0% found this document useful (0 votes)

75 views434 pages

978-3-031-42227-0

Uploaded by

quang tran

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

75 views434 pages

978-3-031-42227-0

Uploaded by

quang tran

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 434

William Bajjali

ArcGIS Pro and

ArcGIS Online
Applications in Water and Environmental Sciences
Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences,
Geography and Environment
The Springer Textbooks series publishes a broad portfolio of textbooks on Earth Sciences,
Geography and Environmental Science. Springer textbooks provide comprehensive
introductions as well as in-depth knowledge for advanced studies. A clear, reader-friendly
layout and features such as end-of-chapter summaries, work examples, exercises, and glossaries
help the reader to access the subject. Springer textbooks are essential for students, researchers
and applied scientists.
William Bajjali

ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online

Applications in Water and Environmental
Sciences
William Bajjali
Natural Sciences Department
University of Wisconsin
Superior, WI, USA

ISSN 2510-1307 ISSN 2510-1315 (electronic)

Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment
ISBN 978-3-031-42226-3 ISBN 978-3-031-42227-0 (eBook)
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0

© The Editor(s) (if applicable) and The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023
This work is subject to copyright. All rights are solely and exclusively licensed by the Publisher, whether the whole or
part of the material is concerned, specifically the rights of translation, reprinting, reuse of illustrations, recitation,
broadcasting, reproduction on microfilms or in any other physical way, and transmission or information storage and
retrieval, electronic adaptation, computer software, or by similar or dissimilar methodology now known or hereafter
developed.
The use of general descriptive names, registered names, trademarks, service marks, etc. in this publication does not
imply, even in the absence of a specific statement, that such names are exempt from the relevant protective laws and
regulations and therefore free for general use.
The publisher, the authors, and the editors are safe to assume that the advice and information in this book are believed
to be true and accurate at the date of publication. Neither the publisher nor the authors or the editors give a warranty,
expressed or implied, with respect to the material contained herein or for any errors or omissions that may have been
made. The publisher remains neutral with regard to jurisdictional claims in published maps and institutional affiliations.

This Springer imprint is published by the registered company Springer Nature Switzerland AG
The registered company address is: Gewerbestrasse 11, 6330 Cham, Switzerland

Paper in this product is recyclable.

I would like to dedicate this textbook to my beloved family, whose unwavering
support, inspiration, and encouragement have been a constant throughout my
journey.
To all the students, both past and present, who have entrusted me with their
learning, I am grateful for your trust, and it has motivated me to strive for
clarity, effectiveness, and innovative teaching methods.
Lastly, I want to express my deepest gratitude to the numerous researchers,
authors, and educators in the field of spatial analysis. It is because of their
groundbreaking work that this textbook has been made possible. Your
contributions to the field continue to inspire future generations.
May this textbook be a source of knowledge and inspiration, empowering
both learners and educators, and may it make a valuable contribution to the
advancement of education in the realm of GIS applications.
With sincere appreciation,
Preface

The study of geographic information system (GIS) applications is enlightening, challenging,

and very interesting. This workbook was created as a guide to students and professionals on
the applications of GIS in the geoscience field. GIS applications are now considered to be an
important course in the curriculum of undergraduate geoscience, the environment, and some
fields of engineering programs. It is the result of more than 30 years of experience in applying
GIS technology to water resources and environmental problems. The databases and the appli-
cations used in the text reflect real-world problems from different environmental settings that
have been gathered from the author’s works in the USA and Middle East. Each chapter pres-
ents a different set of scenarios and case studies that include an environmental problem that
needs a solution. A step-by-step approach was adopted to provide answers and solutions to the
presented problems for the scenarios presented.
The textbook is intended to be an introductory course to those who want to get to know and
work with ArcGIS Pro. ArcGIS Pro is a new generation of ESRI software that works with dif-
ferent platforms than the previous ArcGIS Desktop. ArcGIS Pro is a multiple-threaded 64-bit
application and ESRI’s geospatial cloud that supports advanced data analysis. ArcGIS Online
is a platform for web GIS accessed through a website in a browser. All analysis performed in
ArcGIS Online is processed and stored on web servers, and the data created by GIS users will
be stored on those servers. ArcGIS Online has a different platform than ArcGIS Pro, but they
do communicate with each other, and this depends on GIS user licenses of both products. The
licensing issue of ArcGIS Online is explained in Chap. 16. Data can be used in one platform
while working in the other, such as adding data directly from ArcGIS Online into ArcGIS Pro.
In this case, the ArcGIS Online data are still hosted on web servers, but they are only displayed
within ArcGIS Pro.
The primary focus of the textbook is on ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online. The textbook can
be used at an undergraduate level or as a dual-level undergraduate/graduate course, or it can be
used as a self-study workbook for professionals in the field of geoscience. The textbook aims
to teach students and professionals mapping and spatial analysis skills using ArcGIS Pro and
ArcGIS Online, as well as state-of-the-art methodologies to acquire, visualize, and analyze
data. The textbook has 17 chapters that cover many topics related to GIS applications. Chapter
1 introduces the concept of the vector and raster in GIS and their advantages and disadvan-
tages. Chapter 2 introduces the components of the ArcGIS Pro platform, the new concept of
the ArcGIS Pro project, and data integration and symbolizations. Chapter 3 teaches how to
work with a variety of ArcGIS Pro tools, classify data, perform different quantitative and quali-
tative classifications, and generate color-coded maps and state-of-the-art layouts. Chapter 4
addresses coordinate systems, map projections, and reprojections. The chapter discusses the
types of coordinate systems: geographic coordinate systems (GCS) and various types of pro-
jected coordinate systems. The concept of the datum, projection on the fly, projection of the
GCS into Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM), State Plane coordinate (SPC), and various
types of customize coordinate systems from the Middle East is discussed. Projection of the
raster and geo-referencing are elucidated using real-world examples. Chapter 5 deals with
building a geodatabase, importing different data sources in the geodatabase, creating feature
classes and feature datasets, and creating relationships between objects and a relationship class

vii
viii Preface

between feature class attribute tables and standalone tables. Chapter 6 discusses data editing
and topology by thoroughly explaining the simple, advanced, and topological editing process
using diverse real-world examples. The use of the simple editing tools to edit existing features
and how to fix some common digitizing errors such as overshoot and undershoots, generalize
line feature, smooth polygon feature, merging, splitting, and reshaping feature classes. It dem-
onstrates data editing work using topology rules. These rules address understanding coincident
and shared geometry, feature creation, building a geodatabase topology, and identifying and
fixing topology errors. Chapter 7 discusses geoprocessing, which refers to the tools and pro-
cesses used to generate derived datasets from other data using a set of tools. Geoprocessing is
a very important tool in ArcGIS Pro and plays a fundamental role in spatial analysis.
Geoprocessing is discussed with examples based on extracting (clip, erase, and split), combin-
ing features (merge, append, dissolve, and buffer), and combining geometries and attributes
(union, intersect, and spatial join). Chapter 8 discusses site suitability and data modeling
through two real-world scenarios. Model 1 shows how to use different aspects of functionality
in GIS to find the most suitable area for building a greenhouse. Model 2 demonstrates how to
find the most suitable location to build a nuclear power plant using ModelBuilder in ArcGIS
Pro. Chapter 9 offers two instances of geocoding applications that only use 5-digit codes. In
the first illustration, a specific Wisconsin state destination post office’s zip code was used.
Based on the 5-digit number, a locator tool was used to geocode the wells (point layers). The
second illustration made use of the zip code‘s associated street address. The software can
accept a different kind of zip code if the user requests to use one. Chapter 10 explains the use
of raster analysis in GIS; this chapter is divided into three sections: section 1 is about raster
data download and raster dataset conversion, section 2 is about raster projection and process-
ing raster dataset, and section 3 describes the terrain analysis. The user performed different
exercises of various GIS functions dealing with raster analysis, such as creating hillshades,
contours, vertical profiles, deriving viewshed, slopes, aspects, mosaic images, and clip images.
Chapter 11 addresses spatial interpolation techniques using groundwater salinity affected by
salt intrusion. Trend analysis was used to determine the direction of salinity distribution along
the coast of the Sultanate of Oman. Global polynomial interpolation (GPI), inverse distance
weighting (IDW), and kriging interpolation techniques were used to study the effect of the dam
on improving water quality along the coast of Oman. Chapter 12 explains the use of hydrology
tools in spatial analysis to delineate watersheds using a raster digital elevation model. All tools
that are important to watershed creation, such as the flow direction, sink, fill, and flow accumu-
lation tools, are implemented and discussed. Chapter 13 discusses the use of geostatistical
analysis to obtain meaningful information related to groundwater data in terms of distribution
and patterns. The intention in the textbook is to focus on GIS applications rather than empha-
sizing complex mathematics and statistics. Nevertheless, some of the tools, such as measuring
geographic distribution, analysis patterns, and mapping clusters, are explained and imple-
mented using real-world groundwater data. Chapter 14 discusses the proximity and network
analysis techniques, which are important functions in Network Analyst Extension of the
ArcGIS Pro. A wide range of topics related to the distance and movement along a linear route
are covered. The Near, Point Distance, and Desire line (Spider Diagram) tools were used to
verify if the dam in the Dhuleil area recharges the aquifer and improves its water quality.
Network Analyst was used to overcome natural barriers such as hills, lakes, or areas where
there is absolutely no network of street systems. The network analyst used the actual distance
that is associated with the street feature, which is an important feature in the application. The
network analyst was used to find the amount of time it requires a water truck to supply the
towns with portable water supplies and find the actual path and time that the water truck will
take from each well to each town. Chapter 15 explains the 3-D Analyst that is designed to
perform different types of analysis and make the map look real and easy to comprehend.
ArcGIS Pro worked with data in 2-D and 3-D environments from within the same application.
The chapter discusses how to create a triangular irregular network from contours and use it as
an elevation source to display features in a 3-D environment. Different layers were integrated
Preface ix

from 2-D into 3-D and extruded using a local scene and displayed over the WorldElevation3D/
Terrain3D. An animation was created from bookmarks, and a video was created from the 3-D
map animation by flying over the scene. Time tracking was used to visualize the movement of
subsurface contamination. Chapter 16 introduces ArcGIS Online and ArcGIS StoryMaps. The
chapter covers managing the data in ArcGIS Pro and publishing it as web layers to ArcGIS
Online. Build a web map by utilizing services in ArcGIS Online and configuring the layers
using the Map Viewer. Chapter 17 covers how to create the Instant app in ArcGIS Online. A
map was created in ArcGIS Pro and was shared as a web map and web layers in ArcGIS
Online. The web map was opened, analyzed, and configured in Map Viewer. The web map was
used to create Instant App using different layers that pinpoint the locations of earthquakes,
tsunamis, wells, schools, and hospitals that can be used as emergency facilities in terms of
shelter, medical treatment, and potable drinking water or identify what exists within a distance
from a specific address in the state of California. The Instant App was published and shared
with the whole world community.

Note on Data

The textbook includes three types of data that have been used in the exercises of the book’s
chapters. The first type of data presented is from actual field data gathered by the author and
taken from his published work. The second type of data is manipulated based on real informa-
tion gathered from different projects in the Middle East. The data were modified with the aim
of protecting privacy and rules that govern these projects. The third type of data is public
domain information and freely available from the Internet to any GIS user. Chapters that
included public domain data in the exercises document the data sources.

Superior, WI, USA William Bajjali

Acknowledgments

I am immensely thankful to the students and colleagues I have had the honor of collaborating
with during my academic and professional path. Their exceptional contributions in educational
settings, research endeavors, and practical fieldwork have been indispensable in the develop-
ment of this textbook. I am particularly appreciative of their participation in diverse projects
carried out in the United States, Canada, Oman, and Jordan.

xi
Contents

1 Introduction to ArcGIS Pro�� 1

What Is GIS?�� 2
GIS Infrastructure�� 3
Spatial Data Representation�� 3
Introduction to ArcGIS Pro�� 8
Authorize ArcGIS Pro to Work Offline�� 8
Start ArcGIS Pro�� 9
Lesson 1: Explore the Vector Data�� 10
Lesson 2: Explore the Raster Data�� 11
2 Working With ArcGIS Pro�� 15
Create a New ArcGIS Pro Project�� 15
Connect to a Folder�� 18
Data Integration in ArcGIS PRO�� 19
Find Places on a Map�� 23
Labeling �� 26
Display Layers Using Visibility Range�� 28
Create Thumbnail�� 31
Set Map Extent�� 32
3 ap Classification and Layout �� 35
M
Creating Map and Data Classification �� 36
Data Integration �� 36
Import Styles from ArcGIS Desktop�� 39
Import Styles from Web �� 40
Data Symbolization�� 40
Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Natural Break Method �� 43
Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Quantile Method�� 44
Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Equal Intervals Method�� 46
Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using a Manual Method�� 47
Sharing the Projects and the Data Using Package Project �� 48
Create Page Layout for Groundwater Classification�� 51
Add Guides�� 53
Insert Layout Elements�� 55
Export the Layout as PDF File�� 61
4
Coordinate Systems and Projections�� 63
Geographic Coordinate System (GCS)�� 63
Map Projections �� 63
Working with GCS�� 68
Coordinate Systems and Projections�� 68
Assign Datum for the Salinity Feature Class�� 71
Georeferencing�� 73

xiii
xiv Contents

Copy Raster�� 75

Georeference the Raster�� 75
Project the Raster �� 79
Challenge Task�� 80
5 Introduction to Geodatabase�� 81
Three Types of Geodatabases�� 81
Datasets in the Geodatabase�� 82
Creating a Geodatabase�� 83
Import Image as a Raster Dataset into File Geodatabase�� 83
Create a Feature Dataset in File Geodatabase�� 84
Digitizing Point, Line and Polygon on Screen�� 87
Import Data into Geodatabase �� 90
Relationship Class�� 91
6 Data Editing and Topology�� 97
Simple Editing �� 98
Simple Editing �� 98
Digitize the Missing Formation �� 105
Update the Area and Perimeter fields in the Geology Attribute Table�� 107
Merge Function�� 109
Advance Editing�� 110
Fixing Overshoots and Undershoots�� 110
Topological Editing Using Geodatabase�� 113
Build the Topology and Set the Rule �� 115
Second Approach: Map Topology�� 119
Fix Watershed Using Topology (Geodatabase)�� 123
7 Geoprocessing�� 129
Working with Geoprocessing Tools �� 130
Extract a Feature Class�� 136
Merge Tool �� 139
Buffer Tool and Select By Location�� 139
Select by Location�� 140
Create an Artificial Water Reservoir for Irrigation Purposes �� 141
Erase Tool�� 143
8 Site
Suitability and Modeling�� 145
ModelBuilder �� 145
Site Suitability and Modeling�� 146
Model 1�� 146
The Criteria to Build the Greenhouse�� 146
Model 2: ModelBuilder�� 150
Work with a Model: Find Best Suitable Location�� 151
The Criteria to Find Suitable Location to Build Nuclear Power Plant�� 151
Draw a Connection Interactively Between the Variable and Tool �� 160
Validate and Run the Modelbuilder in Model Window �� 161
Model Output �� 162
Change a Model Name and Label�� 163
Intermediate Data�� 164
Create Model Tool �� 164
Model Parameters�� 166
Run the Model Tool �� 168
Contents xv

9 Geocoding �� 169

Part 1: Geocoding Based on Zip Code�� 170
Launch ArcGIS Pro and Connect to Data�� 170
Create Locator�� 171
Locate Places and Addresses �� 171
Geocode the Addresses�� 172
Wells in Each Zip Code and Average Nitrate Concentration�� 173
Symbolizing �� 174
Part 2: Geocoding Based on Street Address�� 175
Integrate Excel Table�� 176
Build the Street Locator Using Create Locator�� 177
Test Your Address Locator �� 178
Geocode Well Owner by Address�� 179
Examination of the Geocoding Results�� 180
Changing the Basemap�� 180
Match the Unmatched Addresses�� 181
10 Raster Format�� 183
Section 1: Explore and Download Digital Elevation Model (DEM) �� 183
Section 2: Projection and Processing Raster Dataset�� 183
Section 3: Terrain Analysis�� 184
Download Dem Image from Usgs Webpage�� 184
Download the Dem of the City of Burnsville in Minnesota�� 184
Launch ArcGIS Pro�� 185
Folder Connection�� 185
Exploring Digital Elevation Models�� 186
Convert Floating Raster into Integer Raster�� 187
Section 2: Projection And Processing Raster Dataset�� 188
Project the Dem of Amman-Zarqa Basin�� 188
Clip the Raster�� 189
Merge Raster Datasets (MOSAIC)�� 190
Resample an Image�� 192
Classify an Image�� 193
Convert Vector Feature into Raster�� 194
Section 3: Terrain Analysis�� 196
Create Hillshade and Contour for the Dhuleil DEM �� 196
Create Contours �� 198
Create Vertical Profile�� 199
Select a Stream�� 199
Ready to Use Toolbox�� 200
Profile Tool�� 200
Create Vertical Profile�� 201
Customize the Chart Properties �� 201
Create Visibility Map �� 202
Create a New Feature Class �� 203
New Field: Offseta �� 203
Run the Visbility Tool with the New Field “OFFSETA” �� 205
Line of Sight Analysis�� 205
Line of Sight�� 206
Line of Sight for VisibFreq Map Without OFFSETA�� 206
Line of Sight for VisibFreq25 Map with OFFSETA�� 207
Create Linear Lines of Sight�� 208
Slope and Aspect�� 209
xvi Contents

Derive the Slope�� 210

Classify the Slope into Six Classes�� 210
Reclassify Slope�� 211
Add New Field for Slope_Reclass �� 213
Derive Aspect Layer�� 214
Combine Two Images: Slope and Geology�� 215
Find Best Area to Build the Lysimeter�� 217
Extract by Attribute tool�� 217
Raster Calculator Tool �� 219
Calculate the Area of the Lysimeter�� 220
11 Spatial Interpolation�� 223
Method of Interpolation �� 224
Trend Surface Analysis�� 224
Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW)�� 224
Global Polynomial (GP)�� 225
Kriging �� 225
Connect to Data and Data Integration�� 226
Density of Groundwater Well�� 227
Trend Analysis �� 229
Calculate the Coordinates of the Borehole Layer�� 230
Salinity Trend Using Scatter Plot�� 231
Save as Layer Files�� 233
Interpolation�� 234
Global Polynomial Interpolation�� 234
Convert the Gpi Layer Into Raster Format�� 235
Classify the GPI Map�� 236
Inverse Distance Weighting�� 237
Conversion of the Idw into Raster Format�� 238
Classify the IDW Map �� 239
Interpolation Using Kriging�� 240
Convert the Kriging Layer into A Raster Format�� 241
Classify the Ordinarykriging Raster�� 242
12 Watershed Delineation�� 243
Flow Direction �� 243
Flow Accumulation�� 244
Stream Link�� 244
Delineate Watershed Based on a Pour Point�� 245
Data Connection and Integration �� 245
Integrate Layers into the Watershed Map�� 246
Delineating the Watershed �� 246
Step 1: Run the Flow Direction Tool �� 246
Step 2: Identify the Locations of the Sink (Sink Tool)�� 247
Zonal Statistics�� 248
Step 3: Run the Fill Tool�� 249
Step 4: Run the Flow Direction Tool �� 249
Step 5: Create a Flow Accumulation Raster�� 250
Build Raster Attribute Table Tool�� 251
Run the Flow Accumulation and Save the Output as Float �� 251
Convert the Float Raster into Integer Raster�� 252
Step 6: Create Source Raster to Delineate WatersheD�� 252
Source Raster �� 253
Step 7: Delineate Watershed�� 254
Contents xvii

Point-Based Watershed�� 255

Convert Pourshed Raster into a Vector�� 256
Generating the Stream Network�� 257
Create Stream Order�� 257
13 Geostatistical Analysis �� 259
Measuring Geographic Distribution Toolset�� 259
Measuring Geographic Distribution�� 260
Data Connection and Integration �� 261
Symbolizing the Three Layers �� 261
Mean Center�� 262
Mean Center with Weight�� 263
Standard Distance and Mean Center�� 264
Distance Between Khaldiyah Dam and the Center of the Buffer�� 265
Identify an Injection Well�� 266
Select by Location and Select by Attributes�� 266
Near Tool�� 267
Analyzing Pattern Toolset: Identify Pattern Based on Location�� 268
Average Nearest Neighbor Tool�� 268
Null Hypotheses�� 269
Identify Pattern Based on Values (Getis-Ord General G)�� 272
Find the Ideal Distance�� 273
High/Low Clustering (Getis-Ord General G)�� 274
Spatial Autocorrelation (Global Moran’s I) �� 275
Spatial Join Between Grid_1000 and Well Layers�� 276
Spatial Autocorrelation (Global Moran’s I) �� 277
Cluster and Outlier Analysis (Anselin Local Moran I)�� 279
Run Cluster and Outlier Analysis (Anselin Local Moran I)�� 280
Hot Spot Analysis (Getis-Ord GI*)�� 282
Summary Statistics�� 284
14 Proximity and Network Analysis�� 287
Part I – Proximity Analysis�� 287
Proximity Analysis in Vector Format�� 287
GIS Approach to Solve Scenario 1�� 288
Buffer the WWTP in the SAMRA Region�� 289
Select Wells Outside the WWTP_ Buffer in the Samra Region�� 289
Select by Location�� 289
Select by Attributes�� 290
Add New Field to the Well Layer�� 291
Calculate Field �� 292
Buffer the Stream in the Region�� 293
Select Wells in the Dhuleil Region with Low TDS and NO3�� 294
Hide Wells Using Definition Query �� 296
Convert Well Shapfile into Feature Classes in Geodatabase�� 297
Use the Near Tool�� 298
Run Near Tool�� 298
Save Region, City, and Borehole as a Layer�� 299
Create a New Field in the Borehole �� 300
Generate Spider Diagram (Desire Lines)�� 300
Multi-Ring Buffer Around Hay Arnous City �� 302
Select Cities Inside Each Buffer Zone �� 304
xviii Contents

Proximity Analysis in Raster and Vector Formats �� 305

Euclidean Distance�� 305
Euclidian Distance �� 306
Classify the Dam Distance Raster�� 307
Generate Near Table Tool�� 308
Join Two Tables Based on Common Field�� 309
Definition Query�� 310
Well Classification �� 311
Salinity (TDS) Classification �� 311
Nitrate (NO3) Classification �� 311
Part II – Network Analyst�� 312
Create Network Dataset �� 315
Customize and Build the Network�� 316
Explore the Network�� 319
First Approach�� 320
Second Approach �� 320
Run New Service Area�� 321
Add Facilities �� 322
Set the Cutoff Time�� 323
True Path and Total Time Between the Wells and each Town �� 324
Add Facilities �� 325
Add an Incident�� 326
Classify the Straight Lines Routes�� 328
Create the Route Layer�� 329
Create Stops �� 330
Run Analysis�� 331
15 3-D Visualization�� 333
Surfaces and Z Values�� 333
Create Triangular Irregular Network From Contour Line �� 334
Data Connection and Integration �� 334
Change the Symbols of the TIN�� 336
Drape Layers onto Dhuleil_TIN�� 337
Add Data to the Scene�� 337
Extrude Layers �� 338
On-Screen Navigator�� 339
Heading Mode and Full Control Mode�� 339
Apply a Realistic Layer �� 341
Extrude the Well and the WWTP Layers �� 341
Display the Street, Valley and Farm Layers in the Scene�� 342
Change Elevation Units�� 342
Navigate Underground and Change Vertical Exaggeration �� 343
Use the Dhuleil TIN as an Elevation Source �� 344
Create Animation From Bookmarks�� 344
Create a Bookmark�� 344
Use Bookmarks to Create an Animation�� 345
Create a Video�� 346
Fly Through a Map or Scene�� 347
Time Tracking�� 348
Enable Time and Visualize the Data�� 349
Configure the Time Slider to Play Back the Data�� 350
Create an Animation and Export a Video�� 351
Add Surface Information and Elevation Profile�� 352
Contents xix

Elevation Profile�� 354

Elevation Profile - Interactive Placement�� 354
Elevation Profile - From Layer�� 355
Update the Elevation Profile Graph �� 356
16
Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App�� 357
Section 1: Publish Data to ARCGIS Online�� 357
Step 1: Sign in to ArcGIS Online�� 357
Step 2: Publish a Feature Service�� 358
What Is My Content? �� 358
Step 3: Edit the Description and Term of Use �� 361
Step 4: Open the Feature Service�� 363
Content and Setting Toolbar�� 364
Rename the Layers�� 365
Change Layer Symbology�� 366
Save the Web Map�� 369
Share an App Using ArcGIS Online�� 370
Share the Web Map�� 370
Create Story Map �� 372
Work with Media �� 375
Work with Immersive – Sidecar Docked �� 380
Work with Immersive – Sidecar Floating�� 385
Electrical Conductivity�� 386
Dissolve Oxygen (DO)�� 386
Add the Third and Fourth Graphs�� 387
Hydrogen ION Concentration (pH) �� 387
Temperature �� 387
Conclusion �� 388
Review the Story�� 389
Publish and Share�� 391
17
Instant App – Emergency Situations in California �� 393
ArcGIS Pro Approach�� 393
Change the Name and the Basemap�� 393
Connect to Data and Add Layers to the Map�� 394
Set the Extent �� 395
Update Label Properties and Configure Pop-up Windows�� 396
Configure Pop-ups �� 397
Challenge Task�� 399
Share a Web Map and a Web Feature Layer�� 399
Configure the Web Feature Layer�� 400
Share a Web Map �� 401
Publish a Geo APP Using an Instant App Template�� 402
First Approach to Build Geo App�� 403
Examination of the Attribute Table of the Wells�� 404
Configure the Pop-up Window of the Earthquake �� 404
Configure the Pop-up of the Earthquake�� 405
Save the Web Map�� 407
Create a Web App�� 408
Configure Your Instant App�� 410
Type a Specific Address �� 414

References - Data Source Credits �� 417

Index�� 421
Introduction to ArcGIS Pro
1

GIS has great value in our time, as it is a comprehensive information system that evolved and is still developing in parallel
with advancing technology. This era of human kind is characterized as an information age, where the whole world is experi-
encing and interacting with a new revolution, changing our traditional way of looking at things and conducting business with
a completely different approach. The emphases are on technology and its use in every activity ranging from agriculture,
industry, business, social, research and education. The advancement in technology changed our world and our approaches to
meet our new needs that rely completely on technology and data. The value of information in our time has become vital and
important for development. GIS itself is an important module of the information system. The economies of all industrial
countries and many other nations all over the globe have become more dependent on services. This means that the current
economy relies increasingly on computers, networking, accurate information and data. This shift required a mass of skilled
laborers that could deal with the technology and data processing.
GIS technology is not an exception in regard to its use in water resources, geology, and environment-related problems. It
is a powerful tool for developing solutions for many applications ranging from creating a color-coded geological map and
interpolating the water quality of groundwater aquifers to managing water resources on a local or regional scale.
Water is the most precious and valuable resource and is vital for socioeconomic growth and sustainability of the environ-
ment. In some arid countries, water resources are limited, scarce, and mainly sourced from groundwater. In some Middle
Eastern countries, surface water is limited to a few river systems and intermittent streams that are associated with rain during
the winter. Precipitation is vital and the primary source of recharge for various groundwater aquifers in these regions.
Groundwater in the region has been utilized through wells tapping various water-bearing formations to provide more fresh
water to supply the increased demand for water supply and irrigation. This practice negatively affected the whole hydrogeo-
logical setting of the basins. For example, total water withdrawal in the region (Israel, Jordan, and Palestinian territories) in
1994 was approximately 3050 million cubic meters. The estimated total renewable water supply that is practically available
in the region is approximately 2400 million cubic meters per year. The water deficit is pumped from the aquifers without
being replenished. This practice caused the groundwater level to decline dramatically in some well fields, up to 20 m, which
caused some major springs in 1990 to cease completely in the Azraq basin, Jordan.
Therefore, the management of water resources has become a major effort for governments in the region. Various minis-
tries, water institutions, and private companies worldwide are using GIS as a tool to manage water resources in their coun-
tries. GIS can be used to capture data and develop hydrologic datasets for all components of water resources. These include
understanding the region’s hydrology, mapping sources of contamination, preparing water quality and water–rock interaction
maps, delineating watershed areas, and more.

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_1.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 1

W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_1
2 1 Introduction to ArcGIS Pro

What Is GIS?

GIS is a computer system that creates, manages, analyzes, and maps data that is attached to unique locations. It enables users
to capture, store, manipulate, analyze, and present spatial or geographic data. The location data, along with all types of infor-
mation associated with it, provide a foundation for mapping and analysis that is used in virtually every field (ESRI). ArcGIS
Pro and ArcGIS Online provide users with the flexibility to work with data either locally on their computers or online.
ArcGIS Pro uses a new type of geodatabase for storing data that can be saved on your PC. Additionally, ArcGIS Pro allows
users to share their data in different formats, such as geodatabase, shapefile, and Excel, on ArcGIS Online. This online data
can be used to create maps, a web, and apps, as explained in Chaps. 16 and 17, and can also be synchronized back to ArcGIS
Pro. ArcGIS Online also provides a rich collection of data for users to start their projects. The data includes high-resolution
imagery for most of the world, basemaps for reference, boundaries and places, demographics and lifestyle data, transporta-
tion data, Earth observation data, and much more.
With the advancement in technology, a GIS map is dynamic, means that the map can be modified in a very little time, and
can be stored, displayed, and printed out quickly and efficiently. GIS is a new methodology in science and applications; it is
a new profession and a new business.
GIS refers to three integrated parts.

1. Geographic: The geographical location of the real world (coordinate system)

2. Information: The database
3. Systems: The hardware and software

GIS Description
A GIS (Geographic Information System) is a computer-based tool that helps us visualize information with patterns and rela-
tionships that are not otherwise apparent. The ability to ask complex questions about data and analyze many features at once
and then instantly see the results on a map is what makes GIS a powerful tool for creating information. GIS can be used in
many disciplines, such as resource management, criminology, urban planning, marketing, and transportation. GIS is a useful
tool for researchers and scientists, and it plays a vital role in scientific research such as in environmental science, earth sci-
ences, and other fields (Oxford Bibliographies, 2017).

What Can a GIS Do?

A GIS performs six fundamental operations that make it a useful tool for finding solutions to real-world problems. Throughout
this course, you will gain experience with the ArcGIS tools used for these operations.

1. Capture data: You can add data from many sources to a GIS, and you can also create your own data from scratch. You
will learn about getting data into a GIS in Modules 4 and 5.
2. Store data: You can store and manage information about the real world in ways that make sense for your application. You
will learn about organizing data in Module 4.
3. Query data: You can ask complex questions about features based on their attributes or their location and get quick
results. You will gain experience with querying in Module 6.
4. Analyze data: You can integrate multiple datasets to find features that meet specific criteria and create information useful
for problem solving. You will perform analysis in Modules 6 and 7.
5. Display data: You can display features based on their attributes, a powerful feature you will come to appreciate. You will
learn how to symbolize features in different ways in the next module (Module 2).
6. Present data: You can create and distribute high-quality maps, graphs, and reports to present your analysis results in a
compelling way to your audience. You will learn how to create a report in Module 6 and how to design an effective map
in Module 8.

GIS is a computerized system that deals with spatial data in terms of the following:

1. Storage: Digital and database storage (CAD format and dbs format).
2. Management of Data: Integration of the database into the GIS system (AutoCAD, Dbf format).
3. Retrieval: The capacity to view the various database data formats (AutoCAD, Dbf, Shapefile, and Coverage).
Spatial Data Representation 3

4. Conversion: Convert different sets of data from one form to another (shapefile to feature geodatabase).
5. Analysis: Manipulating data to produce new information (geology map).
6. Modeling: Simplifying the data and its process (fuzzy logic model)
7. Display: Presenting the output works (maps and reports).

Organization
GIS is a complete system that consists of sophisticated hardware and software and can provide organizations with a powerful
tool for managing and analyzing data in a geospatial context, leading to better decision-making, increased efficiency, and
improved communication and resource management.
ArcGIS Pro is capable of accommodating different data types, allowing users to work with a broad range of items includ-
ing databases, file-based datasets, and web services. Additionally, it enables the inclusion of shared maps, layers, tools, and
other resources into a project. The ArcGIS Online portal also supports various items such as feature layers, Layer Packages,
Map Packages, Project Packages, geoprocessing packages, Map files, imagery layers, Elevation layers, KML layers, layer
files, OGC web feature service feature layer, OGC web tile service tile layer, CAD drawings, and more.

GIS Infrastructure

1. Hardware: The machine where the GIS can be run (computer, digitizer, plotter, printer).
2. Software: The program needed to run the GIS (ArcGIS and its extensions)
3. Data: The digital and database (information)
4. Organization & People: This is the most important part of the GIS structure. GIS is too important and so costly that it
cannot be considered just equipment. It requires organization and staff to utilize this technology. Unfortunately, many
organizations treat GIS as equipment rather than an important tool.

GIS Principles

1. The computer is an unavoidable technology in our time. We are living in the digital age, which has become an important
element in nearly all professions.
2. Computer training in most scientific disciplines is essential. Without this technology, all professionals will be
handicapped.
3. GIS is an inevitable technology that will be used in all scientific fields. GIS has become the accepted and standard means
of using spatial data.
4. GIS is more accurate, flexible, object efficient, and rapid fun than the traditional method of spatial data inventory.
5. GIS is replacing traditional cartography. Much of the traditional “pen & ink” cartography performed by skilled draftsper-
sons and artists is being replaced by GIS.
6. GIS is opening new horizons. New modes of analysis and applications are constantly being discovered.

Spatial Data Representation

Spatial data are a fundamental component in any GIS environment. The data are based on the perception of the world as
being occupied by features. Each feature is an entity that can be described by its attribute or property, and its location on earth
can be mapped using a spatial reference. The most common representation of spatial data that measures the landscape is
using discrete data (vector model) and continuous data (raster models). The data models are a set of rules used to describe
and represent real world features in GIS software.
4 1 Introduction to ArcGIS Pro

Vector Data Model

The vector data model is a representation of the world of distinct features that have definite boundaries and identities and a
specific shape using points, lines, and polygons. Vector data are structured with two specific elements (node, vertex) and
coordinates. This model is useful for storing data that have discrete boundaries, such as groundwater wells, streams, and
lakes. Each entity has a dimension, boundary and location. For example, a well has a specific measurement, and its location
can be described using a coordinate system such as latitude-longitude. The following represents the three fundamental vector
types that exist in GIS.

Point A point entity is simply a location that can be described using the coordinate system (longitude, latitude or X, Y). The
point has no actual spatial dimension and has no actual length and width but has a specific location in space (single coordi-
nate pair). Points can be represented by different symbols. Points generally specify features that are too small to show prop-
erly at a given scale. For example, buildings, schools, or a small farm at a scale of 1:25,000 can be represented as a point.
Figure 1.1 shows the locations of five groundwater wells, with each well representing a point feature. Table 1.1 shows the
coordinate locations of the wells in (X, Y). The coordinate system allows users to integrate the wells into GIS and make them
subject to mapping. The well feature is associated with an attribute table. The attribute of each well has information related
to the depth and the yield of each well.

Line A spatial feature that is given a precise location that can be described by a series of coordinate pairs. Each line is stored
by the sequence of the first and last point together with the associated table attribute of this line. Line is a one-dimensional
feature and has length but no width. Line is a linear feature such as rivers, pipelines, and fences. The more points used to
create the line, the greater the detail. The recent requirement that the line features include topology means that the system
stores one end of the line as the starting point and the other as the end point, giving the line “direction”.
Figure 1.2 shows four pipelines (A, B, C, and D). Each pipeline is represented by a line that has its first and last node to
distinguish its location. Each line has attributes of length and discharge. Note that each node has coordinates (X, Y) stored in
another table (Table 1.2).

Fig. 1.1 Point feature

representation

Table 1.1 Attribute table of point features

No Well X Y Well Depth (m) Yield (m3/h)
1 WAJ-1 0.5 4.0 WAJ-1 78 90
2 WAJ-2 1.0 1.5 WAJ-2 48 68
3 WAJ-3 3.0 1.0 WAJ-3 35 54
4 WAJ-4 5.0 1.5 WAJ-4 58 75
5 WAJ-5 5.0 2.7 WAJ-5 55 75
Spatial Data Representation 5

Fig. 1.2 Line feature

representation

Table 1.2 Attribute table of line feature

Node no X Y Line 1st node Last node Line Length Discharge
1 0.5 4.0 A 1 2 A 25.5 5
2 1.0 1.5 B 2 3 B 20.6 4
3 3.0 1.0 C 3 4 C 20.6 4
4 5.0 1.5 D 4 5 D 15.0 3
5 5.0 2.7

Polygon The polygon is an area fully encompassed by a series of connected lines. The first point in the polygon is equal to
the last point. A polygon is a 2-D feature with at least three sides, and because lines have direction, the area that falls within
the lines compromises the polygon, and the perimeter can be calculated. All of the data points that form the perimeter of the
polygon must connect to form an unbroken line. Polygons are often irregularly shaped, such as parcels, lakes, and political
boundaries.

Figure 1.3 shows polygon A, which represents an agricultural field. The polygon has its first and last node in node number
1 to settle its location. Each node has coordinates (X, Y) that are stored in another table (Table 1.3). Aside from location
attributes, the polygon has associated attributes of area and crop.
Features on maps have spatial relationships that show how those features are related to each other in space. The most
important spatial relationships are as follows:
1. Distance: This measures the distance from one feature to another in the GIS map. The distance concept is an important
relationship, as the distance between features can be measured in any unit regardless of the map’s coordinate system.
2. Distribution: This is the collective location of features where relationships can show the feature among themselves or
their spatial relationships with other features in the map.
3. Density: This is the number of features per unit area or simply how close features are to each other.
4. Pattern: This is the consistent arrangement of a feature.

Raster Data Model

A representation of an area or region as a surface divided into a grid of cells (Fig. 1.4). It is useful for storing data that vary
continuously, such as in an aerial photograph, a satellite image, a surface of humidity, or a digital elevation model (DEM)
(Fig. 1.5).
6 1 Introduction to ArcGIS Pro

Fig. 1.3 Polygon feature

representation

Table 1.3 Attribute table of the polygon feature

Node no X Y Polygon Node Polygon Area Crop
1 1.6 3.1 A 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 A 520 Tomato
2 3.2 3.8
3 5.0 3.1
4 5.0 2.6
5 3.4 1.8
6 2.0 2.2

Fig. 1.4 Depicts the basics

of the raster data model. The C O L U M N S
cell is the minimum mapping
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
unit and the smallest size at X, Y Location
which any landscape feature 0
can be represented
1 Cell
2
3
4
R O W S

5
6
7 5m

8 (5,8) 5m Resolution

9
10

These cells in the raster dataset are used as building blocks for creating points, lines, and polygons. In the raster data
model, points, lines, and polygons are represented by grid cells. The location of each cell in the grid is determined by two
things: 1) the origin of the grid (the upper left-hand, which is (0, 0) and the resolution (size of the cell). The resolution is
determined by measuring one side of the square cell. For example, a raster model with a cell representing 5 m by 5 m (25 m2)
in the real world would be said to have a spatial resolution of 5 m. Each cell in the raster carries a single value, which repre-
sents the characteristic of the spatial phenomenon at a location denoted by its row and column. The precision of raster data
is determined by the resolution of the grid dataset. The data type for that cell value can be either integer or floating-point.
Spatial Data Representation 7

Fig. 1.5 Aerial Photograph of Faxon Creek, Superior, WI and DEM Jafr, Jordan

The raster model averages all values within a given cell to yield a single value. Various techniques are used to assign cell
codes, such as presence-absence, cell center, dominant area, and percent coverage. The more area covered per cell, the less
accurate the associated data values. The area covered by each cell determines the spatial resolution of the raster model from
which it is derived. Raster coding produces spatial inaccuracies as the shape of features is forced into an artificial grid cell
format. Therefore, there is no way to know where any small feature occurs within the cell, as the location according to the
raster format is simply the entire cell. If the raster cell represents 100 m by 100 m, the cell represents a well that has a 0.5-m
diameter. The whole cell in this case represents the well, which makes the raster format imprecise.

Advantages and Disadvantages of the Raster and Vector Model

There are several advantages and disadvantages for using either the raster or vector data model for storing and displaying
spatial data.

Raster Model: Advantages

1. Simple data structure

2. Efficient for remotely sensed or scanned data
3. Simple spatial analysis procedures

Raster Model: Disadvantages

1. Requires greater storage space on a computer
2. Depending on pixel size, graphical output may be less pleasing
3. Projection transformations are more difficult
4. Difficult to represent topological relationships

Vector Model: Advantages

1. Data can be represented in their original resolution without generalization.

2. Requires less disk storage space
3. Topological relationships are readily maintained
4. Graphical outp.ut closely resembles hand-drawn maps

Vector Model: Disadvantages

1. More complex data structure

2. Inefficient for remotely sensed data
3. Some spatial analysis procedures are complex and process intensive
4. Overlaying multiple vector maps is often time consuming
8 1 Introduction to ArcGIS Pro

GIS Project
To carry a GIS project, users need to integrate spatial data into GIS software, where the data can have a vector or raster data-
set. GIS data come from many resources

1. Hard copy maps

2. Digital files
3. Imagery
4. GPS
5. Excel, text delimited, and dbf files
6. Reports
GIS analysis is based on a database, which is powerful and important in GIS.

Introduction to ArcGIS Pro

ArcGIS Pro is an advanced GIS application from Esri. The program performs spatial analysis, and users can share their work
with ArcGIS Online or the ArcGIS Enterprise portal. ArcGIS Pro consists of different components: maps, scenes, layouts,
data, tables, and different tools that are structured in a project(Links to an external site).
ArcGIS Pro is tightly linked with ArcGIS Online, which is a cloud-based system built to encourage the sharing of GIS
data and other resources between organizations and users. Both ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS online required an account from
ESRI that provided access to more data and tools. ArcGIS Pro can also run offline. ArcGIS Pro has the capability of ArcGIS
desktop (ArcMap, ArcCatalog, and ArcToolbox). It can Import ArcMap document, integrate ArcScene, and ArcGlobe. It also
maintains Python and ModelBuilder. ArcGIS Pro continues to include various extensions in much the same way as ArcGIS
desktop.
ArcGIS Pro has a more modern GUI, and its performance improved in terms of analysis, 2-D and 3-D integration, label-
ing, symbology, creating layouts, editing, and sharing. ArcGIS Pro does not accept certain files such as Personal Database or
ArcInfo Coverage but can import ArcMap documents (*.mxd). By default, a project is stored in its own system folder with
the extension (*.aprx). A project also has its own geodatabase (a file with the extension (*.gdb) and its own toolbox (a file
with the extension (*.tbx).
When you start ArcGIS Pro, you can create a project(Links to an external site.) from one of the four system templates.
Each template creates a project file that starts the application in a different state. For example, a project created from the Map
template starts with a map view containing a basemap layer. You can also start without a template (Links to an external site.).
This allows you to work in ArcGIS Pro without saving a project file.
New projects can also be started from project templates (Links to an external site.) made by you or shared with you by
colleagues. A project template is a customized starting state for a project. Recently, used templates appear on the start page.
You can also browse to templates. There are various ways to open your saved projects(Links to an external site.). Any project
you have used recently is accessible from the start page. You can browse to other saved projects to open them. You can also
pin a project to the start page to make sure it is always readily available.

Authorize ArcGIS Pro to Work Offline

Users can use ArcGIS Pro to work offline, which allows users to use the application without being signed in to a licensing
portal. In this case, you can only use the application on one machine. This is the machine you use to take your license offline.
If you work in an environment with periodic online access, you can sign in to an active portal to exchange content with
ArcGIS Online when access is available. Even when ArcGIS Pro is authorized to work offline, you must sign in to an active
portal to get

1. Content from ArcGIS Online

2. Share content to ArcGIS Online.
Start ArcGIS Pro 9

Start ArcGIS Pro

To start ArcGIS Pro, you must be licensed as a name user and have an account with ESRI. If you are a student, your instructor
will create a user account for you; if you are a professional, your administrator at your organization will create the account.
Each user must have a login name and password.
First time you start ArcGIS Pro, you must enter your ArcGIS online by typing in any browser www.arcgis.com(Links to
an external site.) “Sign In” use your login name and password. Signing in to your organization also allows you to access your
content, group content, and your organization’s content in your project. You can sign in to additional portals to use their
content as well. You must also sign in to publish and share with your organization.

Open a Project
Launch ArcGIS Pro and log in using your account.
Under New Project in the right click Open another project.

Browse to \\ENV_Water\Ch01 click Ch01.aprx and click OK.

Ch01 – ArcGIS Pro open with an interface and consists of the following:

1. Ribbon
2. Views
3. Panes

Ribbon The ribbon at the top of the application window displays and organizes functionality into a series of tabs. Some of
these tabs (core tabs) are always present. Others (contextual tabs) appear when the application is in a particular state.

Catalog View Catalog View is in the middle of the program and consists of map view. The map view is a widow that dis-
plays a map. Every view has a tab that can be used to close the view or drag it to a different position. A project may have
many views, which can be opened and closed as needed. The tab of the active view is blue, and currently, there are no open
maps.

Panes There are two panes, and both are dockable windows. The first pane is called the Contents pane (left), which dis-
plays the contents of a view (empty now). In the textbook we will abreviated it as CP. The second pane is called the Catalog
pane (right), which displays the contents of a project or portal or commands and settings related to an area of functionality,
such as the Symbology and Geoprocessing panes (you will work with them in the coming chapters).
10 1 Introduction to ArcGIS Pro

Lesson 1: Explore the Vector Data

Open the Vector Map

In the Catalog pane expands the Maps, which consist of two maps: Raster and Vector.
D-click the Vector Map to open it

Result The following happens

1. The vector map is displayed in the Contents pane, and the vector map consists of four layers: SamplingSite,
NewtonCreek, MurphyOil, and HogIsland. The Content pane works like ArcMap in ArcGIS desktop. In the Content
Map, two layers also display the World Topographic Map and World Hillshade. The World Topographic Map is a
basemap that serves as a reference map used as a background for your work. In the coming chapters, you will choose a
different type of basemap. The World Hillshade is an elevation map from the living atlas of ESRI.
2. The Map view, the project opens with a map centered on Newton Creek in Superior, Wisconsin. The window containing
the map is a map view, and the blue highlighted tab “Vector” at the top of the View window indicates that the Vector view
map is active.
Lesson 2: Explore the Raster Data 11

Layers in the vector map consist of points (SamplingSite), lines (NewtonCreek), and polygons (MurphyOil and HogIsland).
These layers can be classified and symbolized by different symbols. In the map, the 4 layers displayed above the World Topographic
map are symbolized in different symbols and colors. The map shows that Newton Creek starts from Murphy Oil Inc. and dis-
charges into Hog Island. Five sampling sites were used as sampling locations to monitor the quality of the water creek.

Lesson 2: Explore the Raster Data

Open the Raster Map

In the Catalog pane expands the Maps, and and double-D-click the Raster Map to open it.
Result The vector map is closed from the Contents pane, and the raster map is open in the Contents pane and consists of
the elevation layer “elevlidar” of Superior, WI. Both the vector map and raster map are displayed as two tabs above the
map view. The raster tab is blue, which indicates that the raster view map is active.

In the Contents pane, r-click “elevlidar”, click Properties, and click Source tab.
The Source tab includes six sections that provide detailed information about the “elevlidar” raster.
12 1 Introduction to ArcGIS Pro

• Data Source: Show the location of the “elevlidar” raster

• Raster Information: This shows that the “elevlidar” raster has 9989 columns and 5105 rows. The raster consists of 1
band, and the cell size (resolution) is 6.289 × 6.289 feet. It also indicates that the pixel type is a floating point, meaning
that the attribute table cannot be opened. The pixel depth of the raster is 32 Bit.
Lesson 2: Explore the Raster Data 13

• Band Metadata: it shows the information about the raster

• Statistics: This shows the minimum, maximum, mean, and std. deviation of the raster elevation.

• Extent: this shows the coordinate extent in feet.

• Spatial Reference: shows that the coordinate of the “elevlidar” raster is registered in Customized Transverse Mercator
and the datum is D custom. It also provides information about the parameters of the projection, such as false easting and
false northing.

Click OK after exploring the layer properties of the “elevlidar” raster.

Save the Project

It is a good practice to save your changes periodically while you work. You can save the changes to your project or the project
as follows:

• Click the Save button on the Quick Access toolbar at the top of the app.
• Click the Project tab on the ribbon and click Save.
• Press Ctrl + S.
14 1 Introduction to ArcGIS Pro

1. Save your project

2. Exit ArcGIS Pro (Project tab/Exit)
Working With ArcGIS Pro
2

The benefit from the use of geographic information system (GIS) software is tremendous and ranges from managing trans-
portation in a dense city to finding and modeling sophisticated environmental problems. GIS is used all over the world to
achieve various tasks from managing the environment and offering better service. It allows the user to carry out research and
study practically everything, such as land, climate, environment, natural resources, and population.
Chapter 2 introduces the fundamental concepts of GIS and the major functionality contained in ArcGIS Pro. You will work with
a variety of ArcGIS Pro tools, and you will learn how to create color coded maps, query, and solve a variety of spatial problems.
ArcGIS Pro has the capability of ArcGIS desktop and beyond but has a different platform. All the functions are performed
in ArcGIS Pro, and there is no need to open separate programs such as ArcGIS Desktop. ArcGIS Pro maintained the Python,
Model Builder, and various extensions in the same way as Arc GIS desktop.
ArcGIS Pro is a ribbon-based application. Many commands are available from the ribbon at the top of the ArcGIS Pro
window; more advanced or specialized functionality is found on panes that can be opened as needed. The ribbon is at the top
of the application window to display and organize functionality into a series of tabs. Ribbons have two types of tabs: core
tabs are always present, and contextual tabs appear when the application is in a specific state. For example, a set of contextual
feature layer tabs appear when a feature layer is selected in the content pane. Users can also customize the ribbon by creating
tabs and choosing which commands appear on them.
ArcGIS Pro allows you to store multiple items, such as maps, layouts, tables, and charts, in a single project and work with
them as needed. The application also responds contextually to your work. Tabs on the ribbon change depending on the type
of item you are working with.
ArcGIS Pro offers several types of texts that users can use in maps. The main types are labels, annotation, text map notes,
and graphic text in a layout and graphic text on the map. A label is a piece of text that is automatically positioned and whose
text is based on feature attributes. Labels are the easiest way to add text to a map for each feature. ArcGIS Pro has the
Standard Label Engine and the Maplex Label Engine, which provides further capabilities for placing labels.
GIS is made up of layers that make maps in GIS. You can add as many layers as you want, and the layers may contain
features or images.
This section will focus on how to start the ArcGISPro project, connect to folder, data integration, data symbolizing, and
labeling.

Create a New ArcGIS Pro Project

Before you can start working and making a spatial map, you must first create a project using a template. The template helps
to support specific layers, tasks, and apps and can contain maps, layouts, scenes, and other items. It can also contain connec-
tions to data stored in folders, databases, and servers. Maps, layers, and other GIS content can also be added from portals
such as your ArcGIS organization or ArcGIS Living Atlas of the World. Content you create in ArcGIS Pro can also be shared
to your portal. The created project contains maps, databases, toolboxes, and other folders that are helpful when making the

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_2.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 15

map. ArcGIS Pro automatically creates a default file geodatabase and default toolbox in the project’s home folder. The file
geodatabase is the default spatial data container.

Working with ArcGIS Pro

1. Open ArcGIS Pro

Note: if this is your first-time using ArcGIS Pro, you must sign in using your licensed ArcGIS account. ArcGIS Pro allows
you to create Map, Catalog, Global Scene, Local Scene templates or you can start without a template. In this chapter, you
will create a Map template.

2. Under “New Project”

3. Click Map
4. Fill the Create a New Project dialog box as follows:
5. Name: Ch02
6. Location: \\ENV_Water (a folder in your computer or server)
7. Click OK

Note If you open the folder “Ch02” under ENV_Water, you will see 4 items inside: Ch02.gdb, Index, Ch02.aprx, and
Ch02.atbx. If you do not see the extensions of the 3-files (i.e., Ch02.gdb), go to Window Explorer, click View tab check “File
Name Extensions”

ArcGIS Pro will open with Contents pane (CP) to the left (analogous to table of content in ArcMap) and Catalog pane
(analogous to Catalog window in ArcMap) to the right, and the View window in the middle, which displays the maps and is
considered the primary work area of ArcGIS Pro.
The View window displays the World Topographic Map and the World Hillshade. The World Topographic Map is a
basemap. A basemap cannot be symbolized or saved on your local drive but can be replaced by another basemap within the
basemap gallery in ArcGIS Pro (Map tab/Layer group).
Create a New ArcGIS Pro Project 17

The CP includes the Map, which is empty now (you will populate it later) and the basemap “World Topographic Map”
showing part of the world’s continents. ESRI provides several types of basemaps that can be used in a project. The basemap
has no attributes, but it offers a graphical background for the study area, as it covers the whole earth.

The Catalog pane will open with the following files:

• Maps
• Toolboxes
• Databases
• Styles
• Folders
• Locators

Note If you do not see the Content pane, Catalog pane, or Catalog View click View tab and, in the Windows group, click
the button of the one that you want to open
18 2 Working With ArcGIS Pro

Identify the Location of the Project

6. Click the Project tab on the ribbon, then click Options

A dialog box displays that the name of the project is “Ch02”, and the project resides in Ch02 in the ENV_Water folder.
The default database “Ch02.gdb” and the default toolbox “Ch02.atbx” and both also reside in the Ch02 folder.

7. Click Cancel
8. Click the arrow to go back to ArcGIS Pro

Connect to a Folder

This will allow users to connect to folders that contain data. The data can be in a folder on a local drive or network computer.
The data in the folder provide the items needed to complete a project. The data for this project are feature classes in a file
geodatabase “TwinCities.gdb” residing in the Database inside the Data folder in the Data_Ch02 folder. The “TwinCities.
gdb” contains the files that needed to be accessed more often in the project.

9. Make sure that the Catalog pane is open

10. Click the Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click Add Folder. OR in the Catalog pane, right-click Folders
and click Add Folder Connection
11. Browse to \\Database\ Data_Ch08 folder, highlight Data_Ch02 and click OK.
Data Integration in ArcGIS PRO 19

Result The folder connection “Data_Ch02” appears in the Catalog pane in the Folders category.

12. In Catalog pane, under the Folders expand “Data” folder, it contains the geodatabase file “TwinCities.gdb”.

Note The file geodatabase “TwinCities.gdb” has 7 feature classes, and some of them will be used in the project.

Data Integration in ArcGIS PRO

Now you are going to integrate feature classes from the “TwinCities.gdb”.

13. In Catalog pane expand the “Data” under the “Folders” and then expand the “TwinCities.gdb”
14. Click Ctrl on the keyboard and click the Airport, City, Hospital, Street, and Twin_Cities to select them and then drag
them into the map display area.

Result Five layers are displayed above the topographic map in the map display area and are added to CP below the Map
20 2 Working With ArcGIS Pro

Save the Project

Note: It is a good practice to save your changes periodically while you work. You can save the changes to your project as
follows:

15. Save your project, you can save the project in different approaches.

• Click the Save button on the Quick Access toolbar at the top of the app.
• Click the Project tab on the ribbon and click Save.
• Press Ctrl + S.

Explore the Navigate Group in the Map Tab

When you work with maps and scenes, you can zoom in and out and move around in the case of scenes, move up, down, and
look around.
In the Map tab on the ribbon, in the Navigate group, there are various icons
The Explore, Full Extent, Fixed Zoom In, Fixed Zoom Out, Previous Extent, Bookmarks, and Go To XY tool.

Exploration Map

The default tool for maps and scenes is the Explore tool , which is used to move, pan, identify feature attributes via a
pop-up, and zoom in and out of maps and scenes.
Data Integration in ArcGIS PRO 21

When you pan through a map or scene with the mouse, the pointer becomes a hand. Right-click and hold the mouse button
and move the mouse up or down to zoom. The pointer becomes a magnifying glass when you click the right mouse button.
Some Explore tool capabilities are described in the image below.

Zoom In/Out: scroll the mouse wheel to zoom in to or out from the cursor position
Zoom In: click Shift on the keyboard and draw a rectangle on the map where you want to Zoom In. To go to the previous
extent right-click the mouse and point to “Previous Extent”
Pan: click at any location on the map and then drag the map to pan

Search Information About a Feature Class

To find a feature(s) with a specific attribute, type the attribute you are looking for in the search box in the Locate pane. You
are going to find information about the Minneapolis-St. Paul Airport (MSP).

16. In the Map tab on the ribbon, in the Inquiry group, click the drop-down of Locate and select Layer Search. The
Locate dialog box display
17. Select Layer Search Tab and click the drop-down arrow of Options (to the left of the window search)
18. Click the arrow to the right of Search in layer point to Airport and click the arrow and select IATA.
19. Type in the search window “MSP” and Enter

Result The MSP display

20. Right-click the “IATA” below the Airport and point to Show Details
21. A Pop-up display showing the attribute information of the MSP

Note You can also Zoom to, Pan to, Flash, and Add to Selection

22. Click X in the search window to remove the MSP

22 2 Working With ArcGIS Pro

Locate and Address

23. In the Locate dialog box, click the Locate tab, and click the drop-down arrow of the Options and select ArcGIS
World Geocoding Service.

24. In the search window type “704 E Nicolet Blvd, Burnsville, MN, 55337” and Enter
25. The address will be displayed on the map and a pop-up information display about the address
26. Close Locate dialog box
Find Places on a Map 23

Find Places on a Map

Finding places or locations on a map is a fundamental function of a GIS. You can enter the coordinates in longitude-latitude
or latitude-longitude order. In GIS, X is longitude, and Y is latitude. You are going to use decimal degrees (DD). The coor-
dinate will be entered using W and N characters after the numeric values (you can use the character also before the numeric
values)
27. In the Map tab on the ribbon, in the Inquiry group, click the Locate icon. The Locate dialog box display
28. Make sure the Locate tab in the Locate dialog box is selected
29. Click the drop-down arrow of the Options and select XY provider
30. Type in the search window “93.26 W, 44.75 N” and Enter
31. R-click the A text in the Locate dialog box and point to Add Graphic

Result A point added to the map and the Locate Graphic Layer is added to the CP.

If you want to delete the added point, right click the Locate Graphic Layer in the CP and Remove.

32. Close the Locate dialog box and click the Save button on the Quick Access toolbar.

Change the Symbol of a Feature Class

33. Click Ctrl on the keyboard and in the CP, check the box of the Hospital, all the feature class will be unchecked
34. In the CP , check on only the Twin_Cities, then right click it and point to the Zoom To Layer

Change the Color of the Twin_Cities

35. In the CP highlight the Twin_Cities feature

36. The Feature Layer tab appears on the ribbon
37. Under Feature Layer in the Drawing group, click the arrow below Symbology and choose Single Symbol.

The Symbology – Twin_Cities pane appears, allowing you to change the symbol of the layer
The Symbology pane consists of 5 icons
24 2 Working With ArcGIS Pro

• Primary symbology
• Vary Symbology by attribute
• Symbol layer drawing
• Display filters
• Advanced Symbology options

38. Ensure that the Primary symbology is selected

39. Click the symbol to open the “Format Polygon Symbol”
40. From the Gallery tab, select Black Outline (1pt) under ArcGIS 2D

41. Click the Properties tab to customize the Twin_Cities symbol

42. Under Appearance, click Outline color, choose gray 70% from the drop-down arrow. Make the outline width 2 pt and
click Apply at the bottom

Change the Symbol of the Hospital

43. In the CP, check the Hospital and click on its symbol
44. In the Format Point Symbol pane, ensure that the Gallery tab is selected.
45. In the search window type Hospital, enter
46. Choose 2nd symbol under ArcGIS 2D (the symbol will be changed in the map)
47. Click Properties tab in the Format Point Symbol, under Appearance, change the Size to 10 and click Apply
Find Places on a Map 25

Change the Symbol of the Airport

48. In the CP, check and highlight the Airport and click on its symbol.
49. In the Format Point Symbol pane, ensure that the Gallery tab is selected.
50. In the search window type Airport, click “Enter” (3 symbols display), to the right select All Styles from the drop-down
arrow (more symbols will display)
51. Select the Airport Symbol under Icon Points
52. Click Properties tab, change the Size to 12 and click Apply

Challenge Yourself

Change the symbol of the City and Street using the table below

Feature class Symbol Color Width

Street Minor road Gray 70% 1
City Square 3 Pink 1

Change the Name of the Map

53. In the CP, right-click the “Map”, select Properties, change the name to MN, click OK
54. In the CP select the Twin_Cities layer and press F2 key, the Twin Cities became editable type Counties
26 2 Working With ArcGIS Pro

Labeling

In ArcGIS Pro, labeling means inserting text for layer features in maps or scenes. A label is derived from one field or more
in the layer attribute table. In ArcGIS Pro, the label positions are generated automatically, the labels are not selectable, and
the user cannot edit the display properties of individual labels. Maplex Label Engine is the default in ArcGIS Pro

Labeling and Font Changing

1. In the CP, right-click the Counties feature class and choose “Label”, then right-click the Counties feature class again and
choose “Labeling Properties”
2. In the Label Class – Counties, click the Symbol tab and expand the “Appearance”, change the Font name to Times
New Roman, Size: 12, Color: red, and then click Apply
3. Close the Label Class – Counties.

Label the Airport Using the Labeling Tab

4. In the CP, highlight the Airport, and click the Labeling tab in the feature layer contextual tab to access six groups
1. Layer group
2. Label Class group
3. Visibility Range group
Labeling 27

4. Text Symbol group

5. Label Placement group
6. Map group

Each group is associated with different function tools and provides access to the most common labeling functions (font,
style, SQL, visibility range, and others).

The Text Symbol and Label Placement groups have an arrow drop-down that opens the Label Class pane

5. In the CP, r-click the Airport and click the Attribute Table.
6. The Attribute Table open has 3 records and 13 fields, and the IATA field will be used for labeling.
7. In the Airport attribute table, click X in the upper right corner to close the table

8. In the CP, ensure that the Airport layer is highlighted to activate the Feature Layer Contextual tab
9. Click the Labeling tab in the Feature Layer Contextual tab
10. In the Label Class group make sure Field is set to “IATA”
11. In the Layer group, click the Label icon

Result The Airports will be labeled

12. In the Text Symbol group, change the font to Time New Roman, size 12, style Bold, color: Blue
28 2 Working With ArcGIS Pro

Label the River

13. Open the TwinCities.gdb under the Folder in the Catalog pane and drag the River into the map
14. In CP, r-click the River, and point to the Zoom To Layer
15. In CP, click the symbol of the River; in the Symbology pane, click the Gallery tab.
16. In the search window type river and then enter
17. Choose Water (line) under ArcGIS 2D
18. In the view window type in the scale window 100,000 and enter (scale is located in the lower left corner)

19. Click Labeling tab in Feature Layer Contextual tab and in the Label Placement group
20. Click the 3rd drop-down arrow to see all the options and choose Water (Line) under Line.
21. In the Layer group, click the Label icon
22. In the Text Symbol group, change the font into Time New Roman, Size 10, and Italic

Display Layers Using Visibility Range

A layer that is checked in the Contents pane is drawn in the map or scene. When you zoom out or zoom in, it may become
difficult to see more detailed information, or the information may become too coarse, especially if the map or scene contains
several layers. Setting a visible scale range helps organize the layers in the map at different scales.
The Labeling tab in the Feature Layer Contextual tab has the “Visibility Range” group. The “Visibility Range” group

includes the “Out Beyond” and the “In Beyond” scale ranges. Setting the “Out Beyond” scale range applies the small-

est desired map scale at which the layer is visible in the display. On the other hand, “In Beyond” applies the largest
desired visible map scale. Your “Out Beyond” map scale value must be larger than your “In Beyond” map scale value, or
they can be the same if you want the layer to be visible at only one scale.
For example, setting a scale in the scale window to a bigger scale than the 200,000 (i.e., 150,000), the labels remain vis-
ible in the display. If you set the scale to a smaller scale than the 200,000 (i.e., 250,000) the labels disappear
Display Layers Using Visibility Range 29

23. Make sure that the River is highlighted in the CP and the Labeling tab in the Feature Layer Contextual tab is selected,
also make sure that the scale in the display window is 100,000 (scale located in the lower left corner).
24. In the visibility range group, the “Out Beyond” was set to 100,000 from the drop-down arrow (this scale is similar to the
map scale).
25. Change the “Out Beyond” to 200,000 (this scale is smaller than the map scale) and then enter.

Result The labels of the Rivers remain because the 200,000 scale is smaller than the original scale of the map (100,000).

26. In CP, right-click the Counties layer and Zoom To Layer

Result The label of the river disappears, because the scale of the map become 434,218 smaller (may be in your computer,
it’s different depending on computer configuration) and this scale is now beyond the 200,000 scale

27. In the CP, select the River layer

28. In the display window type in the scale window type 190,000 and enter (this scale is bigger than the 200,000-scale set
in the “Out Beyond “)
29. In CP, right-click the Twin Cities layer and Zoom To Layer
30. Save the project (Ctrl S)
30 2 Working With ArcGIS Pro

Park Scale-Based Symbol Classes

When the Park is symbolized using “unique value” symbology, GIS users can specify the visible scale range for each sym-
bol class. This is an effective strategy to limit the amount of detailed data at smaller scales without having to make multiple
versions of the layer. This approach is one strategy to control which features are drawn at which scales.

31. Open the TwinCities.gdb under the Folder in the Catalog pane and drag the Park into the map
32. The Scale in the lower left corner window is 1: 474,087 (may be in your computer different depend on the computer
configuration)

33.
34. In CP, right-click Park layer and click Attribute Table.
35. Park has 193 records and 12 fields; the CATEGORY field has 3 variables and will be used to classify the parks.
36. Close the attribute table of the Park by clicking on the X on the top left part of the table
37. In the CP, highlight the Park layer and r-click it and select Symbology
38. In the Symbology – Park under Primary symbology from drop-down arrow, select Unique Values and Field 1:
CATEGORY
39. Click the drop-down arrow of Color scheme and check Show names and select Basic Random
40. Under Classes tab, change the names under Label as below
41. To change the label double click the text under the label and change it

Value Label Color

Park Reserve PR Yucca Yellow
Regional Park RP Lepidolite Lilac
Special Recreational Feature SR Ginger Pink

42. R-click the color of PR and change the color to “Yucca Yellow” (R1C5)
43. R-click the color of RP and change the color to “Lepidolite Lilac” (R1C11)
44. R-click the color of SR and change the color to “Ginger Pink” (R3C12)
45. Click the drop-down arrow of More and turn off “Show all other values”

Different Symbols for Different Map Scales

46. Click the Scales tab in the Symbology - Park pane

47. Keep the scale of Park Reserve untouched
48. Move the right stop on the slider scale of the Regional Park to the left (scale 1:100,000) and move the left stop to the
right (scale 1:500,000)
49. Keep the scale of Special Recreation Feature untouched
Create Thumbnail 31

50. In the display window type in the scale window 90,000 (scale located in the lower left corner)
51. The Regional Park feature disappears from the map because the 90,000 scale is larger than the 100,000 and 500,000
scales.

52. In CP, right-click the Counties layer and Zoom To Layer

53. Save the project (Ctrl S)

Create Thumbnail

A bookmark is a navigation shortcut to a position on a map or perspective in a scene to return to later or share with others.
Bookmarks can be used to create keyframes in an animation (which will be used in the coming chapters).

54. The MN map zooms in on the MSP airport location (scale approximately 1:125,000).

55. On the Map tab, in the Navigate group, click drop-down arrow of the Bookmarks and click New Bookmark .
56. Name: MSP
57. Description: Minneapolis-Saint Paul is the main airport in MN
58. Click OK
59. In CP, r-click Counties and Zoom To Layer

60. On the Map tab, in the Navigate group, click drop-down arrow of the Bookmarks and select MSP
32 2 Working With ArcGIS Pro

Result The map zooms to the MSP location

Delete the Thumbnail

To delete the thumbnail, do the following:

61. On the Map tab, in the Navigate group, click the drop-down arrow of the Bookmarks and select Manage Bookmarks.
62. In the Bookmarks pane, hover over the bookmark and click the red x to remove the MSP bookmark.

Result The MSP bookmark was permanently removed from the project.

Set Map Extent

The map extent is defined by a set of coordinates that outline the area of the map or scene in the project. By default, the extent
is the spatial extent covered by all features in all layers in the map or scene. This is a dynamic extent. It updates accordingly
when data are added or removed from the map or scene. GIS users can set a custom map extent

63. On the Map tab in the Navigate group, click Full Extent button
64. The MN map will zoom to the whole world.
Set Map Extent 33

Set the Extent to Twin Cities layer

Now you want to set the Extent to the extent of the Counties layer

65. In CP, right-click the MN map and click Properties to open the Map Properties dialog box.
66. On the Extent tab, click Use a custom extent.
67. Choose Counties below the Extent of a layer to generate extent coordinates.
68. Click OK to close the Map Properties dialog box.
69. Click the Full Extent button again
70. The MN map will zoom to the Counties layer

Challenge Tasks

Bookmark the Crow River

Label Streets

Question
What style did you pick? Why?
Map Classification and Layout
3

The map layer that represents features in GIS has more than its location and shape. The GIS layer can be associated with
different information. For a river, this might include its name, length, depth, and water quality. For a county, this might
include its population, ethnic group, household, income, age, and others. The information associated with a feature in a GIS
is called an attribute. For example, population can be an attribute of a city, country, and other features. Feature attributes are
stored in an attribute table. In an attribute table, each feature is a record, and each attribute is a field. The attributes for all the
features in a layer are stored in the same attribute table.

This attribute table for a layer of county stores each feature’s ID number (FID), Shape, NAME, POP2004 (Population in
2004), MALES, FEMALES, age of populations and others. A feature on a GIS map is linked to its record in the attribute
table by a unique numerical identifier (ID). Every feature in a layer has an identifier. Because features on the map are linked
to their records in the table, you can click a feature on the map and see the attributes stored for it in the table. When you select
a record in the table, the linked feature on the map is automatically selected as well and vice versa.
When you add data to ArcGIS Pro, the program assigns random colors for the layer symbols. You can change the colors
and assign a color of your choice to make the map easy to view. When applying proper symbols and classification to the map
in GIS, the map becomes easy to understand. ArcGIS Pro offers diverse symbol and label styles that users can use on maps
and can modify them, so maps look just as desired. Features can also be symbolized based on an attribute. Maps on which
features have been symbolized based on an attribute often convey more detail and clarification. For instance, road lines could
be symbolized by a type attribute to indicate different roads, such as highways, interstates, or major roads. Individual well
locations could be symbolized by a yield attribute to show the capacity of wells by discharge in m3/h.
The type of symbology depends on whether an attribute's values are text or numbers. The numbers represent counts,
amounts, rates, or measures. When a layer is symbolized based on an attribute with a text value, features are represented with
a different symbol. Exactly how the symbols differ from one another depends on what you are mapping. For instance, if you
were symbolizing geology according to the outcrop formations, you might use polygon symbols with different shades or
color to represent the different formations. However, if you were mapping streams according to base flow, you might show
streams with permanent base flow as a solid line and the intermittent stream as a dashed line.

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_3.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 35

The map shows the groundwater wells in the Azraq Basin – Jordan
Feature quantities are typically represented on a map by creating groups of features with classes and assigning a special
symbol to each class. The most common ways to symbolize quantities are graduated symbols and graduated colors.
Displaying features in a graduated sequence allows the map to visualize the distribution patterns in quantity data. For
example, the groundwater map above is symbolized based on graduated symbols. This classification shows a quantitative
difference mapped well features by varying the size of the symbol. The groundwater wells are classified into ranges that are
each then assigned a symbol size to represent the range. The classification of the groundwater has five classes, and five dif-
ferent symbol sizes and colors are assigned. The symbols are drawn with colors ranging from cyan, blue, green, pink, and
red. The red wells can be interpreted to represent greater salinity values than the wells with green and blue colors. Likewise,
cyan has smaller symbols and represents a lower salinity than the wells with larger symbols.

Creating Map and Data Classification

Scenario 3-1 You are a geologist working for the Ministry of Water and Irrigation in the Azraq Basin. You have given a task
to prepare a map showing the geology and the range of the groundwater salinity in the basin.

Creating a Geology Map Using Text Attributes

Data classifications are useful for representing continuous data in logically defined categories for use with mapping. In this
chapter, the geology layer is a polygon and has a qualitative attribute called “lithology”. The lithology field consists of dif-
ferent local geological codes that will be used to create a color-coded map. The map depicts the outcropping geological
formations in the Azraq basin.

Data Integration

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro

2. Click Open another project (upper right) browse to Ch03 under Env_Water and select Ch03.aprx and click OK

Result The Ch03.aprx open and you see the Data_Ch3 folder is already added to the Folder in the Catalog pane
Data Integration 37

Rename the Map and Call It the “Azraq Basin”

3. In the CP, r-click on the Map and click on Properties.

4. Click on the General tab.
5. In the Name box, select the Map and click delete and type in Azraq Basin.
6. Then, click OK
7. In Catalog pane, open the Data under Folder\Data_Ch03, select the Fault.shp, Geology.shp, and Well.shp by holding
the control key “Ctrl” and drag them to the Map View.

8. Save the Project by clicking the Save button on the Quick Access toolbar

Set the Extent to the Geology Layer

9. In CP, r-click Azraq Basin map, click Properties and select the Extent tab, and click “Use a custom extent”
10. Under Get extent from: select Geology, then press OK
11. Save the Project by clicking the Save button on the Quick Access toolbar
38 3 Map Classification and Layout

Classify the Geology Layer Using the Lithology Field

12. In the CP, r-click on the Geology layer, click on the “Attribute Table”
13. The attribute table will open. The “Lithology” field is used to symbolize the geological layer.
14. Close the table after you have done looking at the attribute table, by clicking on the “X” in the left-hand corner.

15. Highlight the Geology layer in the CP, click Feature Layer tab, in the Drawing group, click on the Symbology (or
r-click Geology layer in the CP and select Symbology)
16. The Symbology – Geology pane display
17. On the Primary symbology, select from drop-down arrow “Unique Values” and in the Field 1, choose “Lithology”
18. Click the drop-down arrow in “More” uncheck “Show all other values”
Import Styles from ArcGIS Desktop 39

Importing geology symbols (Styles) from ArcMap

Styles are collections of symbols and other map components (colors, color schemes, label placements, and layout items)
that can promote consistency and standardization across related map scenes and layouts. Styles are stored locally or in a
portal as single files but can be added to a project. The ArcGIS Pro styles have a .stylx file extension.
The styles that are authored by Esri and included in the ArcGIS Pro installation. Only a subset of system styles is added
to each new project by default. These default systems styles are listed in the Catalog pane in the Project tab under the Styles
folder and consist of the following:

1. ArcGIS 2D
2. ArcGIS 3D
3. ArcGIS Colors
4. ColorBrewer Schemes (RGB)

You can add any of the other system styles to a project to have their contents also appear in the galleries. A unique aspect of
system styles is that you can search for symbols from within all system styles, even when they are not added to a project.

Note Styles can be imported from ArcGIS Desktop or from the web if it is shared to a portal.

Import Styles from ArcGIS Desktop

If ArcGIS Desktop is installed on your computer, you can import any of the styles to the ArcGIS Pro project.

20. On the Insert tab, in the Styles group, click Import

21. Browse to C:\ProgramFiles(x86)\ArcGIS\Desktop10.8\Styles
22. Choose “Geology 24K” style and click OK.

Result The “Geology 24K” is added to Catalog pane under the Styles folder

23. R-click the “Geology 24K” style under the Styles in the Catalog pane and Remove.
40 3 Map Classification and Layout

Import Styles from Web

Styles can also be imported into an ArcGIS Pro project from the Web (ESRI server)

19. Click the View tab, click Catalog View, in the Contents pane, click ArcGIS Online under Portal
20. In the Search window box, enter “geology stylx” and click Enter

Note All portal styles that match the search criteria will be returned, including “Geology 24K”.

21. Right-click on “Geology 24K”, click Add Style.

Result The “Geology 24K” is added to Azraq Project under “Styles” in Catalog pane.

Data Symbolization

Vector spatial data exist as points, lines, and areas. Representing these features, combined with their attributes, often means
encoding something more complex than just geographic location. In this section, you will symbolize the Geology layer
based on the Lithology field in the attribute table.

22. Above the Map View, click the Azraq Basin tab to make it active to display the Azraq map.
Data Symbolization 41

23. In the CP, click on the B3 symbol of the Geology layer and it will take you to the Format Polygon Symbol – B3 in the
Symbology – Geology pane.
24. Make sure the Gallery tab selected and scroll down and select “624 Carbonaceous Shale”,
25. Click the Properties tab, under Appearance click the Color, under “Geology 24K”, pick “Quaternary 2” (2, 1) and
make the outline color “Black”, outline width 0.4, and then click Apply.
26. Repeat the previous step and change the lithology of B4, B5, and Basalt using the table below.

Lithology Symbol Color Outline Color Outline Width

B3 624 Carbonaceos Shale Quaternary 2 (2,1) Black 0.4
B4 627 Limestone Tertiary 4 (8,1) Black 0.4
B5 638 Argillaceous Limestone Tertiary 8 (12,1) Black 0.4
Basalt 407 Igneous Volcanic 6 (5,8) Black 0.4

27. Save your project (Ctrl + S)

Save Geology Feature Class as Layer

A layer can exist outside of your map or project as a layer file (.lyrx). This allows others to access the layers you have built.
You can share layers over the network or by email. When you add a layer file to a map, it draws exactly as it was saved,
provided the data referenced by the layer is accessible

28. In the CP, r-click Geology layer, point to Sharing and choose Save As Layer File.
29. Save the “Geology.lyrx” under Folder in Ch03 in a new folder call it Layers (you must create it)
42 3 Map Classification and Layout

Creating a Salinity Map Using Numeric Attributes

ArcGIS Pro provides many types of classification and color ramps, which can be used to highlight different aspects of the
data. When classifying the data, you can use one of many standard classification methods provided in ArcGIS Pro, or you
can manually define your own custom class ranges. This section uses the following classification:

1. Natural Break
2. Quantile
3. Equal Interval
4. Manual

Create a New Map and Call It Salinity Using the Natural Break
A Map in ArcGIS Pro represents a collection of tabular and symbolized geographic layers and persists information such as
the coordinate system and various other metadata.

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
2. In the Contents pane rename the Map and call it Salinity Natural Break
3. In Catalog pane, expand the Ch03 folder under the Folder
4. Drag the Geology.lyrx in the Map View
5. Under Folder, open Data_Ch03\Data and drag Well.shp into the Map View.

Result Geology and Well are added into the CP.

Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Natural Break Method 43

Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Natural Break Method

The natural breaks (Jenks) classification is designed to place variable values into naturally occurring datasets. The features
are divided into classes whose boundaries are set where there are relatively large differences in the data values. The set of
data is classified by finding points that minimize the within-class sum of squared differences and maximize the between-
group sums of squared differences. The advantage of this classification is that it identifies actual classes within the dataset,
which is useful to create true representations of the actual salinity of the groundwater wells.

1. In the CP, r-click on the Well layer, open “Attribute Table”.

2. The “SALINITY” field in the attribute table will be used to classify the Well layer.

3. R-click the “SALINITY” field and select “Sort Ascending”

Question What is the highest and lowest salinity?

4. Close the attribute table of the Well.

5. In the CP, r-click on the Well layer, click the Symbology.
6. The Symbology – Well pane of the Well open
7. Under Primary symbology, select “Graduate Symbols” and fill it as follows:
8. Field: SALINITY
9. Method: Natural Breaks (Jenks)
10. Classes 5
11. Minimum size: 6 pt
12. Maximum size: 16 pt
13. To the right of the Template, click the symbol, and choose “Circle 1” (under ArcGIS 2D)
14. Click the back arrow in the Symbology-Well pane
15. In Classes tab, under the Symbol, r-click the biggest symbol (bottom), change the color to red, r-click the 2nd symbol
from bottom and change the color to pink, change the 3rd to green, the 4th into blue and the top into cyan
44 3 Map Classification and Layout

16. In the Symbology – Well pane, click the Advanced symbology options (5th icon)
17. Open the Format labels, under Alignment, check “Show thousands separators”

Result After you have changed all the colors and made the appropriate symbol size changes, your dialog box should look
like this or very similar.

18. Save your project (Ctrl + S)

Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Quantile Method

In the quantile method, each class contains an equal number of features, and this method is mainly used in homogenous data.
This method is useful when you want to emphasize the relative location of highly saline wells among other low salinity wells.
This method sometimes provides misleading results because the groundwater salinity in the wells is grouped in equal num-
bers in each class. To avoid this phenomenon, the number of classes can be increased.
Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Quantile Method 45

19. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
20. In the Contents pane rename it to Salinity Quantile
21. In Catalog pane, expand the Ch03 folder under the Folder
22. Drag the Geology.lyrx into the Map View
23. Under Folder, open Data_Ch03\Data and drag Well.shp into the Map View.

Result The Geology. lyrx and Well.shp added to the Map View and in the CP.

Note If you did not close the Symbology pane from the previous step, it will be available for you to continue

24. If the Symbology – Well pane is close r-click the well and choose Symbology
25. Fill the Symbology – Well pane as below
(a) Under Primary Symbology: Graduate Symbols
(b) Field: SALINITY
(c) Method: Quantile
(d) Classes 5
(e) Minimum size: 6 pt
(f) Maximum size: 16 pt
26. To the right of the Template, click the symbol, and choose “Circle 1” (under ArcGIS 2D)
27. Click the back arrow in the Symbology-Well pane
28. In Classes tab, under the Symbol, r-click the biggest symbol (bottom), change the color to red, r-click the 2nd symbol
from bottom and change the color to pink, change the 3rd to green, the 4th into blue and the top into cyan
29. In the Symbology - Well pane, click the Advanced symbology options (5th icon)
30. Open the Format labels, under Alignment, check “Show thousands separators”

31. Save your project.

46 3 Map Classification and Layout

Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Equal Intervals Method

The equal interval method generates classes that have equal ranges. This is an advantage, as each class will be equally rep-
resented on the map. The equal interval method is best used in recognizable data ranges but not for heterogeneous data such
as in the case of groundwater salinity in the Azraq basin.

32. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
33. In the Contents pane rename it to Salinity Equal Interval
34. In Catalog pane, expand the Ch03 folder under the Folder
35. Drag the Geology.lyrx into the Map View
36. Under Folder, open Data_Ch03\Data and drag Well.shp into the Map View.

Result The Geology. lyrx and Well.shp added to the Map View and in the CP.

Note If you did not close the Symbology pane from the previous step, it will be available for you to continue

37. If the Symbology – Well pane is close r-click the Well and choose Symbology
38. Fill the Symbology – Well pane as below
(a) Under Primary Symbology: Graduate Symbols
(b) Field: SALINITY
(c) Method: Equal Interval
(d) Classes 5
(e) Minimum size: 6 pt
(f) Maximum size: 16 pt

39. To the right of the Template, click the symbol, and choose “Circle 1” (under ArcGIS 2D)

40. Click the back arrow in the Symbology-Well pane

41. In Classes tab, under the Symbol, r-click the biggest symbol (bottom), change the color to red, r-click the 2nd symbol
from bottom and change the color to pink, change the 3rd to green, the 4th into blue and the top into cyan

Practice Apply the thousand separators to the classes

42. Save your Project

Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using a Manual Method 47

Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using a Manual Method

This method allows users to use their own classes manually by setting the class ranges that are appropriate for the dataset.
This method allows us to classify the water salinity based on the known drinking water quality standard or the water–rock
interaction standard. The method is appropriate for classifying the salinity of groundwater because it allows us to emphasize
features with specific values; for example, wells that are highly saline at certain locations can be excluded as sources for
drinking or irrigation.

43. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
44. In the Contents pane rename it to Salinity Manual
45. In Catalog pane, expand the Ch03 folder under the Folder
46. Drag the Geology.lyrx into the Map View
47. Under Folder, open Data_Ch03\Data and drag Well.shp into the Map View.

Result Geology.shp and Well.shp were added to the Map View and in the CP.

Note If you didn’t close the Symbology pane from previous step, it will be available for you to continue (if it is close r-click
the Well and point to Symbology)

48. Fill the Symbology pane as follows:

(a) Under Primary symbology: Graduate Symbols
(b) Field: SALINITY
(c) Method: Manual Interval
(d) Classes 5
(e) Minimum size: 6 pt
(f) Maximum size: 16 pt

49. To the right of the Template, click the symbol, and choose “Circle 1” (under ArcGIS 2D)

50. Click the back arrow in the Symbology-Well pane

51. In the Symbology – Well pane, in the Classes tab, under the Upper value, delete the number 1574 and type 1000 and
change the color of its symbol to cyan.
52. Continuing by changing the number as in the table below

Symbol color Upper value

Cyan ≤ 1000
Blue ≤ 2000
Green ≤ 3000
Pink ≤ 4000
Red ≤ 80,000
48 3 Map Classification and Layout

53. Save you project

Sharing the Projects and the Data Using Package Project

Project packages (.ppkx) make it easy to share complete projects. A project package is a file that contains all maps and the
data referenced by its layers, as well as folder connections, toolboxes, geoprocessing history, and attachments. Project pack-
ages can be used for sharing projects between colleagues in a work group, across departments in an organization, or with any
other ArcGIS users through ArcGIS Online. The project packages will be saved as a file so that they can be accessed from
the local computer or server.

54. Above the Map View, switch to the Azraq Basin tab

55. Click the Share tab on the ribbon, in the Package group, click New Project Package, the Package Project pane
appears
56. In the Package Project dialog box, in the Package tab, under Start Packaging, check “Save package to file”
57. Name: browse to \\Env_Water\Ch03\Azraq.ppkx and click Save
58. In the Summary window, type Groundwater salinity classification in the Azraq basin, Jordan
59. In the Tag window, type Groundwater, Azraq, Jordan, Geology, Salinity, Classification, and Enter after typing each word
Sharing the Projects and the Data Using Package Project 49

60. Check below the Tag window:

(a) Share outside of organization
(b) Include Toolboxes
(c) Include History Items
61. Under Finish Packaging, click Analyze tab (if there are no problem a message display “No errors or warning found”
62. Click the Package tab next to the Analyze tab (a message display stating a successfully created package)

Result The project package “Azraq.ppkx” created in the ENV_Water\Ch03 folder

63. Close the Package Project pane

64. Save the Project

Unpack Project Package in ArcGIS Pro

It is recommended before unpacking the project package to know in advance the location where you want to unpack it.

65. Click Project tab on the ribbon and select Options tab
66. From the Options dialog box, click Share and Download tab
67. Under Unpacking, check “Ask where to save before unpacking”
68. Click OK
50 3 Map Classification and Layout

69. Click the back arrow to go to the ArcGIS Pro project

70. Exit ArcGIS Pro

Open the Azraq Project Package

71. In your computer, open Window Explorer and browse to Azraq.ppkx (\\Ch03)
72. D-click on “Azraq.ppkx”
73. ArcGIS Pro open and ask you where you want to unpack the “Azraq.ppkx”
74. Pick a location where you want to unpack, for example: \\Temp\Azraq
75. Click OK and save your project

Result ArcGIS Pro will unpack the “Azraq.ppkx” and assemble the Azraq project that contains 5 maps:

• Azraq Basin
• Salinity Natural Break
• Salinity Quantile
• Salinity Equal Interval
• Salinity Manual
Create Page Layout for Groundwater Classification 51

Create Page Layout for Groundwater Classification

A page layout (or layout) is a collection of map elements organized on a virtual page designed for map printing. Common
map elements include one or more map frames, a scale bar, a north arrow, a map title, descriptive text, and a legend. For
geographic reference, you can add grids or graticules. ArcGIS Pro allows users to create multiple layouts in a project

Scenario 3-2 Your boss asked you to create an 8.5 by 11 inches layout page map that includes the 4 types of classifications:
Jenks, quantile, equal interval and manual classification. The layout page should be a landscape orientation in pdf format.
The map document will be distributed to the shareholder of Azraq Basing during the annual briefing about the groundwater
quality.

Create a Layout

1. Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Layout drop-down arrow, under ANSI-Landscape, select
Letter 8.5” x 11” template
2. The Layout is added to the CP and above the Map View.
3. Rename the “Layout” Groundwater Classification Layout”
52 3 Map Classification and Layout

Note Once the Layout active, you see the Layout tab display on the ribbon

Add the Salinity Natural Break to the Layout

4. Insert tab on the ribbon in the Map Frames group, open the Map Frame drop-down arrow and choose the map that has
a scale (1:933,664) under the “Salinity Natural Break”
5. Draw a box for the frame in the left-top side of the layout (leave healthy margin) to place other items
6. The Map Frame added to CP and includes the Salinity Natural Break Map
7. In the CP, r-click the Geology layer and Zoom To Layer
8. In the CP, uncheck the World Topographic Map
9. Click on the map in the Layout, and you can use the selection handles to resize the map.
10. In the CP, rename the Map Frame “Natural Break Frame”
11. Save the project

Add the Salinity Quantile to the Layout

12. Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Map Frames group, open the Map Frame drop-down arrow and choose the map that
has a scale (1:933,664) under the “Salinity Quantile”
13. Draw a box for the frame in the right-top side of the layout (leave healthy margin) to place other items
14. In the CP, r-click the Geology layer/Zoom To Layer
15. The Map Frame added to CP and includes the Salinity Quantile Map
16. In the CP, rename the Map Frame to “Quantile Frame”

Practice Add to the layout in the left-bottom the “Salinity Equal Interval” map that has below it a scale (1:933,664) and
rename the Data Frame “Equal Interval Frame”, and add again in the right-bottom side the “Salinity Manual” map that
has below it a scale (1:933,664) and rename the Data Frame “Manual Frame”

17. In the CP, r-click the Geology layer in both Salinity Equal Interval” map and Salinity Manual and Zoom To Layer
Add Guides 53

Result The final layout will be similar to the image below.

Add Guides

18. Right-click the top ruler and click Add Guides.

Guides are nonprinting lines that help you align elements on the layout.

19. On the Add Guides dialog box, under Orientation, click Both.
20. Click the Placement drop-down menu and click Offset from edge.
21. Replace the value in the Margin box with 0.20 in.
54 3 Map Classification and Layout

22. Click OK.

23. Place your cursor on a 4-inch vertical ruler, r-click and Add Guide
24. In the CP select “Natural Break Frame”, click the Map Format tab on the ribbon, in the Current Selection group,
select Map Frame from the drop-down arrow

Note You can select the Natural Break Frame also by selecting it on the layout

25. In the Size & Position group, set the following

(a) X = 0.2 in/enter
(b) Y = 4 in/enter
(c) Width = 5.2 in/enter
(d) Height = 3.7 in/enter

26. Continue setting the size and position for the rest as in the table below.

New name X Y Width Height

Natural Break Frame 0.2 4 5.2 3.7
Quantile Frame 5.6 4 5.2 3.7
Equal Interval Frame 0.2 0.2 5.2 3.7
Manual Frame 5.6 0.2 5.2 3.7
Insert Layout Elements 55

Insert Layout Elements

The layout can include many elements. Some elements such as legend, scale bar, and north arrow associated with map frame.
Text and graphics are elements not associated with a map frame. In this section, you are going to insert many elements. First
you are going to insert a title for the whole “Groundwater Classification” layout in order to reflect the purpose of the layout,
and it will be placed at the top of the layout. A text title will be created for each map frame inside the layout. In this situation,
each map frame will have its own title. Place your title at any location inside the Map Frame, as you will arrange all your
layout elements (legend, scale, north arrow), after you integrate all of them later.

Insert Title for the Layout

27. In the CP highlight Groundwater Classification Layout

28. Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Graphics and Text group, select Rectangle Text
29. Draw a box for the frame at the top of the layout to place the text
30. Type Groundwater Classification
31. Click outside the box to deselect it
32. In the CP, a Text title display, rename the Text to Layout Title
33. In the CP, highlight the Layout Title, click the Format tab on the ribbon
34. In the Text Symbol group make the font Times New Roman and the size 24 and center it

Insert Title for the Natural Break Frame

35. In the CP highlight the Natural Break Frame

36. Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Graphics and Text group, select Straight Text and click on the top of the Natural
Break Frame in the layout
37. Type Natural Break Classification
38. Click Format tab on the ribbon, click Text Symbol group, change the font to Times New Roman and the size 14
39. Place the Natural Break Frame in the Layout in the upper left corner
40. In the CP rename the Text to Natural Break Classification Title
56 3 Map Classification and Layout

41. Repeat the previous steps and place a title for each data frame as in the table below, and rename the Text tittle

Data frame Title in the data frame Change the text in the CP
Natural break frame Natural break classification Natural break classification title
Quantile frame Quantile classification Quantile classification Title
Equal interval frame Equal interval classification Equal interval classification Title
Manual frame Manual classification Manual classification Title

Add a Legend
The legend tells the map reader the meaning of the symbols used to represent features on the map. Legends always display
the legend patch set for each feature layer. You are going to add legend for the four data frames. To add the legend, do the
following:

42. In the CP, highlight the Natural Break Frame or click inside the Natural Break Frame in the layout
43. Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Map Surrounds group, click Legend button
44. Draw a box inside Natural Break Frame at any location to place the legend
Insert Layout Elements 57

Result A legend is added in the Natural Break Frame in the layout and added in the CP.

Modify the Legend

45. In the CP, rename the Legend to Natural Break Legend

46. In the CP, r-click Natural Break Legend and point to Properties
47. The Format Legend display, make sure the Legend tab selected, below the Options under Legend items click Show
Properties button
48. Under Show, uncheck Layer name
49. Under Arrangement, check Keep in single column
50. Under Sizing, change the
(a) Patch width = 12 pt
(b) Patch height = 10 pt
(a) check Scale to fit patch size
51. Click the Text Symbol tab, click the General tab, and expand the Appearance
52. Font Name: Time New Roman
53. Size: 12 pt
54. Click Apply
58 3 Map Classification and Layout

55. Click the arrow to go back

56. Make sure the Legend is selected in the Natural Break Frame in the layout
57. In the Format Legend dialog box, under the Legend tab, click the Display button (3rd icon)
58. Under Border
59. Symbol: click the color and change it to gray 70% and 1 pt
60. X gap = 0.1
61. Y gap = 0.1
62. Background
63. Symbol: click the color and change it to Arctic White (1,1)
64. X gap = 0.1
65. Y gap = 0.1
66. In the CP expand the Natural Break Frame, the Salinity Natural break, and the Well layer
67. Change the name of “SALINITY” to Salinity (mg/l) and Enter

Result The changes reflected in the Legend in the layout.

Scale Bar
The scale bar provides a visual indication of the size of features and the distance between features on the map. ArcGIS
Pro has different types of scales, and the scale can be a line or bar divided into parts. When a scale bar is added to the layout,
it is associated with a map frame and maintains a connection to the map inside the frame. If the map scale changes, the scale
bar updates to remain correct.

Insert Scale

68. In the CP, select the Natural Break Frame or click it inside the layout.
69. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Map Surrounds group, and click Scale Bar drop-down arrow from under Metric
choose “Double Alternating Scale Bar 2”
70. Draw a box inside Natural Break Frame in the layout to place the scale
Insert Layout Elements 59

Result The Scale Bar added to the Natural Break Frame in the layout, and it was also added in the CP.

71. In the CP, r-click Scale Bar, select Properties, the Format Scale Bar display,
72. Select Scale Bar tab, select the Option button, and fill it as follows:
73. Name: Natural Break Scale Bar
74. Map Units: Kilometers
75. Label text: Kilometers
76. Offset 2pt
77. Label Position: Below center

78. In the Format Scale Bar, under Scale Bar tab, click Properties (2nd icon)
79. Under “Fitting Strategy” select Adjust width
80. Under “Divisions” set the Division Value to 50
81. Divisions: 3
82. Subdivisions: 1
83. Uncheck “Show one division before zero”
84. In the Format Scale Bar, click the Text Symbol tab, in the General tab open the Appearance
85. Font name: Time New Roman
86. Size: 10 pt
87. Apply
60 3 Map Classification and Layout

Insert North Arrow

88. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Map Surround, click the North Arrow drop-down arrow and select any north
arrow (i.e., ArcGIS North 2)
89. Draw a box inside the Natural Break Frame in layout to place the North Arrow.

Modify the Location of Elements in the Natural Break Frame in the Layout
To interact with the map in the layout, such as selection, editing, and navigation, you must activate the map frame containing
that map. There are two ways to activate a map frame:

1. Verify that the map frame you want to activate is the default map frame. Then, on the Layout tab, in the Map group, click
Activate
2. In the Contents pane, right-click the map frame, and click Activate

In the activated map frame mode, you can work with the map within the context of the page. The rest of the layout will
become unavailable until you click Close Activation. The activation can be closed from the Layout tab. When you are in
activated map frame mode, you have two sets of navigation tools available:

1. To pan and zoom within the map frame, use the map navigation tools on the Map tab.
2. To pan and zoom the page, use the layout navigation tools on the Layout contextual tab.
Insert Layout Elements 61

Activate the Natural Break Frame

90. In CP, highlight the Natural Break Frame, in the Layout tab on the ribbon, in the Map group, click Activate button.

Result This step will make only the Natural Break Frame active and will freeze the rest

91. In the Map tab on the ribbon, in the Navigate group, click the Explore button to pan the Azraq map to the left.
92. To deactivate, click the Layout tab, in the Map group, and click Close Activation.

Arrange the Legend, Scale Bar, and North Arrow in the Natural Break Frame
To arrange the Legend, Scale Bar, and North Arrow in the Natural Break Frame in the layout so they will not overlap with
each other, do the following:

93. In CP, highlight the Natural Break Frame to activate it in the layout, click on the Legend, it will be selected, move it to
the right
94. Click on the Scale Bar, it will be selected, move it to the lower right corner of the Natural Break Frame in the layout
95. Click on the North Bar, it will be selected, move it to the right of the Scale Bar in the Natural Break Frame in the
layout

96. Save your Project

Practice Insert legend, scale bar, and north arrow in the Quantile frame, Equal Interval frame, and Manual frame.

Export the Layout as PDF File

97. Click the Share tab on the ribbon, in the Output group, click Export Layout and fill it as follows:
98. File Type: PDF
99. Name: \\Ch03\Groundwater Salinity Layout.pdf
100. Under Quality, check “Compress vector graphics”
101. Resolution: make it 300 DPI
102. Click Export
62 3 Map Classification and Layout
Coordinate Systems and Projections
4

We live on a spherical earth, and the location of any feature can be determined by using a coordinate system.
The latitude and longitude are a 3-D coordinate system or spherical coordinate system that describes the location of fea-
tures on the Earth’s surface. Another type of coordinate system that can be used is called the “projected” coordinate system
(Fig. 4.1).
There are various types of plane coordinate systems, which are expressed in x and y coordinates. The plane coordinates
are the projection of the sphere from a 3-D view into a 2-D plane view. The latitude and longitude coordinates can be con-
verted directly into different plane coordinates. The conversion from one coordinate to another is extremely important in any
GIS work. The conversion from latitude longitude to any plane coordinate is called projection. Conversion from one plane
coordinate to another plane coordinate is called reprojection. ArcGIS is a very advanced technology that can accommodate
and handle any projections and coordinate conversions.

Geographic Coordinate System (GCS)

The GCS is used to locate and measure the location of any feature on the Earth’s surface in terms of latitude and longitude
and is based on a 3-D sphere. Earth is divided into two types of lines, meridians and parallels. Longitude is the line of
meridians that run from north to south and measure the East – West locations. The prime meridian runs straight from the
North Pole to the South Pole and passes through Greenwich in England. The rest of the meridians are moving away from the
prime meridian and are spaced farthest apart on the equator and converge to a single point at the North and South Poles.
Latitudes are lines of parallels and run from east–west and measure locations in the north–south direction (Fig. 4.2).
Parallels are equally spaced between the equator and the poles and always parallel to one another, so any two parallels are
always the same distance apart all the way around the globe. Parallels & Meridians cross one another at right angles 90°.
The longitude ranges from 0° to 180° east and 0° to −180° west, while the latitude ranges from 0° to 90° north and 0°
to -90° south. The east–north orientation is positive, and the west–south orientation is negative.
The latitude longitude is used the same way the X, Y coordinate is used in any plane coordinate. It is used as a reference
grid to find the location of features. The origin of the GCS is the point where the prime meridian intersects the equator.
Latitude and longitude can be measured either in degrees, minutes and seconds or by decimal degree. One degree equals
60′ min, and 1-min equals 60″ s.

Map Projections

Map projection is a mathematical formula where the 3-D Earth’s view is transformed into a 2-D or plane surface. A map
projection is simply a systematic representation of a graticule of latitude and longitude lines on a flat sheet of paper. The
progress in computer technology and mapping mathematics makes projection challenging research.

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_4.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 63

Fig. 4.1 The left map shows the streets of Superior (Wisconsin) and Duluth (Minnesota) registered in latitude longitude. The right map shows that
the same file is registered in the UTM zone

Fig. 4.2 Line of Latitude and Longitude

Projection is used widely in cartography, land information systems, remote sensing and GIS. The map projections gener-
ate different types of plane coordinates that are easier to use and work with than the spherical coordinate.

Projection and Distortion

The shape of the earth is quite complicated, so for map projection, the earth is considered an ellipsoid or sphere. The earth
ellipsoid is rotated about its minor axis and has semimajor (a) and semiminor (b) axes (Fig. 4.3).
The shape, area, distance and direction of the features on the Earth’s surface are correctly shown on a globe. The transfor-
mation from the earth surface onto a flat plane surface involves distortion. Parallels, meridians, and the perpendicular inter-
section of parallels and meridian cannot be duplicated. The major alteration has to do with the angles that will affect the area,
shape, distance and directions. There is no ideal projection that retains the major global properties. This leads scientists to
generate hundreds of map projections to minimize the distortion and retain at least one of the earth’s properties. Therefore,
cartographers classified the map projection into major and minor properties. The major is the conformal and equivalent, and
the minor is the equidistant and azimuthal. Here are some examples about the major world projection

1. Conformal or orthomorphic projection retains the angle and shape of a small area. When this condition occurs, the
parallels and meridians intersect at 90°.
2. Equivalent or equal-area projection will retain the correct relative size. Thus, in such a projection, the parallels and
meridians will not intersect at 90°
3. Equidistant projection retains the distance between two points in a map. The scale must be the same as the principal
scale on the reference globe from which the transformation was made.
4. The azimuthal or true-direction projection represents part of the Earth’s directions correctly with a straight line.
However, no projection can show direction so that the latitude and longitude are both straight lines.
Map Projections 65

Pole

Semiminor
b

axis
Equator a
Semimajor axis

Pole

Fig. 4.3 The shape of an ellipsoid

Developable Surfaces

Cylinder Cone

Developed Developed
Cut

Cut

Cylinder Cone

Fig. 4.4 Projection surfaces the cylinder and the cone

Many map projections include more than one property, which is extremely important in a small-scale map.
Geographers use three physical surfaces for the construction of map projections. Developable surfaces (Fig. 4.4) include
the cylinder and cone, and nondevelopable surfaces include the plane. The cylinder and cone are not flat at the time the
projection is created but can be flattened later by making an appropriate cut in the surface and unrolling it. Without stretching
or tearing, when unrolled, distortion of the surface or of the pattern drawn on it is called a developable surface.
Map projection may be produced from three viewpoints: at the center, from infinity, and on the surface of the globe. For
example, a light can be used to project the globe on a cylinder. The light can also be placed at any desired location, which
gives rise to variations in the map projection.
Changing the location of the light source modifies the characteristic of the resulting projection to the tangent or secant
intersect on the cylinder and the cone. The first is the simple (tangent) case, and the second is the secant case.
The simple case results in one line, and the secant case results in two lines. In the simple case, the projection surface
(azimuthal plane, cylindrical or conic surface) touches the globe at one point or along one line. In the secant case, the projec-
tion surface cuts through the globe to touch the surface at two lines (Fig. 4.5). The line of tangency is called a standard line
in map projection. For cylindrical and conic projections, the simple case has one standard line, whereas the secant case has
two standard lines. If the standard line along the parallel is called the standard line, and if it follows a meridian, it is called
the standard meridian. Along the standard line, there are no distortions because there is a one-to-one relationship between the
projection surface and the reference globe. The standard line is identical to the reference globe, and away from the standard
line, a distortion occurs.
66 4 Coordinate Systems and Projections

Simple Case Secant Case

One Standard Line Two Standard Line

Globe Globe

Conic

Fig. 4.5 Use the cone to construct a map projection

Fig. 4.6 Point and line of tangency

An azimuthal projection has only one point of tangency in the simple case and a line of tangency in the secant case.
Therefore, a plane may be tangent at any point on the globe (Fig. 4.6).
The orientation of the cylinder and the cone may be changed as desired and can be normal, transverse, or oblique. The
normal orientation is when the cylinder can be placed so its tangent is along the equator, and in the case of the cone, its tan-
gent is along the parallel. Transverse projection occurs when the cylinder or cone is turned 90° from the normal orientation.
Oblique projection occurs when the cylinder and cone lie between the normal and transverse positions.

Concept of the Datum

Datum is sets of parameters and ground control points defining local coordinate systems. Because the earth is not a perfect
sphere but is somewhat “egg-shaped,” geodesists use spheroids and ellipsoids to model the 3-dimensional shape of the earth.
Although the Earth can be modeled by an egg-shaped solid, local variations still exist due to the differential thickness of the
Earth’s crust or differential gravitation due to the density of the crustal materials.
A datum is created to account for these local variations in establishing a coordinate system. Figure 4.7 shows that the earth
is an irregular surface (thick black line). A generalized earth-centered coordinate system is called World Geodetic System 84
(WGS84). WGS84 provides a good overall mean solution for all places on Earth. However, for specific local measurements,
WGS84 cannot account for local variations. Instead, a local Datum has been developed. For example, the local North
American Datum of 1927 (NAD27, dashed red line) more closely fits the Earth’s surface in the upper-left quadrant of the
Earth’s cross-section. NAD27 only fits this quadrant, so to use it in another part of the earth will result in serious errors in
Map Projections 67

Fig. 4.7 Geodetic Datums: NAD 27, NAD 83 and WGS84. (Image from ESRI)

Fig. 4.8 Douglas County of Wisconsin has the following parameters

measurement. For mapping North America, to obtain the most accurate locations and measurements, NAD27 was updated
to NAD83, and NAD83 was adjusted in 1991. Any new map created will be based on NAD83.

Projection Parameters
A datum specifies the dimensions of a specific spheroid, a point of origin, an azimuth from the origin to a second point, and
the spatial orientation of the spheroid relative to the earth. A GCS assigns unique coordinate values to locations on the sur-
face of a spheroid. The system is usually based on latitude and longitude and is fully specified by a unit of measure (typically
degrees), a prime meridian and a datum (e.g., NAD83). A projected coordinate system (PCS) is a combination of a map
projection, projection parameters, and an underlying GCS that determines the set of X and Y coordinates assigned to a map.
When a map projection is used as a basis of the coordinate system, an origin should be established first. The point of origin
is defined by the central parallel and the central meridian. The central parallel and central meridian in some studies are called
the latitude of origin and longitude of center, respectively. For example, Douglas County (Fig. 4.8) has the following
projection:
Once map data are projected onto a planar surface, features must be referenced by a planar coordinate system. The
latitude-longitude coordinate, which is based on angles measured on a sphere, is not valid for measurements on a plane.
Therefore, a Cartesian coordinate system is used, where the origin (0, 0) is toward the lower left of the planar section. The
true origin point (0, 0) may or may not be in the proximity of the map data you are using.
The following lessons will be performed in this chapter:

1. Working with GCS

2. Projection on the Fly
3. Projection of the GCS into UTM Zone 15
4. Georeferencing
5. Raster Projection
6. Datum Conflict
68 4 Coordinate Systems and Projections

Working with GCS

The following two examples show how to calculate the distance in latitude – longitude coordinates.

Application 1 Distance calculation between two points on the map using the Pythagorean Theorem (Fig. 4.9). The theorem
is used to find the length of the hypotenuse of a right triangle, a calculation that affords many practical uses in various fields
such as land surveying and navigation.

Application 2 Calculate the distance between Superior and Eau Claire in Wisconsin using the latitude longitude. The loca-
tions of the two cities are as follows:

1. Superior: −92.06 longitude and 46.70 latitude.

2. Eau Claire: −91.52 longitude and 44.80 latitude.
Formula of calculation: cos d = sin a * sin b + cos a * cos b * cos c
a = 46.7 latitude of Superior
b = 44.8 latitude of Eau Claire
c = 0.54 this is longitude of Superior – Longitude of Eau Claire
cos d = sin 46.70 * sin 44.80 + cos 46.70 * cos 44.80 * cos 0.54
cos d = 0.7277 * 0.7046 + 0.6858 * 0.7095 * 0.9999
Cos d = 0.999237
d = 2.237 distance in degree
2.237 * 69.17 miles = 154.7 mile or (2.237 * 111.32 km = 249 km)

Coordinate Systems and Projections

In this chapter, you are working with coordinate systems and projections. To work with the data, you must open a project
package. The package is a compressed file containing GIS data. You learned how to create a project package in Chap. 3. You
are going to unpack the package and use its content.

Open the Project Package

1. Open Window Explorer and browse to Ch04 under ENV_Water

2. Double click the project package “Projection.ppkx”
3. ArcGIS Pro will open and “Select unpacking location” dialog box open

Note See Chap. 3 on how to set the option to allow users to choose a location to unpack their project package.

4. Browse to Ch04 under ENV_Water and Click OK

Fig. 4.9 Distance calculation

between two points 7 Well 1

4 5 Km

2 Well 2
3 Km

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Coordinate Systems and Projections 69

Result The Define Projection map open in ArcGIS Pro. The content pane contains the vector point layer (GPS.shp) and
the image (lake.tif). The Catalog pane under Folder, the Projection folder, includes two new folders, Commondata and
P20. The Commondata contains the data q1, and inside it are the layer (GPS.shp) and the raster (lake.tif). P20 contains
Ch04.tbx and Ch04.dbf. In addition, inside the Ch04 folder, a new folder is created “Projection_dff02f” that stores the two
folders: Commondata and P20.

Projection on the Fly

The Define Projection Map includes two layers: a “GPS” point vector layer and a “Lake” raster layer. Both layers are dis-
played above the World Topographic Map in the display area.

5. In the CP, r-click the GPS, click Properties, and click Source tab, in the right panel, open Spatial Reference. The coor-
dinate of the GPS is the geographic coordinate system (GCS), and the datum is the North American Datum 1983
(NAD 1983).
6. In the CP, r-click the Lake.tif, click Properties, and click Source tab, in the right panel, open Spatial Reference. You
will see that the coordinate of the Lake.tif is UTM Zone 15 and the datum is NAD 1983.

Comment The GPS layer is not projected and registered in latitude-longitude and NAD 1983, while the Lake raster is
projected in UTM coordinate system and NAD 1983.
70 4 Coordinate Systems and Projections

Despite the two layers having different coordinate systems, both layers are aligned with each other. This phenomenon is
called projection on the fly. ArcGIS Pro displays both layers in the correct place on the map. Projection on the fly is valid if
the layers are registered in any coordinate system and datum.
7. Click the Save button on the Quick Access toolbar at the top of the app, or Ctrl+S.

Connection to the Data

This will allow users to connect to the folder that provides the spatial data needed to complete the project. The data for this
project are available in the database folder under Data_Ch04. The data folder contains the layers that you need to access
more often.

8. In Catalog pane, r-click Folders, and click Add Folder Connection

9. Browse to \\Database folder highlight “Data_Ch04” and click OK

Result The folder connection “Data_Ch04” appears in the Catalog pane under the Folders

10. In the Catalog pane, expand “Data_Ch04\Data” folder, it contains 5-subfolders: Q1 and Q2, each folder includes dif-
ferent layers that you need later
11. Drag Salinity.shp from \\Data\Q1 folder into Map view
12. A notification display stating “Unknown Coordinate System

Explanation The Unknown Coordinate System means that Salinity.shp has missing spatial reference information.
Therefore, Salinity.shp is not displayed in the extent of lake.tif and GPS.shp. This is because the Salinity layer is missing
information about the datum (spatial information). This means that the Salinity layer is missing the file “Salinity.prj“

13. In the CP, r-click Salinity, point to Data, and then Export Features and fill it in the Export features pane
14. Input Features: Salinity
15. Output Location: ch04.gdb
16. Output Name: Salinity
17. Click OK
18. Remove the original Salinity layer from the CP
19. In the CP, click the symbol of the Salinity, in the Symbology – Salinity, select Gallery tab, and choose Circle 1, then click
Properties tab, change the color to cyan, and the size 10, then click Apply
Assign Datum for the Salinity Feature Class 71

Assign Datum for the Salinity Feature Class

The Salinity Layer includes total dissolved solid (TDS) information about the water in the lake. Therefore, the Salinity layer
is supposed to be located inside the lake. The reason it is not located there is because the Salinity layer is missing the datum.
In this step, you will assign datum to the Salinity layer, so the Salinity layer will move automatically into its right location
inside the lake.

20. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click the Tool button
21. Click the Toolboxes tab, open Projections and Transformations, and click Define Projection.
22. In the Geoprocessing pane, under Define Projection, fill it as follows:
23. Input Dataset or Feature Class: drag the Salinity from the CP
24. To the Coordinate System click the drop-down arrow of the “Select coordinate system” (globe)
25. The Coordinate System pane, click the drop-down arrow of the “Add Coordinate System”, click “Import Coordinate
System”, browse to Folder\Data_Ch04\Data\Q1 and select GPS.shp
26. Click Ok
27. The Salinity layer moves and displays inside the lake in the widow view.

Result Projection on the fly took place, and the Salinity layer is aligned with lake.tif and GPS.shp because all the layers
now have coordinate systems and datums.

28. Click Project tab on the ribbon, click Save As tab, browse to p20 under Project \ Folders \ Projection and save it as
Define Projection.aprx
29. Click Save
72 4 Coordinate Systems and Projections

Projection of the GCS into UTM Zone 15

The Project tool converts geographic data from one coordinate system to another. Dissimilar projections cause different types
of distortions (see the introduction). You are now going to project the GPS from latitude – longitude onto Universal Transverse
Mercator (UTM) zone 15 N.
The raster layer (lake.tif) and vector layer (GPS) in the Content pane have the same datum (NAD1983) but different
coordinate systems. The lake is registered in UTM projection zone 15 N, and the GPS is in latitude and longitude.
30. If the Geoprocessing pane, click the arrow back in the Define Projection pane

Note if the Define Projection pane is closed, repeat the previous steps by clicking the Analysis tab on the ribbon. In the
Geoprocessing group, click the Tool button and open Projections and Transformations.

31. Click Project under the Projections and Transformations

32. Fill the Project pane as follows:
33. Input Dataset or Feature Class: drag the GPS from the CP
34. Output Dataset or Feature Class: Type GPS_UTM
35. Output Coordinate System: click the drop-down arrow and select lake.tif to import the coordinate system from lake.tif
(NAD_1983_UTM_Zone_15 N).
36. Click Run
Georeferencing 73

Result GPS_UTM is now registered in NAD_1983_UTM_Zone_15 N, saved in the database Ch04.gdb and added into the
Content pane.

37. Save your project (Ctrl + S)

Georeferencing

Raster data are commonly obtained from many sources, such as aerial photographs, satellite images, and scanned maps.
Scanned maps and some downloadable images from the internet usually do not contain spatial reference information.
Therefore, these images cannot be represented on the map, and their locations will not fit correctly on the surface of the earth.
Thus, to use these types of raster data in GIS analysis or as a background image, GIS users will need to use accurate location
data to align or georeference the raster data to a map coordinate system.
GIS users georeference the raster define how the data are situated in map coordinates. This process includes assigning a
coordinate system that associates the data with a specific location on the earth. Georeferencing raster data allows it to be
viewed, queried, and analyzed with other geographic data.

Scenario 4-1 You are an ecologist and found on the internet an image representing Silurian aquifer in east Wisconsin. The
image has a false coordinate, and the rest of your digital data are registered to a geographic coordinate (Latitude -
Longitude).

GIS Approach
To georeference the scanned image, you will use a vector layer of Wisconsin.
1. Click the Insert tab in the ribbon, on the Project group, click New Map and call it “Georeference”
2. In the Catalog pane, expand Folder\Data_Ch04\Data\Q2 and drag State48.shp onto the Map View
74 4 Coordinate Systems and Projections

3. In the CP, r-click State48 layer and click Label

4. Click the Map tab in the ribbon, on the Selection group, click Select Features tool and click on state of Wisconsin
5. In CP, r-click State48.shp point to Data select Export Features
6. In the Export Features dialog box, fill it as follows:
(a) Input Features: State48
(b) Output Location: ch04
(c) Output Name: WI
7. Click OK

8. In the CP, r-click State48.shp, and point to Remove

9. In the CP, r-click WI layer and point to Zoom To Layer
10. In the CP, click the symbol of WI, in the Symbology-WI in the Gallery tab, click on Black Outline (1pt). Click
Properties tab, and click on Outline color and make it red
11. Click Apply

12. Click the Map tab in the ribbon, on the Layer group, click Add Data and browse to Q2 folder, highlight the raster
“WI_Aquifer.jpg” and click OK

Result “WI_Aquifer.jpg” is far from the WI layer because the image has a false coordinate system.
Georeference the Raster 75

Comment If you r-click the “WI_Aquifer.jpg” in the CP, click Source, then open the Spatial Reference, you will notice
that the image has unknown coordinate system.

Copy Raster

To work with a copy of the original image “WI_Aquifer.jpg”, you can copy it and save it in the geodatabase ch04.gdb.
When storing a raster dataset in a geodatabase, the user should not add a file extension to the name of the raster dataset. If
you want to store the image as ESRI Grid, this grid has no extension. You are now going to copy “WI_Aquifer.jpg” and call
it “Silurian_Aquifer”.

12. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click the Tool button
13. Click the Toolboxes tab, open Data Management Tools, Raster, Raster Dataset, and click Copy Raster and fill it as
below
(a) Input Raster: WI_Aquifer.jpg
(b) Output Raster Dataset: Silurian_Aquifer
(c) NoData Value 256
(d) Format: ESRI Grid Format
14. Click Run

Result The “Silurian_Aquifer” image is saved in Ch04.gdb and added into the CP.

15. In the CP, r-click the “WI_Aquifer.jpg” and remove

Georeference the Raster

The copied image has no coordinate system, and you are going to assign for it a coordinate system using the Georeference
tool and the WI feature class.

16. In the CP, highlight the “Silurian_Aquifer” image

17. Click the Imagery tab in the ribbon, in the Alignment group, and click Georeference button to open the Georeference
tab

The tools on the Georeference tab are divided into several groups to help you use the correct tools in the different phases of
your georeferencing session. Once you click on the Georeference tab, the top right corner of the Map View, will show the
“Silurian_Aquifer” that will be georeferenced and the RMS, which is empty (Errors), because the georeferencing process
didn’t start yet.
76 4 Coordinate Systems and Projections

18. In the Prepare group, click Set SRS .

Comment The “Silurian_Aquifer” raster dataset does not have a spatial reference, this is seen in the Map Properties:
Georeferencing. The Map Properties: Georeferencing dialog box allows you to choose the coordinate system for the
georeferencing session. It also displays the coordinates of the layers in the Contents pane.

19. In the Prepare group, click Fit to Display

Result The raster layer you are georeferencing is placed with the current map display. You can also use the Move , Scale
, and Rotate tools to place the raster as needed (try all of them to practice).
Georeference the Raster 77

20. In the CP, turn off the World Topographic Map and World Hillshade because they are not going to be used in the
process of georeferencing. In this exercise, you keep only WI.
21. In the Adjust group, click the Add Control Points tool to create control points.
22. To add a control point, first click a location on the “Silurian_Aquifer” (source layer); then click the same location on
the WI (target layer) on the map.
23. If you want to zoom or pan, click on C letter on the keyboard
24. In the Review group, click the Control Point Table button to evaluate the residual error for each control point.
Currently you have 20 control points, and this is sufficient to georeference your image.

If you find the error is high, highlight it and click delete on the keyboard, the current error is 0.026 and this is acceptable. You
can also press the L key to switch the transparency of your source raster on and off.

25. On the Adjust group, click the drop-down arrow of Transforms , choose the transformation you want to use. The
transformation depends on the number of control points. In this exercise, use the 2nd order polynomial if you have more
than 6 control points.

26. When you’re satisfied with the current alignment, stop entering control points.
27. In the Save group, click Save (it will be saved in the geodatabase)
78 4 Coordinate Systems and Projections

28. In the CP, r-click the “Silurian_Aquifer” and remove

29. In the Catalog pane, open the Databases/Ch04.gdb and r-click the “Silurian_Aquifer”
30. In the Raster Dataset Properties: Silurian_Aquifer, scroll down and open the Spatial Reference. You will see that the
Silurian_Aquifer is registered in GCS_NAD83.

Prepare Raster for Projection

In this section, you will project the raster “Silurian_Aquifer” that you have georeferenced in the previous section. You will
project the raster from GCS_North_American_1983 into NAD 1983 Wisconsin Transverse Mercator.

31. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
32. Click Project tab on the ribbon, click Save As tab, browse to Project \ Folders \ Projection \ p20 and save it as Project_
Raster.aprx
33. Click Save
34. In the CP, change the name of the Map into Raster Projection

35. In Catalog pane, open ch04.gdb under the Databases and drag Silurian_Aquifer into the Map View

Remove the White Background of a TIFF Image

Some images have a default white background, which is a hindrance if it blocks layers placed beneath the image. To remove
the white background, do the following:

36. In the CP, r-click the Silurian_Aquifer image layer, and click Symbology
37. In the Symbology pane, fill it as below
38. Under Primary symbology, choose RGB
39. Click the Mask tab.
40. Check the “Display background value”, and under it, set the value for each band to 255.
41. Set the background color to No Color.
Project the Raster 79

Project the Raster

42. In the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click the Tools button
43. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the Toolboxes, open the Data Management Tools, open the Projections and
Transformations
44. Under Projection and Transformation open the Raster and click Project Raster
45. The Project Raster pane display, fill it as below
46. Input Raster: Silurian_Aquifer
47. Output Raster Dataset: Aquifer_WTM
48. Click Select Coordinate System (Globe)
49. In the Coordinate System dialog box, under XY Coordinate Systems Available
50. Open the Projected Coordinate Systems, open the State Systems, and scroll down to the end and select “NAD 1983
Wisconsin TM (Meters)”

51. Click OK
52. Run
80 4 Coordinate Systems and Projections

Result The image projected from latitude-longitude into the projected coordinate system and the shape of Wisconsin
changed.

53. Save your Project (Ctrl + S)

Challenge Task

One of the last steps you completed was selecting a transformation after selecting control points. The instructions for the
chapter instructed you to use “2nd Order Polynomial”. Return to that point and click through the other transformation
options to see the differences. Does it seem like 2nd Order Polynomial was in fact the most accurate based on the RMS?
Introduction to Geodatabase
5

ArcGIS Pro works with different GIS and non-GIS file formats. The Geodatabase software logic provides the common appli-
cation logic used throughout ArcGIS for accessing and working with all geographic data in a variety of files and formats.
This supports working with the geodatabase, and it includes working with shapefiles, computer-aided drafting (CAD) files,
triangulated irregular networks (TINs), grids, imagery, Geography Markup Language (GML) files, and numerous other GIS
data sources supported by the ArcGIS Data Interoperability extension.
Geodatabase is a collection of geographic datasets of various types held in a common file system folder or a multiuser
relational database management system such as Oracle, PostgreSQL, Microsoft SQL Server, IBM Db2, or SAP HANA.
Geodatabases come in many sizes; have varying numbers of users; and can scale from small, single-user databases built on
files up to larger workgroup, department, and enterprise geodatabases accessed by many users.
Geodatabase has a lot of meaning in ArcGIS Pro in addition to a collection of datasets.
The geodatabase is the native data structure for ArcGIS desktop and ArcGIS Pro. It is the primary data format used for
data editing and management. It is designed to work with and leverage the capabilities of the geodatabase.
The geodatabase physically stores geographic information and uses a database management system or file system. The
data can be accessed either through ArcGIS or through a database management system using SQL.
Geodatabases have a comprehensive information model for representing and managing spatial data. The information
model is employed as a series of tables holding feature classes and attributes. In addition, advanced GIS data objects add real
world behavior, rules for managing spatial integrity, and tools for working with spatial relationships of the core features and
attributes.

Three Types of Geodatabases

File geodatabases: A file geodatabase is stored as multiple files in a folder with a .gdb extension. Each dataset is contained
in a single file. By default, files can grow to 1 TB, but this can be changed to 4 or 256 TB using a configuration keyword.
The geodatabase file is the built-in data structure for ArcGIS Pro and is the primary data format used for editing and data
management. Geodatabase combines “geo” (spatial data) with “database” to create a central data repository for spatial
data storage, management, and analysis.
Mobile geodatabases: A mobile geodatabase is stored in an SQLite database that is entirely contained in a single file and
has a geodatabase extension. The size limit for a mobile geodatabase is 2 TB.
Enterprise geodatabases are stored in relational databases. They can be virtually unlimited in size and number of users; the
limits differ depending on the database management system (DBMS) vendor.

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_5.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 81

Datasets in the Geodatabase

A key geodatabase concept is the dataset, and the geodatabase in ArcGIS Pro contains three primary dataset types:
1. Tables: A collection of rows, each containing the same fields. Feature classes are tables with shape fields.
2. Feature classes: A table with a shape field containing point, line, or polygon geometries for geographic features. Each
row is a feature.
3. Raster datasets: Contain rasters that represent continuous geographic phenomena.
A geodatabase can be generated from scratch by creating or collecting dataset types. After building a number of these fun-
damental dataset types, one can add to or extend their geodatabase with more advanced capabilities (such as adding topolo-
gies, networks, or subtypes) to model GIS behavior, maintain data integrity, and work with an important set of spatial
relationships.

Geodatabase Storage in Tables and Files

Geodatabase storage includes both the schema and rule base for each geographic dataset plus simple tabular storage of the
spatial and attribute data. The three primary datasets in the geodatabase (feature classes, attribute tables, and raster datasets),
as well as other geodatabase elements, are stored using tables. The spatial representations in geographic datasets are stored
as either vector features or rasters. These geometries are stored and managed in fields along with traditional attributes.
The Geology feature class is stored as a table. Each row represents one feature, and the Shape field holds the polygon
geometry for each feature. The polygon value is used to specify that the field contains the coordinates and geometry that
define one polygon in each row.

A key geodatabase strategy is to use the database management system (DBMS) to scale GIS datasets to extremely large
sizes and numbers of users, for example, to support simple small databases for one or a few users up to instances with hun-
dreds of millions of features and thousands of simultaneous users. Tables provide the primary storage mechanism for geo-
graphic datasets. Structured query language (SQL) is strong at querying and processing the rows in tables, and the geodatabase
strategy is designed to use these capabilities.
Import Image as a Raster Dataset into File Geodatabase 83

Creating a Geodatabase

This section will allow you to capture data using digital data to create feature classes and store them in a geodatabase.

Scenario 5-1 You are working as a hydrogeologist for the Water Authority, and you are asked to create a file geodatabase
and fill it with point, line, and polygon feature classes. You are also going to use the “Image_Rectify.tif” image as a source
to capture groundwater wells as a point feature class, the “major fault” as a line feature class, and the “KSWTP” as a polygon
feature class.

Create File Geodatabase (Dhuleil.gdb)

1. In Window Explorer, browse to Ch05 under ENV_Water and d-click Ch05.apx to launch ArcGIS Pro
2. ArcGIS Pro open and in the CP, you see the World Topographic Map and the World Hillshade
3. In Catalog pane, open the Databases, you see there are two databases: Ch05.gdb (default) and the Dhuleil.gdb
4. In Catalog pane, r-click Folders and click Add Folder Connection
5. Browse to \\Database\, select Data_Ch05 and click OK
6. In the CP, rename the MAP to Dhuleil, and save the project

Result In the Catalog pane, the Data_Ch05 from Ch05 added to the Folder and the Map will be called Dhuleil.

Import Image as a Raster Dataset into File Geodatabase

The term raster dataset refers to any raster data model that is stored in a geodatabase.
7. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing tool, click the Tools button
8. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the Toolboxes tab, click the Conversion Tools, and open To Geodatabase.
9. Click Raster To Geodatabase and fill it as below
10. Input Rasters: In Catalog pane, browse to the Image folder under Data_Ch05\Data and choose Image_Rectify and click OK
11. Output Geodatabase: In Catalog pane, browse to the Databases and select Dhuleil.gdb
12. Run
84 5 Introduction to Geodatabase

Result Image_Rectify was converted and stored in Dhuleil.gdb.

13. In Catalog pan, open the Dhuleil.gdb and drag Image_Rectify into the CP or Map View

Result Image_Rectify is displayed in the Map View and consists of two wells, stream, fault and KSWTP. In this section,
you will use the image as a background to capture feature dataset.

Create a Feature Dataset in File Geodatabase

A feature dataset is a collection of related feature classes that share a common coordinate system. Feature datasets are used
to spatially integrate related feature classes. Their primary purpose is to organize related feature classes into a common data-
set for building a topology, a network dataset, a terrain dataset, or a geometric network.
14. Open Catalog pane, expand Dhuleil.gdb under the Databases
15. R-click Dhuleil.gdb, point to New and click Feature Dataset.
16. Fill the Create Feature Dataset dialog box as follows:
17. Feature Dataset Name: type “Water”
18. Coordinate System: click Select coordinate system, open Projected Coordinate System, open UTM, open WGS 1984,
open Northern Hemisphere, and select WGS 1984 UTM Zone 36 N
19. Click OK and then run

Result The Water Feature Dataset is created in Dhuleil.gdb, and it is registered in UTM Zone 36 N and associated with
the WGS 1984 datum.
Create a Feature Dataset in File Geodatabase 85

Import shapefiles into the Water Feature Dataset

This step will import two shapfiles (Dam.shp and Stream.shp) into the Water feature dataset. The two shapefiles are regis-
tered in the coordinate system of GCS_WGS84. The Water feature dataset is registered in the projected coordinate system
(WGS_1984_UTM Zone 36 N). Once Dam.shp and Stream.shp are imported into the Water feature dataset, they are
automatically converted into the coordinates of the Water feature dataset.
20. In the Catalog pane, expand Databases, r-click Water feature dataset.
21. Point to Import, select Feature Class(es)…
22. Fill the Feature Class to Geodatabase as follows:
23. Input Features: In Catalog pane, browse to the Shapefile folder under the Data folders, highlight Dam.shp and Stream.shp
24. Click OK
25. Click Run

Result The Stream and Dam is imported in the Water feature dataset.

Create Feature Classes and Assign Spatial Reference

To create a feature class, the file geodatabase must already exist. Dhuleil.gdb is created in the Databases. You are going to
create 3-new feature classes and call them Well (point), Fault (line), and Plant (polygon).
26. Open Catalog pane, expand Databases, and r-click Dhuleil.gdb
27. Select New and then Feature Class
28. Fill the Create Feature Class dialog box
29. Name: Observation
30. Type of features stored in the feature class: Point
31. Under Geometric Properties Check Z Value – coordinate include Z values used to store 3D data
32. Click Next
33. Click below Field Name: “Click here to add a new field”
34. Remove the Field and type: Name
35. Under Data Type: Text
36. Length: 10
37. Click Next
38. In the Spatial Reference Dialog box
39. Open Geographic coordinate system, open the World, and select WGS 1984
40. Click Finish

Result The Observation feature class is created and stored in Dhuleil.gdb.

86 5 Introduction to Geodatabase

Continue by repeating the previous steps and create a line feature class and call it “Fault” and polygon feature class and
call it “Plant” and register them into GCS_WGS_1984.

Result The Fault, Plant, and the Observation feature classes are integrated into the CP and stored in Dhuleil.gdb, but all
of them are empty.
Digitizing Point, Line and Polygon on Screen 87

Digitizing Point, Line and Polygon on Screen

On-screen digitizing is a process in which a map is created using another map. This map could be an image, a scanned pic-
ture, or a previously digitized map. This technique is used to trace features to create new layers. This practice is similar to
traditional tablet digitizing, but rather than using a classical digitizer and a puck, the user creates layers on the computer
screen with the mouse and referenced information as a background. On-screen digitizing may also be used in an editing ses-
sion where the user can update or add new features. The accuracy of the digitized features cannot in any way be higher than
the original base image. For accurate tracing, during digitization, the user should zoom in for better viewing. Nevertheless,
this does not mean that the newly captured feature will more closely match the real-world coordinate.
In this section, you are going to use the raster dataset (Image_Rectify) that are stored in Dhuleil.gdb as backdrop to digi-
tize on screen the Observation (point), Fault (line), and Plant (polygon).

Capture the Feature Classes using the Raster Dataset

You are going to digitize the two Observations, the Fault, and the Plant using the Image_Rectify raster dataset. The image
is registered in latitude-longitude and associated with the Jordanian datum (D_Jordan).

Create the Observation Feature Class

Now you will create two observation wells by digitizing them using the Raster Dataset as a background.
39. In the CP, click the symbol of the Observation, in the Symbology – Observation dialog box, make sure the Gallery tab

is selected and click the “Circle 4”

40. The symbol of the Observation in the CP changed
41. In the CP, r-click the Observation and click Attribute Table
42. In the upper-right corner of the table, click the Option button , and click the Fields View.
43. Fields: Observation shows that the Field Name: Name and its type and length are text and 10, respectively
44. Close the Fields: Observation and the Observation table

45. On the ribbon, click the Edit tab, in the Features group, click Create button
46. In the Create Features pane, click the Observation feature template and click the Active template (blue arrow) and
click the Point tool in the Active Template
47. Click the point on the map that has the “Al2702” label on the image to create the point feature.
48. Then, click the observation labeled “AL1043” to create the second point.
49. At the bottom of the map and on the Configure tool, click Finish , or press the F2 key on the keyboard to finish the
digitizing.
50. Close the Create Features pane

Result Two points are created on the map, and the second point is selected.
88 5 Introduction to Geodatabase

51. In the CP, r-click Observation and click Attribute Table

52. The last digitized point is still selected, type under Name field “AL1043”
51. Type “Al2702” in the first line under Name and enter
52. On the ribbon, click the Edit tab, in the Manage Edits group, click Save button and then click Yes to save all edits.
53. In the Observation table click “Clear” to deselect the 2nd point OR in the ribbon click Map tab, in the Selection group,
click Select button to deselect the Point button, and then close the attribute table of Observation

Create the Fault Feature Class

54. In the CP, click the Fault symbol, in the Symbology pane, select Gallery tab and choose “Dashed 4:1” symbol, then
click Properties tab, under the Appearance select the red color.
55. Click Apply, and close the Symbology pane

56. On the ribbon, click the Edit tab, in the Features group, click Create button
57. In the Create Features pane, click the Fault feature template and click the Active template (blue arrow) and click the
Line tool in the Active Template
Digitizing Point, Line and Polygon on Screen 89

58. Using the image as a guide, digitize the Fault by clicking the beginning of the Fault on the east side and continue click-
ing on the Fault as you go along it to completely digitize it.
59. Once you are done, double click to finish digitizing (or r-click and click finish)

60. On the Configure tool, click Finish , or press the F2 to finish the digitizing.
61. Close the Create Features pane
62. On the ribbon, click the Edit tab, in the Manage Edits group, click Save button and then click Yes to save all edits.
63. On the ribbon click Map tab, in the Selection group, click Select button to deselect the Point button

Result The line is created on the map, and it is selected.

Create the Plant Feature Class

65. In the CP, click the Plant symbol, in the Symbology pane, select Gallery tab and choose “Water (area)” symbol
66. In the Symbology pane, select Gallery tab and choose Water (area) symbol
67. Close the Symbology pane
68. Zoom In around the Plant in the image
69. On the ribbon, click the Edit tab, in the Features group, click Create button
70. In the Create Features pane, click the Plant feature template, click the Active template (blue arrow) and click the
Polygon tool in the Active Template.
64. Using the image as a guide, place your pointer over the right-east corner of the Plant and click once, then click along the
outside edge of the image to create the polygon.

71. On the Configure tool, click Finish , or press the F2 to finish the digitizing.
72. Close the Create Features pane
73. On the ribbon, click the Edit tab, in the Manage Edits group, click Save button and then click Yes to save all edits.
74. On the ribbon click Map tab, in the Selection group, click Select button to deselect the Point button

75. In the CP, r-click Plant, click the Attribute Table

76. Click the Option button (in upper-right corner), click Fields View
77. In the Fields: Plant table, click the last row that says, “Click here to add a new field”.
78. A new row is created, and the table is filled as follows:
79. Under the Field Name, type Name
80. Double-click the Alias column and enter Name.
81. Select the Data Type column and choose Text from the drop-down menu
82. Under the Length column type 10
83. On the ribbon, in the Fields tab, in the Changes group, click Save button
90 5 Introduction to Geodatabase

84. Close Fields: Plant and the attribute table of Plant

85. In the CP, select the Plant, on the ribbon, select Edit tab, in the Selection group, click the Attributes button
86. The Attribute pan dialog box open
87. Under Attributes tab, to the right of the Name, type KSTP
88. Click Apply
89. On the ribbon, click the Edit tab, on the Manage Edits group, click Save button

Note KSTP means Khirbet Samra Treatment Plant

90. Open the attribute table of Plant, you will see that KSTP added under Name, then close the table
91. In the CP, right click the raster dataset “Image_Rectify”, remove
92. Save the project

Import Data into Geodatabase

1. Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map, and call it Jizzi
2. In Catalog pane, under Database, r-click Dhuleil.gdb, point to Import and then click Feature Class(es)
3. The Feature Class To Geodatabase dialog box opens and fills it as follows:
4. Input Features: In Catalog pane, browse to Jizzi folder under Data folder, highlight the Catchment and Well shapefiles
5. Click OK
6. Output Geodatabase: Dhuleil.gdb
7. Click Run
Relationship Class 91

Result The Catchment and Well feature class will be stored in Dhuleil.gdb, if you don’t see them, r-click Dhuleil.gdb and
click Refresh or click F5

8. In Catalog pane, under Database, r-click Dhuleil.gdb, point to Import and then click Table(s)
9. The Table To Geodatabase dialog box open, fill it as below
10. Input Table: In Catalog pane, browse to Jizzi folder under Data folder, highlight the Table 1.txt and Table 2.txt
11. Click OK
12. Output Geodatabase: Dhuleil.gdb
13. Click Run

Relationship Class

Relationship classes describe relationships between items in the geodatabase. There are different relationships, such as
simple, one-to-one, or one-to-many relationships. These relationships can be used to ensure that the links between items in
the database are maintained and up to date. Deleting a feature, such as a groundwater well, can cause the removal of other
features, such as a pump or casing records in a related table. The create relationship class tool creates a relationship class to
store an association between fields or features in the origin table and the destination table. The Origin Table is the table or
feature class that will be associated with the destination table. The destination table is the table or feature class that will be
associated with the origin table.
92 5 Introduction to Geodatabase

Simple Relationship Class

When you create a relationship class, you specify whether it is simple or composite. In this section, you are going to deal
with simple relationship. In this simple relationship, the well feature class, Table 1, and Table 2 in the geodatabase exist
independently of each other. In this exercise, the groundwater wells have more data related to water chemical analysis and
other data related to the wells’ depth and yields. When creating the first relationship class, you choose the Well to be the
origin and Table 1 to be the destination. In the second relationship class, you choose Table 1 to be the origin and Table 2 to
be the destination.
In a relationship class, objects in the origin match objects in the destination through the values in their key fields. The key
field in the origin class of a relationship is called the primary key (PK), and the key field in the destination class is called the
foreign key (FK). The FK contains values that match those of the primary key field in the origin class.

Create a Relationship Between the Well and Table 1

14. In the Catalog pane, under Database, r-click Dhuleil.gdb, point to New and select Relationship Class
15. The Create Relationship Class dialog box open, fill it as below
(a) Origin Table: Well (stored in Dhuleil.gdb)
(b) Destination Table: Table 1 (stored in Dhuleil.gdb)
(c) Output Relationship Class: Well_Table 1
(d) Relationship Type: Simple
(e) Forward Path Label: Well
(f) Backward Path Label: Table 1
(g) Origin Primary Key: INVEN_No
(h) Origin Foreign Key: INVEN_No
16. Accept the other default
17. Click Run

Result The relationship class created and stored in Dhuleil.gdb.

Create a Relationship Between Table 1 and Table 2

18. In the Catalog pane, under Database, r-click Dhuleil.gdb, point to New and select Relationship Class
19. The Create Relationship Class dialog box open, fill it as below
(a) Origin Table: Table 1 (stored in Dhuleil.gdb)
(b) Destination Table: Table 2 (stored in Dhuleil.gdb)
(c) Output Relationship Class: Table 1_Table 2
(d) Relationship Type: Simple
(e) Forward Path Label: Table 1
(f) Backward Path Label: Table 2
(g) Origin Primary Key: INVEN_No
(h) Origin Foreign Key: INVEN_No
(i) Accept the other default
20. Click Run

Result The relationship class created and stored in Dhuleil.gdb.

After establishing the two relationship classes, you will use them to identify the well salinity.
Relationship Class 93

Find the Wells with Salinities Higher Than 500 mg/l

21. In Catalog pane, drag from Dhuleil.gdb the Catchment, Well, Table 1, and Table 2 in the display window
22. In the CP, click the symbol of the Catchment and make it hallow, and click the symbol of the Well and click the Circle 1
and make the color blue

23. In the CP, select Table 1, click the Map tab, in the Selection group, and Select By Attributes
24. In the Select By Attributes fill, it is as follows:
25. Input Rows: Table 1
26. Selection Type: New selection
27. Write the SQL as follows:
28. where TDS is greater than 500
29. Click Apply and close the Select By Attributes dialog box
94 5 Introduction to Geodatabase

30. In the CP, open the attribute table of Table 1.

31. At the bottom of the table, click “Show Selected Records”

Result Four records selected

32. In the Table 1 attribute table, click Option (3-lines on the top right), point to Related Data and select Well – Table 1
33. The Well attribute table opens and shows that 4 wells are selected in the table and in the middle of the map in the window
display.
Relationship Class 95

34. In the table, select the Table 1 tab

35. In the Table 1 attribute table and click Option (3-lines on the top right), point to Related Data and select
Table 2 – Table 1
36. Table 2 Attribute table open and 4 records selected
Data Editing and Topology
6

During data creation, either using a tablet or on-screen, digitizing can generate errors. The error can be due to human error,
such as missing a point, line, polygon, or digitizing extra features. Errors can also be generated during scanning, tracing or
geo-referencing. An ArcGIS user can edit various types of data, such as feature data stored in shapefiles, geodatabases, and
different tabular formats. The editing can include points, lines, polygons, and text.
Editing occurs in an edit session where vector features or tabular attribute information can be created or modified. Start
an edit session when you are ready to begin editing, but remember to end the edit session when you’re done. If you have more
than one data frame in your map, you can only edit the layers in one data frame at a time, even if all data are in the same
workspace. The editing of the data can be done if they are either in the same or in different coordinate systems.
Topology is an advanced way to edit data, and it is defined as a data structure that creates connections and describes the
spatial relationship between point, line, and polygon features. In other words, the topology is simply the arrangement of how
the three different features (point, line, and polygon) share geometry. All spatial elements in a GIS layer are connected in
some fashion to each other, which allows the layer to be categorized, queried, manipulated, and stored more efficiently. The
topology is also a set of rules, behaviors, and models on how points, lines, and polygons share coincident geometry. For
example, two adjacent catchment areas will have a common water divide between them. The set of sub-catchment polygons
within each watershed must completely cover the watershed polygon and share edges with the whole catchment boundary.
The topology is a useful data structure concept in GIS that allows GIS users to know the location of the feature, what is con-
nected to it, what is surrounded by it, and how to identify spatial relationships with other features. It can also help to get
around using the nodes and vertices to accomplish various spatial analysis tasks. In GIS, one can find and trace a route on a
map between two cities and measure the distance and time of arrival.
When topology is applied in GIS, a data structure table is built from nodes and chains of the features. The tables are used
to determine various relationships, such as what is connected, what is adjacent (left & right), and what is the direction of
chains? Topology is applied after digitizing and editing. When data are digitized or created, there is no connection, or rela-
tionship, to the feature that has recently been digitized. This means that no informational content associated with point, line,
or polygon is available, except location. For example, if you digitize a river and its tributaries, then run the topology, it will
build the spatial information. It does this by recognizing the nodes at the end of each digitized stream and creating new nodes
at intersections where the river crosses. The end result is that each segment of the river consists of three topological chains
separated by a node (Fig. 8.1). One stream segment consists of Arc 1, Arc 2, and Arc 3 using a start node and end node. Arc
1 has node 1 as its starting node and node 4 as its ending node.
Topology offers special information on the data structure, provides powerful functions for spatial analysis and presents a
number of advantages to GIS. The topology allows users to calculate the spatial information and property of the features. The
spatial property for the point is location (X, Y), the line is the length, and the polygon is the perimeter and area. Topology
provides spatial relationships that allow users to query the data and provide spatial analysis when running the network
analyst.

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_6.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 97

Editing in ArcGISPro
In this chapter, you are going to be introduced to various types of editing, which range from simple, advanced, and all the
way to topological editing.

Simple Editing

(a) Delete
(b) Move
(c) Split
(d) Reshape
(e) Modify
(f) Merge

Advanced Editing
(a) Overshoots and undershoots
(b) Generalize feature
(c) Smooth feature

Topological Editing Using Geodatabase

(a) Fix Lines using topology
(b) Fix polygons using topology

Simple Editing

Scenario 6-1 You are giving a shapefile that was digitized from an aerial photograph, and your boss asked you to modify it
by deleting and moving some polygons from it.

Open the Project and Connect to Folder

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro and click “Open another project”
2. Browse to \\ENV_Water\Ch06 and click Open Ch06.aprx and click OK
3. The ArcGIS Pro open and has no data attached to it
Simple Editing 99

4. In Catalog pan, r-click the Folder, and point to Add Folder Connection
5. Browse to \\ENV_Water\Ch06 and select Data_Ch06 ((or \\Database\ Data_Ch06) and click OK
6. In the CP, select the Map and press the F2 key and change the name to Editing

Data Integration and Labeling

7. Open the Folder in the Catalog pane, expand Data_Ch06/Data/Q1 and drag Farm.shp into the Map View.
8. In the CP, r-click Farm and point to Label
9. The seven polygons of the Farm now are labeled
100 6 Data Editing and Topology

Delete Function
In this step you are going to delete 2-polygons: H and G from the Farm layer
10. Click the Edit tab on the ribbon, in the Selection group, click the Select button and select polygon H located in the
northeast of the map.
11. Click Delete button in the Features group, and click Yes to confirm the delete
12. In the Manage Edits group, click the Save button, click Yes to save all edits

Result The H Polygon has been deleted now.

13. Repeat the previous steps to delete polygon G.

Note To remove the selected feature from the current selection click Ctrl + Select . If you want to change the Select
button, click the Map tab on the ribbon, in the Navigate group click the Explore button.

Move Function
In this step, you are going to move two polygons: D and F.
You have found that the actual location of polygon D is between polygon A and polygon B. The location of polygon F is
between polygon A and polygon C. Therefore, you are going to move both polygons D and F into their appropriate
locations.
14. Click the Edit tab on the ribbon. In the Selection group, click the Select button and select polygon D.
15. In the Tools group, click the Move button, polygon D will have a dashed line perimeter, and the Modify Features pane
also displays
16. Place the cursor inside polygon D, drag it and place it between polygons B and A
17. At the bottom of the map, click F2 on the Configure tool.
18. Repeat the previous step and drag polygon F between A and C.
19. To deselect click the Select icon and click any location
Simple Editing 101

Results Polygon D and F moved to their proper locations.

Split Function
Polygon A is a large farm land and is used to cultivate one crop (i.e., potato). You have decided to split polygon An into two
polygons in order to use the land to cultivate two crops: (i.e., potato and tomato).
20. Zoom into polygon A
21. You will split polygon A between points 1 and 2, as seen in the figure below.
22. Edit tab/Select polygon A
23. Select Split icon in the Tools group
24. Click the point corner labeled 2 and then double click the point labeled 1.
25. Click F2, the green check sign in the Configure tool below.

26. In the CP, r-click Farm layer and open the attribute table
27. You will see two records selected and both of them labeled “A”
28. Highlight the last record that is labeled A, replace it by typing M
29. Then, hit Enter and the Farm table
30. Click Save icon in the Manage Edits group, and click Yes to save all edits
31. In CP, r-click the Farm Zoom To Layer
32. Save your project
102 6 Data Editing and Topology

Result Polygon A is now split into two polygons, A and M.

Reshape Function
The Farm layer that has a B label is now going to be modified and expanded to make more land available for agriculture.
Polygon B is reshaped to fit the size and shape of the LandB layer, which has a rectangular shape.
33. Open the Folder in the Catalog pane, expand Data_Ch06/Data/Q1 and drag LandB.shp into the Map View.
34. In CP, right click the LandB layer and click Zoom To Layer
35. In CP, click the symbol of the LandB layer, then click “Black Outline (1 pt)
36. In the CP, highlight the Farm layer, click Edit tab on the ribbon, in the Selection group, click Select button and click on
the map the Farm land that has B label
37. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in the Tools group click Edit Vertices (7 vertices of polygon B displayed)
38. The Edit Vertices dialog box displays the coordinates of the 7 vertices.
39. Edit tab, in the Snapping group, click on Snapping icon to make it active

Note The snapping turn blue means it is active.

40. Click Vertex Snaps to the nearest vertex (3rd icon on Snapping Tool)
41. The polygon will have one node (red) and six vertices (green)
Simple Editing 103

42. Click Vertex 1 and drag it and place it on the lower left corner of the LandB. The vertex will be snapped to the corner
(see the sketch below).
43. Click Vertex 2 and drag it and place it on the upper left corner of the LandB.
44. Click Vertex 5 and drag it and place it on the lower right corner of the LandB.
45. Place your Edit Tool above vertex 3, right click and delete the vertex
46. Repeat the previous steps and delete vertices 6 and 7.

Note You can also click the Delete icon on the configure tool at the bottom of the map.

47. To deselect, click somewhere outside the drawing

48. Click Finish icon on the configure tool at the bottom of the map

Result The farm with label B will be reshaped and will fit the rectangular shape of LandB.

49. Click the Save button on the Manage Edit tools

50. Close the Edit Vertices dialog box
51. In the CP, r-click the Farm and Zoom To Layer and save your project
52. Click the Map tab on the ribbon, and in the Navigate group, click the Explore button to change the cursor from the select
shape to hand shape.
104 6 Data Editing and Topology

Modify Feature
One of the ways to modify a feature in ArcGISPro is to add features by digitizing and then updating the attribute table.

Scenario 6-2 The geology of Dhuleil was subject to a detailed study to add outcropping formations that were missing in the
original map. A group of geologists went to the field, and with the use of GPS, they delineated the outcropping formation
that was missing from the original map. As a GIS technician, your duty is to use the new captured data by GPS to update the
original geological map “Geology.shp”.

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map and call it Geology
2. In Catalog pane, open Folder\Data_Ch06\Data\Q2, click Ctrl and click Field_Geology.shp and Geology.shp and drag
them into the Map View.
3. In the CP, click Geology.shp and point to Feature Layer in the ribbon, in the Drawing group, click the drop-down of the
Symbology button and select Unique values under Symbolize your layer by category
4. In the Symbology – Geology dialog box, in Field 1, select “GEOLOGY”. In Classes Tab, click the drop-down arrow of
More and uncheck “Show all other values”
5. In the CP, click the “Geology”, click the Labeling tab, in Label Class group, in the Field drop-down window select
Geology, in the Layer group click Label button
6. In the CP, r-click “Field_Geology” and point to Label
Result The Geology layer is displayed in two classes (Basalt and Limestone), and Field_Geology.shp is labeled with 1
and 2.
Digitize the Missing Formation 105

Digitize the Missing Formation

Now, you are going to digitize the basalt and limestone features using the “Field_Geology” layer as a reference. The cap-
tured data by GPS are labeled; number 1 represents limestone, while number 2 represents basalt. The captured limestone
crops out above the basalt, and the outcropping basalt is above the limestone.

Digitization of the Limestone Formation

7. In the CP highlight Geology layer, in the Feature Layer tab on the ribbon, in the Effect group, in the Transparency
window type 60%
8. In the Edit tab on the ribbon, in the Snapping group, click the snapping down arrow click on Snapping Toolbar Point
snap (1st icon) and Vertex snap (3rd icon) to make them active.
9. Zoom in around number 1 in the lower right corner of the Geology layer
106 6 Data Editing and Topology

10. Click Edit tab, in Features group, click Create button. The Create Features pane display
11. Click the Limestone class under Geology, click the blue arrow and then click the Polygon symbol
12. Click one point of the Field_Geology, then click a second point, and continue until you finish all the points, and when
you reach the last point, double click to finish digitizing
13. In the configure tool, click the F2 icon
14. In the Manage Edits group, click the Save button and click Yes to save all edits
15. Save your project

Note During digitizing you might need to zoom in or pan, on the keyboard click the C letter and drag or click X letter and
drag to zoom in or out

16. Set the Extent to Geology layer, to set the Map Extent refer to Chap. 2.
17. In the Map tab, in the Navigate group, click the Full Extent button
18. Zoom into the limestone formation that has a label 1 that is located on the north of the map
19. Repeat the previous steps to finish digitizing the limestone formation and save it.

Result The image below shows the final digitization of the limestone formation in the north of the map.

Digitization of the Basalt Formation

20. Click the Full Extent and then Zoom in around number 2 in the middle of the Geology layer.
21. In the Create Features pane, click the back arrow, and click Basalt class under Geology, click the blue arrow and then
click the Polygon symbol
Update the Area and Perimeter fields in the Geology Attribute Table 107

22. Zoom in around the points in the center of the Geology.shp

23. Click one point of Field_Geology.shp, then click a second point, and continue until you finish all the points. When you
reach the last point, double click to finish digitizing.
24. Click the check green sign (F2) on the Configure tool to apply the digitizing
25. In the Manage Edits group, click the Save button and click Yes to save all edits
26. Save your project
27. Repeat the previous steps to finish digitizing the last basalt formation.

Result The image below shows the final digitization of the basalt formation in the west of the map.

28. In the CP, r-click Geology.shp and open the attribute table
29. You will notice that all the limestone and basalt formations are added

Comment When the attribute table of the Geology layer, you will notice that the spatial properties (Area and Perimeter) of
the Geology layer is not updated in the attribute table. This is because the Geology layer is a shapefile. If the Geologygeological
layer has been saved in the geodatabase, the spatial properties will be updated automatically. You will calculate the spatial
properties in the next paragraph.

Update the Area and Perimeter fields in the Geology Attribute Table

30. In the CP, r-click Geology layer and open the attribute table
31. Right click the Area field in the attribute table, and point to Calculate Geometry
32. The Calculate Geometry dialog box display and fill it as follows:
33. Input Features: Geology
34. Field: Area
35. Property: Area (select from the drop-down)
36. Area Unit: Square Meters (select from the drop-down)
108 6 Data Editing and Topology

37. In the Coordinate System open the drop-down arrow and select “Geology”
38. Click OK
39. Right click the Perimeter field in the attribute table, and point to Calculate Geometry
40. The Calculate Geometry dialog box display and fill it as follows:
41. Input Features: Geology
42. Field: Perimeter
43. Property: Perimeter length (select from the drop-down)
44. Length Unit: Meters (select from the drop-down)
45. In the Coordinate System: open the drop-down arrow and select “Geology”
46. Click OK
47. Close the attribute table of the Geology layer
48. Close the Create Feature pane
Result The attribute table of the Geology layer is updated, and both the area and perimeter of the 4 digitized records are
calculated.
Merge Function 109

Merge Function

The merge function works with a single layer, and it can group selected records of a line or polygon features into one feature.
In this scenario you are going to reduce the numbers of basalt and limestone records into one record each. So instead of hav-
ing five records for the limestone in the attribute table, you will have only one record; same thing for the basalt features.
49. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map and call it Merge
50. In Catalog pane, under Folder open \\Data\Q2 and drag Geol_Dhul.shp into Map View
51. Symbolize the Geol_Dhul layer based on the GEOLOGY field using the Unique Values as in the above
52. Open the attribute table of the Geol_Dhul layer
53. The attribute table of Geol_Dhul consists of 8 records: 5 limestone and 3 basalt records.

54. Click the Map tab on ribbon, in the Selection group, click Select By Attributes
55. Fill the Select By Attributes dialog box as follows:
56. Input Rows: Geol_Dhul
57. Selection Type: New Selection
58. Under the SQL make sure that “Where Geology is equal to Limestone”
59. Click Apply then OK

Result The 5 records of the limestone are selected

60. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in the Tools group, and select Merge (under construct)
61. The Merge pane in the Modify Features display
62. Click Merge button (at the bottom of the dialog box)
63. Repeat the previous steps and merge the 3 records of Basalt into one layer.
64. Close the attribute table of the Geol_Dhul.shp layer
Result The 5 limestone records and the three basalt records become one record.
65. In the Edit tab, in the Manage Edits group, click the Save button and click Yes to save all edits.
66. Save the project
110 6 Data Editing and Topology

Advance Editing

In this section, guide you will learn how to use the Advanced Editing tool in ArcGIS Pro to edit existing GIS features, how
to fix some common digitizing errors, and how to update the spatial data using some of these advanced tools. The following
topics will be covered:

Fixing Overshoots and Undershoots

Overshoots and undershoots are very common digitizing errors that affect the quality of digitized data. Overshoots occur
when a line that is supposed to terminate at the edge of another feature extends past the edge. An undershoot occurs when a
line does not reach the edge where it is supposed to terminate.
The overshoot is fixed by trimming it to a selected edge, while the undershoot is fixed by extending it to a selected edge.
1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map and call it Advance Editing
2. In Catalog pane, under Folder open \\Data\Q3\Image and drag North_Duluth.jpg into Map View
3. Open \\Q3\Shapefile click Ctrl and select Lake_MN, River_MN, and Street_MN and drag them into the Map View

Result The image of the North_Duluth.jpg, Lake_MN, and River_MN layers display.
Fixing Overshoots and Undershoots 111

Test Your Knowledge

• Change the symbol of the Lake_MN and River_MN shapefiles into blue color and the Street_MN into dark color.
• Set the Extent to North_Duluth.jpg

Correct Undershoots of the Street

The undershoot means when the street is not extending far enough to intersect another street. This happens during digitizing,
and this could happen if the snap tolerance is not set correctly.
4. In CP, Highlight Street_MN and Zoom in around the street located in the northeast of the map
5. Select the undershoot street (Map tab, Selection group)
6. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in Selection group click Select button and click the undershoot street to select it, in the
Features group click the Modify button
7. The Modify Features pan display
8. Under Reshape click Extend or Trim tool
9. The Extent or Trim pan display, select Extend tool
10. Click below the undershoot on the street that you want the undershoot to connect to it
11. Click again the other undershoot to extend the second undershoot
12. Do not close the Modify Features pane

Result The undershoot street in both locations will be connected to the street below it.
13. Zoom to the full extent and clear the selected features
112 6 Data Editing and Topology

Correct Overshoots of the Street

Overshoot means that a street past its intersection with another street. This happens as explained in the undershoot.
14. In CP/Highlight Street_MN and Zoom in around the street located in the upper middle section of the image, you will
notice that the overshoots where two small streets, inside the loop, extend beyond the straight street
15. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in Selection group click Select button and click the street (overshoot) that needs to be
trimmed
16. In Modify Features, under Reshape, under Extend or Trim tool, click Trim tool
17. Click the street that the overshoot street will connect to.
18. Both overshoots are trimmed off
19. Zoom out to the full extent and clear the selected features
20. Save the Project

Generalize a Stream Feature

Generalizing reduces the number of vertices that describe a feature, so the feature's shape is somewhat less precise. The step
will allow you to reduce the number of vertices that describe the river (River_Mn.shp).
1. In CP, highlight the River_MN, and r-click it and Zoom to Layer
2. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in Selection group click Select button and click the river
3. Click the arrow back in the Modify Features pane, under Reshape, select the Generalize tool
4. Under Method select “Smooth”
5. Under Value type 10 ft for the Maximum Allowable Offset and click Generalize

Result The number of vertices has been significantly reduced. If you zoom in closer at any part of the stream, you can see
a slight effect on the shape of the stream.
Topological Editing Using Geodatabase 113

Generalize a Lake Feature

The outline of the lake next to the stream feature appears rough because it was digitized with too few vertices. To improve
the appearance of the lake, you will use the Smooth tool.
6. In CP, r-click Lake_MN and Zoom to Layer
7. Click the arrow back in the Modify Features pane, under Reshape, select the Generalize
8. Click inside the lake, the Sunshine Lake will be selected
9. Under Method select “Smooth”
10. Under Value type 10 for the Maximum Allowable Offset and click Generalize
11. Make sure the “Show Preview” is checked
12. The border of the lake looks smoother now.
13. Close Modify Features pane
14. Zoom out to the full extent
15. Save the Project

Topological Editing Using Geodatabase

Topology describes the way interrelated features are organized and connected. In ArcGIS Pro, it is implemented as a collec-
tion of spatial rules that are used to constrain active edits or audits and maintain the correctness of features based on their
position relative to other features. There are two types of topology in ArcGIS Pro: topological editing and geodatabase topol-
114 6 Data Editing and Topology

ogy. Both methods help to manage and maintain the accuracy of the feature data with respect to coincidence, adjacency,
containment, and connectivity.
In this section, Geodatabase topology will be used. Geodatabase topology includes creating a topology for a dataset,
assigning features and spatial rules, validating the features in a map, and using specific tools to fix errors and mark excep-
tions. Geodatabase topology rules allow you to define relationships between features in the same feature class or subtype or
between two feature classes or subtypes. The created rules depend on the spatial relationships that GIS users wish to monitor
for the feature classes that participate in the topology and the topology error fixes for points, lines, or polygons.

Fix Fault System Using Topology

The catchment area of Wadi Andam-Halfyan in the Izki region of Oman has many wells. The wells are used mainly for
domestic water supply and agriculture. The catchment area has revealed a structural style that may have had a profound effect
on the geomorphological and hydrological setting of the area. In the catchment, 2 major fault trends have been observed;
Fault A and Fault B are oriented northeast and north, respectively, while Fault C is oriented northwest. A detailed field
study of the geological structure of the catchment revealed that Fault A consists of only one identical fault system and not
broken 5-line fault segments. Thus, Fault A should be corrected by joining the five-line segments into one fault system.
You are going to use the Geodatabase Topology to rectify the fault on the map.

Scenario 6-3 Fault feature A contains gaps between the segments, and the task is to remove the gaps using the topology
technique in the Geodatabase environment. To perform the task and fix the errors, you will implement two topology
techniques.

Create Feature Dataset in the File Geodatabase

To use the Geodatabase topology to fix the errors in the database, you must build a feature dataset and set the proper rule to
fix the error.
1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map and call it Fault
2. In Catalog pane, under Geodatabase, right click Ch06.gdb, point to New and select Feature Dataset
3. In the Feature Dataset dialog box fill it as follows:
4. Output Geodatabase: Ch06.gdb
5. Feature Dataset Name: Water
6. Click the globe (Select coordinate systems), the Coordinate System dialog box open, click the drop-down arrow of Add
Coordinate System, Import Coordinate System
7. Browse to Q4 under Folder\Data_Ch06\Data\ and select Fault
8. OK and click Run
Build the Topology and Set the Rule 115

Result The Water Feature Dataset is created and registered in UTM Zone 40 N, and the datum is WGS84.

9. In Catalog pane, r-click on the Water feature dataset, point to Import and click Feature Class(es)
10. The Feature Class to Geodatabase dialog box opens and fills it as follows:
11. Input Features: Fault (from Q4)
12. Output Geodatabase: Water
13. Run
14. Drag the Fault from the Water Feature Dataset into a Map View
15. In the CP, uncheck the World Hillshade
16. Click the symbol of the Fault in the Symbology pane in Gallery, under ArcGIS 2D select 2.0 Point line symbol, in the
Properties tab, select red color and Line width 2
17. Click Apply and close the Symbology pane

Result The Fault feature class is displayed in the CP in red.

Build the Topology and Set the Rule

18. In Catalog pane, under Ch06.gdb, right click the Water Feature Dataset, point to New and select Topology
19. In the create Topology Wizard in the Define left pane fill it as below
20. Topology Name: Fault_Topology
21. XY Cluster Tolerance: 0.01 m
22. Under Feature Class, check the Fault, accept the default and click Next
23. In the Add Rules, click on “Click here to add a new rule”
116 6 Data Editing and Topology

24. Select Fault from the Feature Class 1 drop-down arrow

25. From the Rule drop-down arrow, select “Must Not Have Dangle (Line)”

26. Next, then after reading the Summary, click Finish

27. In the Catalog pane, under the Water feature dataset, r-click Fault_Topology and click Properties
28. In the Topology Properties: Fault_Topology, in the Error tab, click Generate Summary
29. The number of Fault error display 32, click OK

30. In the Catalog pane, r-click Fault_Topology, and click Add To Current Map

Result The Fault_Topology is added to the Water Feature Dataset and added to the CP.
Build the Topology and Set the Rule 117

Label the Fault Using Two Fields

It is helpful in this exercise to label the Fault based on the values of two fields. This can be done using label expressions.
Displaying the OBJECTID and Name in the labels quickly reveals the name of the Fault and its number that you need later
in this exercise.
31. In the CP, r-click the Fault, and select Label to turn on labeling
32. In the CP, r-click the Fault, and select Labeling Properties
33. In the Label Class pane, click the Language drop-down list, and select VBScript.
34. Under Expression, clear the expression box
35. Under Fields, double click Name to add the Name field to the Expression box, and after the [Name], click space and
type Ampersand (&), then type Quote (“), then click space, then click Comma () then click space, then click Quote (“)
and type Ampersand (&) and click space.
36. Under Fields, double-click OBJECTID to append the OBJECTID field to the expression.
[Name] &", "& [OBJECTID]
37. Click the Verify button to validate the expression. A message popped up sating “Expression is valid”
38. Click Apply to run the script.

Result The Fault shows each segment labeled based on the values from the OBJECTID and Name fields.

Validate and Fix Geodatabase Topology

This step validates and fixes geodatabase topology errors. It contains a table viewer for viewing and filtering errors, tabs for
inspecting feature geometry, and tools for managing exceptions.
39. Click the Edit tab, in the Manage Edits group, select from the No Topology drop-down/select Fault_Topology
(Geodatabase) and click Error Inspector
40. The Error Inspector: Fault table appear
41. In the Error Inspector: Fault, click the Validate tab

Result The table displays 32 fault dangling nodes at the perimeter of the three fault systems (A, B, and C) in the current
map that are validated against all topology rules defined in the Fault Topology Geodatabase. The goal is now to fix the
dangle in Fault A only
118 6 Data Editing and Topology

First Approach: Fault Topology (Geodatabase)

Fix Dangle Between Faults 7 and 16
42. In the Map View magnified north of Fault A, in the upper two segments of the Fault, between the two fault segments
that are labeled A,16 and A,7, to measure the distance between the two dangles
43. In the Map View, click Map tab, in the Inquiry group, click the Measure button measure the distance between the two
nodes of Fault 16 and Fault 7

Result The distance between the two dangles is 150.37 m.

44. In the Error Inspector Fault table, highlight Fault 16, the lower dangle of Fault 16 turns orange color in the Preview
45. In the Preview, click Fix tab, click Snap and type 150.5 m, and Enter
46. Fault 16 joins Fault 7, and one node displays only
47. In the Error Inspector: Fault table click “Validate”, the node between Fault A, 16 and Fault A, 7 disappears

Result The node removed between the two Fault segments and Fault 7 disappears from the Error Inspector: Fault table
Second Approach: Map Topology 119

Fix Dangle Between Faults 7 and 14

48. The Map View zooms to the next segments of Fault A between the A, 7 and A, 14 segments that need to be fixed.
49. In the Error Inspector: Fault table, Fault 7 and Fault 14 are displayed.
50. As in the previous step, measure the distance between the two nodes of A,7 and A,14.
51. The distance is 509.12 m.
52. Highlighting Fault 7 in the Error Inspector Fault table, the dangle of Fault 7 turns orange color.
53. In the Preview, click Fix tab,509.2click Snap and type 509.2 m and Enter
54. Fault A, 14 joins Fault A,7 and one node displays only
55. In the Error Inspector: Fault table click “Validate”, the node disappears

Fix Dangle Between Fault 6 and Fault 14

56. In the Map View zoom in to Fault A between A, 14 and A, 6 segments that need to be fixed
57. In the Error Inspector: Fault table Fault 6 and Fault 14 display
58. Measure the distance between the two nodes as in the above (113.97 m)
59. In the Error Inspector Fault table, Fault 14 is highlighted, and the dangle of Fault 14 turns orange.
60. In the Preview, click Fix tab, click Snap and type 114 m and Enter
61. Fault 14 joins Fault 6, and only one node displays
62. In the Error Inspector: Fault table click “Validate”, the node disappears
63. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, click the Manage Edit group and click Save button
64. Save your project

Second Approach: Map Topology

Fixing Dangles Between Fault 6 and Fault 15

This is a second approach to remove the gaps between the nodes along the fault segments based on the map approach.
Topological editing is an editing mode that constrains coincident geometry to an ordered graph of topologically connected
edges and nodes. It requires no setup and operates only on visible features that are editable.
To proceed, you need to make sure that you are in editing mode.
65. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in the Snapping group, click the Snapping draw-down arrow and make sure the Point snap
(1st icon) is active
66. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in the Manage Edits group, select Map Topology from the drop-down arrow
67. Zoom in between the 2-nodes of the Fault A, 6 and Fault A, 15 that you want to fix the dangle
68. Click Create icon in the Features group
69. In the Create Features dialog box, select the Fault, click the blue arrow, and click the Line symbol from the Active
Template
120 6 Data Editing and Topology

70. Click the node of Fault A, 6 and move your cursor to the next opposite node of Fault A, 15 and double click it.
71. A cyan line is created between the two nodes
72. Click the F2 (green check) in the configure tool to finish the digitizing
73. In the Manage Edits group, click the Save button
74. Click Yes to save all edits
75. In the Selection group, click Clear to unselect the drawing segments

Merge the Segments of Fault A

The Topology tool fixes the dangle errors but does not make the different segments of the fault one record in the attribute
table. To make all the segments one record, the Merge tool is used.
76. Click Map tab on the ribbon, click Selection group, and Select By Attributes
77. In the Select By Attributes dialog box, fill it as follows:
78. Input Rows: Fault
79. Selection Type: New Selection
80. where Name is equal to A.
81. Click Apply

Result Fault A selected in the map view.

82. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in the Features group, click Modify button
83. In the Modify Features, under Construct, click Merge tool
84. In the Modify Features dialog box, click Merge at the bottom of the box
Second Approach: Map Topology 121

Result The five segments of the fault become one line, and you can open the attribute table and see the merge.

85. In the Manage Edits group, click the Save button

86. Click Yes to save all edits
87. In the Selection group, click Clear to unselect the drawing segments

Practice Correcting the gaps along the Fault C segment to fix the errors.

Fix Feature Within Feature Class Soil Polygon

These topology rules will define the relationship between features in the same feature class or subtypes. In this exercise, you
are going to work with the soil polygon feature class.
1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map and call it Soil
2. In Catalog pane, under Geodatabase, right click Ch06.gdb, point to New and select Feature Dataset
3. In the Feature Dataset dialog box, fill it as follows:
4. Output Geodatabase: Ch06.gdb
5. Feature Dataset Name: Soil
1. Click the globe (Select coordinate systems), the Coordinate System dialog box open, click the drop-down arrow of Add
Coordinate System, Import Coordinate System
6. Browse to Q6 from \\Data\Q6 and select Soil. shp from Q6 folder
7. Click Ok and the Run

Result The Soil Feature Dataset is created and registered in WGS 11984 UTM Zone 40 N.

8. In Catalog pane, r-click on the Soil feature dataset, point to Import and click Feature Class(es)
9. The Feature Class to Geodatabase dialog box opens and fills it as follows:
10. Input Features: Soil (from Q6)
11. Output Geodatabase: Soil
12. Run
Building the Topology
13. In Catalog pane, right click on Soil Feature Dataset, click New, and select Topology
14. In the Create Topology Wizard, fill it as follows:
15. In the Define pane, Topology Name: Soil_Topology
16. XY Cluster Tolerance: 0.01 m
17. Under Feature Classes, check Soil
18. Click Next
19. In the Add Rules, “Click here to add a new rule” select Soil under Feature Class 1
122 6 Data Editing and Topology

20. Under Rule drop-down arrow select “Must Not Have Gaps (Area)”
21. Again, “Click here to add a new rule” select Soil under Feature Class 1
22. Under Rule drop-down arrow select “Must Not Overlap (Area)”

23. Click Next

24. In the Summary make sure every think you set look good, then click Finish

25. In Catalog pane, under Soil Feature Dataset, r-click Soil_Topology and Add To Current Map
26. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in Manage Edits group, select Soil_Topology (Geodatabase) and click Error
Inspector
27. The Error Inspector: Soil display with the errors and with the Preview tab showing the Soil error
Fix Watershed Using Topology (Geodatabase) 123

28. Highlight the first row and in the Preview window, click Fix tab, click Mark as Exception

29. Click the next row, and in the Preview window, the error will be displayed in the Map View.
30. Click Fix tab, and click Create Feature

Result The gap disappears, and the error is removed.

31. Close the Error Inspector: Soil

32. Click Edit tab, in the Manage Edits group, click Save button
33. Click Yes, to save all edits

34. Save the Project

124 6 Data Editing and Topology

Fix Watershed Using Topology (Geodatabase)

Two catchment areas were created using the Hydrology tool in the Spatial Analyst. Two different thresholds were used, and
the result was that two catchment areas were created. The two watersheds do not cover each other, and in this exercise, you
will use the Topology Tool to make them identical to each other.
2. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map and call it Watershed
3. In Catalog pane, under Geodatabase, right click Ch06.gdb, point to New and select Feature Dataset
4. In the Feature Dataset dialog box, fill it as follows:
5. Output Geodatabase: Ch06.gdb
6. Feature Dataset Name: Catchment
7. Click the globe (Select coordinate systems), the Coordinate System dialog box open, click the drop-down arrow of Add
Coordinate System, Import Coordinate System
8. Browse to Q5 under Folder\Data_Ch06\Data\ and select Watershed_1.shp
9. OK and click Run
Result The Water Feature Dataset is created and registered in NAD_/1983_UTM_Zone_15 N.
10. In Catalog pane, r-click on the Catchment feature dataset, point to Import and click Feature Class(es)
11. The Feature Class to Geodatabase dialog box opens and fills it as follows:
12. Input Features: Watershed_1.shp & Watershed_2.shp (from Q5)
13. Output Geodatabase: Catchment
14. Run

Result Watershed_1 & Watershed_2 will be integrated into the Catchment feature dataset

Build the Topology and Set the Rule

15. In Catalog pane, under Ch06.gdb, right click on Catchment Feature Dataset, point to New and select Topology
16. In the Create Topology Wizard, in the Define tab, fill it as follows:
17. Topology Name: Catchment_Topology
18. XY Cluster Tolerance 0.01 m
19. Under Feature Classes, check Watershed_1 & Watershed_2
20. Click Next
Fix Watershed Using Topology (Geodatabase) 125

21. In the Add Rules, under Feature Class 1, click here to add a new rule, select Watershed_1
22. Under Rule click and from drop-down arrow select “Must Cover Each Other (Area-Area)”
23. Under Feature Class 2, check Watershed_2 and click Next

24. Summary of the topology rules displayed

25. Click Finish

Result The Catchment _Topology added to the Catchment Feature Dataset.

26. In Catalog pan, under the Catchment Feature Dataset, r-click Catchment_Topolgy and click Add to the Current Map
27. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in Manage Edits group, select Catchment_Topology (Geodatabase), and click Error
Inspector
28. In the Error Inspector: Watershed table, click the Validate tab

Result The Error Inspector: Watershed table display with the errors and with the Preview tab showing the two
catchments
126 6 Data Editing and Topology

29. Click the Edit tab on the ribbon. In the Selection group, click the Select icon and select the lower left corner in the Map
View.

Result The catchments in the Map View, and some records in the Error Inspector: Watershed, and the lower corner of
the window Preview are selected.

30. In the Preview window, click Fix tab

31. In the Available Fixes for Selected Errors, click Remove Overlap
32. In the Error Inspector: Watershed, click Validate tab

Result The overlap was removed.

Another Approach You can select the entire watershed and fix it in one step.
Fix Watershed Using Topology (Geodatabase) 127

33. Click Edit tab on the ribbon, in the Selection group, click the Select icon and select the two watersheds in the Map View
34. In the Preview window, click Fix tab
35. In the Available Fixes for Selected Errors, click Remove Overlap
36. In the Error Inspector: Watershed, click Validate tab

Result The two watersheds overlap.

37. In the Edit tab, in the Manage Edits, click Save button
38. Save the project

Challenge Task When correcting the topology of a continuous river, would it be best to snap the points or create a line
between points?
Geoprocessing
7

Geoprocessing is a framework and set of tools for processing geographic and related data. The comprehensive suite of geo-
processing tools can be used to perform spatial analysis or manage GIS data in an automated way. Geoprocessing is for
everyone that uses ArcGIS Pro. Whether you are a new or advanced user, geoprocessing will likely be an essential part of
GIS user day-to-day work.
In GIS analysis, there are different techniques that can be applied to spatial data to solve diverse types of questions. In
your GIS work, you might want to find productive groundwater wells in a basin that has high yield and good water quality,
or the best location to build a treatment plant, etc. Using the correct geoprocessing tool is essential to obtain the right dataset
for the analysis. A typical geoprocessing tool performs an operation on a dataset such as a feature class, raster, or table and
creates a resulting output dataset. For example, the buffer tool takes features as input, creates buffer areas around the features
to a specified distance, and writes those buffer areas to a new output dataset. As another illustration, if you want to create a
new dataset that contains a geographic subset of the features in another dataset, you could use the Clip tool. The tool cut out
a piece of one dataset using one or more of the features in another dataset as a cookie cutter.
Geoprocessing refers to the tools and processes used to generate derived datasets from other data using a set of tools.
Geoprocessing in GIS is a very important tool in ArcGIS Pro software and plays a fundamental role in spatial analysis.
Geoprocessing is a very broad subject in GIS and has many definitions ranging from process study areas for GIS applications
to existing data to manipulate GIS data or how GIS data are computed. Geoprocessing can range from simple tasks to very
complicated spatial analyses that aid in addressing an important GIS problem. A typical geoprocessing operation takes an
input dataset and performs an operation on that dataset, generating new information returns as an output dataset. Geoprocessing
tools perform essential operations on a database, such as projections, conversions, data management, and spatial analysis.
Some tools modify the attributes or geometry of an input dataset. A few geoprocessing tools have other effects, such as creat-
ing selections on layers or generating messages or reports.

The most important geoprocessing tools can be divided based on the following tasks:
1. Extracting features
(a) Clip
(b) Erase
(c) Split
2. Combining features
(a) Merge
(b) Append
(c) Dissolve
(d) Buffer

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_7.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 129
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_7
130 7 Geoprocessing

3. Combining geometries and attributes

(a) Union
(b) Intersect
(c) Spatial Join

You can use custom geoprocessing tools that are included in a project or build and use your own custom tools. ArcGIS Pro
supports custom geoprocessing tools that are built with ModelBuilder or Python. ArcGIS Pro can run be through Toolboxes,
which include the Analysis Tools that have a range of operations such as Extract, Overlay, Proximity and Statistics. For
example, the overlay and proximity answer basic questions in spatial analysis: “What’s on top of what?” and “What’s near
what?” The first set of tools is discussed in Overlay analysis, and the second set is discussed in Proximity analysis. In ArcGIS
Pro, there are two ways to find any tool:
1. Using the search window
2. Browsing the Toolboxes
ArcGIS Pro in the Geoprocessing group includes Ready To Use tools, which are ArcGIS Online geoprocessing services that
use the hosted data and analysis capabilities of ArcGIS Online. All you need to provide are input features; all the other data
necessary for the analysis and the computation is hosted in ArcGIS Online. You can use the Ready To Use tools to solve
diverse spatial analysis problems, including the following:
1. Profile and viewshed (Elevation)
2. Watershed and stream tracing (Hydrology)

Working with Geoprocessing Tools

In GIS analysis, there are different techniques that can be applied to spatial data to solve diverse types of questions. For
example, you might want to find the best groundwater wells in a basin that has high yield and good water quality, or the best
location to build a treatment plant, and many more questions. Using the correct geoprocessing tool is essential for the success
of the analysis. Geoprocessing in GIS is a very important tool in ArcGIS software and plays a fundamental role in spatial
analysis. Geoprocessing is a very broad subject in GIS and has many definitions ranging from process study areas for GIS
applications from existing data to manipulation. Geoprocessing can range from simple tasks to very complicated spatial
analyses that aid in addressing an important GIS problem. A typical geoprocessing operation takes an input dataset and per-
forms an operation on that dataset, generating new information returns as an output dataset.
The most important geoprocessing tools can be divided based on the following tasks:
4. Extracting features
(a) Clip
(b) Erase
(c) Split
5. Combining features
(a) Merge
(b) Append
(c) Dissolve
(d) Buffer
6. Combining geometries and attributes
(a) Union
(b) Intersect
(c) Spatial Join

Open the Project and Connect to Folder

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro and click “Open another project”
2. Browse to \\ENV_Water\Ch07 and click Open Ch07.aprx and click OK
3. The ArcGIS Pro open and has no data attached to it
Working with Geoprocessing Tools 131

4. In Catalog pan, r-click the Folder, and point to Add Folder Connection
5. Browse to \\ENV_Water\CH07, select Data_Ch07 ((or \\Database\ Data_Ch07) and click OK
6. In the CP, select the Map and press the F2 key and change the name to Watershed

7. Open the Folder in the Catalog pane and expand Data_Ch07/Data/Q1 and drag Watershed.shp into the Map View
8. In CP, r-click the Watershed and click Attribute Table
9. The Watershed attribute table has 8-fields and 153 records and one of the fields is called “Code”. The Code field con-
sists of 4 variables A, B, C, and D
10. After exploring the attribute table, close it
132 7 Geoprocessing

Note The watershed file represents different catchments along the Gulf of Oman
Dissolve the Watershed Based on the Code Field
Dissolve can be used when the user wants to aggregate features based on a specified attribute. In this example, you want to
dissolve the Watershed based on the Code field to create a new feature class layer that consists of four records (A, B, C, and
D). The dissolve tool creates 4 code regions by removing the boundaries between the codes. Each code will include the total
area and average acres.
11. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Tools group, open the “Analysis Gallery” by clicking the drop-down arrow
12. In the Analysis Gallery under Manage Data/click the Pairwise Dissolve button

The Pairwise Dissolve pan display, under the Parameters tab, fills it as follows:
13. Input features: Watershed
14. Name your output file Watershed_Code (will be saved in Ch07.gdb)
15. Dissolve Field(s): Code
16. Statistical Field(s):
(a) Area: SUM
(b) ACRES: MEAN
17. Click Run
Working with Geoprocessing Tools 133

Result The Watershed_Code feature class displays 4 code regions and is listed in the CP under the Watershed map. It is
also stored in the Catalog pane under file geodatabase Ch07.gdb in the Geodatabase folder.
18. In the CP, r-click Watershed feature class and click Remove

Classify the Watershed_Code Based on the Code Field

19. Open the attribute table of the Watershed_Code feature class and examine the new schema of the table. The schema
consists of 8 fields and 4 records. The dissolve tool reduced the number of records from 153 to 4 records and then closed
the attribute table.
20. In the CP, r-click the Watershed_Code, click Symbology
21. The Symbology – Watershed_Code dialog box display, fill it as below
22. Under Primary symbology, select Unique Values
23. In Field 1: Code

24. Under Classes tab, click Add all values .

25. Click the drop-down of Color scheme, check “Show names” and select Basic Random
26. Click the More drop-down and uncheck “Show all other values”
27. Close the Symbology pane
134 7 Geoprocessing

28. Open the attribute table of “Watershed_Code”, r-click Sum_Area and select Fields
29. In the Sum_Area row, d-click the Numeric under Number Format
30. In the highlighted Sum_Area, click the Options button … (3-dots) to open the Number Format dialog box
31. Fill the Number Format dialog box as follows:
32. Category Numeric
33. Decimal Places, under Rounding 0
34. Under Alignment, check Show thousands of separators
35. Click OK
36. In the Fields tab on the ribbon, in Changes group, click Save button
37. Close the Fields: Watershed_Code and make sure that the Watershed_Code attribute table is open

Result You see that the Sum_Area field in the attribute table has no decimal and the thousand separator display

Practice Format the Mean_Acres field in the attribute table to have zero decimal and a thousand separator.

Labeling
Label the “Watershed_Code” using the Code and Sum_Aea fields and change the font into Times New Roman and the font
size to 14.
38. In the CP, r-click the Watershed_Code, and select Label to turn on labeling
39. In the CP, r-click the Watershed_Code, and select Labeling Properties
40. In the Label Class pane, in the Class tab, in the Label expression tab, click the Language drop-down list, and select
VBScript.
41. Under Expression, clear the expression box
Working with Geoprocessing Tools 135

42. Under Fields, double click Code to add it to the Expression box, and after the [Code], click space and type on the key-
board Ampersand (&), then type Quote (“), then click space, then click Dash (-) then click space, then click Quote (“)
and then type Ampersand (&) and click space.
43. Under Fields, double-click SUM_AREA to append the SUM_AREA field to the Expression box.
[Code] & “-” & [SUM_AREA]
44. Click the Verify button (green check symbol) to see if the expression is correct. A message popped up sating “Expression
is valid”
45. Click Apply to run the script.
46. Click Position tab, in the Position tab, at the bottom, open the Spread labels, above the Maximum, choose “Spread
words up to a fixed limit” and to the right make the percentage
47. Close the Label Class – Watershed_Code
48. In the CP, click the Watershed_Code and click Labeling tab, in the Text Symbol, make the font into Times New Roman
and the size 14
49. Save your Project
136 7 Geoprocessing

50. Open the attribute table of “Watershed_Code”, examine the labels and answer the following questions:
(a) How many records the “Watershed_Code” have? Name them
(b) Which region code has the highest and lowest sum area
(c) Which region has the highest average ACRES
51. Save the project

Extract a Feature Class

Now, region C, which has the largest area, will be saved as an independent watershed.
1. In CP, highlight Watershed_Code, and click the Map tab on the ribbon, in the Selection group, and click Select button
2. Click on RegionC to select it
3. In CP, r-click Watershed_Code, click Data and click Export Features
4. The Export Features pane is shown below
5. Input Features: Watershed Code
6. Output Feature Class: RegionC
7. OK
Extract a Feature Class 137

8. Close the Export Features pan and in CP, uncheck the Watershed_code
9. Save the project

Clipping a Feature Class

The clip tool cuts out a feature class using another feature class as a cookie cutter. This geoprocessing function is valuable
for creating a new dataset. In this section, you are going to clip a network of streams inside Region C.
10. In Catalog pane, drag Stream.shp from Q1 under Folder\Ch07_Data\Data into the Map View
11. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Tools group, click the Pairwise Clip button
12. The Pairwise Clip pane display, and fill it as below
13. Input Features: Stream
14. Clip Features: RegionC
15. Output Feature Class: StreamC
16. Click Run
17. Close the Pairwise Clip pane
18. In the CP, r-click the Stream and remove
19. In the CP, r-click the symbol of the StreamC and click blue color
20. In the CP, r-click RegionC and click Label
21. In CP, r-click RegionC and click Zoom To Layer
138 7 Geoprocessing

22. In CP, click the symbol of RegionC

23. In the Format Polygon Symbol, in the Format Polygon Symbol, scroll down and select “White”
24. Close the Symbology pane
25. Save your Project

Intersect
The Intersect tool calculates the geometric intersection of any number of feature classes and feature layers. The features, or
portion of features, that are common to all inputs will be written to the output feature class.
26. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in Project group, click New Map and call it Soil
27. Open the Folder in the Catalog pane and expand Data_Ch07/Data/Q1 and drag MayhaCatch.shp and Soil.shp into
the Map View
28. In the CP, if MayhaCatch is not above the Soil, drag it and place it above the Soil.
29. Click the Analysis tab, in the Tools group, click the lower drop-down to display the Analysis Gallery, under Overlay
Features, click Pairwise Intersect tool

30. The Pairwise Intersect pane display, fill it as below

31. Input Features: MayhaCatch and Soil
32. Output Feature Class: MayhaCatch_Soil
33. Accept the other default
34. Run
Buffer Tool and Select By Location 139

35. In CP, click the symbol of MayhaCatch_Soil

36. In the Format Polygon Symbol, scroll down and select Land
37. Close the Symbology pane
38. In the CP, remove the MayhaCatch.shp and Soil.shp
39. Save your Project

Merge Tool

The Merge tool unites numerous input feature classes or datasets into a single, new output feature class or dataset. This merge
function can combine point, line, or polygon feature classes or tables. The tool requires that both inputs have the same geom-
etry type.
1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in Project group, click New Map and call it Farm
2. Open the Folder in the Catalog pane and expand Data_Ch07/Data/Q2 and select AFLAJ.shp, FarmA.shp, FarmB.
shp, FarmC.shp, and FarmD.shp and drag them into the Map View
3. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Tools group, click the Analysis Gallery and under Manage Data, select
Merge tool
4. The Merge pane open
5. Fill it as follows:
6. Input Datasets: FarmA.shp, FarmB.shp, FarmC.shp, and FarmD.shp
7. Output Dataset: FarmNew
8. Accept the other default
9. Run
10. Close the Merge pane
11. Save the Project

Result The four feature classes (FarmA, FarmB, FarmC, and FarmD) become one feature class consisting of four records.

Buffer Tool and Select By Location

The “Buffer” is a zone of a specified distance from a selected feature, and it involves the creation of a zone with a specified
width around a point, line or area. The result of the buffer is a new polygon, which can be used in queries to determine which
entities occur either within or outside the defined buffer zone. The “Select By Location” is a special query dialog box that
lets you select features based on their location relative to other features.

Scenario 7-1 Your advisor asked you to know how many Aflaj are located within 500 meters from the outside boundary of
the farm “FarmNew”. Because these Aflaj will be a source of water for irrigation in the “FarmNew”.
140 7 Geoprocessing

Buffer Tool
12. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon in the Geoprocessing group, click the Tools button
13. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the Toolboxes tab, open the Analysis Tools, then open the Proximity, and click the
Buffer tool
14. Fill the Buffer pane as follows:
15. Input Features: FarmNew
16. Output Features Class: FarmNew_Buffer
17. Distance 500
18. Dissolve Type: Dissolve all output features into a single feature
19. Accept the other default
20. Click Run
21. Close the Buffer pane

22. Save the project

Select by Location

14. In the CP, click on the symbol of AFLAJ, in the Symbology – AFLAJ pane, under Gallery tab, select Circle 6, then
close the Symbology pane
15. Click the Map tab on the ribbon, in the Selection group, click Select By Location button
16. The Select By Location pane opens and fills it as follows:
17. Input Features: AFLAJ
18. Relationship: Completely within
19. Selecting Features: FarmNew_buffer
20. Selection type: New selection
21. Click Apply
22. Close the Select By Location pane
23. In Cp, r-click AFLAJ and open the attribute table after exploring the selected AFLAJ close the attribute table
Create an Artificial Water Reservoir for Irrigation Purposes 141

Result Six out of 45 Aflaj inside the buffer zone are selected.

24. In the CP, r-click on AFLAJ and point to Data, click Export Features, and fill the Export Feature dialog box as
follows:
25. Input Features: AFLAJ
26. Output Feature Class: AFLAJ_Farm
27. Click OK
28. In the CP, r-click AFLAJ and click Remove
29. In the CP, highlight AFLAJ_Farm, click Labeling tab, in the Label Class group, make the Field = NUMBER
30. In the Layer group, click the Label button
31. In the CP, r-click AFLAJ and click Remove

Create an Artificial Water Reservoir for Irrigation Purposes

Scenario 7-2 You are going to create a cylinder shape feature reservoir that could hold at least 40,000 m3 of water. The
source of water will come from the AFLAJ, which is within half a kilometer of FarmNew. The circular reservoir will have
a radius and depth of 50 m and 5.1 m, respectively, and it will be placed north of AFLAJ no. F1458.
142 7 Geoprocessing

Note Volume of the reservoir cylinder πr2h= 3.14 × 50 m × 50 m × 5.1 m = 40,035 m3

Create a Circle Reservoir
A circular polygon feature is constructed from two sketched points. The first point defines the center of the circle, and the
second point specifies the radius.
31. In the Catalog pane, expand “Databases” r-click “Ch07.gdb”, point to New, and click Feature Class
32. The Create Feature Class dialog box display and fill it as follows:
33. Name: Reservoir
34. Feature Class Type: Polygon
35. Under Geometric Properties Check Z Value – coordinates include Z values used to store 3D data
36. Click Next
37. In the Fields dialog box, below Field Name: “Click here to add a new field”
38. Remove the Field and type: Name
39. Under Data Type: Text
40. Length: 12
41. Click Next
42. In the Spatial Reference Dialog box, open the drop-down arrow of “Add Coordinate System”, click Import Coordinate
System, browse to “Ch07.gdb” and select “FarmNew”, click OK
43. Click Finish
Erase Tool 143

Result The Reservoir feature class is created and integrated into the content pane, but it is empty and needs to be
digitized.
44. In the Map view, zoom in between the two AFLAJs that have the F1458 and F1477 labels.
45. Click the Edit tab on the ribbon, in the Features group, click Create button
46. In the Create Features pane, click the Reservoir symbol
47. The construction toolbar appears at the bottom of the map. Click the blue arrow.
48. The Active Template pane open
49. On the toolbar, click the Circle symbol
50. Click the map north of Aflaj F1458 (mid distance between F1458 and F1477) then drag the pointer away and r-click, and
select radius, type 50 m and enter
51. Open the Attribute table of the Reservoir layer

Result The area of the reservoir is 7853.9 m2.

52. After examining the area of the Reservoir, close the attribute table
53. In the Manage Edits group, click Save button and click Yes to save all edits.
54. Click Clear in the Selection group, to deselect the Reservoir in the Map View
55. Close the Create Features pane
56. Save your project

Erase Tool

The Erase tool creates a feature class by overlaying the input features with the polygons of the Erase features. Only those
portions of the input features falling outside the erase features, outside of their boundaries, are copied to the output feature
class.
144 7 Geoprocessing

Scenario 7-3 The reservoir that has been built inside the new farm will reduce the size of the agricultural area. Therefore,
the Erase function is used to remove the area of the reservoir from the total farmland.

57. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click Tools button
58. In the Geoprocessing pane, select Toolboxes, expand Analysis Tools
59. Open the Overlay, and click the Erase tool
60. The Erase pane opens and fills as follows:
(a) Input Features: FarmNew
(b) Erase Features: Reservoir
61. Output Feature Class: FarmNew_Reservoir
62. Run
63. Close the Erase tool

64. Save project and exit ArcGIS Pro

Site Suitability and Modeling
8

Site selection means finding the location that meets a specific condition or criteria. In ArcGIS Pro, different techniques and
tools can be used to find the most suitable site for a particular purpose. One of the straightforward procedures that can be
used in GIS is modeling. Modeling helps to generalize or simplify an environmental setting and its processes. For example,
to find suitable land for a certain purpose such as irrigation or residential building, you have to apply criteria in your analysis
to evaluate where the land is most suitable for that particular use. Understanding the main input functions of suitability mod-
eling guarantees a successful model.

ModelBuilder

In ArcGIS Pro, geoprocessing tools can be used to perform spatial analysis and manage GIS data. ModelBuilder is used to
create, edit, and manage geoprocessing models that automate those tools. Models are workflows that string together sequences
of geoprocessing tools, feeding the output of one tool into another tool as input. ModelBuilder can also be thought of as a
visual programming language for building workflows.
ModelBuilder is a visual programming language for building geoprocessing workflows. Geoprocessing models automate
and document your spatial analysis and data management processes. You create and modify geoprocessing models in
ModelBuilder, where a model is represented as a diagram that chains together sequences of processes and geoprocessing
tools, using the output of one process as the input to another process.
ModelBuilder in ArcGIS Pro allows you to do the following:

• Build a model by adding and connecting data and tools.

• Iteratively process every feature class, raster, file, or table in a workspace.
• Visualize your workflow sequence as an easy-to-understand diagram.
• Run a model step by step, up to a selected step, or run the entire model.
• Make your model into a geoprocessing tool that can be shared or can be used in Python scripting and other models.

The most important elements of the model progression are the following:

1. What is the problem that demands solving?

2. Define a well-articulated criterion for the analysis
3. Gather the necessary data to solve the problem
4. Select the GIS tool needed for the model
5. Create the model to diagram the activity flow

Determine the criteria that allow you to successfully collect the proper data and create the model.

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_8.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 145
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_8
146 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

Site Suitability and Modeling

In this chapter, you are going to be introduced to type of approaches to perform modeling. The first approach uses the
Toolboxes, and the second approach uses the ModelBuilder.

Model 1

Site suitability is selecting a site that meets one or more necessary criteria, such as location, attributes, area, and more. The
model can be performed with a series of individual geoprocessing tools or with a model containing all the necessary tools.
In model 1, you will use different aspects of functionality in GIS to find the most suitable area for building a greenhouse
at the Jordan University campus. The data that will be used in model 1 are an image downloaded from Google Earth and then
clipped and georeferenced using the Palestine_1923_Palestine_Grid projection. The layers “Landuse” and “Vegetation”
were digitized using the image after it had been rectified.

Scenario 8-1 You are a GIS manager at Jordan University, and you have been asked by the administrator to choose the best
location to build a new greenhouse on the north–east region of the campus (Figure below). To build the greenhouse, you must
take into consideration different criteria.

Areal image of the study area

The Criteria to Build the Greenhouse

1. The greenhouse should be at least 50 meters away from the sewer pipeline.
2. The greenhouse should be within a code of 400 of the land use layer.
3. The greenhouse should be within a Veg_Code 1 or 2 of the vegetation layer.
4. The potential location should have a minimum area of 8,000 m2.

Connect to Folder

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro and click “Open another project”

2. Browse to \\ENV_Water\Ch08\ and click Ch08.aprx and then click OK
3. The ArcGIS Pro open and has no data attached to it
The Criteria to Build the Greenhouse 147

4. In Catalog pan, r-click the Folder, and point to Add Folder Connection
5. Browse to \\ENV_Water\Ch08\ folder and select Data_Ch08 (or \\Database\ Data_Ch08) and click OK
6. In the CP, select the Map and press the F2 key and change the name to Greenhouse
7. Open the Folder in the Catalog pane and expand Data_Ch08/Data/M1 and drag LandUse, Pipeline, StudyArea, and
Vegetation into the Map View
8. In the CP, drag StudyArea to the bottom
9. In the CP, r-click Pipeline and click Symbology.
10. The Symbology – Pipeline pane open, click the Symbol and under Gallery, choose Water (line), then click the Properties
tab change the colors to blue and width 2, click Apply.
11. In the CP, highlight Vegetation, click the Symbol in the Symbology pane in the Properties tab, change the color to green
and outline width to 0, and click Apply
12. In the CP, highlight LandUse, click the Symbol in the Symbology pane, in the Properties tab, change the color to gray
and outline width to 0, and click Apply
13. In the CP, highlight StudyArea, click the Symbol in the Symbology pane, in the Gallery tab, select Dashed Black
Outline (1pt)
14. Close the Symbology pane

Proximity Analysis: Buffer

The buffer function will create a polygon around the pipeline at our specified distance of 50 m. The buffer shows the area
around the pipeline that you cannot use for the Greenhouse, as it is too close to the pipeline.

15. In the CP, highlight the Pipeline, and click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click the Tools
button, the Geoprocessing pane display
148 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

16. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the Toolboxes and open the Analysis Tools, then open the Proximity and click the
Buffer tool and enter the Buffer dialog box as shown below.
17. Input Features: Pipeline
18. Output Feature Class: PipelineBuffer
19. Distance: 50 m
20. Accept the rest of the default
21. Click Run.

Result The output layer “PipelineBuffer” is a polygon feature 50 m around the pipeline, and the attribute table of the layer
consists of only one record.

Overlay Analysis: Union

The Union function is a polygon-to-polygon overlay method that takes all the features from the input layers and then calcu-
lates the geometric intersection of the layers. The output layer will be of that same geometry type. This means that several
polygon feature classes and feature layers can be unified together. The output features will have the attributes of all the input
features that overlap.
The Union tool will unify the 3-polygon layers: PipelineBuffer, LandUse, and Vegetation.

22. Click back the black arrow of the Geoprocessing pane, under Analysis Tools, open the Overlay, and click Union, enter
the Union dialog box as shown below.
23. Input Features: PipelineBuffer, Vegetation, and LandUse
24. Output Feature Class: Union
25. Accept the default of the default
26. Click Run
The Criteria to Build the Greenhouse 149

Result The output file “Union” includes all fields from the three input layers: PipelinwBuffer, LandUse, and Vegetation.
The Union feature class will be used to select the criteria to build the Greenhouse at the campus.

The Second and Third Criteria

The Greenhouse should be within a code of 400 of the LandUse layer and within a Veg_Code 1 or 2 of the Vegetation
layers.

Select Tool
The select function, typically using a select or Structured Query Language (SQL) expression, stores them in an output
feature class. The selection ensures that the SQL meets the criteria for the suitability outlined for this assignment.

27. Click back the black arrow of the Geoprocessing pane, under Analysis Tools, open the Extract, and click Select, enter
the Select dialog box as shown below.
28. Input Features: Union
29. Output Feature Class: Site
30. After Where from the drop-down arrow, choose Name, then select is not equal to, then select the Sewage Pipe
31. Click + Add Clause
32. After And from the drop-down arrow, choose Veg_Code, then select is less than or equal to, then select 2
33. Click + Add Clause
34. After And from the drop-down arrow, choose Code, then select is equal to, then select 400
35. Click Run

Result The best potential location will be selected.

150 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

The Fourth Criteria

The potential location should have a minimum area of 8000 m2.

36. In the CP, r-lick the “Site” layer and open the Attribute Table.
37. The last record of the Site attribute table has an area of 18,246 m2. This land will be used to build the greenhouse on it.
38. Select the second record that has an area of 18,246 m2.
39. In the CP, r-click the “Site” layer point to Data and click Export Features.
40. Fill the Export Features dialog box as follows:
41. Input Features: Site
42. Output Feature Class: Greenhouse
43. Click OK
44. The Greenhouse feature class created and displayed in the CP
45. Click the Greenhouse symbol and from the Symbology pane, under Gallery tab, select the Cropland
46. Close the Symbology pane
47. Save the project

Model 2: ModelBuilder

The geoprocessing model is a graphical way of systematizing analysis. This means instead of running the tools from
Toolboxes repeatedly as in model 1. GIS users could automate their analysis as workflows through the geoprocessing model.
This means that the model is a visual representation of a workflow in which several geoprocessing tools are run in sequence.
The Criteria to Find Suitable Location to Build Nuclear Power Plant 151

In ArcGIS Pro, when you create a model, it opens for editing in ModelBuilder. A new model starts as a blank model view,
into which you can add data and tools and connect them to form processes. The new model opens with a temporary welcome
message that expires when you add a model element or save the model.
When you create a model in ArcGIS Pro, it opens for editing in ModelBuilder. A new model starts as a blank model view,
into which you can add data and tools and connect them to form processes. The new model opens with a temporary welcome
message that expires when you add a model element or save the model.
You can create your own tools. Tools you create are called custom tools and become an integral part of geoprocessing.
You can open and run any tool from the Search or Catalog window, use it in ModelBuilder and the Python window, and call
it from another script. Once you have created your own toolbox, you can create a model tool or create a script tool in the
toolbox. Any model you create and save in a toolbox becomes a model tool.
In this section, you will create a model and add a process to it. A process is a geoprocessing tool connected to its input
and output data. A model with one process is the simplest model that can be run. The output from one tool is often the input
to another tool. A geoprocessing model depicts a workflow as a diagram. The model is made up of a process, meaning that
each tool is associated with input and output elements. A model process consists of a tool and all variables connected to it.
Connector lines indicate the sequence of processing. Many processes can be chained together to create a larger process. A
process in a model can be in one of four states: not ready to run, ready to run, running, and has been run.

1. Not ready to run: When you initially drag a tool into ModelBuilder, the process is in a not-ready-to-run state because the
required parameter values have not been specified. The tool and its inputs and outputs are gray.
2. Ready to run: A process is ready to run when the tool has all required parameters filled in. All model elements in the
process have color.
3. Running: The process is in a running state if the model tools are red.
4. Has been run: If you run the model from within ModelBuilder, the tool and derived data elements are displayed with
drop shadows, indicating that the process has run, and the derived data have been generated.

Work with a Model: Find Best Suitable Location

Site selection means finding the location that meets a specific condition or criteria. It is a generalized model that can be used
in the GIS environment to find the most suitable site for a particular use. The modeling process identifies the main issue that
needs to be answered based on specific criteria. For modeling analysis, the main input function to perform the work is to
determine the proper data to find the ideal solution. To carry this model in ArcGIS Pro, the exact tools and the procedures to
be carried out should be determined and understood in advance for an effective result. Site suitability can be determined by
using both raster and vector techniques. This task will be based on applying the vector mode, which relies greatly on proxim-
ity and overlay analysis. The main concept will be discerning the sensitive area from the study area and selecting an area that
is most suitable.
This exercise allows you to use different aspects of GIS functionality to find the most suitable area for building a Nuclear
Power Plant (NPP) in the Dhuleil Area, Jordan.

The Criteria to Find Suitable Location to Build Nuclear Power Plant

The Dhuleil area in Jordan is proposed to be a location to build a Nuclear Power Plant, as it is an ideal location due to the
presence of a plentiful amount of reclaimed water that can be used for cooling purposes. Nevertheless, the main question is:
what is the possibility of building a Nuclear Power Plant in the area without affecting the local environment and the water
resources?
Dhuleil is an agricultural area that has a major limestone and basalt aquifer. Many wells are tapping into these two perme-
able formations, and they have been used for irrigation since the 1960s. In the mid-1980s, a major sewage treatment plant,
named Khirbet Al-Samra (KSWTP), was built to increase the water resources for irrigation and lessen the use of groundwa-
ter, whose water quality and quantity had deteriorated due to extensive use and overexploitation. The area has a network of
drainage systems that shifted water from intermittent streams into perennial streams after the KSWTP started to discharge
its treated water into the major Zarqa River, which ended up in the King Talal Dam reservoir. The water stored in the reservoir
was then released to irrigate the Jordan Rift Valley, which is one of the most important irrigated areas in the country.
152 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

The geological structure of the Dhuleil area is highly fractured, and the structure influences the groundwater recharge
from precipitation and surface runoff during the wet season. A previous study showed that wells near fault systems have
slightly elevated concentrations of contaminants such as nitrate and salinity. Therefore, any NPP should be built at a suitable
distance away from the fault system. The surficial geology in the study area consists of basalt, limestone, alluvium, sand-
stone, siltstone, and marly limestone. The first four formations are considered highly permeable and are generally associated
with moderate to high potential rates of local recharge from rain or surface runoff during wet seasons. The marly limestone
and siltstone are considered impermeable surface deposits that have very low to low recharge potential with reduced rates of
water movement into or out of these formations. Any potential site for building the proposed NNP should be built within
these two impermeable layers. Therefore, the surface water and groundwater should be protected from any potential con-
tamination from the proposed NPP.

The Criteria to Find Best Site to Build the NPP

To find the best location, you must use four criteria related to distance from the water body, structure, groundwater well loca-
tions, and geological impermeable formations.

1. The NPP should be at least 300 m away from the main stream.
2. The NPP should be at least 200 m away from the fault system.
3. The NPP should be at least 500 m away from the groundwater wells.
4. The NPP should be built within code 2 (Siltstone and Marly Limestone formations)

Build a Geoprocessing Model in Modelbuilder

In this task, you must select a suitable location to build a nuclear power plant based on four criteria using a geoprocessing
model in ModelBuilder.

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in Project group, click New Map and call it “NPP Model”.
2. Open the Folder in the Catalog pane and expand Data_Ch08/Data/M2 and drag the Fault, GEOL_KS, KSWTP,
Stream, and Well into the Map View
3. In CP, r-click the GEOL_KS and select Symbology, In the Symbology pane, under Primary symbology, choose Unique
Values, in the Field1 choose Formation, click Add all values, open the More drop-down arrow and uncheck “Show all
other values”
4. Use the Table below to change the following layers in the Content pane

Layers Symbol Color Size

Well Circle Blue 8
Fault 1.0 Point Red 1pt
Stream Water (line) Apatite Blue 2pt
KSWTP Waterlines 2pt
The Criteria to Find Suitable Location to Build Nuclear Power Plant 153

5. Click the Project tab on the ribbon, click Options, click Geoprocessing, ensure settings are as shown below.

6. Click the back arrow in the upper left corner to return to the project
7. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, and in the Geoprocessing group, click the Model Builder button to launch a Model
window.
154 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

Result The model will be created and displayed on top of the Map View, and it will be created in the Catalog pane under
the Toolboxes\Ch08.atbx folders

8. Make sure the Model is highlighted above the Map View

9. Click ModelBuilder tab on the ribbon, in the Model group, and click Environments button
10. Fill the Environment dialog box as follows:
11. Current Workspace: browse to M2
12. Scratch Workspace: Ch08.gdb
13. Output Coordinate system: from the window drop-down select Well, the Palestine_1923_Palestine_Belt will display
14. Ok

Add Geoprocessing Tools and Add Data

Models work with data, with the output of one geoprocessing tool being used as input to another tool. You can start building
your model by first adding the data you want to process. Geoprocessing tools are a fundamental building block of your
model. ArcGIS Pro has many geoprocessing tools for accomplishing an extensive number of GIS tasks. Once you know the
right tools for the work you are doing, it is straightforward to add those tools to a model.

Select the Main Stream

The Stream layer in the Content pane has 25 records and some of these records under the “Status” field in the attribute table
are called “Main”. These records will be selected to be part of the model.

15. In the CP, r-click the Stream layer and open the attribute table. After exploring the information, close the attribute table.
16. Make sure the model view is active, click the ModelBuilder tab on the ribbon, in the Insert group, click Tools button
17. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the Toolboxes tab
18. In the search box, type Select
The Criteria to Find Suitable Location to Build Nuclear Power Plant 155

19. Drag “Select Layer By Attribute” (Data Management) into the Model.
20. Double click the Select Layer by Attribute tool in the model window and fill it as follows:
21. Input Rows: Stream
22. Selection Type: New Selection
23. In the SQL expression, fill the statement as “Where Status is equal to Main”
24. Click OK.

25. Click Save button on the Model group

26. Click Fit to Window button in the View group

Result The process (the tool and the input and the output variables) is in a state ready-to-run

Buffer the Selected Stream: 300 m

The first criterion to find the best site to build the NPP is that the new location should be at least 300 m away from the main
stream.
156 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

27. In the Geoprocessing pane, in the Search window, type Buffer

28. Drag the Buffer (Analysis Tools) into the Model and place it below Select Layer By Attribute.
29. Double-click Buffer tool in the “Model”
30. Fill the Buffer dialog box
(a) Input Features: Stream (2)
(b) Output Feature Class: StreamBuffer
(c) Distance: 300 m
(d) Accept the rest of the default
31. Click OK.

32. Click Save button on the Model group

33. Click Auto Layout in the View group.

Result The process is in a state ready-to-run and Stream (2) is connected to the Buffer tool.

Buffer the Fault: 200 m

The second criterion is that the location of the NPP should be at least 200 m away from the fault system.

34. In the Geoprocessing pane, drag once again the Buffer tool into the Model, and place it below the Buffer tool
35. Double click the Buffer (2) tool and enter inputs as shown below.
36. Fill the Buffer (2) dialog box as follows:
The Criteria to Find Suitable Location to Build Nuclear Power Plant 157

(a) Input Features: Fault

(b) Output Feature Class: FaultBuffer
(c) Distance: 200 m
(d) Accept the rest of the default
37. Click OK

38. Click Save button on the Model group

39. Click Auto Layout in the View group.

Buffer the Well:500 m

The third criterion is that the location of the NPP should be at least 500 m away from the groundwater wells.

40. In the Geoprocessing pane, drag once again the Buffer tool into the Model, and place it below the Buffer tool
41. Double click the Buffer (3) tool and enter inputs as shown below.
42. Fill the Buffer (3) dialog box as follows:
(a) Input Features: Well
(b) Output Feature Class: WellBuffer
(c) Distance: 500 m
(d) Accept the rest of the default
43. Click OK

44. Click Save button on the Model group

45. Click Auto Layout in the View group.
158 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

Result The process is in a state ready-to-run.

Select Tool
The fourth criterion is to select the impermeable geological formations siltstone and marl-limestone that are associated with
code 2 in the attribute table of the GEOL_KS layer. Code 2 includes only impermeable formations.

46. In the Geoprocessing pane, in the Search window, type Select.

47. Drag Select (Analysis Tools) into the Model
48. D-click Select tool and fill the Select dialog box as below
49. Input Features: GEOL_KS
50. Output Feature Class: GEOL_Code2
51. In the SQL expression, fill the statement as “Where Code is equal to 2”
52. Click OK.
53. Click Save button on the Model group
54. Click Auto Layout in the View group.
The Criteria to Find Suitable Location to Build Nuclear Power Plant 159

Union the Streambuffer, Faultbuffer, and Wellbuffer

To continue the analysis in the model, you will perform a geometric union of the 3-input feature classes: StreamBuffer,
FaultBuffer, and WellBuffer. The Union tool will only work on polygon feature classes. All features and their attributes will
be written to the output feature class. This step is required to combine all the buffers that have been created for the wells,
faults, and stream and make them one polygon.

55. In the Geoprocessing pane, in the Search window, type Union.

56. Drag Union tool into the model
57. D-click Union tool and fill the Union dialog box as below
58. Input Features: StreamBuffer, FaultBuffer, WellBuffer
59. Output Feature Class: UnionBuffer
60. Attribute to join: All attributes
61. Click OK.
62. Click the Auto Layout button in the View group.
63. Click Save button on the Model group
64. Click Full Extent icon

Result The process is in a state ready-to-run.

Erase Tool
The Erase tool creates a feature class by overlaying the input feature “UnionBuffer” that is created from the 3-input layers
with the impermeable geological formation of code 2 in the GEOL_Code2 layer that has been selected previously using the
Select tool. Only those portions of the input features that fall outside the boundaries of UnionBuffer are copied to the output
feature class.

65. In the Geoprocessing pane, in the Search window, type Erase.

66. Drag Erase (Analysis Tools) into the Model
67. D-click Erase tool and fill it as below
(a) Input Features: GEOL_Code2
(b) Erase Features: UnionBuffer
(c) Output Feature Class: Suitable
68. OK
160 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

69. Click Auto Layout button on View group to rearrange all processes
70. Click Save button on the Model group

Draw a Connection Interactively Between the Variable and Tool

You can specify the data or other parameter settings for a geoprocessing tool to use by making a connection between the
variables and tools in the model. There are two primary ways to make connections:

71. draw a connection interactively or

72. open the tool in the model and specify input parameters using model variables and map layers or by browsing to a
dataset.

In this exercise, you will use the draw a connection interactively

73. Place the cursor over the variable (GEOL_Code2), the cursor changes to hand pointer
74. Click and hold the left mouse button while you move the cursor to the Erase tool
75. From the pop-up menu, select “Input Features”
76. Repeat and make a connection line from the UnionBuffer to the Erase tool
77. From the pop-up menu, select “Erase Features”
78. R-click Suitable and check Add to Display
79. Click Save on the Model group
Validate and Run the Modelbuilder in Model Window 161

Result The Erase process is connected, and the Model is ready to run

80. Click Auto Layout on the View group.

Validate and Run the Modelbuilder in Model Window

When validating the model, the system ensures that all model processes, which include tool input features and output fea-
tures, are valid to be run properly. If all the variables and tools are validated, then the model will run. If some tools and their
variables are not validated, the model will not run. Therefore, if something is wrong, you should open either the variable or
the tool and fix it by providing the correct values. Running a model in ModelBuilder means that you open the model for edit-
ing and run it in the ModelBuilder window. You can run a single tool, a sequence of tools, or the entire model.
Alternatively, you can right-click anywhere in the model and select Run.

81. On the ModelBuilder tab on the ribbon, in the Run group, click the Run button

Results The “Suitable” layer is added to the CP, and drop shadows appear around all tools and all output variables. The
shadows around the tools and output variables mean that the Model is in the has-been-run state. The shadow polygons
represent suitable locations to build a nuclear power plant.

82. On the ModelBuilder tab on the ribbon, in the Run group, click the Run button

83. In the CP, r-click the “Suitable” layer is, you will see it consists of two formations.
162 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

Model Output

The Suitable layer generated by the model consists of two impermeable formations: the “Siltstone” and “Marly Limestone”.
The proposed nuclear power can be built only above these formations. If you examine the location of these two formations,
you will notice that the model has selected only the impermeable layers that are located a substantial distance from the wells,
faults, and the main stream based on the criteria employed in the scenario.

Validate the Model

84. On the ModelBuilder tab on the ribbon, in the Run group, click the Validate button

Results The shadow around the tools and the output variables are removed.
85. Once again click the Run button from the Run group
Results The shadow around the tools and the output variables will be restored again.
Change a Model Name and Label 163

Change a Model Name and Label

Any model created has both a name and a label.

(a) The model label is displayed in the open model view tab, as well as the Catalog and Geoprocessing panes. The model
label can contain spaces and other special characters.
(b) The model name is an internal name used by the system and is used when running the model from Python. The model
name cannot contain spaces or other special characters.

You can change both the model name and label in the Model group
The other way is to change the name by right-clicking the model in its toolbox and select Properties.

86. In the ModelBuilder on the ribbon, in the Model group, click the Properties button
87. In the Tool Properties: Model enter inputs as shown below
88. Name: type “SiteSelection”
89. Label: type “NPP Site Selection”
90. Description: type “ The Dhuleil area is proposed to be a location to build a Nuclear Power Plant, as it’s an ideal
location due to the presence of a plentiful amount of reclaimed water that can be used for cooling purposes”
91. Click OK
92. Click Save button, in the Model group
93. Close the Model by clicking the X in the Model tab above the Map View

Result The name of the Model will be “NPP Site Selection”, and this name will be displayed in the Toolboxes and the
Folder in the Catalog pane.

Open The NPP Site Selection Model

To view an existing model diagram in ModelBuilder, right-click a model in a toolbox and choose Edit. The model diagram
appears in ModelBuilder with the same layout, extent, and appearance with which the model was saved.
164 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

94. In the Catalog pane, under the Toolboxes, open Ch08.atbx and r-click NPP Site Selection, and click Edit

Result The NPP Site Selection open in the Map View.

Intermediate Data

When a model is run, output data are created for each process in the model (unless the process only modifies or passes the
input directly). Some outputs created by the intermediate tools are only needed for generating the final output and have no
use after the model has completed. For effective data management, these intermediate outputs can be set as model Intermediate
Data and deleted altogether.
For example, the “WellBuffer” is only created to select the area that is at least 500 m away from the wells. After that, this
variable is no longer needed.

95. In the ModelBuilder tab on the ribbon, in the Run group, click the Intermediate button

Result The intermediate data deleted from the workspace, the shadow around the tools (Buffer, Select, Union, and Erase)
and all the output variables (with the exception of Stream (2) will be removed. This means the following:

• The Buffer, Select, Union, and Erase are reset because they generate intermediate data.
• The Select Layer By Attribute does not create intermediate data.

Create Model Tool

A geoprocessing model is saved as a model tool in a toolbox. Model tools can be run like any other geoprocessing tool from
the Geoprocessing pane and used in other models and Python scripts. You can configure a model tool so you can process
different datasets with different settings than those specified inside the model, without actually modifying the model vari-
ables in ModelBuilder.
To create a model tool, do the following:

(a) Build and save a model within ModelBuilder.

(b) Set model parameters.
(c) Set model tool properties.
(d) Document the tool.

96. In the Catalog pane, under Toolboxes, open the Ch08.atbx and d-click the NPP Site Selection
97. Geoprocessing pane, open with no parameters
98. Close NPP Site Selection dialog box.
Create Model Tool 165

Result The “NPP Site Selection” dialog box indicates that it has no parameters. This is because you built the NPP Site
Selection without setting any model parameters. Therefore, when you open the model tool in the Geoprocessing pane, the
tool dialog box will display no parameters.

Copy the NPP Site Selection

96. In the Catalog pane, under Toolboxes, open the Ch08.atbx and r-click the NPP Site Selection and click Copy
97. R-click Ch08.atbx under Toolboxes and click Paste
98. Rename “NPP Site Selection 1” to “Model2”

Result Model 2 is copied under Ch08.atbx.

99. In Catalog pane, r-click the Databases and click New File Geodatabase and call it Model2 and click Save.
100. The Model2.gdb created in the Databases.

101. In the Catalog pane, under Databases, r-click Model2 and click Edit to open Model2.

Result Model 2 open in the Map View.

102. Click ModelBuilder tab on the ribbon, in the Model group, click Environments button
103. Fill the Environments dialog box as follows:
(a) Scratch Workspace: Model2.gdb
(b) Accept the other default
104. Click OK to close the dialog box
166 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

Model Parameters

To display parameters on the tool dialog box and to add output datasets to a map, you must set model parameters within your
model. Once the model parameters have been created, you can run the model as a geoprocessing tool, supplying different
values and datasets for its parameters.

105. In the Model, r-click the Stream and click Parameter to make it model parameter. Then, right click the Stream again
and click rename and call it MainStream and click outside to deselect it.
106. Right click the “Buffer”, click Create Variable, click From Parameter, click Distance.
107. The Distance (Value of Field) display
108. R-click Distance (Value of Field) and click Parameter
109. In the View group, click Auto Layout.

110. R-click the Fault and click Parameter to make it model parameter.
111. Right click Buffer2, click Create Variable, click From Parameter, and click Distance.
112. The Distance (Value of Field) (2) display. R-click Distance (Value of Field) (2) and click Parameter
113. In the View group, click Auto Layout.
114. R-click the Well and click Parameter.
115. R-click Buffer (3), click Create Variable, click From Parameter, and click Distance.
116. The Distance (Value of Field) (3) display. R-click Distance (Value of Field) (3) and click Parameter.
117. In the View group, click Auto Layout.
118. R-click the variable StreamBuffer and click Parameter
119. R-click the variable FaultBuffer and click Parameter
120. R-click the variable WellBuffer and click Parameter
121. R-click Union tool, Create Variable, click From Parameter, click Attributes To Join
122. In the View group, click Auto Layout.
123. R-click Attributes To Join and click Parameter
124. R-click the Union_Buffer and click Parameter
125. R-click GEOL_Code2 and click Parameter
126. R-click Suitable and click Parameter
127. R-click Suitable and make sure the Add to Display is checked
128. In the View group, click Auto Layout.
129. In the Run group, click Validate
130. Click Save on the Model group, and close the Model
131. the Model and Close
Model Parameters 167
168 8 Site Suitability and Modeling

Run the Model Tool

132. In the Catalog Pane, r-click Model 2 and click Open.

133. Scroll down and save the Suitable in Model2.gdb
134. Click Run

Result All layers, including “Suitable”, will be added to the NPP Model map, and the Suitable layer run as a model tool
is identical to the model that run within a model.

135. Save the model and the project

136. Close your project.
Geocoding
9

The Geocoding module allows GIS users to explore and set locator properties and automate geocoding workflows. Geocoding
is the process of transforming a description of a location such as a pair of coordinates, an address, or a name of a place to a
location on the Earth’s surface. You can geocode by entering one location description at a time or by providing many of them
at once in a table. The resulting output is a location feature with attributes, which can be used for mapping or spatial analysis.
With geocoded addresses, the address locations can be spatially displayed as points in ArcGIS Pro. Geocoding helps users
recognize patterns by using some of the analysis tools available with ArcGIS Pro.
Users can geocode addresses that are stored in a table in a single field or multiple fields. A single input field stores the
complete address, for example, 712 N 22ND St NE, Superior, WI 54880. Multiple fields are supported if the input addresses
are split into multiple fields, such as Address, City, State, and ZIP for a general United States address.
A locator is the tool used to perform geocoding operations. With this module, you can view and modify properties on the
locator to tune it to your specific geocoding needs by customizing it for performance or quality. You can also use this module
to perform various geocoding operations, including finding the location of a place or address, finding the closest place or
address to a given location, or generating a set of autocomplete suggestions for partial input. A locator is a portable file used
to perform geocoding, the process of finding addresses and places on a map. Locators contain a snapshot of the reference
data used for geocoding, as well as indexes and local addressing knowledge that help return the best match during the geoc-
oding process.
A locator can be accessed as a service on your portal, such as ArcGIS World Geocoding Service, as a service accessed
through an AGS server connection, or as a file on disk.
Geocodes a table of addresses. This process requires a table that stores the addresses you want to geocode and an address
locator or a composite address locator. This tool matches the addresses against the locator and saves the result for each input
record in a new point feature class. When using the ArcGIS World Geocoding Service, this operation may consume credits.
Performing geocoding operations using the ArcGIS World Geocoding Service requires an ArcGIS Online organizational
subscription, and it consumes credits. The organizational account must have enough credits to complete the entire geocoding
request.
In this chapter, you will learn techniques for finding various types of addresses. The user will be introduced to the prepara-
tion of geographic data necessary for address matching called reference data. Technically geocoding is a process of using an
address locator to enter address text or a table of addresses to find corresponding address locations in a geographic
database.
Geocoding requires the following:

1. Address table: This table includes the addresses that need to be converted into a feature class location.
2. Reference data: This is a snapshot of geographic information (point, line, or polygon feature classes) with address infor-
mation such as streets or feature class
3. Address locator: An address locator lets you convert textual descriptions of locations into geographic features. Address
locators are stored and managed in a workspace you choose. The workspace can be a file folder or geodatabase (file or
personal geodatabase).

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_9.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 169
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_9
170 9 Geocoding

Once you know what you want to find, the next step to prepare for geocoding is to build or locate sources of geographic data
for reference data. In this chapter, you will perform geocoding based on two approaches. The first approach uses the zip code,
and the second approach uses the street address.
In this exercise, you are going to geocode based on two ways: geocoding based on zip code and geocoding based on street
address. The ZIP code is usually associated with the residents and business addresses. Therefore, utilizing the ZIP code
address is an easy method to convert the zip codes into a point feature class. Geocoding based on street addresses is the pro-
cess of converting street addresses into geographic coordinates (latitude and longitude) and then using the points in ArcGIS
Pro for further analysis.

Part 1: Geocoding Based on Zip Code

Scenario 1 Approximately three-quarters of the population in Wisconsin and especially those who are living in rural areas
rely on groundwater as a source for domestic purposes. Many of these wells are shallow and susceptible to groundwater
contamination, especially from septic tanks on owners’ properties. As a new employer at the USGS, you have been given a
database table of well owners that their wells have a nitrate concentration higher than 20 mg/L. You have been asked to geo-
code the wells’ addresses; based on their zip code and prepare a table showing the average nitrates in the wells in each zip
code. This process consists of the following:

(a) Geocode the database file based on the zip code

(b) Summarize the matched addresses based on the zip code
(c) Join the summarized matched addresses with the geocoded layer

Launch ArcGIS Pro and Connect to Data

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro and click “Open another project”

2. Browse to \\ENV_Water\ Ch09 folder and click Ch09.aprx and then click OK
3. The ArcGIS Pro open and has no data attached to it
4. In Catalog pan, r-click the Folder, and point to Add Folder Connection
5. Browse to \\ENV_Water\Ch09 folder and select Data_Ch09 (or \\Database\ Data_Ch09) and click OK
6. In the CP, select the Map and press the F2 key and change the name to Geocode Zip Code
7. Open the Folder in the Catalog pane, expand Data_Ch09\Data\Q1, open GEOCODE.gdb and drag Well_Owner and
ZipCode_WI into the Map View.

Result The ZipCode_WI feature class is the zip code in Wisconsin, and Well_Owner represents the name and address of
the private well owners.
Locate Places and Addresses 171

Create Locator

Creates a locator that can find the location of an address or a place, convert a table of addresses or places to a collection of
point features, or identify the address of a point location.

8. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click the Tools button
9. The Geoprocessing pane appears.
10. Click the Toolboxes tab, open Geocoding Tools, and click Create Locator
(a) Country or Region: United States
(b) Primary Table(s): ZipCode_WI
(c) Role: ZIP
Under Field Mapping
(d) Feature ID: ObjectID
(e) *ZIP: ZIP
(f) Output Locator: ZIPCODE_WI_Create Locator
(g) Language Code: English
(h) Accept the rest of the default
11. Click Run

Result The create locator “ZIPCODE_WI_CreateLocator” is established and will be stored in Catalog pane under
Locators.

Locate Places and Addresses

You can find addresses and locations on the map by using the Locate button located in the Map tab.

12. In the Map tab on the ribbon, click the Inquiry group, click the Locate button. The Locate pane display
13. In the Search text box in the Locate pane, type 54880 and Enter
172 9 Geocoding

Result The Locate pane displays two locations for “54880”. The pink and blue dots generated from the ArcGIS Online
World Geocoding Service and the “ZipCode_WI_CreateLocator” were created in the previous steps. You can use either
one of them or both

14. Close to the Locate pane, the two locations disappear from the Map View.

Geocode the Addresses

To geocode a table of addresses using either address locator or the ArcGIS World Geocoding Service, an ArcGIS Online for
organizations subscription is needed. The service operates under a credit-based usage model that allows you to pay only for
what you use. If you do not already have a subscription, purchase one or request a free trial.

15. Click arrow back in the Geoprocessing pane

16. Click the Toolboxes tab, open Geocoding Tools, and click Geocode Addresses
17. The Geocode Addresses dialog box opens and fills it as follows:
18. Input Table: Well_Owner (from Data\Q1\Geocode.gdb)
19. Input Address Locator: ZipCode _WI_CreateLocator (from the drop-down arrow)
20. Input Address Field: Single Field (from the drop-down arrow)
21. Single Line Input: ZipCode (from the drop-down arrow)
22. Output Feature Class: Well
23. Category: Check Postal
24. Click Run
Wells in Each Zip Code and Average Nitrate Concentration 173

Result The Wells display in the in the Map View and in the CP.

25. In the CP, r-click the Well and open the attribute table

Result The Well attribute table is open and has 779 records and many fields, such as Status, Score, Match_Type, Match_
addr, and all the fields from the Well_Owner table that are used for geocoding. The Status field indicates that the candidate
either matched or did not match, while the score field means the percent of matching by the address locator. In this exercise,
all the candidates matched 100%.
26. Make sure that the attribute table of the Well is open
27. R-click “Match_adrr” field and click Sort Ascending
28. Close the attribute table after examining the “Match_adrr” field

Comment The attribute table of the Well feature class shows that each zip code contains dissimilar number of wells.

Wells in Each Zip Code and Average Nitrate Concentration

This step will show the number of wells and their average nitrate in each zip code in the state of Wisconsin. To obtain infor-
mation about the number of wells and their average nitrate, the dissolve tool should be used. The dissolve tool aggregates the
well feature class based on the “Match_adrr” field in the attribute table. The tool will allow you to use statistics of any field
present in the attribute table of the well feature class.

29. Click the back arrow in the Geoprocessing pane, open the Toolboxes, open Data Management Tools, then open
Generalization, and click Dissolve
30. The Dissolve dialog box is opened and filled in as follows:
(a) Input Features: Well
(b) Output Feature Class: Well_Nitrate
(c) Dissolve Field: Match_addr
(d) Statistic Field: NO3 and check Mean
(e) Statistic Field: ZipCode and check Count
31. Accept the other default
32. Click Run
174 9 Geocoding

Result The Well_Nitrate layer is displayed in the CP, and if you open the attribute table, you see three fields: Match_addr,
MEAN_USER_ NO3, and COUNT_USER_ZipCode. The table has been reduced from 779 records to 66 records. The
COUNT_USER_ZipCode field shows how many wells exist in each zip code. The MEAN_USER_ NO3 is the average of
nitrate in all the wells existing in a zip code. Certain Zip Code includes one well and others include many more. For example,
the zip code “53132” includes 1 well, and its mean nitrate is 47, while the zip code “53202” has 22 wells, and their average
nitrate is 51.13 mg/L.

Symbolizing

You will provide symbology for the geocoded wells in the zip codes by using the graduated symbols. This method is used to
show a quantitative difference in the nitrate concentration of the well features by varying the size of symbols. Nitrate is clas-
sified into ranges that are each then assigned a symbol size to represent the range. The nitrate data will have 4 classes; there-
fore, four different symbol sizes are assigned different symbol colors. The zip code that has wells with a high average nitrate
concentration will have a larger symbol and red color, while the zip code that has wells with a lower average nitrate concen-
tration will have a smaller symbol and blue color.

33. In the CP, r-click Well_Nitrate, click Symbology

34. In the Symbology – Well Nitrate pane
35. Choose Graduated Symbols from the drop-down arrow under the Primary symbology
36. Field: MEAN_USER_NO3
37. Classes: 4
38. Method: Manual Interval
39. Change the symbol size from 8 to 18
40. In Classes tab, under Upper value
41. Type ≤ 40, ≤ 50, ≤ 60, and ≤ 70.5 in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th ranges, respectively
42. R-click each symbol and change the color of each symbol from bottom to top into red, pink, green, and blue, as seen
below.
43. Click More and uncheck “Show values out of range”
44. Close the Symbology – Well Nitrate pane
45. Save the project
Part 2: Geocoding Based on Street Address 175

46. Open the attribute table of the Well_Nitrate layer and answer the following questions:
(a) Which Zip code has the highest number of wells and what is the ObjectID numbers?
(b) Which Zip code has the highest average NO3 concentration and what is the value?
(c) Which Zip code has the lowest average NO3 concentration and what is the value?
(d) How many Zip codes have average NO3 concentrations higher than 50 mg/L?

Part 2: Geocoding Based on Street Address

Geocoding is a fundamental part of business data management. Every organization maintains address information for each
client. In water resources, Wisconsin private wells have an address. The address is stored in a table that contains the well
owner’s address, well depth, and other relevant information.

Scenario 2 You are working for Douglas County in the city of Superior. You have been given an Excel table that contains
well owners and their addresses. You have been asked to geocode the well address owners by converting them into a well
point feature class. The well layer will be used in the analysis to select the deepest wells that are tapping the sandstone aqui-
fer to be used as an alternative source for water supply in case of emergency.

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map and call it Superior
2. Open the Folders in the Catalog pane, expand Q2 in Data_Ch09\Data select Street.shp and drag it into the Map View.
3. In the CP, click the symbol of the Street and select “Arterial Street” from the Symbology – Street pane from under the
Gallery tab
176 9 Geocoding

Integrate Excel Table

The Excel table Well.xls has information about the wells, and your duty is to convert it into a table format in ArcGIS.

4. Click the back arrow in the Geoprocessing pane

5. Click the Toolboxes tab, open Conversion Tools, and open Excel
6. Click Excel to Table, the Excel to Table dialog box open, fill it as below
7. Input Excel File: Well.xls (from Data\Q2) and click OK
8. Output Table: Address_Table
9. Sheet: Well
10. Accept the rest of the default
11. Click Run
12. In the CP, r-click Address_Table, and click open, explore it and then close it

Result The Well Excel file is now converted into Address_Table and added to the CP, and both files are identical and con-
sist of 15 records.
Build the Street Locator Using Create Locator 177

Build the Street Locator Using Create Locator

Geocoding is performed in ArcGIS Pro with an address locator. An address locator is a dataset stored in either a geodatabase
or a file folder that contains information about local conventions for addresses (known as an address locator style) and
embedded map data such as street centerlines with address ranges (known as reference data). When geocoding is performed,
the address locator interprets an address using the address locator style and finds that address on a map using the reference
data. An address locator is created based on a specific locator style. The style determines the type of addresses that can be
geocoded, the field mapping for the reference data, and what output information of a match would be returned. It also con-
tains information about how an address is parsed, searching methods for possible matches, and default values for the geocod-
ing options.

13. Click the back arrow of the Geoprocessing pane

14. Click the Toolboxes tab, open Geocoding Tools, and click Create Locator
15. The Create Locator dialog box opens and fills it as follows:
16. Country or Region: United States
17. Primary Table(s): Street
18. Role: Street Address
19. Feature ID: OBJECTID
20. Left House Number From From_Left
21. Left House Number TO: To_Left
22. Right House Number From: From_Right
23. Right House Number TO: To_Right
24. Prefix Direction: PrfxDir
25. Street Name: STNAME
26. Suffix Type: STTYPE
27. Suffix Direction: SufixDir
28. Left City: City
29. Right City: City
30. Left State: State
31. Right State: State
32. Output Locator: Street_CreateLocator
33. Language Code: English
34. Run
178 9 Geocoding

Test Your Address Locator

In this step you will test the “Street_CreateLocator” that you just created. You will use the Locate button to quickly search
for an address in the city of Superior and display the corresponding location on a map.

35. Click Map tab on the ribbon, in Inquiry group, click Locate button
36. Click the drop-down Options and check only the “Street_CreateLocator”.
37. In the search box, type 712 N 22ND St, Superior and press Enter.

Result A point display on the map and the Locate pop-up display showing information about the address

38. Close the Locate pop-up, the graph point of the address 712 N 22ND St, Superior disappears from the map
Geocode Well Owner by Address 179

Geocode Well Owner by Address

This step will use the Address_Table that stores the name and addresses of the well owners that you want to geocode. The
tool matches the stored addresses against the “Street_CreateLocator” and saves the result for each input record in a new
point feature class.

Note user can use the ArcGIS World Geocoding Service, but this operation consumes credits.

39. In CP, r-click Address_Table and click Geocode Table

40. Click “Go to Tool” tab at the bottom of the Geocode Table
41. The Geocode Table dialog box display, fill it as below
42. Input Table: Address_Table
43. Input Locator: “Street_CeateLocator”
44. Input Address Fields: More than one field
45. Address or Place: Address
46. City: City
47. State: State
48. Zip: ZipCode
49. Output: Well_Superior (Ch09.gdb)
50. Category: Address
51. Accept the rest of the default
52. Run

Result The Geocoding Completed dialog box display states that 12 addresses matched and 3 unmatched. The Well_
Superior feature class is displayed in the CP.

53. Click No for “Start rematch process?”

54. Close the Geocoding Completed dialog box
55. In CP, click Well_Superior symbol of the and symbolize it with circle1 and blue color
180 9 Geocoding

Examination of the Geocoding Results

56. Open the attribute table of the Well_Superior feature class

Note Under the Match_addr field, the unmatched records are empty. The geocoding algorithm was unable to match the
three addresses. You now need to match the unmatched addresses records. You contacted Douglas County regarding the
unmatched two addresses of the wells, and they provided you with the correct address (see table below)

Object ID Wrong address Correct address

3 666 20TH St, Superior, WI 606 20TH AV E, Superior, WI
4 737 2ND St, Superior, WI 737 2ND AV E, Superior, WI
7 717 N 2ND St, Superior, WI 717 E 2ND St, Superior, WI

Changing the Basemap

You are going to change the basemap from the Basemap gallery and choose the World Street Map
57. In The CP turn off the Street layer
58. Click the Map tab on the ribbon, in the Layer group, from the drop-down arrow of the Basemap select Streets
Match the Unmatched Addresses 181

Result The World Street Map display in the CP

Match the Unmatched Addresses

59. In CP, right-click the Well_Superior layer and click Data and then from the drop-down list select Rematch Addresses
60. The Rematch Addresses pane and the attribute table for your geocoded feature class appear.

Result The pane opens to Unmatched addresses by default, and it shows that there are three unmatched records. The attri-
bute table of the Well_Superior feature class also opens automatically. You can use the table to navigate the unmatched data
and make selections.

Sometimes an address is not matched because a perfect match cannot be found, but there are close match candidates. The
Rematch pane is context sensitive to the attribute table. You can use selection and query shortcuts in the table view and in the
Rematch pane by accessing the Menu drop-down menu to more efficiently navigate your data.

61. In the attribute table of Well_Superior, select the “666 20TH St, Superior, WI”
62. The candidates are displayed in list format on the lower portion of the Rematch Addresses pane, and one candidate has
been designated with a score of 71.87. The candidate appears as points on the map.
63. In the Rematch Addresses pane, in the “Address or Place” change the 666 into 606 and the St into AV and add E after
AV, it should look like this “606 20TH AV E, Superior, WI 54880” then enter
64. The candidate score will be changed from 71.87 to 95
65. In the Rematch Addresses pane, select the second candidate in the list and click Match .

Result The candidate is automatically moved to the Matched category in the Rematch pane, and the current view is updated
to list the last unmatched address from the Well_Superior feature class, which is now the only unmatched address.
182 9 Geocoding

66. In the attribute table of Well_Superior, select the “737 2ND St, Superior, WI 54880”
67. The candidates are displayed in list format on the lower portion of the Rematch Addresses pane, the candidate has been
designated with a score of 71.66, and the candidate appears as points on the map.
68. In the Rematch Addresses pane, in the “Address or Place” change the St into AV and type E after it, it should look like
this “737 2ND AV E, Superior, WI 54880” then enter
69. The candidate score will change to 94.87
70. n the Rematch Addresses pane, select the candidate in the list and click Match .
71. In the attribute table of Well_Superior, select the “717 N 2ND St, Superior, WI 54880”
72. No candidates display on the lower portion of the Rematch Addresses pane
73. In the Rematch Addresses pane, in the “Address or Place” change the N into E, it should look like this “717 E 2ND St,
Superior, WI” then enter
74. The candidate score will change to 94.87
75. In the Rematch Addresses pane, select the candidate in the list and click Match .

76. Close the Rematch pane

77. Save the project
78. Exit ArcGIS Pr0
Raster Format
10

The second type of spatial data that is used in GIS is the raster format, which is one form of organization for spatial data.
This type of format is suitable for continuous surfaces, such as temperature. A raster is a regular grid of a mesh of cells (pix-
els) that is laid over the landscape covering a specific area. The cells of the grid are organized in rows and columns.
The cell is the smallest unit of the raster, and each cell has a value representing information, such as elevation. Raster can
be satellite imagery, digital aerial photography, digital pictures, scanned maps, and saved images. The cell is the fundamental
unit of analysis in the raster system. A cell represents a location in space. The condition of a given cell is recorded as a
numeric value for each cell. The level of detail of features represented by a raster is often dependent on the cell size (spatial
resolution). Resolution means detail with which a map shows the shape and location of geometric features such as a lake.
Smaller cell sizes result in larger raster datasets to represent an entire surface; therefore, there is a need for greater storage
space, which often results in longer processing time.

Feature Representation in Raster Format

A point in a vector representation can be approximately transformed to a single cell in a raster representation. Likewise, a
vector line can be approximately transformed to a sequence of raster cells lying along that line, and a vector polygon can be
approximately transformed to a zone of raster cells overlaying the polygon area. Like vector format, raster provides proce-
dures for deriving new information by transforming or making associations of information from existing layers. GIS analysis
using raster data is commonly used in environmental assessments. Raster processes are more commonly used because they
can be significantly faster computationally than vector processes. This chapter consists of four sections, and each section
includes different GIS exercises that deal with raster datasets.

Section 1: Explore and Download Digital Elevation Model (DEM)

1. Explore the downloaded image

2. Convert image from float to integer

Section 2: Projection and Processing Raster Dataset

1. Project an image
2. Clip an image
3. Merge raster datasets (Mosaic)
4. Resample an image
5. Classify an image
6. Convert Vector Feature into Raster

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_10.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 183
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_10
184 10 Raster Format

Section 3: Terrain Analysis

1. Create Hillshade
2. Create Contour
3. Create Vertical Profile
4. Create Visibility map
5. Create Line of Sight
6. Derive Slope and Aspect
7. Reclassify the Slope
8. Combine the Slope and Geology
9. Find the best location to build the lysimeter

Chapter 10: Working with Raster

The internet has plenty of digital and nondigital data that GIS users can obtain free data that can be used in a project and
conduct meaningful research. The data can be found on the web pages of several federal, state, and local governments in
addition to private companies.
In this section, you are going to download digital elevation model (DEM) from the National Map Viewer organized by the
USGS web page. The website provides applications and web map services for "Topographic Information for the Nation".
This information includes topographic maps and geographic information system (GIS) data for elevation, hydrography,
watersheds, geographic names, land cover, and more.

Download Dem Image from Usgs Webpage

A DEM is the digital representation of the ground surface elevation with respect to a reference datum excluding surface
objects such as buildings, trees, and any other surface features. DEMs are created from a variety of sources. USGS DEMs were
derived from topographic maps. DEMs are used to determine terrain attributes such as elevation at any point, slope, aspect,
watershed and more.

Download the Dem of the City of Burnsville in Minnesota

To download DEM, click in the link below:

https://apps.nationalmap.gov/downloader/#/

1. In the Search window, type “Burnsville, MN, USA” and Enter

2. In the left panel, check “Elevation Product (3DEP)”
3. Make sure the Datasets tab is highlighted (at the top, below USGS)
4. Click “Search Products”

Result One image display

5. Click “Download Link (TIF)”

6. The “USGS_13_n45w094_20160331.tif” image downloaded in the download folder
7. Move the “USGS_13_n45w094_20160331.tif” image in Data_Ch10

Note If for a reason or another, you cannot download the image, the image can be accessed in the download folder in the
Burnsville folder in Data_Ch10.
Download the Dem of the City of Burnsville in Minnesota 185

Launch ArcGIS Pro

8. Launch ArcGIS Pro

9. Open another project (upper-right) browse to \\Env_Water\Ch10 select Ch10.aprx and click OK

Result Ch10.aprx open and it is empty

10. In the CP, change the name of the Map to DEM.

Folder Connection

To access the data of the project, connect to the original folder “Data_Ch10”

11. Open the Catalog pane and expand the Folders

12. R-click Folders and click Add Folder Connection
13. Browse to (or \\Database\ Data_Ch10) open it and highlight Data_Ch10 and click OK
14. Highlight it and click OK
15. In the Catalog pane, expand “Data_Ch10” under the Folder.
16. Save your project
186 10 Raster Format

Result The “Data_Ch10” folder includes 4 folders: Data01, Data02, Data03, and Download. All the folders contain data
that you need later for the analysis.

Exploring Digital Elevation Models

A DEM is a raster representation of a continuous surface, usually referencing the surface of the earth. The accuracy of these
data is determined primarily by the resolution (the distance between sample points). Other factors affecting accuracy are data
type (integer or floating point) and the actual sampling of the surface when creating the original DEM.

17. In Catalog pane, expand the “Data_Ch10” folder in the Folder

18. Expand the Download and then the Burnsville folder and drag USGS_13_n45w094_20160331.tif into the Map View.
19. In CP rename “USGS_13_n45w094_20160331.tif” to “Burnsville”

Result The DEM display in the Map View and Contents pane

20. In the CP, r-click “Burnsville” choose Properties and click the Source tab
21. The Layer Property: Burnsville consists of six sections, and each section tab provides information about the Burnsville
DEM
A. Data source: This shows the data type (raster), location on your computer, and its name
B. Raster Information: This shows that the DEM has 10812 columns and rows and consists of 1 band, and the cell size
(resolution) is 9.25x10-5 x 9.25x10-5. This indicates that the pixel type is a floating point, meaning that the attribute
table of the raster cannot be opened in ArcGIS Pro. The DEM format is TIFF, and the pixel depth is 32 bit.
C. Band Metadata: Because the Burnsville DEM consists of 1 band, the Metadata is available for this band.
D. Statistics: This shows the min, max, mean, and standard deviation of elevation.
E. Extent: this shows the coordinate extent in deg (decimal degree)
F. Spatial Reference: this shows that the DEM coordinate is registered in GCS and the datum is North American
Datum 1983
Convert Floating Raster into Integer Raster 187

22. Click OK to Examine Layer Properties: Burnsville

Convert Floating Raster into Integer Raster

This exercise converts the pixel type of the “Burnsville” image from floating point input values into integer point input val-
ues using the “INT” tool. Burnsville is a floating point and has no attribute table, and its cell values are between 182.504 feet
(lower elevation) and 408.892 feet (higher elevation). The “Int” tool converts each cell value of a raster to an integer by
truncation.

23. Click Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click Tools button”
24. In the Geoprocessing pane click the Toolboxes tab
25. Scroll down and open the Spatial Analyst Tools and then the Math Tools
26. Click the Int Tool and fill it as follows:
27. Input raster or constant value: Burnsville
28. Output raster: Burnsville_Int (save in Ch10.gdb)
29. Run
30. Save your project
188 10 Raster Format

Result The “Burnsville_Int” display in the CP under the DEM with integer elevation and it appears also in the Catalog
pane in the Ch10.gdb. The cell value of a raster is truncated, and the elevation is now between 182 feet (min) and 408 feet
(max).

Section 2: Projection And Processing Raster Dataset

Project the Dem of Amman-Zarqa Basin

ArcGIS Pro can perform projection of vectors and rasters. This exercise addresses a raster that is registered in the interna-
tional coordinate systems of Jordan. Jordan uses specific datums and different projected coordinate systems. The raster will
be projected from latitude longitude into the Palestine Projection, which is based on a customized Transverse Mercator.
The parameters of the projection are listed below:

False_Easting: 170251.55500000
False_Northing: 1126867.90900000
Central_Meridian: 35.21208056
Scale_Factor: 1.00000000
Latitude of origin: 31.73409694
Linear Unit: Meter

In ArcGIS Pro, the projection for Jordan is stored in the National Grids/Asia. In this exercise, you are going to project
the image of “AZ_DEM” from GCS_WGS_1984 into Palestine Projection.
31. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
32. In the CP, change the name from “Map” to “Projection”
33. In Catalog pane drag the az_dem from Data_Ch10\Data01 folder under Folders in Map View
34. The az_dem has GCS_WGS_1984 (Check Layer Properties/Source)
Clip the Raster 189

35. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow

36. Scroll down and open the Data Management Tools and the Projections and Transformations and then open the
Raster tools
37. Click the Project Raster Tool and fill it as follows:
38. Input Raster: az_dem
39. Output Raster Dataset: az_dem_utm
40. Output Coordinate System: Click the Select coordinate system (Globe icon)
41. Open Projected Coordinate System, open National Grids, and then open Asia
42. Scroll down and select Palestine 1923 Palestine Belt and then click OK
43. Geographic Transformation: automatically the “Palestine_1923_To_WGS_1984_1” selected
44. Accept the rest of the default
45. Run

46. Save your project

Result The az_dem_utm display in the Map View and the CP

Question 1: What is the resolution of the az_dem_utm?

Question 2: What is the Datum of the az_dem_utm?
Question 3: Where the az_dem_utm image saved?

Clip the Raster

Clipping a raster can be done using a rectangular shape according to the extents defined or using a polygon feature class. The
shape defining the clip can clip the extent of the raster or clip out an area within the raster.
190 10 Raster Format

The image “az_dem_utm” that was projected in the previous section covers a large area of the Amman-Zarqa Basin, and
now you are interested in using the Clip Tool to cover only the Dhuleil area. To clip the image, you are going to use a shape-
file “StudyDhuleil.shp” that will generate the clipped image.

47. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the Catalog tab and drag StudyDhuleil.shp from the Data_Ch10\Data01 folder under
Folders in the Map View.
48. In Cp click the symbol of the StudyDhuleil, in the Symbology pane, select Black Outline (1pt) and close the Symbology
pane
49. In the Geoprocessing pane click the back arrow and scroll down and open the Data Management Tools, open Raster
Tools and then Raster Processing
50. Click the Clip Raster Tool and fill it as follows:
51. Input Raster: az_dem_utm
52. Output Extent: StudyDhuleil
53. Check Input Features for Clipping Geometry
54. Output Raster Dataset: Dhuleil
55. Accept the rest as the default
56. Run
57. Save the project

Result The image is now clipped to the shape of the study area.

Merge Raster Datasets (MOSAIC)

The Merge Rasters function represents a grouped collection of rasters. It is useful when you have multiple rasters that you
want treated as a single item, for example, to calculate the same statistics for all, or to treat as one image. This is useful for
some satellite imagery that is stored as separate tiles to reduce the file size of each but should be considered part of the same
image.
The “Mosaic To New Raster” tool merges multiple raster datasets into a new raster dataset. To merge the raster datasets,
they must have
Merge Raster Datasets (MOSAIC) 191

(a) Same number of bands

(b) Same pixel type
(c) Same pixel depth

When merging the raster dataset in a file format, the extension should be specified. There are various extensions that users
can choose from, and the most popular formats are.bil (ESRI BIL),.bmp (BMP),.gif (GIF),.png (PNG),.tif (TIFF),.jpg
(JPEG), and.img (ERDAS IMAGINE). The extensions will not be added to the name of the raster when the raster dataset is
stored in a geodatabase. In this example, we merge two rasters, Dhuleil and kt_dam.

58. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
59. In the CP, change the name from “Map” to “Mosaic”
60. In Catalog pane drag the kt_dam raster from Data_Ch10\Data01 folder under Folders
61. In the CP, r-click kt_dam raster and select Symbology
62. In the Symbology pane change the Unique Values into “Stretch”
63. Close the Symbology pane

64. In Catalog pane drag the Dhuleil raster from Data_Ch10.gdb under Databases
65. Zoom to see both rasters in the Map View
66. R-click the Dhuleil raster, click Properties, Source tab and then Raster Information and write down the following:
(a) Number of bands:
(b) Pixel Type:
(c) Pixel depth:
67. Repeat the same for the kt_dam raster
(d) Number of bands:
(e) Pixel Type:
(f) Pixel depth
68. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow
69. Scroll down and open the Data Management Tools and the Projections and Transformations and then open the
Raster tools
70. Scroll down and open the Data Management Tools and the Raster and then open the Raster Dataset
71. Click the Mosaic To New Raster Tool and fill it as follows:
72. Input Rasters: kt_dam and Dhuleil
73. Output Location: Ch10.gdb
74. Raster Dataset Name with Extension: Dhuleil_KTDam.tif
75. Spatial Reference for Raster: From the drop-down arrow select kt_dam

Note the coordinate is Palestine_1923_Palestine_Belt

192 10 Raster Format

76. Pixel Type: 16_BIT_SIGNED

77. Number of Bands: 1
78. Accept the rest of the default
79. Run
80. Close the Mosaic To New Raster pane
81. Save your Project

Result The mosaic raster “Dhul_KTDam” created from kt_dam and Dhuleil as both rasters merge together and become
one raster.

Resample an Image

The resampling tool allows the user to change the resolution of the raster. The cell size can be changed either to a higher or
lower resolution, but the extent of the raster dataset will remain the same. The output raster can be saved in any of the fol-
lowing formats: BIL, BIP, BMP, BSQ, DAT, Esri Grid, GIF, IMG, JPEG, JPEG 2000, PNG, TIFF, or any geodatabase raster
dataset.
There are four options for the resampling technique parameter: nearest, majority, bilinear, and cubic. In this exercise, you
are going to change the resolution (cell size from lower to higher) from 86.146 meters to 5 meters.

82. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
83. In the CP, change the name from “Map” to “Resample”
84. In Catalog pane drag, the Dhul_KTDam raster from Ch10.gdb under Databases
85. In the CP, r-click Dhul_KTDam raster, click Properties and click the Source tab
86. Open the Raster Information you see that the Cell Size of the X and Y is 86.146 meters
Classify an Image 193

87. Close the Layer Properties dialog box

88. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow
89. Scroll down and open the Data Management Tools and then the Raster folder and then open the Raster Processing
90. Click the Resample tool and fill the Resample dialog box as follows:
91. Input Raster: Dhul_KTDam
92. Output Raster Dataset: Dhul_KTDam5
93. Output Cell Size: X = 5, Y = 5
94. Resampling Techniques: Bilinear
95. Run
96. In the CP, r-click Dhul_KTDam5 raster, click Properties and click the Source tab

Result The cell size of Dhul_KTDam5 is now 5 meters.

Classify an Image

The classification provides different colors to the DEM image

97. In the CP, r-click Dhul_KTDam5 image and click Symbology

98. Make sure the Stretch is selected under the Primary symbology
194 10 Raster Format

99. Open the drop-down arrow of Color scheme and check Show names
100. Scroll down and select Elevation 1
101. Close the Symbology pane and save your project

Result the color scheme changed to Elevation 1

Convert Vector Feature into Raster

The Feature to Raster tool in the Conversion Tools converts features to a raster dataset. Any feature class (geodatabase,
shapefile) containing point, line, or polygon features can be converted to a raster dataset. This tool is similar to the polygon
to raster, and it always uses the cell center to decide the value of a raster pixel. The tool will be used to convert the geology
of the Dhuleil shapefile into a raster.

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
2. In the CP, change the name from “Map” to “Conversion”
3. In Catalog pane drag the Geology.shp from Data01under Folders
4. R-click Geology layer click Symbology and under Primary symbology select Unique Values
5. In Field 1 select from the drop-down arrow “Lithology” if necessary click Add All Values
6. Open the More and uncheck “Show all other values”
7. Close the Symbology pane
Convert Vector Feature into Raster 195

8. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow

9. Scroll down and open the Conversion Tools and then open To Raster
10. folder and then open the Raster Processing
11. Click Polygon to Raster tool and fill the dialog box as below
12. Input Features: Geology
13. Value field: Lithology
14. Output Raster Dataset: Geology
15. Cell assignment type: Cell Center
16. Cellsize: 100
17. Check Raster attribute table
18. Run

Result The “Geology” raster is created with the lithology that consists of 4 geological formations and added to CP and to
the Map View. The created raster has an attribute table

19. Close the Polygon to Raster pane and save your project
196 10 Raster Format

Section 3: Terrain Analysis

Create Hillshade and Contour for the Dhuleil DEM

DEM is an excellent raster format that can be used for different terrain analyses. In this exercise, you are going to work with
Dhuleil DEM. The Dhuleil area is part of the Amman-Zarqa Basin, which is considered one of the most important ground-
water basins in Jordan. The hillshade tool in ArcGIS Pro creates a shaded relief raster from a DEM. The DEM contains all
the 3D information about the terrain, but it does not look like a 3D object. To obtain a better expression at the terrain, it is
possible to calculate a hillshade, which is a raster format with a 3D-looking image. The Hillshade is a hypothetical illumina-
tion of a surface based on a given azimuth and altitude for the sun. It creates a 3-D effect that provides a sense of visual relief
for the terrain and is considered the most common way to visualize texture. Using a hillshade enhances the topography of the
landscape.
Section 3: Terrain Analysis 197

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
2. In the CP, change the name from “Map” to “Hillshade”
3. In Catalog pane drag the Dhuleil from Ch10.gdb under Databases
4. R-click Dhuleil image and then Symbology
5. Make sure the Stretch is selected under the Primary symbology
6. Open the drop-down arrow of Color scheme, check Show names and select Elevation 1
7. Close the Symbology pane and save your project
8. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow
9. Scroll down and open the Spatial Analyst Tools and then open Surface folder and then click the Hillshade
10. Fill the dialog box of the Hillshade as follows:
(a) Input raster: Dhuleil
(b) Output raster: HillShade
(c) Accept the Default 315 (azimuth), 45 (altitude), and 1 (Z factor)
11. Run
12. In the CP, select the Hillshade and click the Raster Layer tab on the ribbon
13. In the Effects group, adjust the Transparency slider
14. Save your project

Result Transparency was applied to the Hillshade raster, which allowed us to see the symbology through the hillshade,
yielding a three-dimensional effect.
198 10 Raster Format

Create Contours

The Contour tool creates isolines (contour lines) from the DEM raster and is commonly used to represent surface elevations
on maps. A contour is a line through all contiguous points with equal height values. In this section, 25-meter interval contours
are created using the Dhuleil DEM, which is registered in the UTM coordinate system. The elevation of the Dhuleil DEM
ranges from 404 to 905 m above sea level.

15. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow

16. In the Surface folder under Spatial Analyst Tools, click the Contour tool
17. Fill the Contour dialog box as follows:
(d) Input Surface: Dhuleil
(e) Output feature Class: Contour25
(f) Contour Interval: 25
(g) Base Contour: 400
(h) Contour type: Contour
18. Accept the rest of the default
19. Run
20. In CP, r-click Contour25 and click Symbology
21. In the Symbology pane and under Primary symbology select Graduate Colors.
22. Field = Contour
23. Classes = 5
24. Method = Manual Interval
25. In Classes tab under Upper value type ≤ 525, ≤ 625, ≤ 725, ≤ 825, and ≤ 925
26. Use More drop-down arrow, click Format all symbols and in the Gallery tab, search for Contour and choose Contour
Topographic, Index
27. In the Symbology pane click the back arrow and click Advanced symbology options icon
28. Open Format labels under Rounding make the Decimal places “0”
Create Vertical Profile 199

Create Vertical Profile

Profile is a useful GIS operation for terrain analysis and is a very effective tool for viewing the landscape form. It is created
by drawing a line across an elevation image, reading elevation along the line, and then plotting the shape of the terrain. In
geology, creating a profile is very useful to understand the form of the land and the outcropping formations and the river
morphology in terms of shape and form. In this exercise, you want to create a profile for one stream in the Dhuleil area.
To generate the vertical profile, you must use the “Profile” tool, which generates a line feature with elevation values
extracted along the input line feature. The profile tool can be found in the “Ready To Use” toolbox, which is part of ArcGIS
Online Geoprecessing services. The “Ready To Use” toolbox consists of 3-Toolsets, and the Profile tool is part of the
Elevation toolset. The Profile tool runs remotely on a server associated with ArcGIS Online and consumes 0.01 credit from
your account.

(a) Elevation
(b) Hydrology
(c) Network Analyst

Select a Stream

29. Drag the Stream.shp to the Hillshade map from the Data01 folder
30. In the CP, ensure that the Stream is placed above the Contour25 layer and click the symbol of the Stream and choose
from the Symbology pane the Water (line) symbol
31. In the CP, uncheck the Contour25 layer
32. In the CP, highlight the Stream
33. Click the Map tab on the ribbon, in the Selection group and Select By Attributes button
34. In the Select By Attributes dialog box, fill it as follows:
(a) Input Rows: Stream
(b) Selection type: New selection
(c) The expression should be “Where Stream_ID is equal 48”
35. Click Apply
36. Close the Select By Attributes dialog box
200 10 Raster Format

Result The 48 Stream ID is now selected.

Ready to Use Toolbox

Ready To Use Tools are ArcGIS Online geoprocessing services that use the hosted data and analysis capabilities of ArcGIS
Online. All you need to provide are input features; all the other data necessary for the analysis and the computation is hosted
in ArcGIS Online.
You can use the Ready To Use Tools to solve diverse spatial analysis problems such as the Profile tool. Ready To Use
Tools are also available in the Ready To Use Tools gallery on the Analysis tab in the Geoprocessing group. In order to see
the Ready To Use Tools, you have to sign to your account in ArcGIS Online.

Profile Tool

The Profile tool returns elevation profiles for the input line features

37. Click the Analysis tab, in the Geoprocessing group, open the Ready To Use Tools button (make sure that you are logged
in ArcGIS Online)
38. Click the “Profile” tool, the Profile dialog box opens, and fill it as follows:
(a) Input Line Features: Stream
(b) Profile ID Field: Stream_ID
(c) DEM Resolution: FINEST
(d) Accept the rest of the default
39. Run
Customize the Chart Properties 201

Result A line feature class called “feature_set” was created in Ch10.gdb, and an output profile layer was displayed in the
CP and in the Map View.

40. In the CP rename the Output Profile to “Tributary”

41. In the CP, r-click the Stream, click Selection and then Zoom to Selection

Create Vertical Profile

42. In the CP, uncheck the Stream layer and highlight the Tributary layer
43. Click the symbol of the Tributary layer and make its color blue
44. Click the Data tab on the ribbon, in the Visualize group open the drop-down arrow in Create Chart and select “Profile
Graph”
45. In the CP, r-click Tributary, Create Chart and select Profile Graph.

Result Three things happen: (a) in the CP, a chart called Profile Graph Tributary is added; (b) a profile graph for the tributary
display in the Map View; and (c) Chart Properties of the Tributary pane display.

Customize the Chart Properties

46. In the Chart Properties, click the Axes tab and fill it as follows:
47. Horizontal Axes: Kilometers
48. Vertical Axes: Meters
49. Click the General tab:
50. Chart title: Vertical Profile of Stream Tributary No 48
51. X-axis title: Kilometer
52. Y-axis title: Elevation (m)
53. Close the Chart Properties of the Tributary pane
54. Save the project
202 10 Raster Format

Result the modification adopted in the profile graph of the tributaries

Create Visibility Map

The Visibility tool can show what locations in the raster are visible from a specific location and how many observable loca-
tions it is visible from. The visibility map is based on two types of analysis: the first type is frequency visibility analysis,
which determines which raster surface locations are visible to a set of observers, and the second is observer visibility analy-
sis, which identifies which observers are visible from each raster surface location.

55. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
56. In the CP, change the name from “Map” to “Visibility”
57. In Catalog pane drag the Dhuleil from Ch10.gdb under Databases and the KSCentroid.shp from the Data01 folder
58. In the CP, click the symbol of the KSCentroid and choose Circle 4 and close the Symbology pane.
59. In the Geoprocessing pane click the back arrow and click the Toolboxes
60. Scroll down and open the Spatial Analyst Tools and open the Surface folder
61. Click Visibility tool and fill the Visibility dialog box as below
62. Input raster: Dhuleil
63. Input point or polyline observer features: KSCentroid
64. Output raster: VisibFreq
65. Analysis type: Frequency
66. Accept the result of the default
67. Click Run
New Field: Offseta 203

68. Open the Attribute table of the VisibFreq, you see to records

Result The VisibFreq map is displayed in the Content pane and the Map View. The attribute table of VisibFreq has a value
field with two recods, “0” and “1”. Value 1 indicates the area that can be seen from the KSCentroid location, while Value
0 is the area that cannot be seen from the KSCentroid location.

Create a New Feature Class

69. In the CP, r-click KSCentroid click Data and select Export Features
70. The Export Features dialog box open, fill it as below
71. Input Features: KSCentroid
72. Output Feature Class: KSCent_New
73. Accept the default
74. Click OK

New Field: Offseta

You will add 25-meters height to the OFFSETA field in the KSCent_New feature class. An OFFSETA field will be added
to the observation point (KSCent_New). The OFFSETA field indicates a vertical distance in surface units to be added to the
z value of the observation point.

75. In the CP, r-click KSCent_New, click Data Design and select Fields. This opens the fields view, displaying the layer’s
fields in a tabular arrangement
76. Click the last row in the view that says “Click here to add a new field”
77. Enter a name “OFFSETA” under the Field Name
78. Under Data Type column choose from the drop-down menu “Short”
79. Under Number Format click and, in the Number Format in the Category, select “Numeric” and select “0” for the
“Decimal places” and click OK
204 10 Raster Format

80. Click the Field tab, in the Changes group, click the Save button
81. Close the Fields: KSCent_New tab above the Map View

82. Open the attribute table of KSCent_New

83. R-click OFFSETA and click Calculate Field
84. In the Calculate Field pane fill it as follows:
85. Input Table: KSCent
86. Field Name: OFFSETA
87. SQL statement: OFFSETA = 25
88. Click the Verify (green color check) you get Expression is valid
89. Click OK and close the attribute table of KSCent_New
90. Close the Calculate Field pane and the attribute table of KSCENT_New
Line of Sight Analysis 205

Run the Visbility Tool with the New Field “OFFSETA”

91. Click the back arrow in the Geoprocessing pane

92. In Toolboxes click Spatial Analyst Tools and open the Surface folder
93. Click Visibility and fill it as below
94. Input raster: Dhuleil
95. Input point or polyline observer features: KSCent_New
96. Output raster: VisibFreq25
97. Analysis type: Frequency
98. Accept the result of the default
99. Analysis type: Frequency
100. Run
101. Save the project

Result the visibility map display and the visible area increase due to the added 25 meter height

Line of Sight Analysis

Line-of-sight analysis determines whether two points in the raster DEM are visible. To use this tool, a line should be drawn
between two locations. In this task, you will use first the “Construct Sight Lines” and then the “Line of Sight”. In this
exercise, you will use two observation points: the Lufi Dam (Luhfi_Dam) and the treatment plant (KSCent_New). The
Construct Sight Lines tool will create a line between the two points.
206 10 Raster Format

102. In Catalog pane drag the Luhfi_Dam.shp from Data01 under Folder
103. In the CP, click the symbol of Luhfi_Dam and search for a dam symbol and choose one that you prefer
104. In the Geoprocessing click the back arrow, click in the Toolboxes and expand the 3D Analyst Tools and open the
Visibility tools
105. Click the Construct Sight Lines and fill the pane as follows:
106. Observer Points: Luhfi_Dam
107. Target Features: KSCent_New
108. Output: Sightline (save it in Ch10.gdb)
109. Sampling Method: 2D distance
110. Accept the rest of the default
111. Run

Result The Sightline feature class was created as a line between Luhfi_Dam and KSCent_New. The Sightline is stored in
Ch10.gdb and displayed in the CP and Map View.

Line of Sight

The Line of Sight divides the created line between the two observation points (Luhfi_Dam and KSCent_New) into seg-
ments that are visible (green color) from one point and segments that are invisible (red color). The line of sight can then be
compared with the two visibility maps created previously.

Line of Sight for VisibFreq Map Without OFFSETA

112. On the Construct Sight Lines pane click the back arrow
113. Click the Line of Sight tool under the Visibility tools
114. The Line Of Sight pane display, fill it as below
115. Input Surface: VisibFreq
116. Input Line Features: Sightline
Line of Sight 207

117. Output Feature Class: LineVisibFreq

118. Accept the rest of the default
119. Run
120. Do not close the Line of Sight pane

Result the VisibleLine feature class created and displayed with two colors: red means not seen and green means visible.
This means that if you are standing on the Luhfi_Dam and looking toward KSCentroid, you can see from your location a
small part, and the rest will not be seen.

Line of Sight for VisibFreq25 Map with OFFSETA

121. On the Line of Sight pane, fill it as below

122. Input Surface: VisibFreq25
123. Input Line Features: Sightline
124. Output Feature Class: LineVisibFreq25
125. Run
126. Save your project
208 10 Raster Format

Result The VisibleLine25 feature class is created and displayed with two colors: the red color is dominant, which means
that the view between the Luhfi_Dam and KSCent_New is not seen. The green color means visible. The green color is only
seen close to the location of Luhfi_Dam and KSCent_New. The line of sight is correlated nicely with VisibFreq25.

Create Linear Lines of Sight

There is a way to create the line of sight directly by using the Create linear lines of sight. The Linear Line of Sight tool
shows the surface that is visible between one or more observer and target locations. Use this tool to locate observation posts
tasked with monitoring a specific location or for test siting of radio antennas. The results show the number of visible targets,
sight lines, and a line of sight. The tool requires surface information to perform the calculations; therefore, you have to have
an input surface available or you can add observer and target locations manually by entering known coordinates or by select-
ing locations from the map. In this exercise, you will add two locations manually.

127. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Workflows group, click Visibility Analysis
128. In the Visibility Analysis pane, click the Linear Line Of Sight tab and fill it as follows:
129. Input Surface: VisibFreq
130. Observer Points: Enter Manually
131. Click the Observer Map Point Tool and click a point in the upper left corner of the map

Result On the map, observer points are marked with blue circles.

132. Target Points: Enter Manually.

133. Click Target Map Point Tool and click a point in the lower right corner of the map.
Slope and Aspect 209

Result On the map, target points are marked with red squares.

134. Output Linear Line of Sight Line_Sight

135. OK
136. Click the Visibility Analysis pane

Result The Linear Line of Sight tool produces the Line_Sight feature dataset in Ch10.gdb with four feature classes. The
value entered in the Output Linear Line of Sight text box is used to name the feature dataset and is prepended to the feature
classes within the feature dataset. The Linear Line of Sight tool output is added to the Contents pane in a group layer. The
name used for the feature dataset is also used for the group layer.

Slope and Aspect

The slope is the incline or steepness of the ground surface of a terrain, and it can be measured in degrees from horizontal
(0–90) or percent slope (rise over run multiplied by 100). For example, a slope of 45 degrees equals 100 percent slope. As
the slope angle approaches vertical (90 degrees), the percent slope approaches infinity. The slope for a cell in a raster is the
steepest slope of a plane defined by the cell and its eight surrounding neighbors.
Slope: degree of angle CBE (α)
Rise CE
Slope 100 100%
Run BC

20
Example: CE = 20, BC = 60; Slope 100% 33.3%
60
Note if the rise is more than run, the slope will be more than 100%)
210 10 Raster Format

Derive the Slope

1- Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map
2- In the CP, change the name from “Map” to “Slope”
3- In Catalog pane drag the Dhuleil from Ch10.gdb under Databases
4- In the Geoprocessing click the back arrow, click in the Toolboxes and expand the Spatial Analyst Tools and open the
Surface tools
5- Click the Slope tool
6- The Slope pane dialog box display, fill it as below
7- Input raster: Dhuleil
8- Output raster: Dhuleil_Slope
9- Output measurement: Percent rise
10- Accept the rest of default
11- Run

Result The slope displays 11 classes, and the last class is equal to or less than 1,000. This value indicates a very steep slope
that corresponds to a degree of angle between 84 and 90 degrees.
Q1: What is the range of percent slope values in Dhuleil_Slope?
Quiz: can you run the slope again with “DEGREE” as output measurement?

Classify the Slope into Six Classes

12- In the CP, r-click Dhuleil_Slope and click Symbology

13- In the Symbology pane, select Classify under the Primary symbology
14- Classes 7
15- Method Manual Interval
Reclassify Slope 211

16- In Classes tab, under Upper value change the values from top to bottom to ≤5, ≤10, ≤15, ≤20, ≤25, ≤30, and last num-
ber ≤51 (see image below)
17- Change the Color scheme to Aspect and close the Symbology pane
18- Save the project

Question: Where is the highest and the lowest slope on the map?

Reclassify Slope

The Reclassify tool allows you to change the range of values in the slope. At the same time, it generates an integer raster,
which will allow you to see the attribute table and perform further analysis. You are going to reclassify the Dhuleil_Slope
into 6 classes (5, 10, 15, 20, 30 and 55)

20. In the Geoprocessing click the back arrow, open the Spatial Analyst Tools and then the Reclass tools and click Reclassify
21. The Reclassify pane open, fill it as below
22. Input raster: Dhuleil_Slope
23. Reclass Field: Value
24. Under Reclassification click the Classify tab, make the classes 6 and the method Manual Interval and click OK
25. Enter the following values as seen in the table below:
212 10 Raster Format

Start End New

0 5 1
5 10 2
10 15 3
15 20 4
20 30 5
30 55 6

Note when you finish entering 1 in the first row, click enter in your keyboard to open a new row

26. Output raster Slope_Reclass

27. Check “Change missing values to NoData”
28. Run
29. Save the project
Reclassify Slope 213

Add New Field for Slope_Reclass

You are going to add a new field to the Slope_Reclass. The new field will show the slope range in each class.

30. In the CP, r-click Slope_Reclass and click Data Design then click Fields
31. Click the last row in the view that says “Click here to add a new field”
32. Enter a name “Slope” under the Field Name
33. Under Data Type column choose from the drop-down menu “Text”
34. Under Length, type 12
35. Click on your keyboard the Tab to accept your entering
36. Click the Field tab and in Changes group click the Save button
37. Close “Fields: Slope Reclass”

38. Open the attribute table of “Slope Reclass”

39. The “Slope” field is empty ad you are going to add text into it
40. Populate the “Slope” field by doing the following:
41. Highlight the first row then r-click “Slope” field and click Calculate Field
42. The Calculate Field pane open
43. Under Slope = type "0 – 5"
44. At the bottom of the Calculate Field pane click the Verify icon
45. You will get a message stating that the Expression is valid
46. Click Apply
47. Repeat the previous step for the remaining rows as shown below.
48. Second row “6 – 10” and click Apply
49. Third row “11-15” and click Apply
50. Fourth row “16-20” and click Apply
51. Fifth row “21-30” and click Apply
214 10 Raster Format

52. Sixth row “30 – 55” and click Apply

53. Click OK when you finish to close the Calculate Field pane
54. Open Attribute Table of Slope_Reclass, you will see that the Slope field is populated
55. Close the Slope_Reclass attribute table
56. Save your project

Derive Aspect Layer

The aspect raster map indicates the direction that slopes are facing. The compass direction that a topographic slope faces is
usually measured in degrees starting from north. Aspect can be generated from continuous elevation surfaces. For example,
the aspect recorded for a TIN face is the steepest downslope direction of the face, and the aspect of a cell in a raster is the
steepest downslope direction of a plane defined by the cell and its eight surrounding neighbors.

56- In the Geoprocessing click the back arrow, click the Aspect in the Surface tools
57- The Aspect pane open, fill it as below
58- Input raster: Dhuleil
59- Output raster: Dhuleil_Aspect
60- Accept the default
61- Run
Combine Two Images: Slope and Geology 215

Result Aspect is measured counterclockwise in degrees from 0 (north) to 360 (north), coming full circle). The value of each
cell in an aspect grid indicates the direction in which the cell’s slope faces. Flat slopes have no direction and are given a value
of -1. Nine principal directions are created for the Dhuleil_Aspect

Combine Two Images: Slope and Geology

The Combine tool takes multiple input rasters and assigns a new value for each unique combination of input values in the
output raster. The original cell values from each of the inputs are recorded in the attribute table of the output raster. Additional
items are added to the output raster’s attribute table, one for each input raster.
In the image below, two rasters were input into the Combine function. Note that each unique combination of values from
the two input rasters receives a unique value in the output raster. Two additional fields are added to the output raster attribute
table containing the original values from the two input rasters that created the unique combination. Thus, the parentage of
the output values can be traced back to the original rasters. Note that if a cell contains NoData in any of the input rasters, that
location will receive NoData for the output. There is no limit to the number of rasters that can be combined; however, there
is a practical limit. If there are many rasters all having many different zones, a greater number of unique combinations will
be created, resulting in a large attribute table.

Scenario 10-1 The Water Authority decided to install a lysimeter to estimate the vertical infiltration rate of surficial geol-
ogy in the Dhuleil area. The greatest factor controlling infiltration is the amount and characteristics of the precipitation. In
general, rain falling on steeply sloped land runs off more quickly and infiltrates less than water falling on flat land. In addi-
tion, some outcropping formations allow rainwater to infiltrate at a higher rate downgradient and recharge the permeable
formations. Alluvium and limestone are permeable formations and allow portions of rainwater to infiltrate and contribute to
216 10 Raster Format

groundwater recharge. Therefore, the aim is to find an area with a slope less than 10% that consists of limestone and allu-
vium. Slopes with values of 1 and 2 have slopes equal to or less than 10%.
To perform the analysis, the first step is to combine the two rasters: Slope and Geology together and make them one rater
with the joined attribute table.

62- Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group click New Map
63- Change the name from “Map” to “Geology”
64- In Catalog pane drag the Geology.tif and Slope.tif from the Data02 folder into the Map View
65- Open the attribute table of the Geology.tif and Slope.tif and familiarize yourself with the attribute of both rasters

66- When you done, close the attribute table of both rasters
67- In the Geoprocessing click the back arrow, open the Spatial Analyst Tools and then the Local tools and click Combine
68- The Combine pane dialog box opens and fills it as follows:
69- Input raster: Slope.tif & Geology.tif
70- Output raster: Geol_Slope
71- Run
72- Close the Combine pane
73- Open the attribute table of “Geol_Slope” and familiarize yourself with the output
Find Best Area to Build the Lysimeter 217

Result The combined output raster “Geol_Slope” created with 27 records and the attribute table unites the geology and the
slope in one image and one table.

Note To see the image in color make sure the primary symbology of the “Geol_Slope” is “Unique Value”

Find Best Area to Build the Lysimeter

The lysimeter should be built in an area with a slope less than 10% and consisting of limestone and alluvium. Slopes with
values of 1 and 2 have slopes equal to or less than 10%. To find the areas of the outcropping limestone and alluvium forma-
tions that have slopes less than 10%, certain tools should be used in the spatial analyst tools, and this can be performed using
two different approaches:

(a) Extract by Attribute

(b) Raster Calculator

Both approaches can be used to find the best location to install the lysimeter.

Extract by Attribute tool

This approach allows you to extract the cells of a raster based on a logical query.

74- In the Geoprocessing click the back arrow, open the Spatial Analyst Tools and then the Extraction and click Extract
by Attributes
75- In the Extract by Attributes dialog box, fill it as follows:
76- Input raster: Geol_Slope
77- Choose: Where Slope is less than or equal to 2
78- Click + Add Clause
79- Choose And Geology is equal to 2
218 10 Raster Format

80- Click + Add Clause

81- Choose Or Geology is equal to 4
82- Click the verify that the SQL expression is valid (green check symbol icon)
83- Output raster: BestLocation
84- Run
85- Close the Extract by Attribute pane

Result The BestLocation raster display consists of 10 records where the lysimeter can be built.
Find Best Area to Build the Lysimeter 219

Raster Calculator Tool

In this example, you might use the Raster Calculator in the Map Algebra to select the land that has a slope less than 10%
and consists of limestone and alluvium formation using the two rasters: Geology and Slope.

86- In the Geoprocessing click the back arrow, in the Spatial Analyst Tools open the Map Algebra and click Raster
Calculator
87- In the Raster Calculator dialog box, type the SQL statement as follows:

Combine(“Geol_Slope” <=2) & (“Geology.tif” ==2) | (“Geology.tif” ==4)

88- Output raster: LysLocation

89- Run
90- Save your project
91- Close the raster calculator pane
220 10 Raster Format

Result LysLocation is a raster with two records. Class no. 1 is the location where the lysometer will be installed, and class
0 is the area that is not suitable for lysometer installation.

Calculate the Area of the Lysimeter

93. In the CP, r-click LysLocation and click Data Design then click Fields
94. Click the last row in the view that says “Click here to add a new field”
92- Enter a name “Percent” under the Field Name
93- Enter a name “Percent” under the Alias
94- Under Data Type column choose from the drop-down menu “Double”
95- Under Number Format choose Numeric in the category and make the decimal places equal to 2 and click OK
96- Click on the keyboard tab to accept your entering
97- Click the Field tab in the Changes group and click the Save button
98- Close “Fields: LysLocation”
99- Open the attribute table of LysLocation (The layer has 2 records; the count of the value 0 has 57969 cells and the value
1 has 78687 cells)
100- R-click field “Percent” and point to Calculate Field
101- Fill the Calculate Field dialog box as follows:
Calculate the Area of the Lysimeter 221

102- Input Table: LysLocation

103- Field Name: Percent
104- Under Percent = type (!Count! / (57969 + 78687) * 100)
105- Click Apply and then OK to close the Calculate Field dialog box
106- Save the project and Exit ArcGIS Pro

Results The percentage of the area that is suitable for building a Lysimeter is 57.58%.
Spatial Interpolation
11

Spatial interpolation (SI) is a term used to estimate a value of a data variable at an unsampled site from measurements made
in proximity to or within a range of available data. This technique is based on Tobler’s First Law of Geography, which states
that points close together in space are more likely to have similar values than points that are far apart. Use a neighborhood
of sample points to estimate a value at an unsampled location (Figure below).

Interpolation uses a neighborhood of sample points of known values (blue color) to estimate a value at an unsampled
location (rose color). This method of estimation uses a specific radius from the unsampled point.
Various interpolation techniques are used. These techniques use sample values and X and Y coordinates to estimate the
value of an unsampled point. In general, different methods will generate dissimilar results with the same input data, and no
method is more accurate than others under all conditions. Users seeking accuracy should take into consideration several point
samples and knowledge of the study area.
To produce a continuous representation of the phenomenon in question, interpolation makes use of sampling data. The
sampling data are accurate and qualitative. There are various GIS methods that use the interpolation method. Deterministic
interpolation techniques create surfaces from measured points. They are based on the extent of the similarity, and an example
of such methods is inverse distance weighted (IDW). There is also a degree of smoothing, such as the trend surface analysis
method. Geostatistical interpolation techniques such as kriging are based on statistics and are used for more advanced predic-
tion surface modeling. That also includes errors or uncertainty of predictions. The kriging method is based on the theory of
regionalized variables and is performed by placing an evenly spaced grid over the area for which we have known values and

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_11.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 223
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_11
224 11 Spatial Interpolation

can obtain an estimated surface. The basic idea of kriging interpolation is that every unknown point can be estimated by the
weighted sum of the known points within a certain radius.

Method of Interpolation

Trend Surface Analysis

Trend surface analysis is a simple way to describe large variations, and its function is to find general tendencies of the sample
data rather than to model a surface precisely. The trend analysis calculates the coefficients of a best-fit polynomial surface to
fit a set of spatially distributed data points.
In one dimension (1-D): z varies as a linear function of x
Z b 0 b1 x e
Z - Axis

X - Axis

In two dimensions (2-D): z varies as a linear function of x and y

Z b 0 b1 x b 2 y e
where Z is the interpolated parameter.
X and Y are the coordinates of the wells.
The B coefficient is estimated from the control points.
The aim of this method is to develop a general kind of spatial distribution of an observable fact. The surface can be mod-
eled using a linear or trend surface. Linear trends describe only the major direction and rate of change, while the trend surface
provides progressively more complex descriptions of spatial patterns.

Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW)

Inverse distance weighting is a very popular technique in GIS and is considered one of the simplest interpolation methods.
There are a variety of methods that use weighted moving averages of points within a zone of influence. Interpolation tech-
niques in which interpolation estimates are made based on values at nearby locations weighted only by distance from the
interpolation location (figure below).
Method of Interpolation 225

501
310
3 1.5

4
3
433

420

IDW: Closest 4 neighbors

In general, the simplified formula for IDW is:
Vi
in1
V0 Di
1
in1
Di

where V0 is the predictable value at point 0, Vi is the V value at control point i, Di is the distance between control point i
and 0, and n is the number of known values used in the evaluation.
The weights are a decreasing function of distance, and the user has control over the mathematical form of the weighting
function. The size of the neighborhood can be expressed as a radius or several points.

Global Polynomial (GP)

Global Polynomial or GP fits a smooth surface that is defined by a polynomial to the input sample points such as the TDS
field in the attribute table of the well layer. The GP is similar to taking a piece of paper and fitting it in between the raised
TDS values. The result from GP interpolation is a smooth surface that represents gradual trends in the surface over the area
of interest. It is used by fitting a surface to the sample points when the surface varies slowly from region to region over the
area of interest. While examining and/or removing the effects of long-range or global trends. In such circumstances, the
technique is often referred to as trend surface analysis.

Kriging

Using geostatistical techniques, surfaces incorporating the statistical properties of the measured data can be created.
Geostatistics is based on statistics. These techniques produce not only prediction surfaces but also error or uncertainty sur-
faces, giving you an indication of how good the predictions are. Many methods are associated with geostatistics, but they are
all in the kriging family. Ordinary, simple, universal, probability, indicator, and disjunctive kriging, along with their counter-
parts in cokriging, are all available in the Geostatistical Analyst. Not only do these kriging methods create predictions and
error surfaces, they can also produce probability and quantile output maps depending on user needs. Kriging is the estimation
procedure using known values and a semivariogram to determine unknown values. The procedures involved in kriging incor-
porate measures of error and uncertainty when determining estimations. Based on the semivariogram used, optimal weights
are assigned to unknown values to calculate the unknown ones. Since the variogram changes with distance, the weights
depend on the known sample distribution. The basic equation used in ordinary kriging is as follows:
1 i 1
K d Z xi Z xi d
2

2n n
226 11 Spatial Interpolation

where d is the distance between known points, n is the number of pairs of samples separated by d, and Z is the attribute value
(elevation of known points). The equation indicates that the semivariance is expected to increase as d increases.
One of the most popular approaches is ordinary kriging, which will be applied in this study. Ordinary kriging assumes the
following model: Z(s) = μ + ε(s), where μ is an unknown constant.
One of the main issues concerning ordinary kriging is whether the assumption of a constant mean is reasonable. Sometimes
there are good scientific reasons to reject this assumption. However, as a simple prediction method, it has remarkable flexibil-
ity. The following figure is an example in one spatial dimension:

µ Unknown Mean

ε(s)

Z (s)

The data are consistent with TDS values collected from the Maawil watershed in Oman. The well locations look like they
are distributed randomly. The data are simulated from the ordinary kriging model with a constant mean μ. The true but
unknown mean is given by the dashed line. Thus, ordinary kriging can be used for data that seem to have a trend. There is no
way to decide, based on the data alone, whether the observed pattern is the result of autocorrelation—among the errors ε(s)
with μ constant—or trend, with μ(s) changing with s.
Ordinary kriging can use either semivariograms or covariances (which are the mathematical forms used to express auto-
correlation), use transformations and remove trends, and allow for measurement error.

Connect to Data and Data Integration

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro

2. Click Open another project (upper-right) browse to \\Env_Water\Ch11 select Ch11.aprx and click OK

The Ch11.aprx open and the Content pane include the Map, which is empty. The Map View displays the World Topographic
Map and World Hillshade.
In the Catalog pan r-click Folders and click Add Folder Connection browse to \\Env_Water\Ch11 (or \\Database\
Data_Ch11) open it and highlight Data_Ch11 and click OK
The Data folder has 4 shapefiles:

• Dam.shp
• Stream.shp
• Watershed.shp
• Well.shp.
Density of Groundwater Well 227

The files are registered in UTM zone 40, and the datum is WGS 1972. The watershed contains 1,758 groundwater wells
drilled mainly in the upper part of the Maawil watershed area and downstream from two dams. The wells include information
about the salinity (TDS) and nitrate (NO3) concentrations.

4. In the CP, select the Map and press the F2 key and change the name to Groundwater Density
5. In the Catalog pane, open the Folder and expand the Data under Data_Ch11 and select the Dam.shp, Stream.shp,
Watershed.shp and Well.shp and drag them into Map View
6. Symbolize the Well (use circle 1, blue color, and size 6), the Dam (use dam symbol), the Stream (use Intermittent Water
(line), and line width 1 pt), and the Watershed (use Black Outline (1pt))
7. Close the Symbology pane

The 4 layers, which are in the northern part of the Sultanate of Oman, are displayed in the Map View with the proper
symbology.

8. Save the project

Density of Groundwater Well

The point density calculates a magnitude-per-unit area from point features that fall within a neighborhood around each cell.
Adopting larger radii yields a more generalized density raster, and a smaller radius yields a more detailed raster. Only the
wells that fall within the neighborhood are considered when calculating the density. If no wells fall within the neighborhood
at a cell, that cell is assigned no data (NoData).

Scenario 1 You are a hydrogeologist working for the water resources in Oman. You have been given a task to evaluate the
groundwater along the coast in the Maawil watershed. You decided first to assess if the densities of the wells influence the
salt intrusion and second, if the quality of groundwater downstream of the Maawil and Al-Kabir dams has been improved.
The two dams have been built to store the surface runoff produced by rain in the rainy season, and then the rainwater gradu-
ally infiltrates downgradient and recharging the aquifer and improves its water quality. To answer these two questions, you
decided to use the interpolation technique in GIS environment.

9. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click the Tools button, the Geoprocessing pane
display
10. In the Geoprocessing pane click the Toolboxes tab and open the Spatial Analyst Tools, then open the Density and click
the Point Density tool
11. The Point Density pane dialog box opens, click the Parameters tab and fill it as follows:
228 11 Spatial Interpolation

12. Input point features: Well

13. Population field: TDS
14. Output raster: TDS_Density
15. Output cell size: 50
16. Neighborhood: Circle
17. Radius: 1000
18. Units type: Map
19. Area Units: Square Kilometers
20. Click the Environment tab
21. Output Coordinate System: click the drop-down arrow and select “Well” the following coordinate displays:
WGS_1972_UTM_Zone_40 N
22. Cell Size Projection Method: Preserve resolution
23. Mask: Watershed
24. Accept the rest of the default
25. Run

Result The TDS_Density raster map displays and shows the cell densities using the salinity (TDS) field. Wells that have
high salinity demonstrate larger densities. It is true that the density of the wells in one location could affect the cone of
depression by reducing the water table below the sea level of the Gulf of Oman. This causes the sea saline water to invade
the shallow aquifer along the coast and increase its salinity to a higher concentration.

26. In CP, click TDS_Density and click Symbology tab below the Catalog pane
27. In the Symbology pane under Primary symbology select Classify
28. In Classes choose 5 and the Method choose Manual Interval
29. In the Classes tab under Upper value change the concentration and color from top to bottom 1000 (apatite Blue), 2000
(Cretan Blue), 3000 (Medium Apple), 5000 (Ginger Pink), and 30000 (Mars Red).

30. In the Symbology pane, click the Advanced symbology options tab
Trend Analysis 229

31. Open Format Labels and change the Decimal places to 0

32. Save the project

Trend Analysis

The trend analysis tool can help identify trends in the east–west or north–south direction in one of the input variables of the
dataset. To perform the trend analysis, you must have the X and Y coordinates for all the wells and then use the scatter plot
graph which will show the 1st polynomial order trend by setting the X-axis number to the Y coordinate and the Y-axis number
to the TDS value. Trend surface analysis is a useful tool in early data analysis for delineating basic information and trends
regarding the distribution of data. This type of analysis will be performed on the TDS to detect any trend in the salinity.

33. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
34. In the CP rename the Map to “Trend Analysis”
35. In the Catalog pane, integrate the Well and Watershed from the Data folder
36. In the CP, click the symbol of the Watershed and use the Black Outline (1pt) symbol from the Gallery tab.
37. In the CP, right-click Well and point to Data and click Export Features
38. The Export Features dialog box open, fill it as below
39. Input Features: Well
40. Output Feature Class: Borehole
41. Click OK
42. Remove the Well from the CP
43. In the CP, click the symbol of the Borehole and make it circle 1, blue and size 3.
230 11 Spatial Interpolation

Calculate the Coordinates of the Borehole Layer

44. In the CP, highlight the Borehole, click the Data tab in the ribbon, in the Data Design group, click the Fields button

Result The Fields: Borehole (Trend Analysis) table display

45. At the bottom of the table “Click here to add a new field”
46. Under Field Name, type “Easting”, then click the tab in the keyboard
47. Under Alias, type “Easting”, then click the tab twice in the keyboard
48. Under Data Type, select “Double”, then click the tab 3-times in the keyboard
49. Under Number Format, click the window and then the 3-dots and select in the Category Numeric and make the deci-
mal places 4 and click OK
50. Click again “Click here to add a new field”
51. Under Field Name, type “Northing”, then click the tab in the keyboard
52. Under Data Type, select “Double”, then click the tab in the keyboard
53. Under Number Format, click the 3-dots and select in the Category Numeric and make the decimal places 4 and click
OK
54. In the Fields tab on the ribbon, in the Changes group, click the “Save” button
55. Close the Field: Borehole tab above the Map View by clicking on the X
Salinity Trend Using Scatter Plot 231

56. In the CP, r-click Borehole and open the Attribute Table
57. R-click the Easting header and click Calculate Geometry
58. Fill the Calculate Geometry pane as follows:
59. Input Features: Borehole
60. Target Field: Easting
61. Property: Point x-coordinate
62. Target Field: Northing
63. Property: Point y-coordinate
64. Coordinate System: Borehole (display WGS_1972_UTM_Zone_40 N)
65. Click OK
66. Close the Calculate Geometry Attributes pane then close the Borehole attribute table

Result Easting and Northing are calculated in the projected coordinate system, which is UTM zone 40 and associated with
WGS 1972.

Salinity Trend Using Scatter Plot

Scatter plots visualize the relationship between two numeric variables, where one variable is displayed on the x-axis, and the
other variable is displayed on the y-axis. For each record, a point is plotted where the two variables intersect in the chart.

67. In the CP select Borehole, click the Data tab in the ribbon, in the Visualize group, click the drop-down arrow of the
Create Chart and select Scatter Plot
68. In the Chart Properties -Borehole pane fill it as below
69. Click Data tab:
(a) X-axis Number: Northing
(b) Y-axis Number: TDS
(c) Under Statistics check Show linear trend
(d) Click the linear trend line and change its color to red.
(e) Symbol size: 3
232 11 Spatial Interpolation

70. Click Series tab

(a) change the color of the symbol into dark amethyst color (C11, R5)
71. Click Axes tab
(a) Under the Y-axis, change the maximum to 15000
(b) Check the Log axis
72. Click the Format tab
(a) Click the “Text element” icon and highlight All Text
(b) In the Font select Times New Roman and the Font Size = 12 pt
73. Click General tab
(a) Chart Title: Salinity Increase toward the Coast of Oman
(b) Y axis title: TDS (mg/L)
Save as Layer Files 233

Result The effect takes place directly on the chart and on the Chart in the CP. The scatter plot is displayed in the content
pane and the Map View. The graph shows the trend projection of the south–north trend (YZ-red). The trend means that the
TDS concentration increases toward the Gulf of Oman.

4. Close the Salinity Increase toward the Coast of Oman Chart

5. If you want to modify the chart, you can r-click the Chart in the CP and open

Save as Layer Files

Now, you will save the Borehole and Watershed as layer files. The layer file stores many properties of the input layer, such
as symbology. Both layers will be used in the interpolation techniques.

46. In the CP, r-click Borehole layer, point to Sharing and choose Save As Layer File.
47. Save the “Borehole.lyrx” in Catalog pane in Data_Ch11 under the Folder
48. Repeat the previous step and save the Watershed.lyrx in Data_Ch11 under Folder.
49. Save the project
234 11 Spatial Interpolation

Interpolation

ArcGIS Pro includes different tools to predict values at unmeasured locations. The technique predicts values for cells in a
raster from a limited number of sample data points. The data can represent elevation, rainfall, chemical concentrations, popu-
lation and others. In this paragraph, interpolation tools were used to study the correlation of the TDS (salinity) concentration
in groundwater in different watersheds in the Sultanate of Oman. Three types of interpolations will be discussed: global
polynomial interpolation (GPI), inverse distance weighting (IDW), and kriging.

Global Polynomial Interpolation

Global polynomial interpolation (GPI) is used to demonstrate how TDS varies in groundwater in the watershed. The output
from using this tool is a smooth surface that is defined by a mathematical function (a polynomial) to the borehole points. The
GPI is allowed up to 10 order polynomials.

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
2. In the CP rename the Map to “GPI”
3. In the Catalog pane, integrate the Borehole.lyrx and Watershed.lyrx from the Data_Ch11 folder
4. Click the Analysis in the ribbon, in the Workflows group, click the Geostatistical Wizard
5. The Geostatistical Wizard dialog box displays

6. Under Deterministic methods: select Global Polynomial Interpolation

7. Under the input dataset, fill it as follows:
8. Source Dataset: Borehole
9. Data Field: TDS
10. Click Next
11. Use Mean and click Next

Note 1 This step allows you to choose the order of polynomial from 1 to 9.

12. Select Power 1

13. Next
14. The root-mean-square (RMS) is 1936.07

Comment This step shows three tabs things: the predicted tab displays a scatter plot that show the predicted values versus
measured values.

Note 2 you are going to use different order of polynomial. You are going to use the order of polynomial that generates the
lower RMS. Therefore, you are going to repeat the process by choosing other powers starting from 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9.
The results are shown in the table below.
Convert the Gpi Layer Into Raster Format 235

Result The best polynomial power is 8, as it generates a lower RMS of 1472.72

15. Go back and select Power 8, then click Next

16. Click Finish
17. After reviewing the Method Report, click OK

Result The global polynomial interpolation layer is displayed in the CP and has the same area extent as the borehole layer.

Convert the Gpi Layer Into Raster Format

Converting the Global Polynomial Interpolation layer into raster format is an essential step to clip the interpolated layer to
fit the watershed area using the Mask in the Raster Analysis.

18. Right click Global Polynomial Interpolation layer, click Export Layer and choose To Raster
19. The GA Layer To Rasters pane open
20. In the Parameters tab, fill the dialog box as follows:
(a) Input geostatistical layer: Global Polynomial Interpolation
(b) Output Raster: GPI
(c) Output cell size: 50
21. Click the Environments tab and fill it as follows:
(d) Output Coordinate System: Borehole
(e) Mask Watershed
22. Accept the rest of the default
23. Click Run
24. In the CP, uncheck the Global Polynomial Interpolation layer
236 11 Spatial Interpolation

Result The GPI grid is created and added to the CP, and it is clipped to the watershed area.

Classify the GPI Map

You will classify the GPI raster into 5 classes using the Manual Interval

25. In the CP, highlight the GPI and click the Symbology tab in the Catalog pane
26. Under Primary symbology select Classify
27. Make sure Class 5
28. Method = Manual Interval
29. In the Classes tab and under “Upper Value” and Color, replace the values and color from bottom to top
30. 30000 (red), 3000 (pink), 2000 (yellow), 1000 (green), and 500 (blue)
31. In the Symbology pane click the Advanced Symbology Options icon
32. Open Format labels and change the decimal places to 0
33. Under the label, remove the negative value and replace it by 0.
34. Save the project
Inverse Distance Weighting 237

Result The generated GPI salinity maps for the watershed area indicate that the interpolated surface downstream from the
two dams was dominated by the low TDS with the exception of the lower left side of the watershed due to the lack of bore-
holes in this location. The calculated surfaces are highly susceptible to outliers (extremely high and low values), especially
at the edges. In general, the water quality demonstrates improvement in the south–north direction.

Challenge integrate the dam layer, symbolize it and comment on the water quality downstream of the dam.

Inverse Distance Weighting

Inverse distance weighted (IDW) interpolation determines cell values using a linearly weighted combination of a set of
boreholes. The weight is a function of inverse distance. The surface being interpolated should be the location of the depen-
dent variable. In this section, IDW interpolation techniques are employed using the salinity of the boreholes.

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
2. In the CP rename the Map to “IDW”
3. In the Catalog pane, drag the Watershed.lyrx and then Borehole.lyrx from the Data_Ch11 folder under the Folder into
the Map View
4. Click the Analysis in the ribbon, in the Workflows group, click the Geostatistical Wizard
5. The Geostatistical Wizard dialog box displays
6. Under Deterministic methods, check the Inverse Distance Weighting
7. Under Input Dataset
8. Source Dataset: Borehole
9. Data Field: TDS
10. Click Next
11. Check Use Mean
12. Click Next

Note IDW relies mainly on the inverse of the distance raised to a mathematical power. The power parameter lets you control
the significance of known points on the interpolated values based on their distance from the output point. It is a positive, real
number, and its default value is 2.

13. In the Power window “click to optimize” (it changes from 2 to 1)

14. Maximum Neighbors: 15
15. Minimum Neighbors: 5
16. Accept the rest of the default
17. Next
18. The Root-Mean-Square (RMS) is 1273.06

Result This step shows two things: on the left, a scatter plot (predicted values vs measured values) with three tabs (Predicted,
Error, Distribution) and on the right, a summary and table tabs that consist of (Source ID, Included, Measured, Predicted, and
Error). You can save the table to the feature class, and it will be saved in Ch11.gdb.
238 11 Spatial Interpolation

Note Geostatistical Analyst uses power values greater than or equal to 1. When p = 2 (default value), the method is known
as inverse distance squared weighted interpolation. However, there is no theoretical justification to prefer this value over oth-
ers. The effect of changing p should be investigated by previewing the output and examining the cross-validation statistics.

19. Click Finish and then OK

Result The inverse distance weighting layer is displayed in the CP and has the same area extent as the Borehole layer.

Conversion of the Idw into Raster Format

Converting the inverse distance weighting layer into raster is an essential step in order to clip the interpolated rater to fit the
watershed layer.

20. Right click Inverse Distance Weighting layer click Export Layer and choose To Raster
21. The GA Layer To Rasters pane open
22. Select the Parameters tab and fill it as follows:
(a) Input geostatistical layer: Inverse Distance Weighting
(b) Output Raster: IDW
(c) Output cell size: 50
(d) Accept the rest of the default
23. Click the Environments tab and fill it as follows:
(a) Output Coordinate System: Borehole
(b) Mask: Watershed
(c) Accept the rest of the default
24. Run
25. Close the GA Layer to the Rasters pane and uncheck the Inverse Distance Weighting layer
Classify the IDW Map 239

Classify the IDW Map

You will classify the IDW raster into 5 classes using the Manual Interval

1. In the CP, highlight the IDW and click the Symbology tab in Catalog pane
2. Under Primary symbology select Classify
3. Make sure Class 5
4. Method = Manual Interval
5. In classes tab and under “Upper Value” and under Color, replace the first number by 500 (blue), 1000 (green), 2000 (yel-
low), 3000 (pink), and 30000 (red)
6. In the Symbology pane click the Advanced Symbology Options icon
7. Open Format labels and change the decimal places to 0
8. Save the project

Result The generated IDW salinity maps for the watershed area indicate that the interpolated surface is dominated by high
TDS along the coast.
240 11 Spatial Interpolation

Interpolation Using Kriging

Kriging is the best possible interpolation method based on regression against the observed z values of surrounding data
points and weighted according to spatial covariance values. Kriging assigns weights according to a data-driven weighting
function rather than an arbitrary function. It is still just an interpolation algorithm and will give very similar results to others
techniques such as IDW and GPI. There are various types of kriging, and in this exercise, you will conduct an interpolation
based on Ordinary Kriging.

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
2. In the CP rename the Map to “Kriging”
3. In the Catalog pane, drag the Watershed.lyrx and then Borehole.lyrx from the Data_Ch11 folder under the Folder into
the Map View
4. Click the Analysis in the ribbon, in the Workflows group, click the Geostatistical Wizard
5. The Geostatistical Wizard dialog box displays
6. Under Geostatistical methods: select Kriging/CoKriging
7. Under Input Dataset
8. Source Dataset: Borehole
9. Data Field: TDS
10. Click Next
11. Check Use Mean
12. Click Next
13. Under “Ordinary Kriging”
14. Check the “Prediction”
15. Click Next

16. In Optimize model “click to optimize entire model”

17. Model #1 select Gaussian
18. Accept the rest of the default
19. Next
20. Neighborhood type: Standard
21. Maximum Neighbor: 15
22. Minimum Neighbor 5
23. Accept the rest of the default
24. Click Finish and then click OK
Convert the Kriging Layer into A Raster Format 241

Result The Kriging layer is displayed in the CP and has the same area as the Borehole layer.

Convert the Kriging Layer into A Raster Format

26. Right click Kriging in the CP click Export Layer and choose To Raster
27. The GA Layer To Rasters pane open
28. Select the Parameters tab and fill it as follows:
(a) Input geostatistical layer: Kriging
(b) Output Raster: OrdinaryKriging
(c) Output cell size 50
(d) Accept the rest of the default
29. Click the Environments tab and fill it as follows:
(a) Output Coordinate System: Borehole
(b) Mask: Watershed
(c) Accept the rest of the default
25. Run
242 11 Spatial Interpolation

Classify the Ordinarykriging Raster

You will classify the OrdinaryKriging raster into 5 classes using the Manual Interval

26. In the CP, highlight the OrdinayKriging and click the Symbology tab in the Catalog pane
27. Under Primary symbology select Classify
28. Make sure Class 5
29. Method = Manual Interval
30. In classes tab and under “Upper Value” and under Color, replace the first number by 500 (blue), 1000 (green), 2000 (yel-
low), 3000 (pink), and 30000 (red)
31. In the Symbology pane click the Advanced Symbology Options icon
32. Open Format labels and change the decimal places to 0
33. Close the Symbology pane
34. Save the project

Question 1 Comment on the salinity interpolation.

Question 2 Run the GPI, IDW, and Kriging using the nitrate (NO3) variable.
Watershed Delineation
12

The watershed is an area of land that serves as a catchment for water. From the watershed, the surface water then enters a
common outlet in the form of either a body of water, such as a lake, stream, or wetland, or it infiltrates into the groundwater.
It is simply an area that drains surface water from high elevation to low elevation. The watershed is a hydrologic unit that is
used to model, as it is considered fundamental to hydrologic designs and is used to aid in the study of the movement, distribu-
tion, quality and quantity of water in an area. Watershed analysis is a technique essential in the management, conservation,
and planning of Earth’s natural resources.
Traditionally, watersheds are created manually from topographic maps by locating the water divide. In ArcGIS Pro, the
watershed can be delineated using the Spatial Analyst extension and hydrology tools for watershed delineation.
There are many steps involved in creating the watershed boundary. The delineation of the watershed requires work with
the raster DEM of a study area. If the raster DEM is not available and you have a point elevation, you can use one of the
interpolation techniques such as IDW, GPI, or kriging in ArcGIS Pro to convert the point elevation into DEM. The watershed
can be created using a DEM, as it is considered the main source point to create a watershed model.
After obtaining the DEM, ensure that the raster is depressed. These topographic depressions are also called sinks.
Depression is normal in nature and can be generated during the interpolation process of DEM creation. Depression in the
DEM occurs when a very low elevation relative to neighboring cells is found, which prevents downslope DEM flow-path
routing. These low elevation cells can be removed by increasing their cell value to the lowest overflow point. The table below
shows that the cell in row 3 column 2 is a depression.

Therefore, to use the raster DEM in watershed delineation, the depressions should be removed using the Fill tool.

Flow Direction

The next step is to create a raster grid containing information about flow directions. The Flow Direction tool resides in the
hydrology tool. The Flow Direction tool is used to find drainage networks and drainage divides and is determined by the
elevation of surrounding cells in the DEM. The water can flow only into one cell, and the GIS model assumes no sinks. If

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_12.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 243
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_12
244 12 Watershed Delineation

this does not happen in the output grid, the raster DEM sinks. Flow direction is critical in the hydrologic modeling process
because it determines the direction of flow for each cell in the land topography. The raster grid created by the Flow Direction
tool is based on the D8 flow algorithm. The D8 algorithm is the method for performing flow path analysis for the application
of watershed delineation. The method assigns a cell’s flow direction to one of its eight surrounding cells that has the steepest
gradient. D8 has disadvantages and can be replaced by D∞. The flow direction function is that for each 3 X 3 cell neighbor-
hood, the grid processor stops at the center cell and determines which neighboring cell is lowest. Depending on the direction
of flow, the output grid will have a cell value at the center cell. The values for each direction from the center are 1, 2, 4, 8,
16, 32, 64, and 128. For example, if the direction of the steepest drop was to the left of the current processing cell, its flow
direction would be coded as 16. The figure below shows the output grid cell values with the center cell, as determined by this
matrix:

If a cell flows northwest, then in the output grid, the cell in its location will have a value of 32, and if a cell flows south-
ward, then the value will be 4 (figure below).

Flow Accumulation

The next step in creating the watershed is to run the flow accumulation function, which is an important step in creating the
drainage network and measuring the area of a watershed that contributes runoff to a given cell. Therefore, it is necessary to
determine the ultimate flow path based on the direction of flow of every cell on the topography grid. Flow accumulation
selects cells with the greatest accumulated flow, which will assist in creating a network of high-flow cells. These high-flow
cells should be situated on stream channels and at valley bottoms. Cells that have high accumulation values higher than “1”
correspond to stream flow, and cells having an accumulation value of “0” correspond to ridgelines. Once flow accumulation
is calculated, it is customary to identify those cells with high flow. Higher-flow cells will have a larger value, and the user can
select any threshold number (i.e., > 500), which should be close to the network obtained from the traditional method.

Stream Link

After the stream network is established from flow accumulation, each stream section of the stream raster is assigned a unique
value, e.g., 1, 2, 3, etc. The intersection of the streams is similar to a node, and the stream section is an arc.
Data Connection and Integration 245

Delineate Watershed Based on a Pour Point

To delineate a watershed, you need to select an outlet cell (Pour Point), which is the lowest point in the watershed, where all
flow is directed. The Pour Point can also be any feature, such as a gauge station, dam, bridge, sampling location, confluence
of a tributary with a mainstream or any point of interest in the study area. The Pour Point could be a raster or vector. To obtain
the watershed, the Pour Point should coincide with the flow path of high flow accumulation values in the flow accumulation
raster. Finally, you can use the Watershed tool to extract the whole watershed polygons for the Pour Points or a single water-
shed for a specific stream or tributary. At the end, you can convert your raster watershed to vector so that you can integrate it
and align it nicely with the rest of your digital data.

Scenario 1 You are an ecologist working for DNR, and one of your duties is to delineate the catchment area of the CreditRiver
region. This catchment will be used as an input function to estimate the recharge amount to the groundwater resources in the
area.

Your duty is to do the following:

1. Delineate the watershed based on the whole region.

2. Delineating the watershed based on a single point
3. Convert the watershed raster into vector

Data Connection and Integration

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro

2. Click Open another project (upper-right) browse to \\Env_Water\Ch12 select Ch12.aprx and click OK

Result The Ch12.aprx open and the CP includes the Map, which is empty. The Map View displays both the World
Topographic Map and World Hillshade.

3. Make sure that the Catalog pane is open

4. Click the Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click Add Folder
5. Browse to \\Env_Water\Ch12 (or \\Database\ Data_Ch12) open it and highlight Data_Ch12 and click OK.

Result Inside the Data_Ch12 folder, there are two subfolders, Image and Shapefile, and they contain the required data to
delineate the watershed.
6. Save the project
246 12 Watershed Delineation

Integrate Layers into the Watershed Map

7. In Catalog pane expand the “Folders”, the “Data” folder under Image highlights CreditRiver.tif and drags it into the
Map View.

Result The CreditRiver.tif DEM is displayed in the Map View and added to CP below the Map. The Credit River is in
Burnsville, MN, USA.

8. Rename the Map to Watershed

Delineating the Watershed

Delineating the watershed in ArcGIS Pro is required to use the hydrology tool in the Spatial Analyst. Delineation requires
different steps using a digital elevation model. In this section, the CreditRiver DEM will be used to delineate the
watershed.

Step 1: Run the Flow Direction Tool

This step is very important to run in order to create a raster grid containing the information about flow directions and identify
any sinks (depressions) in the DEM raster, as the DEM raster file will be used for performing the task. The Flow Direction
tool creates a raster of flow direction from each cell to its downslope neighbor, or neighbors, using different methods such as
D8. In the D8 method, the direction of flow is determined by the direction of steepest descent, or maximum drop, from each
cell.

9. Click Analysis tab on the ribbon in the Geoprocessing group click the Tools button
10. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the Toolboxes tab and scroll down and open Spatial Analyst Tools
11. Open the Hydrology tools and click the Flow Direction
12. In the Flow Direction pane, in the Parameters tab fill it as follows:
Step 2: Identify the Locations of the Sink (Sink Tool) 247

(a) Input surface raster: CreditRiver.tif

(b) Output flow direction raster: FlowTemp
(c) Accept the rest of the default
13. In the Environment tab
(d) Output Coordinate System: “CreditRiver.tif” The coordinate is NAD_1983_UTM_Zone_15 N
(e) Accept the rest of the default
14. Run

Result The output raster is an integer and contains 163 records, which means that the CreditRiver raster has sinks. A sink
is a cell or set of spatially connected cells whose flow direction cannot be assigned one of the eight valid values (1, 2, 4, 8,
16, 32, 64, and 128) in a flow direction raster. This can occur when all neighboring cells are higher than the processing cell
or when two cells flow into each other, creating a two-cell loop. ...

Step 2: Identify the Locations of the Sink (Sink Tool)

A sink is a cell or set of spatially connected cells whose flow direction cannot be assigned one of the eight valid values in a
flow direction raster (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, and 128). The Sink tool will create a raster of the sink coded with depth.

15. Click the back arrow in the Flow Direction pane

16. Click the Sink tool and fill the Sink dialog box as follows:
17. Input D8 flow direction raster: FlowTemp
18. Output raster: Sink
19. Run

Comments The output grid shows that the CreditRiver has 12402 sinks. Some sinks are natural in nature, and some are
deficiencies in the DEM during processing. After knowing the number of sinks, we must fill them using the “Fill tool” on the
original CreditRiver raster.
248 12 Watershed Delineation

Zonal Statistics

Now you are going to use the Zonal Statistics to create a raster that will identify the minimum elevation of each sink area in
the raster

20. Click the back arrow in the Sink pane

21. Open Spatial Analyst Tools and open Zonal and click Zonal Statistics
22. The Zonal Statistics open and fill it as follows:
(a) Input raster or feature zone data: Sink
(b) Zone field: Value
(c) Input value raster: CreditRiver
(d) Output raster: SinkMin
(e) Statistics type: MINIMUM
23. Accept the rest of the default
24. Click Run
Step 4: Run the Flow Direction Tool 249

Result The SinkMin raster displays an elevation range between 182.50 and 352.46 m above sea level.

Step 3: Run the Fill Tool

The fill tool function fills the sinks in the CreditRiver raster to remove depressions in the data. The tool iterates until all sinks
within the specified z limit are filled and can also be used to remove peaks, which are cells with elevations greater than would
be expected given the trend of the surrounding surface.

25. Click the back arrow in the Zonal Statistics pane

26. In Spatial Analyst Tools, open the Hydrology tools and click the Fill tool.
27. The Fill pane opens. Fill it as follows:
(f) Input surface raster: CreditRiver.tif
(g) Output surface raster: CreditRiverFill
28. Run

Result Now, CreditRiverFill is a raster free of any depressions.

Step 4: Run the Flow Direction Tool

The Flow Direction tool will run again after filling all the sinks and this time the output is an integer raster with 8 values (1.
2. 4. 8, 16, 32, 64, and 128).

29. Click the back arrow in the Fill pane

30. Click the Flow Direction tool in the Hydrology tools and fill it as follows:
(a) Input surface raster: CreditRiverFill
(b) Output flow direction raster: Flowdirection
(c) Accept the rest of the default
31. Run

Result Flowdirection is an integer raster with an attribute table of 8 records. Values 16 and 64 have the highest frequency,
which means that the direction of the surface flow is west–north.
250 12 Watershed Delineation

Step 5: Create a Flow Accumulation Raster

This step is important because it will tabulate for each cell the number of upstream cells that will flow into it, and the tabula-
tion will be based on the flow direction raster. Cells with high flow accumulation are areas of concentrated flow and may be
used to identify stream channels. Cells with a flow accumulation of 0 are local topographic highs and may be used to identify
ridges. The results of Flow Accumulation can be used to create a stream network by applying a threshold value to select
cells with a high accumulated flow.

32. Click the back arrow in the Flow Direction pane

33. Click the Flow Accumulations tool and fill it as follows:
34. Input flow direction raster: Flowdirection
35. Output accumulation raster: FlowAccum
36. Output Data Type: INTEGER
37. Accept the rest of the default
38. Run

Note the output data type of the raster “FlowAccum” is supposed to be an integer. This means that the raster should have
an attribute table. If the raster has no attribute table, you can build it by using the Build Raster Attribute Table tool.
Run the Flow Accumulation and Save the Output as Float 251

Build Raster Attribute Table Tool

The Build Raster Attribute Table tool creates an attribute table for the “FlowAccum” raster in which its pixel type is a signed
integer.

39. Click the back arrow in the Flow Accumulation pane

40. Open Data Management Tools, open then Raster tools and then Raster Properties
41. Click Build Raster Attribute Table and fill it as follows:
42. Input raster: FlowAccum
43. Check the “Overwrite”
44. Run

Result the attribute table created for the FlowAccum raster and a stream network displayed

Note
Currently, the building of the attribute table is a bug registered by ESRI. To work around this problem, perform the
following: run the Flow accumulation and keep the default (Float), then convert the Float into integer (Math tool under
Int tool) in Spatial Analyst

Run the Flow Accumulation and Save the Output as Float

45. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon in the Geoprocessing group, click the History button, in the History dialog box
double click on the Flow Accumulation
46. Fill the Flow Accumulations tool as follows:
47. Input flow direction raster: Flowdirection
48. Output accumulation raster: FlowAccumF
49. Output Data Type: Float
50. Accept the rest of the default
51. Run
252 12 Watershed Delineation

Convert the Float Raster into Integer Raster

52. Click the back arrow in the Flow Accumulations pane

53. Open the Spatial Analyst Tools, open Math tools, and then open the Trigonometric tool
54. Click the Int tool
55. Input raster or constant value: FlowAcumF
56. Output raster: FlowAcumI
57. Click Run

Result FlowAccumI created and has an attribute table with 16,996 records.

Step 6: Create Source Raster to Delineate WatersheD

The flow accumulation raster will help in deriving the stream network. The stream derivation is based on threshold cell val-
ues, which could be 100, 200, 300, or more cells. The 300 cells mean that each cell has a minimum of 300 cells contributing
to them. The difference between 300 cells and 100 cells is that 300 cells will generate less dense stream networks, while 100
cells will generate denser streams.
Source Raster 253

Source Raster

The source raster required two steps:

1st Step: This step is to use the results of flow accumulation to create a stream network by applying a threshold value to
select cells with a high accumulated flow. In this example, you are going to use the flow accumulation raster that has more
than 500 cells flowing into them. The procedure performs a conditional operation with the Con tool to create a raster where
the value 1 represents the stream network.
58. Click the back arrow in the Int pane
59. Open the Spatial Analyst Tools open the Conditional tools
60. Click the Con tool
61. Input Conditional raster: FlowAcumI
62. Click + New Expression Value is greater than 500
63. After Where select Value then select “is greater than or equal to” type 500
“Where Value is greater than or equal to 500”
64. Input true raster or constant value: 1
65. Output raster: Network
66. Run
254 12 Watershed Delineation

Result The network raster has only 1 record

2nd step: Links are the sections of a stream channel connecting two successive junctions, a junction and the outlet, or a
junction and the drainage divide. In hydrology, these stream segments are called reaches. A junction is related to a pour point
and helps delineate a watershed or drainage sub-basin boundary. In this section, a unique value is assigned to each section of
the network raster. In other words, each segment intersects with another segment as a unique record.

67. Click the back arrow in the Con pane

68. Open the Spatial Analyst Tools and then the Hydrology tools
69. Click Stream Link tool and fill it as follows:
70. Input stream raster: Network
71. Input flow direction raster: flowdirection
72. Output raster: StreamLink
73. Run

Result The StreamLink raster has 1657 segments, and each stream segment is now an independent record and has a
“Value” in the attribute table.

Step 7: Delineate Watershed

74. Click the back arrow in the Stream Link pane

75. Open the Spatial Analyst Tools, then the Hydrology tool
76. Click Watershed tool and fill the dialog box as below
77. Input D8 flow direction raster: Flowdirection
78. Input raster or feature pour point data: StreamLink
79. Pour point field: Value
80. Output raster; Watershed
81. Run
82. In the CP, r-click Watershed select Symbology and change the Color scheme into Basic Random
83. Close the Symbology pane
84. Save your project
Point-Based Watershed 255

Results The watershed is created.

Question How many sub-basins are in the watershed?

Point-Based Watershed

This approach allows the user to derive a watershed either for each stream or based on a point of interest such as any point
of interest along the flow system.

Scenario 2 Your superior asked you to create only one watershed base on the Bridge point shapefile

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
2. In the CP rename the Map to “PourShed”
3. In the Catalog pane, integrate the Flowdirection from the Ch12.gdb under Databases and the Bridge.shp from the
Shapefile in the Data folder under Folders
4. In the CP, click the symbol of the Bridge and search for the proper symbol and choose it.
5. Click again the Watershed tool and fill the Watershed pane as below.
6. Input flow direction raster: Flowdirection
7. Input raster or feature pour point data: Bridge
8. Output raster: PourShed
9. Run
10. Change the color ramp of the PourShed into Bathemetry#1 and close the symbology pane
256 12 Watershed Delineation

Convert Pourshed Raster into a Vector

Now you are going to vectorize the raster dataset “PourShed” by converting it to polygon feature class. If the conversion
allows you to choose which attribute field of the input raster dataset will become an attribute in the output polygon feature
class.

11. Click the back arrow in the Watershed pane

12. Open the Conversion Tools then open From Raster and click Raster to Polygon
13. Fill the Raster to Polygon as follows:
14. Input raster: PourShed
15. Output polygon features: CR_Watershed
16. Click Run

Question what is the total area of the CR_Watershed?

Assignment Calculate the amount of recharge to groundwater in cubic meters per year (m3/year). If the average amount of
precipitation in the CR_Watershed is 120 mm per year, the vertical infiltration rate to the subsurface water-bearing formation
is 5%.
Create Stream Order 257

Hint

1. Recharge = Area (m2) x Infiltration Rate (120 x 0.05 mm)

2. Convert the mm into meter (1 mm = 0.001 m)

Choose the right answer from below

(a) 388,653.54 m3/year

(b) 3,885,535.58 m3/year
(c) 38,865, 355.81 m3/year

Generating the Stream Network

This step converts the network raster into a vector file.

1. Click the back arrow in the Raster to Polygon pane

2. Click Raster to Polyline tool
3. Fill the Raster to polyline as follows:
4. Input raster: Network (from Ch12.gdb)
5. Output polyline features: Stream
6. Accept the rest of the default
7. Run

Result A stream network consisting of 3,865 streams and tributaries was created.

Create Stream Order

Stream ordering is a method of assigning a numeric order to links in a stream network. This order is a method for identifying
and classifying types of streams based on their numbers of tributaries.
258 12 Watershed Delineation

8. Click the back arrow in the Raster to Polyline pane

9. Open Spatial Analyst Tools and then open the Hydrology tools
10. Click Stream Order tool and fill it as follows:
11. Input stream raster: Network
12. Input flow direction raster: Flowdirection
13. Output raster: StreamOrder
14. Method of stream ordering: Strahler
15. Run
16. Close the Geoprocessing pane
17. Save the project and exit the ArcGIS Pro

Result Four stream orders are created, where each segment of a stream within the stream network is treated as a node in a
tree, with the next segment downstream as its parent. The CreditRiver in Burnsville is a five-order
Geostatistical Analysis
13

Geostatistics is a very useful approach that allows users to obtain meaningful information related to data in terms of its dis-
tribution and patterns in GIS. In this chapter, there are some applications of spatial statistics from the GIS environment based
on the field of groundwater resources. The intention is to focus on the application of GIS rather than emphasizing complex
mathematical and statistical theories. Nevertheless, some of the tools such as Measuring Geographic Distribution, Analysis
Patterns, and Mapping Clusters of the Spatial Statistical analysis will be used using groundwater data.

Measuring Geographic Distribution Toolset

Using geographic distribution tools in ArcGIS aims to perform statistical approaches to assist researchers in measuring the
distribution of features. The tools allow users, for example, to calculate a value that represents a characteristic of the distribu-
tion. For example, the center of groundwater wells tap an aquifer. By doing this, you can see how the wells are dispersed
throughout the basin. There are three types of centers that can be calculated: mean center, median center, and central
feature.
The mean center is the average of the X-coordinate and Y-coordinate values of all features. The resulting X, Y coordinate
pair is the mean center. For example, in the Jarash area, there are several wells (Figure below) that spread through the area,
and to find the mean center, we calculate the averages of both X and Y coordinates (table below).

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_13

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 259
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_13
260 13 Geostatistical Analysis

The Central feature is the feature associated with the smallest accumulated distance to all other features in a study area.
For example, there are 6 wells in the Jarash area (Figure below), and to calculate the central feature, the 6 wells (table below)
will be organized into a table. The 6 wells are represented as records and columns, and then the distance between the wells
will be recorded. The sum of the total distance of each well from the rest of the wells is then recorded, and the central feature
will be the well that has the lowest total distance from all other wells. In the table below, you can see that well No 2 is selected
as the central feature.

The Median Center is a slightly different way to calculate the middle and is a point in a pattern that minimizes the dis-
tance between itself and all other points. The median center identifies the location that minimizes the overall Euclidean dis-
tance to the features in a dataset.

Measuring Geographic Distribution

This section explores the mean center with or without weight. To find the center of a randomly distributed feature over an
area, the mean center tool spatial statistics tools must be used. Calculating the center has many applications in applied sci-
ences, especially in geoscience. The center is a feature in the middle of a given set of data and can service all other features
with the shortest time. For example, a set of groundwater wells is in a particular study area and finding the center of the wells
will help build a water tower that will collect water from the surrounding wells faster and with less expense.

Scenario 1 The Water Authority in the Jarash governorate has decided to build an extra water tower in the area to be used
as a distribution center during the summer, as during this period, the demand for potable water increases. The water tower
should be supplied with water from a high-quality groundwater well. The well should be in the center of the wells that belong
to the major cities in the governorate.

You will perform the following:

• Measuring Geographic Distribution Toolset

• Analyzing the Pattern Toolset
• Mapping Clusters
Data Connection and Integration 261

Data Connection and Integration

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro

2. Click Open another project (upper-right) browse to \\Env_Water\Ch13 select Ch13.aprx and click OK

Result The Ch13.aprx open and the CP includes the Map, which is empty. The Map View displays both the World
Topographic Map and World Hillshade.

3. Make sure that the Catalog pane is open

4. Click the Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click Add Folder
5. Browse to \\Env_Water\Ch13 ((or \\Database\ Data_Ch13) open it and highlight Data_Ch13 and click OK.
6. In the CP, name your Map “Geographic Distribution”

7. In the Catalog Pane expand the Folders, Data_Ch13, Data, and then Q1 folder to integrate Governorate.shp, Town.
shp, and Well.shp into the map.

Result The three layers are displayed in the Map View and in the CP. These layers, which show a northern area in Jordan,
are unsymbolized.

Symbolizing the Three Layers

8. Symbolize the Town layer as Square 3 symbol, pink, and size 6

9. Symbolize the Governorate layer as Black Outline (1pt)
10. Now symbolize the Well layer based on Unique Values, choose City in Field 1, click the drop-down of More and
uncheck “Show all other values” and then select “Format all symbols” choose Circle 1 symbol, and change the color
into red (Burma), green (Jarash), and blue (Jubba) and make the size 7
262 13 Geostatistical Analysis

Mean Center

The mean center tool is for tracking changes in the distribution or for comparing the distributions of different types of wells.
The mean center will calculate the average X and Y coordinates of all the wells in the 3 cities in the governorate.
11. In the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click the Tools icon
12. In the Toolboxes tab, open the Spatial Statistics Tools then the Measuring Geographic Distributions subcategory
13. Click the Mean Center tool and fill it as follows:
14. Input Feature Class:Well
15. Output Feature Class:Well_MeanCenter
16. Case Field:City
17. Accept the rest of the default
18. Click Run

Result The Well_MeanCenter layer is a point feature class displayed in the Map View and consists of three records. Each
feature represents a mean center well for each city.

19. In the CP highlight Well_MeanCenter and activate the Symbology pane

20. Symbolize the Well_MeanCenter based on “Unique Values” from the City field, set the symbol of Well_MeanCenter
to “Pentagon 1” and “Size 12”
21. Match the color of the Well_MeanCenter to the color of the respective wells
Mean Center with Weight 263

Mean Center with Weight

The next step is to run the Mean Center again on the well layer using the Weight field. The Weight field in the attribute
table has 2-values; 1 and 2. Value 2 signifies wells that have TDS and NO3- less than 1000 and 45 mg/l, respectively, as well
as wells of depths less than 300 m.
22. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow of the Mean Center pane
23. Click the Mean Center and fill the dialog box as follows:
24. Input Feature Class:Well
25. Output Feature Class:Well_MeanCenterW
26. Weight Field:Weight
27. Case Field:City
28. Accept the rest of the default
29. Click Run
30. Symbolize the Well_MeanCenterW layer precisely as Well_MeanCenter
31. Save the project

Question
1. Does Well_Mean_CenterW align with Well_MeanCenter?
2. If they aren’t aligned, how far are they from each other?
264 13 Geostatistical Analysis

Hint Use the “Measure” tool (Map tab, in Inquiry group, Measure button) to measure the distance between Well_
Mean_Center and Well_Mean_CenterW for each well dataset in the three cities.

Assignment run the Central Feature tool and compare that result with the result of the Mean Center tool and comment
on the result.

Standard Distance and Mean Center

The standard distance calculates the mean center of the displayed features and then draws a buffer around the mean center
with a radius equal to the standard distance value. There are 3 values of the standard deviation. The 1st standard deviation
covers at least 68% of the sample features, the 2nd standard deviation covers at least 95% of the sample features, and the 3rd
standard deviation covers almost 99% of all the samples.

Scenario 2 You are a hydrogeologist in Water Authority and one of your goals is to replenish the groundwater and improve
its water quality using an artificial recharge method. To perform this task, you decided to at least select one well that is
located within 1 standard deviation from the mean center and near the Khaldiyah dam. To execute the assignment, you
decided to calculate the standard circle using a “weight” criterion. The weight is based on the total depth of the wells, and
more emphasis is placed on the wells that are shallower than 100 m. A field called weight is added to the attribute table of
the wells.

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
2. In the CP rename the Map to “Standard Distance”
3. In the Catalog pane, select Dam.shp, Geology.shp, Stream.shp, and Well.shp from the Q2 folder and integrate them
into the Map View.
4. Symbolize the Geology layer based on “Unique Values” using the Code field
5. Uncheck “Show all Other Values” from the “More” dropdown menu
6. Change the Stream symbol to “Stream” symbol and set the “Line width” to 1
7. Change of the symbol of Dam to Dam symbol
8. Set the symbol of the Well to “Circle 1”, size 7, and a blue color
9. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow of the Mean Center pane
10. In the Spatial Statistics Tools category and Measuring Geographic Distributions subcategory, select Standard
Distance
11. Fill the Standard Distance pane as follows:
12. Input Feature Class:Well
13. Output Standard Distance Feature Class:Well_StandDist
14. Circle Size:1 standard deviation
15. Weight Field:Weight
16. Accept the rest of the default
17. Click Run

Result The standard distance tool will calculate the mean center based on the weight and then buffer the mean center to
include approximately 68% of the wells in the study area.

Note To continue with the analysis, you must answer the following questions:

(a) How far is the dam from the center of the buffer?
(b) What is the closest well to the dam that can be used in artificial recharge?
Distance Between Khaldiyah Dam and the Center of the Buffer 265

Distance Between Khaldiyah Dam and the Center of the Buffer

To calculate the distance of the Khaldiyah Dam from the center of the buffer, you must run the Mean Center tool and then
use the Measure tool to find the distance between the center of the buffer and the Khaldiyah Dam.
18. Click the back arrow in the Standard Distance pane
19. In the Measuring Geographic Distributions subcategory, select Mean Center
20. Click the Mean Center and fill the dialog box as follows:
21. Input Feature Class:Well
22. Output Feature Class:MeanCenterDam
23. Weight Field:Weight
24. Accept the rest of the default
25. Click Run

Result The MeanCenterDam layer is displayed in the Map View at a close distance to the Khaldiyah Dam, only 1,135.09
meters from it.
266 13 Geostatistical Analysis

Identify an Injection Well

The next step is to calculate how far each well is located inside the buffer farm from the Khaldiyah Dam. The closest well
to the dam will be used as an injection well in the artificial recharge process. To perform the analysis, you must use the Select
By Location, Select By Attributes and then the Near tool.

Select by Location and Select by Attributes

The Select By Location tool allows you to select the wells that are inside the buffer zone “Well_StandDist”. The Select By
Attributes tool will be used to select the Khaldiyah Dam.

26. On the Map tab, in the Selection group, click Select By Location to open the Select By Location geoprocessing tool
and fill it as below.
27. Input Features:Well
28. Relationship:Completely within
29. Selecting Features:Well_StandDist
30. Accept the rest of the default
31. Click Apply and then OK

Result Fifty-three out of 129 wells were selected.

32. In the CP, r-click the Well, point to Data and click Export Features
33. The Export Features geoprocessing tool open, fill it as below
34. Input Features:Well
35. Output Feature Class:Well_Dam
36. Click OK
37. In the CP, r-click the Well feature class and click Remove

Result The Well_Dam feature class added to Contents pane

38. On the Map tab, in the Selection group, click Select By Attributes to open the Select By Attributes geoprocessing
tool and fill it as below.
39. Input Rows:Dam
40. Selection Type:New selection
41. Select the SQL “Where RESERVOIR is equal to Khaldiyah”
42. Click Apply and then OK

Result The Khaldiyah Dam is selected.

Near Tool 267

Near Tool

Calculate distance and additional proximity information between the wells in the buffer zone and the dam. Three fields in the
attribute table will be added to the Well_Dam feature class that will be used to find the closest well to the Khaldiyah Dam.
The original Well_Dam attribute table has 7 records (ObjectID, Shape, Well_ID, TDS, NO3_ppm, Depth, and Weight). The
attribute table of the Dam has 4 records (FID, Shape, Reservoir, Year). The Feature ID (FID) of the Khaldiyah Dam is
selected.

43. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow

44. Open the Analysis Tools and then the Proximity subcategory and click the Near tool
45. Fill the Near geoprocessing pane as follows:
46. Input Features:Well_Dam
47. Near Features:Dam
48. Accept the rest of the default
49. Run
50. Open the attribute table of Well_Dam

Result Two fields are created in the attribute table of Well_Dam: NEAR_FID and NEAR_DIST. NEAR_FID has one
variable: 1 (which signifies the FID of the Khaldiyah Dam in the Dam attribute table. NEAR_DIST contains the distance
in meters between the wells inside the buffer and the Khaldiyah Dam.

51. In the Well_Dam attribute table, r-click NEAR_DIST and click Sort Ascending

Result The well with Well_Id number 109 is the closest to the Khaldiyah Dam and is 419.88 meters. This well will be used
in artificial recharge

52. Save the project

268 13 Geostatistical Analysis

After finding the distance from each well inside the buffer to the Khaldiyah Dam, answer the following questions about
the closest well to the Khaldiyah Dam.
(a) What is the well depth?
(b) What is the NO3 and TDS concentration?

Analyzing Pattern Toolset: Identify Pattern Based on Location

Some statistical analyses aim to identify patterns, trends, and spatial relationships among features in any environment.
Whether a certain set of data is more likely to show certain characteristics; Some Spatial Analyst tools can recognize the
distribution patterns of geographic layers in a specific study area. In geography, there is a well-documented practice that
demonstrates how features located near each other are more similar than features situated farther away from one another
(Tobler’s First Law of Geography). This idea is common sense; nevertheless, there is always an exception to the rules. For
example, the weather in the Jordan Rift Valley, which is approximately 400 meters below sea level, is not like weather in the
Ajloun Highlands, which is more than 1,000 meters above sea level. Furthermore, these two locations are only 20 kilometers
away from each other. At the same time, the climate of the city of Aqaba is similar to that of the city of Jeddah, even if the
two cities are 970 km away from each other.

Average Nearest Neighbor Tool

To identify patterns based on location, users can use the Average Nearest Neighbor tool. The tool
will detect if features are clustered or dispersed; this tool is used and tested with some degree of confidence level. The
statistical approach behind this method is that the tool will measure the distance from each feature in the dataset to its single
nearest feature neighbor and then calculate the average distance of all measurements. The tool then creates a hypothetical
dataset with the same number of features but placed randomly within the study area. The tool is then run again, the nearest
distance to its nearest neighbor feature is measured, and the average is calculated. The average distance of the random hypo-
thetical data will be assessed with the real data. Two parameters will be generated: I and Z score.
1st parameter: the nearest neighbor index (I) is generated as follows:
Dr
I=
Dh
Null Hypotheses 269

Dr is the calculated average distance of the real data

Dh is the average distance from the hypothetical data

If I<1 The data show clustering

If I > 1, The data show dispersion.
If I=1 The data are randomly distributed

A pattern that falls at a point between dispersed and clustered is said to be random
2nd parameter: the z score will be calculated and is vital to deciding whether to accept or reject the null hypothesis. The
z score is associated with the confidence level and is up to the researchers to adopt which confidence level they are willing
to test with their hypothesis. Each confidence level is associated with the z score, which is simply a standard deviation. For
example, a 90% confidence level has a z score range between -1.65 and + 1.65, and the 95% confidence level has a z score
between -1.96 and +1.96 (table below).

Null Hypotheses

In any statistical testing, you have to propose a null hypothesis and the null hypothesis states that features in the study area
lacking any pattern. This means that the features are not clustered or dispersed but randomly distributed.
Let us assume you are willing to test your hypothesis with 95% confidence level and you are assuming (Null Hypothesis)
that the features are randomly distributed. After running the test, the Z score value that was generated was between -1.96
and +1.96, and the p value was larger than 0.05. Based on the result, you must accept the null hypothesis, which means that
your features are randomly distributed. However, if the Z score fell outside that range for example -2.0 or +2.0 standard
deviations, you must reject the null hypothesis and your observed features are clustering or dispersed.

Scenario 3 You are a hydrogeologist and you have observed a heavy groundwater abstraction from the wells that are used
for irrigation in Wala catchment area. This practice has dramatically lowered the water table in these wells, which affected
the groundwater storage in the whole basin. You have decided to examine if the distance between the wells in the basin are
one of the reasons that generate the intense dropdown. The proximity of the wells to each other could affect the zone of influ-
ence created by well pumping. Your question is, are the wells in the basin that are used for agriculture randomly distributed
or do they have a certain pattern (clustered or dispersed). To determine the answer, you must do the following:
270 13 Geostatistical Analysis

Propose a null hypothesis stating that wells in the basin are randomly distributed.
1. Insert a New Map and name it Nearest Neighbor
2. From Catalog pane, integrate WalaWatershed.shp and Well.shp from the Q3 folder
3. Open Attribute Table of Well, you will see it has 333 records, and the Type field shows that the wells are used for different
purposes. We are interested in selecting the wells that are used for “Irrigation”.
4. Close the Well attribute table
5. In the CP, right click the Well layer and in the “Properties” tab click Definition Query
6. Click “+ New definition query”
7. The query should read as “Where Type is equal to Irrigation”
8. Apply the query and exclude all records from the attribute table that do not meet the criteria.
9. Click OK to exit the Definition Query dialog box

Result The wells used for irrigation are now the only ones displayed, and the rest of the wells are hidden. You can verify
that by opening the attribute table.

10. Open the Well attribute table, you see there are only 271 records used for irrigation
11. Open the attribute table of the WalaWatershed, and record the Shape_Area

Result The area is 1,803,591,128.58 m2.

12. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow of the Near pane
13. In the Spatial Statistics Tools open the Analyzing Patterns
14. Click the Average Nearest Neighbor tool, the tool opens, and fill it as follows:
15. Input Feature Class:Well
16. Distance MethodEuclidian
17. Check Generate Report
18. Area:1803591128.58
19. Click Run
20. Once you have run it, click on “View Details” at the bottom of the Average Nearest Neighbor pane
21. The Average Nearest Neighbor pane open, click on the Parameters tab and click on the “Report File” link (you can
also open it from the folder of the project)
Null Hypotheses 271

Result A two-tailed normal curve graph will be opened and displayed as an html file in your internet browser.

Interpretation The values generated with the normal curve graph will be calculated for you. The generated data are strong
evidence that the wells in the basin are clustered and not randomly distributed; therefore, the null hypothesis will be rejected
based on three pieces of evidence:

1st evidence – Z Score: The calculated Z score in the normal curve is −4.4694 and located on the left tail. This generated
value is less than the Z score of the 99% confidence limit presented in the graph (−2.58). The generated Z score (−4.4694)
in the curve is in the rejection zone and is smaller than the value of −2.58, therefore we can reject the Null Hypothesis.
This confirms that the wells in the basin are clustered and not randomly distributed.
2nd evidence – ƿ-value: The calculated ƿ-value is 0.000008, which is much less than the ƿ-value of the significance level of
the left tail (0.005). Because 0.000008 is much less than 0.005, you can reject the Null Hypothesis that the wells are ran-
domly distributed.
Statistical Background: Confidence limits (C = 0.99) + Significant level (α = 0.01) = 1
The significance level in the left tail is equal to 0.005 (0.01/2).
3rd evidence – I Ratio: the “I” ratio is also 0.858, which is less than 1. Therefore, you can reject the null hypothesis, and we
consider the distribution of the irrigation wells clustered in the basin.
272 13 Geostatistical Analysis

Identify Pattern Based on Values (Getis-Ord General G)

The location of features is not the only aspect determining the clustering but also the values associated with the feature within
a crucial distance of each other. Before running the tool for clustering, you must use a tool to find the important distance that
will be implemented in testing the clustering. The General G-statistics tool will be used to identify high or low distance val-
ues over the entire study area. The distance will reveal whether it is significant or not and will be calculated based on either
Euclidean or Manhattan. The tool also allows users to specify how spatial relationships among features are defined. For
example, in the “fixed distance band”, each feature is analyzed within the context of neighboring features. Neighboring fea-
tures inside the specified critical distance (distance band or threshold distance) receive a weight of one and exert influence
on computations for the target feature. Neighboring features outside the critical distance receive a weight of zero and have
no influence on a target feature’s computations. The distance is an important part of the General G-statistics, as it will show
over which the tool will be ascertained to be significant. The ideal distance will be determined using the “Calculate Distance
Band from Neighbor Count” tool.
The “Calculate Distance Band from Neighbor Count” tool returns the minimum, the maximum, and the average distance
to the specified Nth nearest neighbor (N is an input parameter) for a set of features, for example, 5 wells.
The General G tool calculates the value of the General G index, Z score and p value for a given input feature class. The Z
score and p value are measures of statistical significance that tell you whether to reject the null hypothesis. For this tool, the
null hypothesis states that the values associated with the features are randomly distributed. The Z score value means the
following:
(a) A Z score near zero indicates no apparent clustering within the study area.
(b) A positive Z score indicates clustering of high values.
(c) A negative Z score indicates clustering of low values.

Scenario 4 In the previous scenario we determined that the wells are clustering, this time you must see if the Weight field
has an influence on the clustering of the irrigation wells in the watershed and at what distance the clustering taking place.
The “Weight” field has values from 1 to 5, with 5 representing the most important wells. These wells have the highest yields.
In this exercise, you must run the Calculate Distance Band from Neighbor Count tool to find the ideal distance to run the
General G-statistics. This will show over the tool which will be ascertained to be significant. After identifying the average
distance that will return the minimum, the maximum, and the average distance to the 5th nearest neighbor (N = 5 wells), you
should use values higher and lower than the average return value and run all of them to decide which distance is ideal to use
the General G-statistics.

1. Insert a New Map and rename the Map General G-Statistics

2. From Catalog pane, integrate WalaWatershed.shp and Well.shp from the Q4 folder
3. Open the Attribute Table of Well and you will see it has 333 records
4. In the CP, right click the Well layer and in the “Properties” tab click Definition Query
5. Click “+ New definition query”
6. The query should read as “Where Type is equal to Irrigation”
7. Apply the query and exclude all records from the attribute table that do not meet the criteria.
8. Click OK to exit the Definition Query dialog box
Find the Ideal Distance 273

Result The wells used for irrigation are now the only ones displayed, and the rest of the wells are hidden. You can verify
that by opening the attribute table.

Null Hypothesis Agricultural wells with high ranking values represented by the “Weight” field are randomly distributed in
the study area.

Find the Ideal Distance

Before performing the General G-statistics, you must run the Calculate Distance Band from Neighbor Count tool in order
to find the best distance to use with the General G-statistics.
9. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow of the Average Nearest Neighbor pane
10. In the Spatial Statistics Tools open the Utilities and click Calculate Distance Band from Neighbor Count tool
11. The Calculate Distance Band from Neighbor Count tool open, fill it as below
12. Input Feature Class:Well
13. Neighbors5
14. Distance MethodEuclidian
15. Click Run
16. Click “View Details” at the bottom of the Geoprocessing pan

Result The calculated distance band from the neighbor count displays the result of the minimum, average, and maximum
of 5 neighbor distances (see below).

(a) Minimum Distance = 923.50

(b) Average Distance = 2785.35
(c) Maximum Distance = 8297.21
The average distance is 2785 m with 5 neighbors; therefore, a lower and higher number should be used to determine which
value to use to run the General G statistical tool. The distance we want should be from 2000 to 3600 m at 400-m
intervals.
17. Close the Calculate Distance Band from Neighbor Count
274 13 Geostatistical Analysis

High/Low Clustering (Getis-Ord General G)

Now you will run the High/Low Clustering (Getis-Ord General G) tool using different values and the result will be popu-
lated in the table below. The High/Low Clustering (Getis-Ord General G) statistic is an inferential statistic, which means that
the results of the analysis are interpreted within the context of the null hypothesis. The null hypothesis for the High/Low
Clustering (General G) statistic states that there is no spatial clustering of well weight values. The output result of the tool
produces 5 parameters: Observed General G, Expected General G, Variance, Z score, and p value. The method has no output
layer, but a report is created and demonstrates whether the well distribution in the watershed is clustered, dispersed, or
random.
18. Click the back arrow in the Geoprocessing pane
19. In the Geoprocessing pane under the Spatial Statistics Tools category and Analyzing Patterns subcategory and click
the High/Low Clustering (Getis-Ord General G)
20. Fill the High/Low Clustering (Getis-Ord General G as shown below
21. Input Feature Class:Well
22. Input Field:Weight
23. Check Generate Report
24. Conceptualizing the Spatial Relationship:Fixed distance band
25. Distance Method:Euclidian
26. Standardization:None
27. Distance Band or Threshold Distance:2000
28. Click Run
29. Click View Detail at the bottom of the Geoprocessing pan icon to view the result
30. Open Ch13 folder and click on GeneralG_Result_11852_13792_.html to open it

Result The general G summary displayed 5 values, and GeneralG_Result_11852_13792_.html displayed a normal curve.

Interpretation The p value returned by this tool is small (0.0073), which is much less than the ƿ-value of the significance
level of the right tail (0.005). Therefore, the null hypothesis can be rejected. Because the z score value is positive and higher
than the critical value of the 99% confidence limit presented in the right tail in the graph (2.58), the Null Hypothesis can be
rejected. In other evidence, the z score value is positive, and the observed General G index (0.014) is larger than the expected
General G index (0.012), indicating that high values for the attribute are clustered in the study area.
Spatial Autocorrelation (Global Moran’s I) 275

31. Repeat the previous steps while replacing only the distance with 2400, 2800, 3200, 3600, 4000 and keep the rest of the
distance as the default.
32. Save your project

Interpretation The best distance to choose is the one that is in the rejection zone and has the highest z score. In this case,
2000 m is the best distance to choose.

High low clustering report

Distance p value Z Score Observed General G Expected General G Cluster
2000 0.007 2.67 0.014 0.012 Yes
2400 0.211 1.25 0.018 0.017 No
2800 0.186 1.32 0.024 0.023 No
3200 0.219 1.23 0.029 0.028 No
3600 0.231 1.19 0.037 0.035 No
4000 0.31 1.01 0.044 0.043 No

Spatial Autocorrelation (Global Moran’s I)

Global Moran’s I index measures the spatial correlation using the feature location and an attribute value together to deter-
mine statistically if the data are clustered, dispersed or random. Using the spatial correlation helps define how the variables
are arranged in a study area. The tool calculates three important parameters
276 13 Geostatistical Analysis

(a) Moran’s I Index value

(b) Z score value
(c) p value.
The results of the analysis are always interpreted within the context of its null hypothesis. For the Global Moran’s I statistic,
the null hypothesis states that the attribute being analyzed is randomly distributed among the features in the study area.
If Moran’s index value is near +1.0, clustering is indicated, while an index value near -1.0 indicates dispersion. The
method has no output layer, but a report is created and demonstrates whether the well distribution in the watershed is clus-
tered, dispersed, or random.
The tool will run using the conceptualization of the spatial relationship of Zone of indifference, Euclidian distance, and
distance bands of 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, and 4000. The concept of Zone of indifference in which wells within the
specified critical distance (Distance Band or Threshold Distance) of a target well receive a weight of one and influence com-
putations for that well.

Scenario 5 Your supervisor now asked you to look at the density of groundwater wells per block and would like to hear your
professional judgment on what distance these well densities cluster at. This information is critical in management because it
helps to adjust the rate of pumping of the wells that are located close to each other in the clustering pattern. Your duty is to
do the following:

Spatial Join Between Grid_1000 and Well Layers

To prepare the data for analysis, spatial join must be performed between the wells and the study area represented as a grid
with a cell dimension of 1 kilometer by 1 kilometer.
1. Insert a New Map and rename the Map Moran’s I Index
2. From Catalog pane, integrate Grid_1000.shp, WalaWatershed.shp, and Well.shp from the Q5 folder
3. Click the back arrow in the Geoprocessing pane
4. In the Geoprocessing pane under the Analysis Tools open the Overlay tools and click on Spatial Join.
5. The Spatial Join dialog box will be displayed and filled in as follows:
6. Target Features:Grid_1000
7. Join Features:Well
8. Output Feature Class:Well_Grid
9. Join Operation:Join one to one
10. Match Option:Completely contains
11. Click Run

Result The Well_Grid is created, and it shows the density of the groundwater wells in the Wala watershed. If you open its
attribute table, you will find a field called Join_Count. Some of the values are zero, which indicates the cells that have no
wells. The cells that have one or more wells indicate the number of wells located within each cell. The maximum number of
wells found in one cell is 7, and they are in the northern part of the watershed.
Spatial Autocorrelation (Global Moran’s I) 277

Note The cells that have a “0” value should be hidden before running the statistics.

Create a definition query for Well_Grid

12. The query should read as “Where Join_Count is greater than 0”

13. Apply the query

Result Well_Grid will only show the cells in the grid that have at least one well.

Spatial Autocorrelation (Global Moran’s I)

14. Click the back arrow in the Geoprocessing pane open the Spatial Statistics tools and then the Analyzing Patterns
15. Click “Spatial Autocorrelation (Global Morans I)” and fill the dialog box as follows:
16. Input Feature Class: Well_Grid
17. Input Field:Join_Count
278 13 Geostatistical Analysis

18. Check the Generate Report

19. Conceptualization of spatial relationshipZONE_OF_INDIFFERENCE
20. Distance MethodEUCLIDEAN
21. Standardization:None
22. Distance Band or Threshold Distance500
23. Run
24. Click View Detail at the bottom of Geoprocessing pane
25. Open Ch13 folder and click on MoransI_Result_11852_13792_.html to open it

Result The spatial Moran’s I summary displays 5 values and a normal curve.

Interpretation The p value returned by this tool is small (0.0), which is much less than the ƿ-value of the significance level
of the right tail (0.005). Therefore, the null hypothesis can be rejected. Because the z score value is positive (8.0) and higher
than the critical value of the 99% confidence limit presented in the right tail in the graph (2.58), the Null Hypothesis can be
rejected. Other evidence that the Moran’s Index value is positive (0.06) indicates clustering.

26. Repeat the steps above by using 1000, 2000, 4000, 6000, and 8000 and record all the results in the table below.
27. Save the project
Distance p value Z score Moran’s index Cluster
500 0.00 8.00 0.06 Yes
1000 0.00 3.42 0.28 Yes
2000 0.00 5.03 0.24 Yes
4000 0.00 5.87 0.14 Yes
6000 0.00 7.94 0.13 Yes
8000 0.00 7.62 0.09 Yes

Conclusion The most significant clustering occurs at the distance where the Z score is the highest and Moran’s index (I)
is the lowest. In this situation, significant clustering occurs at a distance of 500 meters.
Cluster and Outlier Analysis (Anselin Local Moran I) 279

Cluster and Outlier Analysis (Anselin Local Moran I)

The cluster analysis will examine a dataset of features (such as wells) with a value associated with the features (such as depth
or salinity). The output result of the analysis will be displayed as a feature class, and the clustering will be highlighted. The
generated output feature class will have the following fields in the attribute table: Local Moran’s I index (LMiIndex), z score
(LMiZScore), pseudo p value (LMiPValue), and cluster/outlier type (COType), in addition to other fields from the original
input layer. The z scores and p values are measures of statistical significance that tell users whether to accept or reject the
null hypothesis. The interpretation of the result will be based on the following fields in the attribute table:
A high positive z score in the attribute table indicates that the surrounding features have similar values (either deep wells
or shallow wells).
The COType field will be HH for a statistically significant cluster of high values (deep wells) and LL for a statistically
significant cluster of low values (shallow wells).
A low negative z score (less than −1.4) for a well indicates a statistically significant spatial data outlier. The COType field
indicates whether the well has a deep well and is surrounded by a well with shallow depth (HL) or if the well has a shallow
depth and is surrounded by wells with deep depth (LH).
No permutations are used to determine how likely it would be to find the actual spatial distribution of the wells you are
analyzing. For each permutation, the neighborhood values around each feature are randomly rearranged and the Local
Moran’s I value is calculated. The result is a reference distribution of values that is then compared to the actual observed
Moran’s I to determine the probability that the observed value could be found in the random distribution. The default is 499
permutations; however, the random sample distribution is improved with increasing permutations, which improves the preci-
sion of the pseudo p value.

Scenario 6 In the Amman-Zarqa basin, there are many groundwater wells drilled for agricultural development, and they tap
two aquifer systems: the carbonate and basalt aquifers. The wells that penetrate the basalt aquifer are in general deeper than
the wells penetrating the carbonate aquifer. Your task is to identify if there is a clustering based on the depth of the wells in
the study area.

1. Insert a New Map and rename the Map “Clustering”

2. From Catalog pane, integrate Geology.shp, Well.shp, and WWTP.shp from Q6
3. In the CP, right click the Well layer and in the “Properties” tab click Definition Query
4. Click “+ New definition query”
5. The query should read as “Where Well_Depth is greater than 0”
6. Click Apply and then OK to exit the Definition Query dialog box

Result The number of records decreases from 2039 to 1787.

280 13 Geostatistical Analysis

7. Set the symbology of the Geology layer to “Unique Values” based on the Lithology field and “Basic Random” color
scheme
8. Hide “All Other Values” by unchecking the option from the “More” dropdown menu

Run Cluster and Outlier Analysis (Anselin Local Moran I)

This method allows you to use a distance of your choice to find a significant number of neighbors. A 1,000 m Euclidean
distance will be used, and wells outside the 1,000 m for a target well are ignored in the analysis for any given well.
9. Click the back arrow in the Geoprocessing pane open the Spatial Statistics tools and then the Mapping Clusters
10. Click “Cluster and Outlier Analysis (Anselin Local Moran I)” and fill the dialog box as below
11. Input Feature Class:Well
12. Input Field:Well_Depth
13. Output Feature Class:MICluster1000
14. Conceptualization of spatial RelationshipsFixed distance band
15. Distance MethodEUCLIDEAN
16. Standardization:None
17. Distance Band or Threshold Distance1000
18. Number of Permutations999
19. Click Run
Cluster and Outlier Analysis (Anselin Local Moran I) 281

Result The new output feature class “MICluster” was created, and its attribute table includes new fields such as local
Moran’s I index, z score, p value, and COType. These fields are important for the interpretation of the results. The z scores
and pseudo p values represent the statistical significance of the computed index values. The “MICluster” is automatically
added to the Content pane with default classification applied to the COType field.

20. Change the symbols of the MICluster to more distinguishable colors and to be slightly larger at your own discretion
21. Save the project

Interpretation A total of 193 wells have HH records, which means a statistically significant cluster of deep wells and sur-
rounding deep wells. The depths of the wells in this dataset range from 230 to 675 meters. The number of wells in the LL
records is 385 wells, which means a statistically significant cluster of shallow wells surrounded by shallow wells. The depths
of the wells in this dataset range from 5 to 217 m. The HL is an outlier in which a high value is surrounded primarily by low
values (HL), and the LH is an outlier in which a low value is surrounded primarily by high values.
282 13 Geostatistical Analysis

Hot Spot Analysis (Getis-Ord GI*)

This is another method to identify statistically significant spatial clusters of wells of high depth (hot spots) and shallow depth
(cold spots) using the Getis-Ord Gi* statistic. The tool creates a new output layer with a z score, p value, and confidence level
bin (Gi_Bin) for each well in the input layer. The z scores and p values are measures of statistical significance that tell the
users whether to accept or reject the null hypothesis. The Gi_Bin field also identifies statistically significant hot and cold
spots as follows:

• Wells (+3 bins) reflect “Hot Spot” statistical significance with a 99% confidence level.
• Wells (+2 bins) reflect “Hot Spot” statistical significance with a 95% confidence level.
• Wells (+1 bins) reflect “Hot Spot” statistical significance with a 90% confidence level.
• Wells (-3 bins) reflect “Cold Spot” statistical significance with a 99% confidence level.
• Wells (-2 bins) reflect “Cold Spot” statistical significance with a 95% confidence level.
• Wells (-1 bins) reflect “Cold Spot” statistical significance with a 90% confidence level.
• Well with 0 bin indicates no apparent spatial clustering

Scenario 7 You are going to use the wells from the previous scenario to identify the hot and cold spot based on the ground-
water wells depth in the Amman-Zarqa basin

1. Insert a New Map and rename the Map “Hot and Cold Spot”
2. Above the Map View activate the Clustering tab, in the CP, r-click Well.shp and Geology.shp and click Copy
3. Above the Map View activate the Hot and Cold Spot tab
4. In the CP, r-click the Hot and Cold Spot map and click Paste
5. Click the back arrow in the Geoprocessing pane open the Spatial Statistics tools and then the Mapping Clusters
6. Click “Hot Spot Analysis (Getis-Ord GI*)” and fill the dialog box as follows:
7. Input Feature Class:Well
8. Input Field:Well_Depth
9. Output Feature Class:HotSpot
10. Conceptualization of spatial RelationshipsFixed distance band
11. Distance MethodEUCLIDEAN
12. Distance Band or Threshold Distance1000
Cluster and Outlier Analysis (Anselin Local Moran I) 283

13. Accept the rest of the default

14. Click Run
15. Change the symbols of the HotSpot to more distinguishable colors and to be slightly larger at your own discretion

Result The HotSpot feature class is automatically added to the Contents pane with default classification applied to the
Gi_Bin field. It was classified into seven classes: Cold Spot, Hot Spot, and no clustering. The cold and hot spots each consist
of three groups. A cold spot is depicted by a 99% – 90% confidence interval, which shows that they are shallow wells and
have a negative Gi_Bin value with a low ZScore. A hot spot is depicted by a 99% – 90% confidence interval, which shows
that they are deep wells with a higher ZScore and a positive Gi_Bin. Wells with ZScore close to 0 and 0 bin reflect no cluster-
ing. In addition, the tool also generates a histogram charting the value of the Well_Depth field.
284 13 Geostatistical Analysis

Summary Statistics

The tool will summarize the attribute table of the HotSpot feature class into seven classes, and the output will be a table
showing the summary
16. Click the back arrow in the Geoprocessing pane open the Analysis Tools then the Statistics
17. Click the Summary Statistics tool to fill the dialog box as follows:
18. Input Table:HotSpot
19. Output Table:HotSpot_Statistics
Summary Statistics 285

20. UnderStatistics Fields

21. Well_Depth:Mean
22. GiZScore Fixed 1000Mean
23. Case Field:Gi_Bin Fixed 1000
24. Click Run
25. Save the project

Table Interpretation A positive z score higher than zero for the wells indicates spatial clustering of deep wells, while a low
negative z score indicates spatial clustering of shallow wells. The higher (or lower) the z score, the more intense the cluster-
ing. A z score near zero and with a 0 bin indicates no clustering.
Proximity and Network Analysis
14

Part I – Proximity Analysis

Proximity analysis is an important function in GIS because it covers a wide range of topics that help in answering many
spatial questions, such as

1. How close is the observation well to a treatment plant?

2. Do any wells fall within 500 meters of a fault system?
3. What are the distances between the wells and the treatment plant?
4. What is the nearest or farthest well from the dam?
5. What is the shortest street network route from the water tower reservoir to the towns?

Proximity tools can be applied in vector and raster formats. The vector-based tools vary in the types of output they produce
and can be explained briefly in this chapter.

Proximity Analysis in Vector Format

Buffer analysis is used for identifying areas surrounding any type of feature, whether it is point, line or polygon. The buffer
polygon is created to a specified distance around an input feature. The output polygon features can be used as an input to overlay
tools (union, intersect, erase, and spatial join). Multi-Ring Buffer creates a new feature class of buffer features using a set of
buffer distances. Buffer function does not take into consideration any physical obstacle that might exist in the area of buffering.

Select by Location After generating the buffer, the user can use the select by location using different relationships between
the buffer and the source feature under investigation. The selection by location does not draw a boundary but selects the
features that are determined by the relationship between the source and target layers.

The near function selects one feature of a set and then calculates the distance to all other features in the same set. The
Near tool adds a new field called “distance” in the attribute table of one of the input layers. The distance will be calculated
based on the map unit of the coordinate system of the map document.
Generate Near Table calculates distances and other proximity information between features in one or more feature
classes or layers. Unlike the Near tool, which modifies the input, Generate Near Table writes results to a new stand-alone
table and supports finding more than one near feature.
The spider diagram will draw a line from each record to the one selected feature to identify the exact location. The
Desire lines tool is part of the business analyst and shows which customers visit which stores. A line is drawn from each
customer point to its associated store point, making it easy to see the actual area of influence of each store. This tool can be
used in environment-related problems.

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_14.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 287
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_14
288 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Scenario 1 The region of Dhuleil-Samra in Jordan is considered an arid area, and groundwater, which is scarce and has
low water quality, is the only source for domestic use. As a hydrogeologist working for the Water Authority, you have been
asked to explore the possibilities of finding two wells with good water quality. One well in each region: Dhuleil and Samra.
The two selected wells were used for water supply in the two regions. The two wells should have the following criteria:

1. The well in the Samra region should be 2.5 km away from the wastewater treatment plant (WWTP) and serve only the
towns in the Samra region.
2. The well in the Dhuleil region should be 2.5 km away from the stream and serve only the towns in the Dhuleil region.
3. Both selected wells should have total dissolved solids (TDS) and nitrate (NO3) less than 1000 mg/l and 20 mg/l,
respectively.

GIS Approach to Solve Scenario 1

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro

2. Click Open another project (upper-right) browse to \\Env_Water\Ch14 select Ch14.aprx and click OK

The Ch14.aprx open and the CP includes the Map, which is empty. The Map View displays both the World Topographic Map
and World Hillshade.

3. In the Catalog pane, r-click Folder and click Add Folder Connection and browse to \\Env_Water\Data_Ch14 (or
\\Database\ Data_Ch14) open it and highlight Data_Ch14 and click OK.
4. In the Content pane rename the Map to “Proximity Analysis”
5. In the Catalog pane, expand Q1 under Folder\Data and select the Region, Road, Stream, Town, Well, and WWTP and
drag them to the Map View.
6. Perform the symbology for the following layers as below:

Layer Symbol Color Size Line Width

Town Square 1 Pink 6
Stream Water (line) 2
Road Minor road
WWTP Water (area)

7. Click the Region symbol, click the back arrow in the Symbology pane, under Primary symbology select “Unique
Values”, Field 1 = Name, click Add All Values, click the More drop-down arrow and uncheck all other values
8. In CP select the Region and click the Labeling tab, in the Label Class group make sure the Field = Name
9. In the Layer group, click the Label button
10. Save the project
Buffer the WWTP in the SAMRA Region 289

Quiz Make the font of the label Time New Roman and size 14?

Buffer the WWTP in the SAMRA Region

11. Click Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group and click the Tools button
12. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the Favorites tab and click the Pairwise Buffer tool.
13. Fill the Pairwise Buffer dialog box as follows:
14. Input Features: WWTP
15. Output Feature Class: WWTP_Buffer
16. Distance: 2.5 Kilometers
17. Accept the other default
18. Click Run
19. In CP select WWTP_Buffer and click the Feature Layer tab in the Effects group, slide the layer Transparency to 50%
(or you can type 50 in the Transparency window)
20. To see the result of the Transparency, in the CP, uncheck the Region, Stream, and Road

Select Wells Outside the WWTP_ Buffer in the Samra Region

In this step, we will select wells located outside the WWTP_Buffer zone in the Samra region that have TDS and NO3 con-
centrations less than 1000 and 20 mg/l, respectively.

Select by Location

21. In the CP select Well layer and click the Map tab, in Selection group, and click Select By Location button
22. Fill the Select By Location as follows:
(a) Input Features: Well
(b) Relationship: Completely within
(c) Selecting Features: WWTP_Buffer
(d) Selection type: New selection
23. Check Invert spatial Relationship
24. Click Apply and then OK to close the Select By Location
290 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Result All wells outside the WWTP_Buffer layer were selected.

18. Open the Attribute Table of the Well

Result The attribute table shows that 34 out of 37 wells are selected.

The next step is to select only one well that is located outside the buffer zone in the Samra region and has TDS and NO3
contents less than 1000 and 20 mg/l, respectively.

Select by Attributes

18. In the CP select Well layer and click the Map tab, in Selection group, and click Select By Attributes button
19. Fill the Select By Attribute dialog box as follows:
20. Input Rows: Well
21. Selection type: Select subset from the current selection
22. Where Region is not equal Dhuleil
23. Click + Add Clause
24. The TDS is less than type 1000.
25. Click + Add Clause
26. In addition, NO3 is less than type 20
Add New Field to the Well Layer 291

Note Before clicking Apply, if you click the SQL icon you will get the following argument.

Region <> ‘Dhuleil’ And TDS < 1000 And NO3 < 20

27. Apply and then OK to exit the Select By Attributes dialog box
28. Save your project

Result Only the Coll.Well/K.S well is selected in the Samra region outside the buffer zone. The TDS and NO3 in the attri-
bute table of the selected well are 186 mg/l and 7.4 mg/l, respectively.

To proceed with the analysis, you must add a new field in the attribute table of the Well.

Add New Field to the Well Layer

29. In the CP r-click Well point to Data Design and click Fields
30. The Fields: Well table open
31. At the bottom of the table “Click here to add a new field”
32. Under Field Name type “Suitable” and click Tab in the keyboard and type again “Suitable” under Alias
33. Under Data Type select “Text”, and under Length type 12
34. In the Field tab on the ribbon in the Changes group click Save button
292 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

35. Close Fields: Well table tab above the Map View
36. Make sure that the Well Attribute Table opens

Note You will see the “Suitable” field is added to the Well Attribute Table and one well is selected from the previous step.

Calculate Field

Now you are going to use the “Calculate Field” tool to populate the “Suitable” field

37. R-click “Suitable” field and click Calculate Field

38. Fill the Calculate Field pan as follows:
39. Input Table: Well
40. Field Name: Suitable
41. Suitable = “Yes” (text requires double quotation)
42. Apply and don’t close the Calculate Field

Result The word Yes is added under Suitable to the well “Col.well/K.S”

43. In the Well attribute table click Switch button

44. In the Calculate Field pane
45. Repeat the previous step but replace the “Yes” with “NO” (see below)
46. Apply and click Ok to close the Calculate Field pane
47. Close the Well attribute table
48. Save your project
Buffer the Stream in the Region 293

Result The attribute table of the well that has a TDS and NO3 less than 1000 and 20 mg/l populated with “YES” and the
rest with “NO” in the “Suitable” field.

Buffer the Stream in the Region

49. In the CP, check the Stream and select it

50. If you close the Geoprocessing from the previous step
51. Click Analysis tab, Geoprocessing group and click the Tools button
52. In the Favorites tab click the Pairwise Buffer tool
53. The Geoprocessing pane fill the Pairwise Buffer as follows:
54. Input Features: Stream
55. Output Feature Class: Stream_Buffer
56. Distance: 2.5 Kilometers
57. Accept the other default
58. Run
59. In CP select Stream_Buffer and click the Feature Layer tab in the Effects group, slide the layer Transparency to 50%
294 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Select Wells in the Dhuleil Region with Low TDS and NO3

The next step is to find the wells that are located outside the Stream Buffer zone in the Dhuleil area that have TDS and NO3
less than 1000 and 20 mg/l, respectively, using the Select By Location and then using the Select By Attributes.

60. In the CP select Well layer and click Map tab and in the Selection group, click Select By Location button
61. Fill the Select By Location dialog box as follows:
(a) Input Features: Well
(b) Relationship: Completely within
(c) Selecting Features: Stream_Buffer
(d) Selection type: New selection
62. Check Invert spatial relationship
63. Click Apply and then click OK to close Select By Location dialog box

Result Seventeen wells from both regions were selected outside the stream buffer.

Now find wells in the Dhuleil area that have TDS and NO3 less than 1000 and 20 mg/l, respectively.

64. Make sure the Well Attribute Table is open

65. In the CP, select Well layer and click Map tab and in the Selection group, click Select By Attributes button
66. Fill the Select By Attribute dialog box as follows:
67. Input Rows: Well
68. Selection type: Select subset from the current selection
69. Click the SQL icon and type the following statement:
Region = ‘Dhuleil’ And TDS < 1000 And NO3 < 20.
70. Click to verify SQL
71. The SQL expression is valid display
72. Click Apply and then click OK to close the Select By Attributes dialog box
Select Wells in the Dhuleil Region with Low TDS and NO3 295

Result Two wells have been selected outside the buffer, therefore, you are going to choose the Halabat Cooper 1 well
because it has a lower TDS.

73. In the Well attribute table, click the first cell of the record that has a TDS = 333, and the color of the record will turn to
yellow.

74. In the Attribute Table click the Unselect button

Result The T.W.15 well that has TDS 333 will be deselected, and the Halabat Cooper 1 well remains selected.

75. In the Well attribute table, r-click Suitable field and click Calculate Field and type “YES” under Suitable and click
Apply and then OK to close the dialog
296 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Result The “Yes” will replace the “NO” under Suitable field

76. Clear the selected and then click “Show all records” and keep the table open
77. At the bottom at the Well attribute table, click “Show All Records”
78. Clear the selected records in the attribute table
79. R-click the Suitable field and click Sort Descending

Result The attribute table of the Well has two wells that have Yes under Suitable.

Hide Wells Using Definition Query

To proceed with the analysis, we must hide all the wells and keep only the two selected wells in the Samra and Dhuleil
regions that have low TDS and NO3.

80. In the CP, r-click Well layer and select Properties, click the Definition Query
81. Click “+ New definition query”
82. Type the following SQL statement
Where Suitable is equal to Yes
83. Click Apply and then click OK to close the dialog box

Result All wells in the attribute table disappear, with the exception of 2 wells that have “Yes” under the Suitable field.

84. In the CP, click the symbol of the Well layer, use Circle 1, size 10, ultra-blue color and click Apply
85. Close the Symbology pane and save the project
Convert Well Shapfile into Feature Classes in Geodatabase 297

Convert Well Shapfile into Feature Classes in Geodatabase

86. In the CP, r-click Well click Data and select Export Features
87. Fill the Export Features dialog box as follows:
88. Input Features Well
89. Output Feature Class: Borehole
90. Click OK

Repeat the previous step, import the Town and call the output feature class “City”.

Comment Importing each feature class individually in order to provide different name for the output feature class from the
input feature class.

Result The Borehole and City are added into the CP and Ch14.gdb. The symbol of booth feature classes is preserved.

91. In the CP, remove the Well and Town

298 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Use the Near Tool

The Near function determines the distance from each town to the two selected nearest wells in the study area. The Near tool
will not generate any output layer but will add two new fields to the attribute table of the City layer. The two fields that are
added will be called NEAR_FID and NEAR_DIST. NEAR_FID contains the feature ID (WellNum) of the borehole layer.
NEAR_DIST stores the distance from each borehole to the nearest city. The value of this field is in meters because the
coordinate system of both data is in Palestine_1923_Palestine_Belt.

Run Near Tool

92. Click back arrow in the Geoprocessing tab

93. Click Toolboxes tab and open Analysis Tools and then the Proximity
94. Click the Near tool and fill the Near dialog box as follows:
(a) Input Features: City
(b) Near Features: Borehole
(c) Accept the rest as a default
95. Run
96. Save your Project

Result If you open the attribute table of the City, you will see two new fields are added NEAR_FID and NEAR_DIST.

Result Explanation First note: In the attribute table of the City two fields are added: Near_FID and Near_Dist. Near_
FID has two variables (1 and 2). Near_FID # 1 corresponds to WellNum 3, and number 1 corresponds to OBJECTID_1 in
the Borehole layer located in the Samra area. Near_FID # 2 corresponds to WellNum 17 under and number 2 under
OBJECTID_1 in the Borehole layer located in the Dhuleil area. The NEAR_DIST field shows the distance between each
borehole and the cities in both Samra and Dhuleil regions.
Save Region, City, and Borehole as a Layer 299

Second note: The Near distance will associate each city with the borehole that has a shorter distance. For example, Hay
Arnous city is in the Dhuleil area and is associated with well No. 3, which is located in the Samra region. The distance
between Arnous city and borehole No. 3 is shorter than the distance between Arnous city and borehole No. 17.
Quiz: Label the Borehole based on the WellNum field and the City layer based on the SETT_Name and measure the
distance in meters between well No 3 and well No 17 and Al Bustan city.

Save Region, City, and Borehole as a Layer

A layer can exist outside of your map or project as a layer file (.lyrx). This allows other users to access the layer you have
built. You can share any layers over the network or by email.
When you add a layer file to a map, it draws exactly as it was saved, provided the data referenced by the layer are acces-
sible. The layer file stores many properties of the input layer, such as symbology, labeling, and custom pop-ups.

Note Layer files saved from ArcGIS Pro cannot be used in ArcMap

1. In the CP, select the Region layer

2. Click the Share tab on the ribbon, in the Save As group, click Layer File (or right-click Region, point to Sharing and
click Save As Layer File)
3. On the Save Layer File dialog box, click New Item and under Data_Ch14 in the Folder create a new folder call it Layers
4. D-click the Layers folder and accept the default name “Region.lyrx” and click Save
5. Repeat the previous step and create a City layer (City.lyrx) and Borehole layer (Borehole.lyrx).
300 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Create a New Field in the Borehole

You are going to create a new field called “ID” in the Borehole layer.

6. In the attribute table of the Borehole, add Field (like in the step above)
7. Call the field ID, Alias ID, Data Type “Short” and Numeric and Save

8. Close the Fields: Borehole and open the Borehole attribute table
9. R-click ID field and click Calculate Field and fill the dialog box as below
10. Place your cursor under ID = and double click “OBJECTID_1”
11. Accept the rest of the default
12. Click Apply and then OK to close the Calculate Field dialog box

Result The ID field in the borehole will be populated with two values, 1 and 2. ID 1 corresponds to well # 3 in the Samra
Region, and ID 2 corresponds to well # 17 in the Dhuleil Region.

Generate Spider Diagram (Desire Lines)

Spider diagrams can be created using the “Desire Lines” tool, which is part of the Business Analyst. Desire Lines will draw
lines from each well to the closest cities in the two regions. The tool can be used in environmentally related problems to see,
for example, the influence of a landfill on groundwater observation wells. Therefore, a line is drawn from the landfill to its
nearest wells, making it easy to see the actual area of influence of the landfill.
To run the Spider Diagram, you must design that both the Borehole and the City attribute tables have two fields related
to each other. The City attribute table has a field “NEAR_FID”, and the Borehole layer has a field “ID” and both fields are
related.
Generate Spider Diagram (Desire Lines) 301

Note To run this function make sure you have the Business Analyst license and you have logged on to your account in
ArcGIS Online.

13. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
14. In the CP rename the Map to “Spider Diagram”
15. In the Catalog pane, select the Borehole.lyrx, City.lyrx and Region.lyrx layers from Layers in the Data_Ch14 folder
and integrate them into the Map View.
16. In the Geoprocessing pane, click the back arrow and in the Toolboxes open the Business Analyst Tools and then open
the Analysis and click the Generate Desire Lines tool
17. Fill the Generate Desire Lines dialog box as follows:
(a) Store Layer: City
(b) Customer Layer: Borehole
(c) Output Feature Class: SpiderDiagram
(d) Store ID Field: Near_FID
(e) Associate Store ID Field: ID
(f) Distance Type: Straight Line
(g) Measure Units: Kilometers
(h) Check Create Report
(i) Open the Report Options
(j) Report Title: Water Distribution
(k) Report Format: PDF
18. Open the Report Options
19. Under Report Title type “Water Distribution”
20. Under Output Report Folder type “DesireLines”
21. Report Format choose PDF
22. Click Run

Result A line will be drawn from each well in each region to the closest town. Five cities in the Dhuleil area will be con-
nected to well # 3 in the Samra area. This is because the distance between well # 3 and these cities is shorter than the distance
between them and well # 17 in the Dhuleil area.

The Output Report Folder “DesireLines” is created and saved in Ch14 folder. It contains the WindRose.pdf file, which
facilitates a better understanding of the city distribution. It summarizes the information in the output attribute table and high-
lights some key facts about the distribution of the city location points.

23. Save your Project

302 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Scenario 2 Your boss asked you to choose the “Hay Arnous” city and build a big water supply tower (WST) in it. The
WST will receive water from pumping the two selected wells in the Dhuleil and Samra regions. The water in the WST will
be distributed into all cities in the two regions by gravity. To carry the work, you need to know the number of cities that will
be served by water and their population. Therefore, you should do the following:

(a) Buffer Hay Arnous city into 3 rings with radii of 4, 11, and 18 km.
(b) Find the number of cities in each ring and their total population

Multi-Ring Buffer Around Hay Arnous City

Hay Arnous city will be buffered using 4, 11, and 18 km radii.

24. In the CP, uncheck the Spider Diagram layer

25. In CP select City, click Map tab, in Selection group, click Select By Attributes button
26. where SETT_NAME is equal to HAY ARNOUS.
27. Click Apply and then OK to exit the Select By Attributes dialog box

Result The ‘HAY ARNOUS’ town is selected.

Multi-Ring Buffer Around Hay Arnous City 303

28. Click the back arrow of the Geoprocessing pan, in the Toolboxes tab, open the Analysis Tools, then the Proximity and
click Multiple Ring Buffer
29. Fill the Multiple Ring Buffer dialog box as follows:
30. Input Features: City
31. Output Feature Class: Arnous_Buffer
32. Distance: type 4 click the + Add another, Type 11 click the + Add another, Type 18,
33. Distance Unit: Kilometer
34. Dissolve Option: Non-overlapping (rings)
35. Method: Planar
36. Accept the rest of the default
37. Click Run

Result A 3-ring buffer is created around the town of ‘HAY ARNOUS’.

38. In CP/r-click Arnous_Buffer select Symbology, choose Unique Values and Field: Distance, Open more and uncheck
Show all other values
39. Close the Symbology pane
40. Deselect the Hay Arnous in the City attribute table
41. Save the project
304 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Select Cities Inside Each Buffer Zone

42. Open the attribute table of the Arnous_Buffer and select the third record (18 km distance)

43. In Cp select City, Map tab in the Selection group, Select By Location
44. Fill the Select By Location dialog box as follows:
(a) Input Features: City
(b) Relationship: Completely within
(c) Selecting Features: Arnous_Buffer
(d) Selection type: New selection
(e) Click Apply and then OK to close the dialog box
45. Open the attribute table of the City

Result There are 14 cities selected out of 28.

46. R-click the field Population and click Statistics

Result The total population of the 14 cities is 365,341.

Proximity Analysis in Raster and Vector Formats 305

47. In the table below, type 14 under Total Cities and type 365,341 under the Total Population
48. Repeat the previous steps and write down the total cities and population of the 4- and 11-kilometer buffer zones.
49. Save your project

Ring Radius (km) Total Cities Total Populations

4
11
18 14 365,341

Scenario 3 You are working in Dhuleil region as a hydrogeologist and you have been given an assignment by your supervi-
sor to verify the argument that the dam in the north–east of the region is playing a role as an artificial recharge. Therefore,
the water stored behind the dam in the rainy season will infiltrate into the subsurface aquifer and improve its water quality.
The water quality will be checked through two parameters, TDS and NO3, in the wells that are located within a 10 km radius
from the dam. Low concentrations of TDS and NO3 in the wells close to the dam mean that the argument is true; otherwise,
it is false.

Proximity Analysis in Raster and Vector Formats

In this section, two approaches will be applied in the raster and vector formats. In the Raster format, the Euclidean Distance
approach will be used. In the vector-based application, the Point Distance will be used. Both approaches aim to evaluate
the effect of the dam on the quality of groundwater.

Euclidean Distance

The raster-based Euclidean distance tool measures distances from the center of source cells to the center of destination cells.
The Spatial Analyst extension can perform analysis where the output layer is in raster format. One of the analyses that can
be applied in Earth sciences is the distance surface. This method creates a continuous layer from a vector input layer. The
vector layer can be a point (groundwater well), line (stream), or polygon (treatment plant).

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
2. In the CP rename the Map to “Recharge”
3. In the Catalog pane, select the Dam, Region, Stream, and Well from \\Data\Q2 folder and integrate them into Map View
4. In the CP, r-click the Region layer and Zoom to layer
5. Symbolize the layers in Content pane as in the table below.
306 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

6. Close the Symbology pane after finishing

Layer Symbol Color Size Line Width

Well Circle 1 Blue 6
Dam Dam Black 14
Stream Water (line) Apatite blue 2
Region Black outline 1 pt

Euclidian Distance

You are going to use a 10 km distance and a cell size of the output raster to be 100 meters

7. Click the back arrow of the Geoprocessing pane and click the Toolbox tab
8. Open the Spatial Analysis Tools, then the Distance and then the Legacy
9. Click the Euclidian Distance and fill it as follows:
10. Input raster or feature source data: Dam
11. Output distance raster: Dam_Distance
12. Maximum distance: 10,000
13. Output cell size: 100
14. Accept the rest of the default
15. Click Environmental tab
16. Output Coordinate System: Region
17. Extent: Region
18. Click the Parameter tab
19. Click Run
Classify the Dam Distance Raster 307

Classify the Dam Distance Raster

20. In the CP, r-click Dam_Distance and select Symbology

21. In the Symbology pane under Primary symbology select Classify choose 10 classes and the Manual Interval for the
Method, and the Color scheme choose Prediction
22. In Classes tab change the numbers under Upper value into 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, and
10,000
23. Under label change, the value in the first class from 0.001 to 0
308 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Result The output Dam_Distance raster is displayed and has 10 classes between 0 and 10,000.

Generate Near Table Tool

The tool determines the distances from input point features to all points in the near features within a specified search radius.
The tool is similar to the Near tool but creates a table with distances between the two sets of point layers. If the default search
radius is used, distances from all input points to all near points are calculated.

50. Click the back arrow in the Geoprocessing pane and in the Toolboxes tab
51. Open Analysis Tools, then the Proximity and click Generate Near Table tool
52. In the Generate Near Table dialog box under Parameters tab fill it as below
(d) Input Features: Dam
(e) Near Features: Well
(f) Output Table: Dam_Well (saved in geodatabase)
(g) Search Radius: 10,000 Meters
(h) Uncheck the find only closest feature
(i) Accept the rest of the default
53. Click F tab, in the Extent select Region
54. Run
Join Two Tables Based on Common Field 309

Result The File Geodatabase Table “Dam_Well” is added into the CP, and it has only 22 wells. The original number of
wells in the region is 37. Only 22 wells are displayed because these wells are within 10,000 meters of the dam.

Note If you open the attribute table of Dam_Well, you will three identical fields that relate the dam to the wells located in
the Region layer

• IN_FID: The Dam feature ID, which has a value of 0

• NEAR_FID: The feature ID of all Wells located in the Region layer
• NEAR_DIST: The distance between the wells and the dam
• NEAR_RANK: The wells are ordered based on their distance from the dam; the closest well has 1 rank, and the far dis-
tance well has a rank of 22.

Join Two Tables Based on Common Field

The next step is to join Dam_Well with the Well layer based on a common field. The WellNum field in the Well layer is
identical to the NEAR_FID field in Dam_Well.

55. In the CP, r-click Well and select Join and Relates and click Add Join
56. Fill the Add Join dialog box as follows:
57. Input Table: Well
58. Input Join Field: WellNum
59. Join Table: Dam_Well
60. Join Table Field: NEAR_FID
61. Check Keep All Target Features
62. Check Index Join Fields
63. Click Validate Join, then click Close
64. Click OK

Result Dam_Well is joined to the Well layer.

310 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

65. Open the attribute table of the Well layer

The NEAR_DIST field in the Well layer is populated with zero <NULL> and numbers larger than zero. The zeros are the
wells that are located more than 10,000 meters from the dam. The wells that are located within 10,000 meters from the dam
and their distance from the dam are listed in the Near_Dist field. Well # 31 is the closest to the dam, and its distance from the
dam is 1857.75 meters, while well # 19 is the farthest from the dam, and its distance is 9980.18 meters.
Quiz: Label the Well layer based on the WellNum field and verify that well # 31 is the closest and well # 19 is the farthest
from the dam as its distance is 9980.18 meters.

Definition Query

This step is necessary to hide wells that are located more than 10,000 meters from the dam.

66. In the CP, r-click Well layer and point to Properties and click Definition Query
67. Click + New definition query
68. Type Where NEAR_DIST is greater than 0
69. Click Apply and then click OK to close the dialog box
70. Save the Project

Result All the wells located farther than 10,000 meters will disappear.
Join Two Tables Based on Common Field 311

Well Classification

To verify the effect of the dam on the quality of the groundwater, the total dissolved solid (TDS) and nitrate (NO3) concentra-
tions of the wells will be classified.

Salinity (TDS) Classification

71. In the CP, r-click Well Layer and select Symbology

72. In the Symbology pane under Primary symbology, select Graduated symbols
73. In the Field select TDS, classes 5, Method select Manual Interval/
74. In Classes tab, under Upper Value, type from top to bottom 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, and keep the last value 4160 and click
Enter
75. Change the color of the TDS symbol from highest to lowest to red, pink, green, blue, then cyan
76. In the Symbology pane, click Advance symbology options (last icon), open Format Labels
77. Check Show thousands of separators

Result The closest wells to the dam have salinities ranging between 1000 and 2000 mg/l. Wells that are located further away
from the dam have higher salinity.

Nitrate (NO3) Classification

78. In the CP, r-click the Well layer and click Copy
79. R-click Recharge map and click Paste
80. Rename the copied Well Layer into Well_Nitrate
81. In the Symbology pane under Primary symbology
82. Change the Field to NO3
83. In Classes tab under Upper value, type from top to bottom, 20, 45, 70, 100, and keep the last value 145 and click Enter
84. In the Symbology pane/click Advance symbology options (last icon), open Format Labels
85. Under Rounding make the Decimal places = 0
312 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

86. Close the Symbology pane

87. Save your Project

Result The lowest concentrations of nitrate are found in the wells that are near the dam.

Conclusion The wells are in an agricultural area, where groundwater is mainly used for irrigation. The high salinity and
nitrate concentration are attributed mainly to return flow and application of chemical fertilizers. Despite the high concentra-
tions of salinity and nitrate, the closest wells to the dam have lower concentrations. This indicates that the stored water in wet
areas behind the dam from precipitation leaks downgradient and improves the quality of water.

Part II – Network Analyst

This section will perform different GIS functions in environment-related problems using the Network Analyst. Network
Analyst is a powerful tool that deals with proximity analysis but is different than the proximity analysis performed in the
previous section. The applications in the Network Analyst tools overcome the concept of straight distance related to some
applications, such as buffering and Euclidian distance calculation. The network analyst will overcome any natural barrier
such as hills, lakes, or where there is absolutely no network of a street system. The network analyst will use the actual dis-
tance that is associated with the street feature, which is an important feature in the application. This approach is more accu-
rate than using the near function or spider diagram model.
To use the Network Analyst, you need to have a line feature that has connectivity such as a street, pipe, railroad, etc. If,
for example, you have a street, you need to calculate the time from the length of the street and the speed of each segment of
the street. The time will be used as the cost in the Network Analyst.
You will perform two scenarios in the Dhuleil-Samra region related to the water supply problem. The data include a
street feature class that consists of many segments. The length and speed are documented for each street segment. A new field
“MINUTES” will be added to the street feature class, which will allow network routing.
Part II – Network Analyst 313

Scenario 4A Samra - Dhuleil region has a shortage of water supply in summer time. The Water Authority decided to use
two good quality water wells to supply the towns in the region with potable water using water trucks to distribute the water.
Your duty is to find how long time it requires the truck to supply the towns in the study region with water.

Scenario 4B After finding the time required to cover the towns in the region, you want to find the actual path and time that
the water truck will take from each well to each town.

To solve Scenario 4A, you should do the following:

(a) Create Network Dataset (Driving_ND)

(b) Build the Driving_ND network dataset

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
2. In the CP rename the Map to “Service”
3. In the Catalog pane, select the Region, Town, and Well_Supply feature classes from the Data\Q3\Region.gdb file geo-
database and integrate them into the Map View.
4. Classify the Region based on the Unique Value using the Name field
5. Symbolize the Town layer (Square 1, size 6, and ginger pink color) and click Apply
6. Symbolize the Well_Supply layer (Circle 1, size 8, and blue color) and click Apply
7. Close the Symbology pane

8. In Catalog pane open the Database folder, r-click Ch14.gdb 6,click New, and select Feature Dataset
9. In the Create Feature Dataset dialog box, fill it as follows:
10. Feature Dataset Name: SamraDhuleil
11. Click Select Coordinate System, click the drop-down arrow of Add Coordinate System and click Import Coordinate
System, browse to \\Data\Q3\Region.gdb and select Region
12. Click OK twice and then click Run

Note The coordinate of the Region feature class is Palestine_1923_Palestine_Belt, and this coordinate system is now
assigned to the SamraDhuleil Feature Dataset.

13. In the Catalog pane, open Ch14.gdb in the Geodatabase, r-click SamraDhuleil Feature dataset and click Import and
select Feature Class(es)
14. Fill the Feature Class To Geodatabase dialog box as follows:
15. Input Features: Street.shp (Data\Q3)
16. Output Geodatabase: SamraDhuleil
17. Click Run

Result The Street feature class created in the SamraDhuleil Feature Dataset in the Geodatabase
314 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

18. Drag the Street feature class into the Map View
19. Open the attribute table of the Street feature class, and you can see that the table has two fields: “Speed” and
“Shape_Length”.

Note The Speed field is in kilometers per hour, and the Shape_Length field is in meters.

The next step is to add a new field “MINUTES” to the Street feature class to calculate the time from the “Shape_Length”
(length of the street) and “Speed” fields. The “MINUTES” field allows users to perform network routing.
Distance Shap _ Length
Time
Velocity Speed

20. In CP, r-click Street feature classes point to Data Design and click Fields
21. At the bottom of the table “Click here to add a new field”
22. Under Field Name type “MINUTES” Data Type “Double”
23. Number Format select Numeric from Category
24. Accept the rest of the default and click OK
25. In the Field tab, in the Changes group, click Save button
26. Save the project
27. Close the Field: Street and make sure the attribute table of the Street is open
28. In Attribute table of Street, r-click MINUTES and click Calculate Field
29. In the Calculate Field dialog box, under MINUTES = type the following Statement:
Create Network Dataset 315

MINUTES = (!Shape_Length! / (!Speed! * 1000) * 60)

Length 69.938 m
Explanation=
: Time = = 0.16 min
Velocity 25 km 1, 000 m 1h
x x
h 1 km 600 min

Click Verify (green arrow) at the bottom of the dialog box.

Click Apply and then OK to close the Calculate Field dialog box.

Result The Minutes field is now calculated.

Close the Calculate Field and attribute table of the Street remove the Street from the CP.

Create Network Dataset

30. In Catalog pane, r-click SamraDhuleil Feature Dataset, click New and choose Network Dataset
31. Fill the Create Network Dataset dialog box as follows:
32. Target Feature Dataset: SamraDhuleil
33. Network Dataset Name: Driving_ND (abbreviated for driving network dataset)
34. Check the Street (this will participate in the networking)
35. Elevation Model: No Elevation (this requires if there are two roads above each other, such as a highway above a
bridge, so the driver cannot turn left or right into the road below it or above it)
36. Click Run

Result The network datasets Driving_ND and Driving_ND_Junction are created in the SamraDhuleil feature dataset.
Only Driving_ND is added to the CP.
316 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

37. Remove the Driving_ND from the CP

Customize and Build the Network

Now you must set up the Driving_ND in the Catalog pane.

38. In Catalog pane, r-click the Driving_ND and click Properties

39. Fill the Network Dataset Properties: Driving_ND as follows:
40. Click the General tab open the Indexes and check the Service-Area Index
41. Next click the Source Settings tab
42. Make sure that below the Edges the Street is display
43. Make sure that below Junctions: Driving_ND_Junctions is display
44. Next, click the Travel Attributes tab, which has several tabs.

45. Click the Travel Modes tab

46. Click on the Menu button (3 lines to the right) and click + New
47. New Travel Mode is added, rename it to “Travel Time”
48. Description: Driving from the wells to different towns using water trucks
49. Under Type make sure Driving is selected
50. Under Cost: Impedance TravelTime (minutes)
51. Under Distance Cost: Length (meters)
Customize and Build the Network 317

52. Click the Cost tab, click on the Menu button and click + New
53. Under Properties change the Name to TravelTime
54. Units: Minutes
55. Under Evaluator in the Street (Along) and under Type Select Field Script

56. D-click under Value, click Field Script setting and change Language to Python
57. Under Result type!MINUTES! (exclamation mark should be before and after the MINUTES and click OK
58. Repeat for the next row Street (Against) by repeating exactly what you did with the Street (Along).

Note MINUTES is a field in the Street attribute table.

318 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

59. Under Turns, click under Type and select Turn Category
60. Under Value click the Turn Category Setting icon
61. The Turn Category Evaluator dialog box will appear.
62. Fill the Turn Category dialog box by changing the Left Turn to 3 seconds and Reverse Turn to 4 seconds
63. Click OK and OK to exit the Network Dataset Properties
Explore the Network 319

Result Driving_ND is filled with the proper direction.

64. In the Catalog pane, r-click Driving_ND, select Build and click Run

Result The Driving_ND and Driving_ND _Junction are built. Driving_ND will be added to CP.

To see the Driving_ND in the CP drag it above the Region and uncheck the Street.

65. In the CP, remove the Driving_ND and save the project

Explore the Network

There are two approaches that allow you to explore how the Driving_ND network is working. You want to check if the street
segments are connected and the travel time along the street segments.
320 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

First Approach

66. In Catalog pane drag the SamraDhuleil feature dataset into the Map View
67. In the CP Highlight, Driving_ND.
68. Click Data tab on the ribbon, in the Explore group, click the Explore Network button
69. Click on any road segment that connected more than street

70. Close the Explore Network dialog box to deselect the segment of the street

Second Approach

The other way to check the connectivity and travel time is to do the following:

71. Click the Analysis tab, in the Workflows group, click the Network Analyst
72. You will see the network Driving_ND that you set
73. Choose Route
74. The Route analysis layers are added to the CP and will allow you to use a network analysis tool to assess whether you
have connectivity or not.
75. In CP, select Route and click on the street segment as in the first approach. It shows the same information as the previous
step
Run New Service Area 321

Result The two approaches show the same result about the connectivity between the streets, direction and the length of the
street segment and the travel time in minutes.

Run New Service Area

The Network Service Area is a region that covers all accessible streets in the study region. The tool shows, for example, that
within 10 minutes, the water truck will travel from the water supply well along the street network and will include all the
streets that can be reached within 10 minutes.
Service areas created by Network Analyst also help evaluate accessibility. Concentric service areas show how accessibil-
ity varies with impedance. Once service areas are created, you can use them to identify how much land, how many people,
or how much of anything else is within the neighborhood or region.

76. Click the Analysis tab, in the Workflows group, click the Network Analyst drop Arrow and choose Service Area

Result The Service Area is added to Ch14.gdb and to the CP and has six new service area layers. The attribute table of all
these feature class layers is empty.

1. Facilities
2. Polygons
3. Lines
4. Point Barriers
5. Line Barriers
6. Polygon Barriers
322 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

To create service areas, you must have facilities to start from. The service area solver simulates all possible paths that a
vehicle, in this scenario, a water truck can travel when departing from the facility. Because water trucks are typically parked
at Well_Supply, you will import Well_Supply into the facilities sublayer. The facilities represent the “Town” that will
receive the water supply from the wells “Well_Supply” by the water truck.

Add Facilities

The facility is the starting location of a water truck. The service area solver simulates all possible paths the vehicle can travel
within an elapsed time when departing from the facility. This adds Well_Supply to the Network Dataset so the Well_
Supply feature class can be used in the Network Service Area analysis.

77. In CP, highlight the Service Area, click on Service Area Layer tab on the ribbon, in the Input Data group, click Import

Facilities button
78. The Add Location pane

79. Fill the Add Locations as follows:

(a) Input network Analysis Layer: Service Area
(b) Sub Layer: Facilities
(c) Input Locations: Well_Supply
(d) Field Name: Name
(e) Check Append to Existing Location and Snap to Network
(f) Snap offset 5 meters
(g) Click Advance
(h) Search Tolerance 2000 meters
80. Accept the rest of the default
81. Click Apply and OK to exit the dialog box
Set the Cutoff Time 323

Result The “facilities” that are under the service area in the content pane are now created with two features that represent
the 2 wells (Well_Supply). The two wells (facilities) are now snapped to the network of the Driving_ND_Junctions, which
indicates that they have now become part of the network dataset and can participate in network analysis.

Set the Cutoff Time

After loading Well_Supply into the Facilities sublayer, the water truck travel distance should be set by setting a cutoff value.
The Water Authority now wants to see the areas that will be served with water supply within different times by the water
truck and to see which would be more effective.

82. Make sure the Service Area in the CP is selected

83. Click Service Area Layer in Travel Setting group, click the Mode drop-down list and select Travel Time
84. Direction: Away from Facilities
85. Cutoffs: type 5, 10, 15

The 5, 10, and 15 cutoffs are minutes, and they represent how much the water truck can cover within these minutes from the
water supply wells to the towns in the region.

86. In the Output Geometry group, click the drop-down arrow and select Polygons
87. Click the Polygon Trim Distance and choose 500 m
88. Select High Precision, Sissolve, and Rings
89. In the Analysis group, click Run
324 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

90. Change the color of the 3 polygons in the CP by assigning cyan, green, and pink for 5, 10, and 15, respectively.
91. Save the project

Result The three polygons that are created represent the area that the water truck will cover in 5, 10, and 5 minutes.

True Path and Total Time Between the Wells and each Town

Scenario 4B After finding the time required to cover the towns in the region, you want to find the actual path and time that
the water truck will take from each well to each town. The actual path can be carried out using the “Closest Facility” tool on
the Network Analyst.

The “Closest Facility” tool is similar to the “Near” tool that has been used earlier, as both measure the distance between
two locations. However, they are different, as the “Near” tool measures the straight line distance, while the “Closest Facility”
tool measures the distance along a network.
To solve Scenario 4B, you have to do the following:

(a) Use the Driving_ND network dataset

(b) Calculate the True Path and Total Time between Wells and Towns

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
2. In the CP rename the Map to “True Path”
3. In the Catalog pane, select the Borehole, City, and Region layers from the Layer folder under the Data_Ch14 in the
Folder and drag them into Map View
Add Facilities 325

4. Remove the labels from the City and Region layers (challenge yourself)
5. In Catalog pane drag the SamraDhuleil feature dataset into the Map View
6. Click the Analysis tab, in the Workflows group, open the Network Analysis drop-down arrow and select the Closest
Facility

Result A set of closest facility layers are added to the CP. There are 6 layers:

(a) Facilities
(b) Incidents
(c) Routes
(d) Point Barrier
(e) Line Barriers
(f) Polygon Barriers

7. In the CP, change the color of the Facilities layer into green and the Incidents layers into blue

Add Facilities

You will use the Borehole layers to load the Facilities sublayer network analysis class. The facilities should be located on
the network to perform the analysis.

8. In CP, highlight the Closest Facilities, click the Closest Facility Layer tab on the ribbon, in the Input Data group, click
Import Facilities
9. Fill the Add Location pane dialog box as below
(a) Input Network Analysis Layer: Closest Facility
(b) Sub Layer: Facilities
(c) Input Locations: Borehole
(d) Field Name: WellNum
326 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

10. Check Append to Existing Locations

11. Check Snap to Network (5 meters)
12. Open Advance and type 2000 meters under Search Tolerance
13. Click Apply
14. Click OK to close the dialog box

Result A total of 2 boreholes were loaded as facilities. The attribute table of the Facilities includes the two boreholes:
Number 3 and 17. The Facilities that represent the two boreholes are snapped to the Network of the street, which indicates
that they are now part of the Network Dataset and can participate in network analysis.

Add an Incident

The location of the boreholes site is an incident. The closest facility solver finds one or more cities that are closest to the
borehole location.

15. In CP, select Closest Facilities and click the Closest Facility Layer tab, and in the Input Data, click Import Incidents
16. Fill the Add Location pane as follows:
(a) Input Network Analysis Layer: Closest Facility
(b) Sub Layer: Incidents
(c) Input Locations: City
(d) Field Name: SETT_NAME
17. Check Append to Existing Locations
18. Check Snap to Network, Snap Offset 5 meters
19. Advanced Search Tolerance 2000 meters
20. Accept the rest of the default
21. Click Apply
Add an Incident 327

22. Click OK to close the dialog box

Result The incidents are connected in the network, and the number of incidents is 28, which is similar to the number of
towns.

23. In CP highlight the Closest Facilities and click Closest Facility Layer tab, in the Travel Setting group AND SELECT
THE FOLLOWING
24. Mode: Travel Time
25. Direction: Away from Facilities
26. Click drop-down Cost Attributes to Accumulate along Output Lines check the TravelTime (minutes)
27. Facilities = 1 (because we have only 2 wells)
28. In the Output Geometry group, choose Along Network
29. Click Run
30. Output Geometry group, choose Straight Lines
31. Click Run

Result When you run Along Network, it will generate Routes along the network street. When using straight lines, it gener-
ates a straight line, which is easy to see.
328 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Classify the Straight Lines Routes

32. Open the attribute table of the Routes; you will see a field called FacilityID.
33. In CP r-click Routes, click Symbology, Unique Values, Field 1=Facility ID, click Add All Values
34. Change the first color to red, width 2, change the second line green, width 2, click Apply
35. Close the Symbology pane
36. Save the project
Create the Route Layer 329

Result The image shows the direction from each borehole to the cities.

Create the Route Layer

A route layer provides the structure and properties needed to set up and solve route problems. It also contains the results after
solving.

36. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map button
37. In the CP rename the Map to “Route”
38. In the Catalog pane, select the Borehole, City, and Region layers from the Layer folder under the Data_Ch14 in the
Folder and drag them into Map View.
39. Remove the labels from the City and Region layers (challenge yourself)
40. In Catalog pane drag the SamraDhuleil feature dataset into the Map View

41. Click the Analysis tab, in the Workflows group, open the Network Analysis drop-down arrow and select the Route

Result The Route layer is added to the CP, and it includes several sublayers that hold the following sublayers:

1. Stops
2. Routes
3. Point Barriers
4. Line Barriers
5. Polygon Barriers

The route references the Driving _ND network dataset because the network was in the CP when the route layer was
created.
330 14 Proximity and Network Analysis

Create Stops

42. In the CP, click Route under the Route Map to select the group layer.
43. Click the Route Layer tab on the ribbon, in the Input Data group, click Create Features button.
44. The Create Features pane dialog box open showing a list of layers that can be edited

45. Under Route: Stops, click Stops.

46. Use the Point tool to create a 4-stops on the Driving _ND network dataset on the map. Create 2-stops in Samra and
2-stops in Dhuleil regions

47. On the Edit tab, in the Selection group, click Attributes .

48. In the Attributes pane appears.
49. Select the lower stop you created in Samra region and in the Attributes tab change the name to Samra1, then click the
upper stop in Samra region and change the name to Samra2.
50. Select the lower stop you created in Dhuleil region and in the Attributes tab change the name to Dhuleil1, then click the
upper stop in Dhuleil region and change the name to Dhuleil2
51. In the Manage Edits group, click Save, and Yes to save all Edits
Run Analysis 331

Run Analysis

52. Click the Route Layer tab, in the Analysis group, click Run .

Result The fastest path through the network, connecting all the stops you created, will be displayed. The stop symbol on the
map shows the sequence number in the order in which the stops were entered and visited by the route solver.
3-D Visualization
15

The ArcGIS 3D Analyst extension in ArcGIS Pro provides tools for creating, visualizing, and analyzing GIS data in a three-
dimensional (3D) context. The ArcGIS 3D Analyst extension toolbox provides a collection of geoprocessing tools that
enable a wide variety of analytical, data management, and data conversion operations on surface models and three-dimen-
sional vector data. The toolbox is conveniently organized into toolsets that define the scope of tasks accomplished by the
tools they contain. You must enable ArcGIS 3D Analyst extension before you can work with it in ArcGIS Pro. ArcGIS Pro
requires that an administrator of an organization assign software licenses and extensions. Once you have been assigned
ArcGIS 3D Analyst extension, you gain access to the 3D Analyst tools. ArcGIS Pro allows you to work with data in 2D and
3D environments from within the same application. Having both 2D and 3D in the same application gives you more freedom
to work in 3D than in working with ArcMap. The 2D and 3D of the same data can be analyzed together in ArcGISPro, which
allows for new understandings into that data. A 2D map is viewed from above at a 90-degree angle to the map; a 3D scene
can be viewed from any angle or perspective. The perspective used to view and navigate the scene is called the camera. 2-D
maps are always useful in GIS applications, but 3-D maps are also useful in some applications. It allows users to visualize
features and objects above the ground surface, such as buildings, fences, mountains, or trees, or visualize subsurface features,
such as wells, pipelines, storage tanks or geological faults. In this condition, the 3-D maps and scenes can be helpful for
visualizing the real world and being aware of your surroundings. ArcGIS Pro can examine and browse through your data in
more than one way at once. Users can link 3D scenes to 2D maps or to other scenes to enable simultaneous views of their
data. Although multiple linked scenes and maps reference the same source data, they are separate items within your project.
If you change the visibility of a layer in the 2D map or remove it altogether, that change will not appear in a linked 3D scene.
However, if you change the source data in a way that affects visualization, that change will be shown in both the 2D map and
3D scene.

Surfaces and Z Values

A 3D surface model is a digital representation of features, either real or hypothetical, in 3-D space. Some simple examples
of 3D surfaces are a landscape, an urban corridor, well depths drilled under the ground to determine water quality or plume
of contamination. These are all examples of real features, but surfaces could be derived or imaginary.
Functional surfaces are most commonly used to model terrestrial data representing the Earth’s surface, although they can
also be used to model many other types of surfaces, such as bathymetric data, individual geologic strata, or statistical surfaces
describing geographic concentrations. Terrain datasets, Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN), Digital Elevation Model
(DEM) Raster, and LAS datasets (LAS is a file format for the interchange of 3-dimensional point cloud data) are all examples
of functional surfaces.
To work with the 3-D Analyst, you need a 3D dataset that consists of (x, y, z). x and y are the locations, and z represents
a value in the attribute other than the location. z could be the elevation of points above sea level, chemical concentration of
groundwater, precipitation, or any phenomenon that varies across a specific location. Table 15.1 below shows that x and y are

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_15.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 333
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_15
334 15 3-D Visualization

Table 15.1 Groundwater well locations and other information

Well-ID Northing Easting Elevation Depth Salinity
840 3872.70 1027.00 626.99 17 456
841 3872.50 1024.20 663.03 38 567
842 3871.50 1021.80 662.91 58 435
843 3928.50 1358.20 662.73 14 289
846 3572.20 941.30 662.38 35 987
847 3554.10 2416.40 664.35 14 888
848 3038.90 964.70 663.61 16 846
853 2501.00 808.80 668.19 55 484
856 2133.00 2387.70 673.90 35 503
857 2129.10 2390.20 673.95 61 359

the easting and northing of the projected coordinate, and z represents either the elevation, well depth, or salinity of the
groundwater wells.

Create Triangular Irregular Network From Contour Line

A triangular irregular network (TIN) layer is commonly an elevation surface that represents height values across a study area.
TIN is vector-based digital geographic data constructed by triangulating a set of vertices (points). The vertices are connected
to a series of edges to form a network of triangles. The edges of TINs form contiguous, nonoverlapping triangular facets and
can be used to capture the position of linear features that play an important role in a surface, such as a ridge line or stream
course. Because nodes can be placed irregularly over a surface, TINs can have a higher resolution in areas where a surface is
highly variable and a lower resolution in areas that are less variable. The TIN can be created from features such as points,
lines and polygons that contain elevation information. Using either feature class to construct the TIN will generate many
nonoverlapping triangles that cover the entire study area, and the land surface is designated with these triangles.
There are different methods of interpolation to form these triangles, such as Delaunay triangulation or distance ordering.
ArcGIS supports the Delaunay triangulation method. The resulting triangulation satisfies the Delaunay triangle criterion,
which ensures that no vertex lies within the interior of any of the circumcircles of the triangles in the network. If the
Delaunay criterion is satisfied everywhere on the TIN, the minimum interior angle of all triangles is maximized. The result
is that long, thin triangles are avoided as much as possible. The TIN units can be in feet or meters, not decimal degrees.
Delaunay triangulations are not valid when constructed using angular coordinates from geographic coordinate systems.
Therefore, when constructing the TIN, you should use a projected coordinate system and avoid using the latitude-longitude
coordinate systems. TIN layers are available in both map and scene views in ArcGIS Pro.

Scenario 1 You have been asked by your advisor to generate TIN from contour lines to provide a presentation about the
water resources in the Dhuleil area in a 3-D setting.

Data Connection and Integration

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro

2. Click Open another project (upper-right) browse to \\Env_Water\Ch15 select Ch15.aprx and click OK

The Ch15.aprx open and the CP include the Map, which includes both the World Topographic Map and World Hillshade.

3. Make sure that the Catalog pane is open

4. Click the Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click Add Folder
5. Browse to \\Env_Water\Ch15 (or \\Database\ Data_Ch15) open it and highlight Data_Ch15 and click OK.
6. In the CP, name your Map “TIN”
7. In the Catalog Pane expand the Folders, Data_Ch15, and then Q1 folder to integrate the Contour.shp layer into the
TIN map
8. The Contour layer display
9. In the CP, r-click the Contour layer and open the Attribute Table
Data Connection and Integration 335

Note The table has an “Elevation” field that will be used to create the TIN

10. Close the Contour attribute table

11. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click the Tools button
12. In Geoprocessing pan, click the Toolboxes tab and open the 3D Analyst Tools
13. Open TIN Dataset and click Create TIN
14. Fill the Create TIN pane as follows:
15. Output TIN: Dhuleil_TIN (save it in Data_Ch15 under Folder)
16. Click Save
17. Coordinate System Select Contour (from the drop-down arrow)
18. Input Features: Contour
19. Height Field: Elevation
20. Type: Hard_Line
21. Accept the reset of the default
22. Check Constrained Delaunay
23. Click Run

Result Dhuleil_TIN is created and added to CP.

336 15 3-D Visualization

Change the Symbols of the TIN

24. In the CP, highlight “Dhuleil_TIN” and click the TIN Layer tab on the ribbon, in the Drawing group, open the drop-
down arrow of the Symbology, select “Slope”
25. The Symbology – Dhuleil_TIN pane open

26. Make sure the “Symbolize your layer using a surface” is selected (fourth icon)
27. Under Surface from Draw using select “Simple”
28. Under “Current symbol”, click the color symbol
29. Under Format Polygon Symbol, select the Properties tab
30. Under Appearance click the color symbol and select the Mango (c4, r2)
31. Click Apply
32. Keep the Symbology pane open
33. In the CP, r-click the Contour layer and click Remove

Result Dhuleil_TIN now has a mango color and shows the topography of the study area.
Add Data to the Scene 337

Drape Layers onto Dhuleil_TIN

Now, you will drape some layers over the TIN. The layers do not have an elevation field in their attribute tables, so the base
height is taken from Dhuleil_TIN and applied to the layers.

34. In Catalog pane expand the Data_Ch15, and then Q1 folder, select Building, Farm, ObserbationWell, Street, Tree,
Valley, and WWTP layers and drag them into Map View
35. In the CP, drag the Building and place it above the WWTP layer
36. In CP, change the color of some layers based on the table below
37. Classify the Building based on the Height field

Add Data to the Scene

The 3D scene helps to visualize geographic data in 3D, which is more intuitive than viewing the data in 2D. The difference
between data displayed in 2D and 3D is that the 3D data must have an elevation associated with it. That elevation value may
be

• Stored as a part of the data itself, or

• The data may be draped over an elevation surface.

Scenes in ArcGIS Pro are 3D maps that can be either local (for small areas) or global (for large areas). In ArcGIS Pro, the
scene has a default surface called the WorldElevation3D/Terrain3D (Ground), which comes from ESRI’s World Elevation
service. You can define other surfaces in addition to the Ground, for instance, Dhuleil_TIN or any other DEM. Data dis-
played in a 3D scene must have an Elevation value, that is, a height (i.e., building) or depth (i.e., well) at which to be dis-
played. Elevation information might be stored within the feature’s geometry as a z value or as a value in the attribute table.
Alternatively, the feature might be assumed to be on, or relative to, an elevation surface.

38. Click View tab on the ribbon, in the View group, click Convert drop-down arrow and choose To Local Scene

Result Two things happen.

A new map, called TIN_3D, was established in the CP, and a new tab called TIN_3D was established above the Map View.
TIN_3D consists of the following:

(a) 3D Layers: empty

(b) 2D Layers: contain Tree, ObserbationWell, Valley, Street, Building, WWTP, and Farm layers

Note In the CP, the Elevation Surfaces contain the Ground (WorldElevation3D/Terrain3D).
338 15 3-D Visualization

Extrude Layers

Extrusion is the process of stretching a flat, 2D shape vertically to create a 3D object in a scene. The points, lines, and poly-
gons support extrusion; for example, building polygons can be extruded by a height value to create three-dimensional build-
ing shapes. When you extrude a layer in the 2D Layers category in the Contents pane, it is moved to the 3D Layers category,
as the Extrusion is only available in scenes. In ArcGIS Pro there are various feature extrusion types and, in this section, you
will use the “Base Height”.

39. In CP, drag the Building from 2D Layers to 3D Layers

40. In CP, under the 3D layer highlight the Building, click Feature Layer tab on the ribbon, in the Extrusion group, click
the Type drop-down arrow and choose “Base Height”,

41. In the Field: Choose Height from the drop-down arrow, and click the Extrusion expression button
42. In the Expression Builder box, below the Expression after $feature. Height, type *10
43. Click the Verify button
44. If expression is valid, click OK
45. Zoom in to the eastern Building
Heading Mode and Full Control Mode 339

Result The Building was extruded based on the “WorldElevation3D/Terrain3d” raster.

On-Screen Navigator

The on-screen navigator exposes many camera navigation commands in a single control in the lower left of a view. Using the
navigator is optional but provides quick access to controls that help refine camera movements when moving through maps
and scenes. The navigator has two modes: a smaller display mode providing a north indicator and pan function and a full-
control display state for raising and lowering the camera, looking around, zooming, and rotating. The control appears by
default in 3D but not in 2D. However, you can set preferences for when maps and scenes are opened, if you want the control
to appear at all, and in which display mode.

Heading Mode and Full Control Mode

The smaller display state of the on-screen navigator shows the heading as you pan using the ring. Once the panning ring
changes color, panning can begin by dragging in any direction. The closer you are to the center of the navigator, the slower
the pan speed. A semitransparent arrow follows your pointer to help indicate direction as you move away from the ring. Click
the North button to reset the view back to facing north.
340 15 3-D Visualization

The full-control navigator has a larger set of functions for manipulating the camera. Hover the pointer over the controls
to highlight controls you can interact with. Precise camera control gives you a more intuitive navigation experience if you
are new to navigating in 3D. The following table lists the navigator control options and their descriptions:

Planar North First-person

navigation indicator navigation

Switch navigator Resize the navigator

mode
Move up Zoom forward
Rotate around
target (x, y)

Look around Face cardinal direction

Pan Rotate around target (x, y, z)

Move down Zoom backward

Navigator
control option Description
North Rotate to indicate north direction. Click the arrow
indicator to return the view to face north
Switch Change the display view of the navigator to
navigator heading mode or full control mode
mode
Move Specific to 3D, move the camera vertically higher
up/Move or lower. The camera’s X,Y and heading are
down maintained
Resize the Drag to resize the navigator. Larger sizes may be
navigator more suitable for touch screen use
Zoom Continuously zoom in closer or farther away from
forward/zoom the view
backward
Face cardinal The arrows are clickable on the outer ring. Click to
direction rotate the view to face the specific cardinal
direction (N/S/E/W)
Pan (outer Continuously pan the camera horizontally in 2D
ring) and 3D. The ring is clickable for short pan
movements, or you can click and hold to
continuously pan across the view following the
direction of the pointer
Rotate around Rotate the camera around the center target point.
target (inner Click and hold to rotate in a motion similar to a
ring) dial
Look around The camera remains stationary but can look in all
directions. (same behavior as using the B keyboard
with the explore tool )
Planar When you navigate with the mouse, the camera is
navigation constrained to maintain the current viewing angle
and distance
First-person The camera navigates the scene using the
navigation perspective of a person walking. Roam in 3D using
the keyboard to move the camera and the mouse
pointer to look around
Extrude the Well and the WWTP Layers 341

Apply a Realistic Layer

There are a variety of symbols for the tree layer, and some symbols can be displayed only in maps or only in scenes. In this
section, you will use the 3D Vegetation - Realistic Trees. Realistic trees display a point feature class as realistic-looking 3D
trees in a scene.

46. In CP, drag the Tree from 2D Layers to 3D Layers

47. In the CP, click the symbol of the Tree, In the Symbology – Tree pane, in the Gallery tab, type “tree” in the search
window and enter
48. Scroll down and select “Date Palm” under 3D Vegetation – Realistic
49. Click Properties dam, change the size to 30 and click Apply

Result The Tree display in the Map View as a 3D layer.

Extrude the Well and the WWTP Layers

The well layer “ObservationWell” has a field in the attribute table called “Height”. The height field represents the depth of
the wells below the ground surface.

50. In CP, drag the ObservationWell from 2D Layers to 3D Layers

51. In the CP, r-click the ObservationWell and Zoom To Layer
52. In the CP, click the symbol of the ObservationWell
53. In the Symbology pane in the Properties tab, under Appearance
54. Change the color to blue and the size to 6
55. Click Apply
56. In CP ensure that the ObservationWell is selected, click Feature Layer tab on the ribbon, in the Extrusion group
57. Click the Type drop-down arrow and choose “Base Height”, in the Field: choose Height
58. Click the Extrusion Expression button
59. In the Expression Builder dialog box, after $feature. Height, type *10
60. Click the Verify button
61. OK
62. In the CP, under the “Ground” uncheck the WorldElevation/Terrain3D and the World Hillshade
63. Rotate the image to see the ObservationWell

Result The wells will be displayed as features drilled below the ground.
342 15 3-D Visualization

64. In CP, drag the WWTP from the 2D Layer into the 3D Layers
65. In the CP, click the symbol of the WWTP in 3D Layers
66. In CP, ensure that the WWTP is selected, and click Feature Layer tab on the ribbon, in the Extrusion group
67. Click the Type drop-down arrow and choose “Base Height”, in the Field: choose Depth
68. Click the Extrusion Expression button
69. In the Expression Builder dialog box, after $feature. Depth, type *20
70. Click the Verify button
71. OK

Display the Street, Valley and Farm Layers in the Scene

72. In CP, drag the Street from under 2D layer into to 3D Layers
73. In CP ensure that the Street is selected, click Feature Layer tab on the ribbon, in the Extrusion group, click the Type
drop-down arrow and choose “Base Height”,
74. Repeat the above steps for the Valley and Farm layers

Change Elevation Units

When working with a scene, the viewing height relative to the ground is listed in the height list in the lower corner of the
display. To change the elevation unit displayed in the list do the following:

75. In the CP, right-click TIN_3D (scene) and click Properties.

76. On the Map Properties: TIN_3D dialog box, on the General tab, choose Meters from the Elevation Units drop-down
menu
77. Click OK
Navigate Underground and Change Vertical Exaggeration 343

Result The unit changes from feet to meter.

Navigate Underground and Change Vertical Exaggeration

Belowground navigation is disabled by default for layers in a scene to avoid navigating underground accidentally. Since the
scene (TIN_3D) contains underground data “wells”, you should enable this capability.

78. In the CP, highlight the Ground under the Elevation Surfaces
79. On the Elevation Surface Layer tab, in the Surface group, check the Navigate Underground and Shade to Relative
To Light Position.
80. In the Drawing group, for Vertical Exaggeration, type 4 and for Surface Color choose gray 10%

Note Make sure that the World/Elevation/Terrain3D is checked under the Ground.

Result Vertical exaggeration is a visual effect that enhances the 3D appearance of the scene.
344 15 3-D Visualization

Use the Dhuleil TIN as an Elevation Source

An elevation source layer references the data that contribute height values to the elevation surface layer. An elevation surface
layer can have more than one elevation source layer, and different types can be combined. Local elevation source layers can
be a single-band raster that contains elevation information or a TIN dataset. The Dhuleil_TIN that created earlier is consid-
ered a source of an elevation and you are going to use it by replacing the “WorldElevation3D/Terrain3D”.

81. In CP, drag the Dhuleil_TIN below the Ground under the Elevation Surfaces OR
82. Right-click the Ground under the Elevation Surfaces and choose Add Elevation Source Layer
83. Browse to Data_Ch15 under Folder select Dhuleil_TIN and click OK OR
84. Map tab on the ribbon in the Layer group and open the Add Data drop down arrow and click “Elevation Source Layer”
and choose Dhuleil_TIN
85. In the CP uncheck the “WorldElevation3D/Terrain3D”
86. In the CP uncheck the World Topographic Map and keep the World Hillshade checked

Create Animation From Bookmarks

The animation in ArcGIS Pro can be created either using bookmarks or fly through a scene.
A bookmark is a navigation shortcut to a position on a map or perspective in a scene to return to later or share with others.
Bookmarks can be used to create keyframes in an animation or pages in a bookmark map series. Animations can help you
tell a story with a map or a scene and then export it as a video to share. You can create animations by capturing a series of
keyframes. You can configure how the transitions are interpolated between each keyframe. When you’re done, you can edit
the animation as needed.

Create a Bookmark

1. In the CP, under the Ground, r-click the Dheleil_TIN and click Zoom To
2. On the Map tab, in the Navigate group, click Bookmarks and click New Bookmark .
3. On the Create Bookmark dialog box, type Basemap, in the Description, type Dhuleil Region.
4. Click OK.
5. Zoom in to the eastern part of the region around the “WWTP” and create a bookmark and call it WWTP and in the
Description type “Wastewater Treatment Plant” and click OK
Create Animation From Bookmarks 345

6. Zoom to other locations such as eastern Dhuleil, central Dhuleil, northern highland, and western Dhuleil and show the
wells, trees, buildings and create more bookmarks.
7. After finishing creating the r-click the Dheleil_TIN and click Zoom To and create bookmark

Result Ten bookmarks created, but you can more if you desire.

Use Bookmarks to Create an Animation

In this step, you will import the 10 bookmarks to create an animation by converting the bookmarks to keyframes. Each book-
mark represents a location on the scene; it will start from the basemap that covers the whole region and then go to different
locations and end at the beginning location.

8. Click the Map tab, in Navigate group, click the Bookmark and click Manage Bookmark
9. Make sure that the bookmarks are organized in order
10. Click the View tab, in the Animation group, and click Add.
11. The Animation Timeline: Animation dialog box display
12. In the Animation tab on the ribbon, in the Create group, click the Import drop-down arrow and select Bookmarks to
Fly Through
346 15 3-D Visualization

Result All the bookmarks the way they organized will create the keyframes and establish the camera fly path

13. In the Animation Timeline: Animation click the first keyframe and in the Animation tab on the ribbon, in the
Playback group, click inside the Duration box and type 00:30:000, then click the Play button

Result Now, the keyframes from the bookmarks generated the animation.

14. If you closed the Animation Timeline: Animation, you can open it by clicking on Animation tab, in the Playback
group, and click Timeline

Create a Video

Once you are happy with your 3D map animation, you can make a video.

15. Click the Animation tab in the ribbon, in the Export group, click the Movie button
16. In the Export Movie dialog box, select YouTube
17. File Name: Dhuleil.mp4 and save it in Data_Ch15 under Folder and click Save
18. Click Advanced Movie Export Setting and accept the default (720p HD Letterbox (1280 x 720)
19. Click Export

Note To create the video, it takes a few minutes depending on the computer configuration.
Create a Video 347

20. To view the Dhuleil.mp4, open the folder Data_Ch15 in window explorer and double click it

Fly Through a Map or Scene

A fly through animation simulates the camera moving through a map or scene and mimics what it is like to be physically
present in the view. Examples include a 3D fly although along a parade route or 2D panning along a proposed electrical
transmission line path. A fly through animation is usually best served by smooth curves between keyframes using a fixed
transition. In a few cases, the linear transition may work well, but one must be aware that this creates simulated bumps when
the camera changes direction. In this section, you will delete the keyframe created by the bookmarks and start over with the
fly through a map or scene. You can use different camera transition types, as 6 types are available: fixed, adjustable, linear,
stepped, and hold. In this section, you will use the fixed transition.

21. Click the Animation tab on the ribbon, in the Edit group, click Delete All to delete all keyframes in the track to start
over.
22. In the Animation tab, in the Create group, click the Append drop-down menu and verify that Fixed is the transition
type.
23. In the CP, r-click the Dhuleil_TIN and Zoom To
24. In the Create group, click the Append to create the first keyframe.
25. Navigate the camera to the first keyframe location

Note The camera location is stored in the first keyframe at zero seconds. You can verify that the first keyframe was created
by confirming the thumbnail appears in the Animation Timeline pane. You can also verify it using the Keyframe List drop-
down menu in the Edit group.
348 15 3-D Visualization

26. Zoom to the eastern part of the Dhuleil_TIN that show the WWTP and click Append.
27. Repeat the previous step until the fly through path is complete.
28. Make sure the WorldElevation3D/Terrain3D is uncheck the to see the subsurface wells
29. In the Animation tab, in the Playback group, click inside the Duration box and type 30, then click the Play button to
play through the entire animation.
30. Create a YouTube movie as in the previous step, and save it in Data_Ch15 under Folder
31. Close the Export Movie dialog box, and the Animation Timeline, the Geoprocessing pane and any other pane
32. Save your project

Time Tracking

Time tracking is a visual representation that uses the time field to show how the events are changing over time. The Plume
attribute table layer contains two fields that represent a time, which allows the user to visualize the events at various locations
over time.

1. Click Insert tab on the ribbon, in the Project group, click New Map and call it Plume
2. In Catalog pan, select GasStation, Plume and SupplyWell from Q2 under Data_Ch15 and drag them to the Map View
3. In the CP, r-click Plume select Symbology
4. In the Symbology pane, under Primary symbology, choose Unique Values from the drop-down arrow, and in Field 1,
choose PlumeLevel

5. Click the Symbol layer drawing tab , and turn on Enable symbol layer drawing.
6. On the Basic tab, drag symbol classes to reorder their drawing order if necessary (Plume 1 at the top and Plume 5 at the
bottom)
7. Change the color of the plumes from top to bottom into light blue, yellow, mango, pink, and red
8. Click More and uncheck “Show all other values”
Create a Video 349

9. In the CP, click the symbol of SupplyWell, select Circle1 symbol, blue color and size 8
10. In the CP, click the symbol of GasStation and change the color to red, outline color (no color, outline width 0, and make
sure the GasStation is above the Plume in the CP
11. Click View tab on the ribbon, in the View group, click Convert drop-down arrow and choose To Local Scene
12. In CP, r-click the Plume and Zoom To Layer
13. In CP, drag the SupplyWell from 2D Layers to 3D Layers
14. Under the 3D layer highlight the SupplyWell, click Feature Layer tab, in the Extrusion group, click the Type drop-
down arrow and choose “Base Height”, in the Field: Choose Height from the drop-down arrow, and click the Extrusion

expression button , In the Expression Builder box, below the Expression after $feature. Height, type *10
15. Click the Verify button; if the expression is valid, click OK
16. In CP, drag the GasStation from the 2D layer into the 3D layers
17. In the CP, click the symbol of the GasStation in 3D Layers, click Feature Layer tab on the ribbon, in the Extrusion
group, click the Type drop-down arrow and choose “Base Height”, in the Field: choose Height, click the Extrusion
Expression button, in the Expression Builder dialog box, after $feature. Height, type *25
18. Click the Verify button, then OK
19. Make sure the WorldElevation3D/Terrain3D and the World Hillshade are unchecked
20. Use the Navigator and the Rotate around target to rotate the image

21. In the CP, r-click the Plume to open the Attribute Table, you see two date fields: Coll_Date and End_Date, familiarize
yourself with the time and close the table.

Enable Time and Visualize the Data

22. In the CP, d-click the Plume to open the Properties dialog box.
23. Click the Time tab
24. Click the Layer Time drop-down arrow and click Each feature has start and end time field.
25. The Time Field value is automatically set to Cool_Date and End_Date
26. The Time Extent values are set to the range of the data.
27. Accept the rest of the default and click OK
28. The Time Slider appears at the top of the map view.
29. Hover over the Time Slider to see its controls.
350 15 3-D Visualization

28. On the left side of the Time Slider, click Time disabled icon to change it to Time enabled .

Configure the Time Slider to Play Back the Data

29. Click the Time tab on the ribbon, in the Snapping group, check the Time Snapping, and below it, open the drop-down
arrow and click Months
30. In the Current Time group, change the Span setting to 4 and press the Enter key.

This ensures that only four months’ worth of data is displayed at a time.

31. In the Playback group, click Repeat and then click Play All Steps
32. In the Playback group, the Adjust Playback Speed slider was used to decrease the speed.
33. Play the data again.

34. To stop the plume, on the left side of the Time Slider, click Time enabled icon to change it to Time disabled .

35. Close the Symbology pane

36. Save the project
Create a Video 351

Create an Animation and Export a Video

36. Click the View tab on the ribbon, in the Animation group, click Add .

Result An empty Animation Timeline: Animation pane appears under the map view. On the ribbon, an Animation tab
appears. Before you create keyframes for the animation, you will zoom to the correct map extent.

37. In the Contents pane, right-click the Plume layer and click the Zoom To Layer .

38. Click the Animation tab on the ribbon, in the Create group, click Import drop-down arrow and click Time Slider

Steps .

Result The animation timeline pane populates with few keyframes. (It takes a few moments for the thumbnail images to
display in the keyframes.) The first keyframe represents the animation at zero seconds (current: 00:00.000) and duration:
00:48:00. Each subsequent keyframe corresponds to the data for 4 months.

40. On the Animation tab, in the Playback group, the Duration setting is forty-eight seconds (00:48.000). There are 17
slide transitions, which means that each slide is visible for 2. 28 seconds. You want to make the transition time to
2 seconds.
41. On the Animation tab, in the Playback group, replace the Duration value with 00:34 and press the Enter key. The time
stamps in the Animation Timeline pane are adjusted. Each transition now takes one second.

42. In the Playback group, click Play . (Do not click Play on the time slider changes you have made to the animation are
not reflected in the time slider playback.)
352 15 3-D Visualization

43. On the Animation tab, in the Export group, click Movie .

44. The Export Movie pane appears. The default settings output a video configured for YouTube in mp4 media format.
45. In the Export Movie pane, in the File Name box, change the default file name Plume.mp4, and save it in Data_Ch15
under Folder
46. Click Export
47. To view Plume.mp4, open the folder Data_Ch15 in the window explorer and double click it.

Result The video will play.

48. Close the Animation Timeline and the Export Movie dialog box
49. Save the project

Add Surface Information and Elevation Profile

The tool adds a Z field to the attributes table of the “RainStation” feature with statistics derived from the duluth digital
elevation model. The Z field in the attribute table is calculated based on the duluth surface, which is used to interpolate Z
information for the input features.

Scenario 2 You have been asked to use the duluth DEM to identify the elevation of the nine “RainStation” feature class.

48. Click Insert tab, in the Project group, click New Map and call it Rain Station
49. In Catalog pan, select City, duluth, RainStation, and Stream from Q3 under Data_Ch15 and drag them to the Map
View.
50. In the CP, r-click duluth raster and Zoom To Layer
51. Symbolize the layers in the CP as shown in the table below.
52. In the CP, r-click RainStation and open the attribute table. The attribute table has only 3 fields: FID, Shape, and Id.
Then, close the attribute table
Create a Video 353

Layer Symbol Color Size

Duluth Elevation # 1

City Square 1 Pink 6

RainStation Triangle 1 Blue 10

Stream Blue

52. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Geoprocessing group, click the Tools button
53. In Geoprocessing pan, click the Toolboxes tab and open the 3D Analyst Tools, then open the Statistics and click Add
Surface Information
54. Fill the Add Surface Information dialog box as follows:
55. Input Features: RainStation
56. Input Surface: duluth
57. Check the Z under Output Property
58. Method: Bilinear
59. Accept the rest of the default
60. Click Run

Result Z is added to the attribute table of the RainStation feature. The elevation of Z is between 183.5 and 397.2 meters.
354 15 3-D Visualization

Elevation Profile

An interactive elevation profile graph can be created in either a map or a scene using one of the following creation
methods:

• Interactive Placement: A profile line can be digitized in the map or scene by interactively clicking to define the path’s
vertices and double-clicking to finish. This creation method is well suited for maps and scenes that do not contain existing
line features.
• From Layer: A profile line can be created from one or more selected line features in the map or scene. This creation
method is well suited for creating elevation profiles along paths that already exist as data in the view, such as a stream.

Elevation Profile - Interactive Placement

You will create a vertical profile between rain stations 1 and 2 by digitizing by clicking to define a path between these two
stations.

61. Click View tab on the ribbon, in the View group, click Convert drop-down arrow and choose To Local Scene. A new
map, called Rain Station_3D, was established in the CP, and a new tab called Rain Station_3D was added above the
Map View.
62. In the CP, drag the RainStation and then the Stream from the 2D Layers into 3D Layers
63. Label the RainStation based on the Id field (make the label top right)
64. Click the Analysis tab on the ribbon, in the Workflows group, expand the Exploratory 3D Analysis drop-down list and

choose Elevation Profile .

65. The Exploratory Analysis pane appears and the Create tab is active

66. Click the Interactive Placement tool ; when selected, the option is highlighted blue. When active, hover over the map
or scene, and the pointer should now be a crosshairs icon.
67. Under Distance Units, select Meters to be used by the elevation profile.
68. Click the “RainStation” labeled 1 in the scene to set the starting point of the profile line.
69. Continue to add vertices to digitize the path between 1 and 2 and double-click on the “RainStation” labeled 2.
Create a Video 355

Result The elevation profile overlay window appears at the bottom of the active view.

Elevation Profile - From Layer

A profile line will be created from Stream feature in the scene.

70. In the Exploratory Analysis pane, under Creation Method, click From Layer . When selected, the option is high-
lighted blue and provides an option to choose an input line layer.
71. In the Line Layer text box, select the Stream,
72. Click the Map tab on the ribbon, Selection group and click Select button, click the Stream to make it selectable.
73. Under Distance Units, make sure Meters is selected.
74. Click Apply.

Result The elevation profile overlay window appears at the bottom of the active view.
356 15 3-D Visualization

Update the Elevation Profile Graph

Once a profile graph has been created, you can update it in the following ways (optional):

75. Change the profile path by dragging individual vertices within the map or scene.

76. Flip the direction of the graph in the Elevation Profile window by clicking the Reverse Direction button .
77. Change the units used to label the axis of an existing profile graph by changing the Distance Units property on the
Create tab of the Exploratory Analysis pane.
78. Close the Geoprocessing pane, the Exploratory pane and Elevation Profile
79. Save the project
80. Exit ArcGIS Pro
Working with ArcGIS Online
and StoryMap App 16

ArcGIS Online is a cloud-based mapping and analysis solution. It is used for creating and sharing GIS maps, apps, and con-
tent. The content can be accessed at any time on any device. It provides access to critical information throughout your orga-
nization (i.e., University of Wisconsin).
In this chapter, you will learn the following:

1. Manage your data

2. Publish it as web layers
3. Create web maps using services in ArcGIS Online
4. Create StoryMap (web apps)
5. Share this content with your organization and publicly

Section 1: Publish Data to ARCGIS Online

Scenario 1 You have studied the Newton Creek in Superior, WI and you would like the result of your study to be published
as web app (Story Map) in ArcGIS Online to be used by researchers and students dealing with environmental problems.

You are going to integrate data as a zipped shapefile and publish the data as web layers.
To perform these tasks, you need the following:

• ArcGIS Online Organizational Account

• Publisher role or equivalent

Step 1: Sign in to ArcGIS Online

The first step to publish content to ArcGIS Online is to sign in to your organizational account.

1. In a web browser, go to www.arcgis.com

2. Sign in with your organizational account username and password.

After you sign in, the organization’s home page appears.

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_16.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 357
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_16
358 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Step 2: Publish a Feature Service

After you have signed in, you will add a zipped shapefile to ArcGIS Online and publish it as a feature service.

Note To obtain the feature data into ArcGIS Online, you can upload a shapefile, or you can upload a file geodatabase to
upload several feature classes. To upload these, you need to zip them and upload the zip file to ArcGIS online.

3. In ArcGIS Online at the top of the page, click Content (My Content will be active).

What Is My Content?

The My Content page is your storage space for items that you have added to the site or created. You can add files here and
publish these files as services (if they are the appropriate file type).

4. On the Content page, next to Folders, click the Create New Folder button.
5. In the Create A Folder dialog box, type Creek and click OK.

Result The Creek folder is created and will be used to store contents.

6. Click on Creek folder, under Content, click New Item.

7. The New Item dialog box open, click Your Device tab
8. Browse to the Story folder under \\Env_Water\Ch16 folders on your computer, select Superior.zip, and click Open.
What Is My Content? 359

Note You can also click Google Drive or OneDrive if you saved your data in one of them.

Note Superior.zip is a zipped shapefile that includes four shapefiles that will be used as feature layers.

9. In the New item dialog box, under How would you like to add this file? Check the “Add Superior.zip and create a hosted
feature layer” box.

Note The zipped shapefiles already have the geographic location configured in the file, so ArcGIS Online does not need to
geocode the file before publishing the layer.

10. Click Next

In the New Item dialog box, fill it as follows:

Title: type Newton Creek.

Folder: Creek.
Tags: type Newton and Faxon Creeks, Rivers, Water Quality, Murphy Oil, Hog Island, Impact Assessment, Superior,
Wisconsin, USA and press Enter after each tag.
Under Summary, type Water quality evaluation in Newton Creek in Superior, WI.

11. Click Next

360 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Note1 It may take a few minutes for the zipped shapefile to publish.

Note2 If you encounter an error that the service name already exists, rename the title by adding your initials to the title name
and try publishing it again.
Step 3: Edit the Description and Term of Use 361

Result After the file has been successfully published, the item’s details appear. The item page provides descriptive informa-
tion about the item “Newton_WB”, as well as options to use or to configure the item, such as providing a description and
term of use. Below the Layers it shows that the item includes 4 layers” SamplingSite, River, MurphyOil, and Superior.

Step 3: Edit the Description and Term of Use

You will complete the Newton_WB details to help other site members understand what this information represents.

12. To the right of the Description, click Edit.

13. In the Edit Description, type Water quality evaluation in Newton Creek, Superior, WI
14. Highlight the text and choose “medium”
15. Click Save.

Because the content of the work is taken from a published paper, you should cite the paper.

16. Under Terms of Use, click Edit and type

362 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Bajjali, W. Water Quality Assessment of Newton Creek and Its Effect on Hog Island Inlet of Lake Superior. Water Qual
Expo Health 4, 123–135 (2012). https://doi.org/10.1007/s12403-012-0071-1

17. Highlight the text and make it medium

18. Click Save

19. Click Share tab on the right.

20. In the Share dialog box, for the Set sharing level, select Everyone (Public) and click Save.
Step 4: Open the Feature Service 363

Note If you are unable to share with everyone, share with your organization or a group within your organization.

Step 4: Open the Feature Service

After the item’s details are complete, you will add the layer to a new web map.

21. Click the back arrow on the top-left of the page or click the Content tab
22. In the Content tab (My Content), make sure that the Creek folder is selected.

You will see two files:

• Newton_WB Feature Layers (hosted)

• Newton_WB Shapefile

23. To the right of the Newton_WB feature layer (hosted) item, click the Options button …
24. Choose Open in Map Viewer.

Comment The Map Viewer is the primary map-making tool for ArcGIS Online. In this section, you will use the Map
Viewer to create your web map. You will add layer to the web map that have been shared in ArcGIS Online, the layers that
have been shared with the community (layers that have been publicly shared on ArcGIS Online), organization or your group.

Map Viewer opens, and the Newton_WB feature layer (hosted) is added to the map.

25. To the left below the Layers expand the Newton_WB, you will notice it consists of 4-layers
(a) SamplingSite
(b) River
(c) MurphyOil
(d) Superior
364 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Content and Setting Toolbar

Each layer in the Map Viewer is associated with two tollbars

1. Setting toolbar
2. Content toolbar
Rename the Layers 365

Settings toolbar (light color) on the right side of Map Viewer and includes tools and options available for the selected
layer, such as properties, styles, filtering, effects, and aggregation. The toolbar is contextual, which means that these options
only appear when there is a selected layer in the map and the menu depends on the layer that you select under Layers.
Contents toolbar (dark color) on the left side of Map Viewer and includes options such Add, Layers, Basemap, Charts,
Legend, Bookmark, Save and Open, Map Properties, and others.
The Content and Settings toolbars can be expanded or collapsed by clicking the Expand arrows or the Collapse arrows
at the bottom of each toolbar.

26. In the Map Viewer, click on one of the river layers.

27. A pop-up window appears with information from the attribute table of the layer.
28. Close the pop-up window.

Rename the Layers

29. In the Layers pane, expand the Newton_WB layer,

30. Select the sublayer SamplingSite and click the Options button (…) and choose Rename.
31. Change the layer name to Sampling Site and click OK.

Change the name of the sublayer MurphyOil to Murphy Oil.

366 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Change Layer Symbology

Next, you will change the symbology of the Sampling Site and Murphy Oil layers to make it easier to differentiate between
the Sampling Sites, Murphy Oil, and Superior.
First, you will change the symbology for the Sampling Site to different colors

32. Select the sublayer Sampling Site and click the Options button and choose Show table
33. The attribute table opens, and the Location field is used to symbolize the layer
34. Close the table by click on the X on the top right

35. On the right, in the Settings toolbar, click the Styles button .
36. Under Choose attributes, click Field, select Location and click Add.

37. Under Pick a style, click Style Options.

38. To the right, under the Symbol style, click the Edit button .
39. Click the Symbol under Current symbol
Change Layer Symbology 367

40. Choose circle (first symbol) and click Done

41. Under Size, change the size to 14
42. Under Fill transparency, change it to 35
43. Under Outline color, change it to black
44. Under Outline transparency, change it to 0
45. Under Outline width make it 1
46. Click Done then Done

Result The Sampling Site sublayer is displayed as a circle with different colors in Map Viewer.

47. Click Done to Exit the Styles

Result The legend disappears in the Map Viewer.

48. Select the sublayer Murphy Oil under the Layers pane
49. On the right, in the Settings toolbar, click the Styles button
50. Under Pick a style, click Style Options
51. Under Symbol style, click the Edit button.
52. Under Current symbol, click the Basic polygon
368 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

53. Under Category, select from the drop-down arrow Hatch Fill and choose a hatch of your taste Click Done
54. Click Fill color and choose green color
55. Accept the rest of the default
56. Click Done twice to exit the Styles

57. In the Map Viewer zoom in to see the whole Superior layer
58. Select the sublayer Superior under the Layers pane
59. On the right, in the Settings toolbar, click the Styles button .
60. Under Pick a style, click Style Options
61. under the Symbol style, click the Edit button.
62. Under Fill color, choose light gray and click Done
63. Under Outline transparency make it 75
64. Accept the rest of the default
65. Click Done twice to exit the Styles
Save the Web Map 369

Save the Web Map

Now that you have set up the map, you are ready to save it as a Web Map.

66. On the left, in the Contents toolbar, click the Save and open button, and click Save as.

In the Save Map dialog box, specify the following information:

• For Title, type Newton Creek_WB (type your initials, i.e., WB).
• For Folder, choose Creek
• For Tags, type Newton Creek, Faxon Creek, Murphy Oil, Hog Island, Site Location, Superior, Wisconsin
• For Summary, type Sampling Sites of Newton and Faxon Creeks and Lake Superior, WI, USA
370 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

67. Click Save Map

Result If you go to Content, you will see the new Web Map “Newton Creek_WB” display under Creek folder.

Share an App Using ArcGIS Online

You have created the web map and want to share it with community members. You want to share the map in a way that
focuses on the site locations so the map will be used in any geo app such as Story Map or another app.

Share the Web Map

You want to share the Newton Creek_WB web map with the world community members. Everyone (Public) is the most
appropriate level. Remember, the web map contains layers, which will not be visible to community members if they are not
shared at the same level as the web map, so the layers will need to be shared with the same permission level as the map.
Share the Web Map 371

Note You can update sharing any item in the Content pane.

68. From the Content page, open your Creek folder if necessary.
69. To the right of the Newton Creek_WB, click the More Options button … and choose View item details.

67. The map’s item page opens

68. On the item page, on the right, click Share.
69. In the Share dialog box, select Everyone (Public)
70. Click Save.

Note If you are unable to share with everyone, share with your organization instead.
372 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Create Story Map

Making a story can be done in different ways and from different locations in ArcGIS Online. One way is from Map Viewer,
the second way is using the ArcGIS StoryMaps app (http://storymaps.arcgis.com), and the third way is creating the
StoryMap app from App Launcher in ArcGIS Online. In this section, we will use the App Launcher to create the
StoryMap app. In Chap. 17, we will use the Map Viewer to create the Instant app.
ArcGIS StoryMap is a web map that has been created by integrating maps, text, photos, and others and provides func-
tionality, such as swipes, pop-ups, and time sliders, that helps users explore this content of the story. Before starting the story,
you should have the story text and media, you will start building the story using content blocks. Each title, paragraph, image,
and media type are added as a separate block from the block palette. In this chapter you will create a story about Newton
Creek in Superior, WI and publish with your organization or if you desire with the whole world. After creating the story, you
can share your maps in the context of narrative text and other multimedia content. You can use ArcGIS StoryMaps to publish
and share your stories. Published stories each have their own URL, and you can use these URLs to share your stories within
your organization, to specific groups, or with everyone.
You will start from scratch to create your story using the ArcGIS StoryMaps app.

1. Launch ArcGIS Online (if you signed out)

2. Sign in to ArcGIS Online
3. Click the App Launcher in the top-right corner
4. Scroll down and click the ArcGIS StoryMaps

5. Click the New story button in the top right and then click Start from scratch.

Result A blank story template appears.

Note Ch16 includes “Image” and “Picture” folders that will be used to add to your story as well as a word document
“Newton Text” that you can use to fill in content.

6. In this chapter folder, open the “Newton Text” document, you are going to use the document to build your story by copy
and paste.
7. For Title your story, type or paste Water Quality of Newton Creek from the “Newton Text.docx”
8. For Start with a short introduction or subtitle, type or paste the following text: in Superior, WI. USA
Create Story Map 373

The ribbon updates with the new title.

Note You can change the title at any time.

You can see above the title the Draft badge and next to it, you will see evidence of the autosave feature in ArcGIS
StoryMaps; any time you edit your story, that text will let you know your story is saving and then confirm that your changes
have been saved.
374 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

9. Click the + sign next to Tell your story, click Text under Basic.

Comments The block palette contains options for adding content. You will tell your story using these blocks to add sections
of content to the body of your story.

There are a few types of blocks you can choose from.

• Basic elements such as

• Text blocks (paragraph, heading, quote, and so on)

• Button
• Separator

• Media blocks such as

• Map
• Image
• Image Gallery
• Audio
• Embed
• Swipe
• Timeline

• Immersive blocks such as

• Slideshow
• Sidecar
• map tour
Work with Media 375

10. Type or paste the following: Introduction

11. Highlight the Introduction, click Paragraph and choose Heading

12. Click the + sign below the Introduction, click Text under Basic.

Type or paste the following: Newton Creek is a 1.6-mile water-way running through a mostly residential area of Superior,
WI. It originates from an artificial pool that receives its main source of water from the treated wastewater of the Murphy Oil
Refinery. It discharges to Hog Island Inlet, which is part of the greater Saint Louis River System’s Superior Bay and connects
to Lake Superior. (Figure 1).

13. Highlight the first paragraph. In the text menu, click the Italic button.

Note You can also use keyboard shortcuts such as Ctrl + I for italics and Ctrl + B for bold.

Work with Media

Once you have added your first text, you will add an “Image” under “Media” to represent Fig. 1 under first paragraph.
Images, video and other media are important because they break up a long narrative and provide context.

14. Below the text under the “Introduction”, hover over the left margin below Fig. 1 and click the + sign (Add content
block), the block palette open, choose Image under Media.
15. From the Add an image dialog box, click “Browse your files” and browse to the directory where you saved the images
(Ch16\Story\Images) and select Fig. 1.jpg
16. Click open and then click Add
376 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Result The image is added to the story.

17. Hover over Fig. 1 image. In the toolbar, click Medium.

Depending on the width of the image you upload, larger sizes may not be available, ensuring that your content is never
stretched beyond its maximum width. Full-width media, for example, must be at least 2001 pixels wide.

18. Hover over the image again and click the Options button.

19. The Image options window appears

Work with Media 377

You will add alternative text, or alt text, that describes the image so that anyone reading your story can see the study area
of your work. You can specify alt text in the properties menu for each media item using the Options button. Unlike captions,
which appear below an image, the alt text associated with an image can be viewed by hovering over it.

20. For Alternative text, type Sampling Locations of Newton Creek

21. In the Attribution type “Your Name”, i.e., “William Bajjali”
22. Click Save

23. Under Fig. 1 image, click Add a caption for this image (optional) and type or paste the following text: Sampling
Locations at Newton Creek
378 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

24. Click the + sign below Fig. 1 image, click Text under Basic.
25. Type or paste the following: “The Problem”
26. Highlight “The Problem”, click the Paragraph and choose Heading.
27. Click the + sign below the “The Problem”, click Text under Basic.
28. Type or paste the following:
The Newton Creek water, surrounding soil, and HII were found to be highly contaminated with hydrocarbon byprod-
ucts. The contaminated site was classified by the EPA as an “area of concern”. Remediation was conducted to remove
contaminants, and restoration began. Between 1997 and 2005, a total of 60,175 tons of contaminated sediment was
removed from the creek and HII. Despite this remediation, contaminates continued to exist within the creek
environment.

29. Highlight the pasted paragraph. In the text menu, click the Italic button
Work with Media 379

30. Click the + sign below the pasted text below “The Problem”, click Text under Basic.
31. Type or paste the following: “Objective”
32. Highlight the “Objective”, click the Paragraph and choose Heading.
33. Click the + sign below the “Objective”, click Text under Basic.
34. Type or paste the following:
Determine if the water quality of Newton Creek improved after remediation.
35. Highlight the pasted paragraph. In the text menu, click the Italic button

36. Click the + sign below the pasted text below “Objective”, click Text under Basic.
37. Type or paste the following: “Methodology”
38. Highlight the “Methodology”, click the Paragraph and choose Heading.
39. Click the + sign below the “Methodology”, click Text under Basic.
40. Type or paste the following:
Between 2005 and 2011, Dr. Bajjali from the University of Wisconsin - Superior and his students conducted a study
of water quality for Newton Creek. The creek water was sampled for DO, EC, pH, and temperature. The creek water was
measured on a weekly basis using Omega devices, dual pH/conductivity handheld instruments and portable digital dis-
solved oxygen temperature meters. The water at the five sites was measured from the bank of the stream (Table 1).
41. Highlight the pasted paragraph. In the text menu, click the Italic button.

42. Below the text under the “Methodology”, hover over the left margin below Table 1 and click the + sign (Add content
block), the block palette open, choose Image under Media.
43. From the Add an image dialog box, click “Browse your files” and browse to the directory where you saved the images
(Ch16\Story\Images) and select Table 1
44. Click Open and the click Add
45. Hover over the image again and click the Options button.
380 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

46. The Image options window appears.

47. For Alternative text, type Average EC, pH, D.O., and Temperature in Newton Creek
48. In the Attribution type “Your Name”, i.e., “William Bajjali”
49. Click Save
50. Under the Table 1 image, click Add a caption for this image and type or paste the following text: Table 1 Average EC,
pH, D.O., and Temperature of the Newton Creek Water

51. Click the + sign below the “Table 1”, click Text under Basic.
52. Type or paste the following: “Sampling Sites”
53. Highlight the “Sampling Sites”, click the Paragraph and choose Heading.
54. Click the + sign below the “Sampling Sites”, click Text under Basic.
55. Type or paste the following:

The data set was conducted at five sites along the flow of the creek starting from the discharge point of the treated water from
the Murphy Oil treatment plant and ending on Hog Island. The following images show the locations of Murphy Oil that form
the head water of the creek, the sampling site along Newton Creek, Hog Island, which is considered the mouth of the creek,
and a picture of one student sampling the creek.

56. Highlight the pasted paragraph. In the text menu, click the Italic button.

Work with Immersive – Sidecar Docked

Immersive blocks are unique in that they become full-screen takeovers of your story, providing different, interactive reading
experiences. You will add a “Sidecar” and add five pictures as the media in your sidecar. You will customize the pictures to
best fit the story. The first picture is the head of the creek that starts from the discharge point of the treated water from the
Murphy Oil treatment plant. The second, third, and fourth are the sampling locations. The fifth picture is the mouth of the
creek that ends on Hog Island.

1. Click the + sign below the “Sampling Sites” text

2. Click Sidecar below the Immersive
3. The Choose a layout dialog box display
4. Choose Docked panel, and then click Done
Work with Immersive – Sidecar Docked 381

Result The sidecar display, but empty and you have to fill the sidecar by adding the 5-pictures that represent the Newton
Creek sampling sites

5. At the top, click the Add drop-down arrow and choose Image or Video (you can also select “Map” and this will allow
you to select a web map that you created previously and saved on ArcGIS Online)
6. The Add an image or video dialog box display

7. Make sure the Upload tab in the left is selected and click Browse your files

8. Browse to picture folder in Chapter16/Story and select 1_NewtonSite1. JPG

9. Click Open, and then click Add
382 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Result Picture 1, which represents sampling site 1 at the headwater of the creek in the area of Murphy oil, has been added
to the story.

10. At the top of the picture click Options

11. In the Image options
12. Check Fit (do not crop)
13. In the Attribution, type your name (i.e. William Bajjali)
14. Click Save
Work with Immersive – Sidecar Docked 383

15. Next to the Picture, click Continue your story and type or paste the following:Site 1 of sampling Newton Creek that
originates from an artificial pool that receives its main source of water from the treated wastewater of Murphy
Oil Refinery.

16. Highlight the text, click Paragraph, and click Quote.

17. Add another text block and type Photo: type your name (i.e., William Bajjali).
18. Highlight the Photo text and click the Bold and then Italic button.
384 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Result The first sidecar slide is complete.

Add Second Picture

19. At the bottom of the sidecar block is the slide panel.

Comment In the slide panel, you can add or remove slides, adjust the transitions between them, or remove the sidecar block
from your story entirely. You can change which side the narrative panel is on by using the double-arrow button where the
media and narrative panel meet.

20. In the slide panel, click the + sign (New slide) button.

Result A blank slide is added to the pane.

21. Click Open, and then click Add

22. Click Add and click Image or video.

23. Browse to Chapter16\Story\Pictures and choose 2_NewtonSite2.jpg.
24. Click Open, and then click Add

25. At the top of the picture click Options

26. In the Image options, check Fit (do not crop)
27. In the Attribution, type your name (i.e. William Bajjali)
28. Click Save
29. Next to the Picture, click Continue your story and type or paste the following sidecar text:

Newton Creek Sampling Site 2.

30. Highlight the text, click Paragraph, and click Quote

31. Add another text block and type Photo: type your name (i.e., William Bajjali).
32. Highlight the Photo text and click the Bold and then Italic button.
Work with Immersive – Sidecar Floating 385

33. Repeat the previous steps by adding the rest of the pictures, as seen in the table below.

Picture Text Photo

3_NewtonSite3.jpg Newton Creek Sampling Site 3 Your Name
4_NewtonSite4.jpg Luai (student) Sampling Site 4 Your Name
5_HogIsland.jpg Newton Creak discharge in Hog Island Your Name

34. Click the + sign below the Sidecar, click Text under Basic.
35. Type or paste the following: “Fluctuation of EC, pH, DO, and Temperature”
36. Highlight “Fluctuation of EC, pH, DO, and Temperature”, click the Paragraph and choose Heading.
37. Click the + sign below the “Fluctuation of EC, pH, DO, and Temperature”, click Text under Basic.
38. Type or paste the following:
The DO, EC, pH, and temperature parameters of the sampling water along the flow path of Newton Creek are important
to aquatic life in the stream.
39. Highlight the text and in the text menu, click the Italic button

Work with Immersive – Sidecar Floating

You will add a “Sidecar” with floating panel and add 4 graphs that represent the fluctuation of the EC, pH, DO, and
Temperature from 2005 to 2011.

40. Click the + sign below the text of the “Fluctuation of EC, pH, DO, and Temperature”
41. Click Sidecar below the Immersive, the Choose a layout dialog box display
42. Choose the Floating panel, and then click Done
43. At the top, click the Add drop-down arrow and choose Image or Video
44. The Add an image or video dialog box display
45. Make sure the Upload tab in the left is selected and click Browse your files
46. Browse to Images folder in Chapter16/Story and select EC. JPG
47. Click Open, and then click Add

Result EC images that represent the fluctuation of the EC are added to the story.

48. At the top of the EC image click Options

49. In the Image options, check Fit (do not crop)

50. In the Attribution, type your name (i.e. William Bajjali)
51. Click Save
52. Next to the EC, click Continue your story and type or paste the following text:
386 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Electrical Conductivity

High EC indicates pollution from different sources, such as urban runoff, road salt, wastewater, and others. The graph repre-
sents the average EC values on a monthly basis. The creek water fluctuates between the winter, summer, fall, or spring
throughout the sampling years at all sites, except for site 5. The similar trends of EC seasonal fluctuation emphasize that the
input sources of EC to the creek water system behave in a similar way throughout the year.

53. Highlight the title Electrical Conductivity, click Paragraph, and click Quote.
54. Highlight the text below the Electrical Conductivity, click Paragraph twice
55. Add another text block and type Graph: type your name (i.e., William Bajjali).
56. Highlight the Graph text and click the Bold and then Italic button.

Add Second Graph

57. At the bottom of the sidecar block is the slide panel.

58. In the slide panel, click the + sign (New slide) button.
59. Repeat the previous step and add the DO graph and type the following text:

Dissolve Oxygen (DO)

The presence of DO in water is essential to aquatic life, such as fish vertebrates. DO is a function of atmospheric P, water T,
and other dissolved substances in the water. To sustain life, DO should be above the chronic criterion for growth: 4.8 mg/l.
Clear variation in the DO concentration was recorded at the five sites. Several sample sites recorded levels below 4.8 mg/l.
There is clear variation in the DO concentration at the five sites. This could be due to warmer summer temperatures and
increased biological activity in terms of organic matter decomposition. Several sample sites recorded levels below the chronic
criterion for the growth of aquatic life. The graph shows that extreme values below 4.8 mg/l were measured at all sites on
different dates.
Temperature 387

60. Customize it as in the previous step

Add the Third and Fourth Graphs

61. Add the third graph “pH.jpg” and add the following text:

Hydrogen ION Concentration (pH)

pH affects many chemical and biological processes in the water, which is important to the survival and reproduction of
aquatic life such as fish. A pH higher than 8 causes stress and limits growth, while a pH lower than 5 can speed up the mobil-
ity of certain trace elements that could harm plants and animals. The pH affects many chemical and biological processes in
the water. Different organisms thrive within different ranges of pH (6.5–8.0). Newton Creek water shows pH fluctuation. pH
fluctuation reflects contamination by a strong base (high pH). Excess aquatic plant growth (high pH). Low pH) pH in the
stream shows that at times, the water is harmful to aquatic animals. Low pH could cause some toxic trace elements to be
released, which may end up in the fat tissue of the organism on Hog Island.

62. Add the fourth graph “Temp.jpg” and add the following text:

Temperature

Water temperature is a critical parameter for aquatic life and has an impact on DO concentration and bacterial activity in
water. Temperature can determine which fish and macroinvertebrate species can survive in a given stream. Macroinvertebrates
are sensitive to T and will change location to select the optimal T. Site 1 never recorded a T value below zero compared to
the rest of the sites. The graph shows that the temperature in the graph increases in summer and decreases in winter.
388 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

63. Customize the “pH.jpg” and the “Temp.jpg” as you did with the EC graph

Conclusion

64. Click the + sign below the Sidecar, click Text under Basic.
65. Type or paste “Conclusion”
66. Highlight the “Conclusion”, in the text menu, click the Paragraph and select Heading.
67. Click the + sign below the “Conclusion”, click Text under Basic.
68. Type or paste the following text:
Some of the recorded parameters of EC, DO, and pH were observed to be much greater than the acute criteria. The relatively
high EC value demonstrates that the source of water in the creek originates from polluted water. This source could origi-
nate mainly from the effluent of the treated wastewater of the oil refinery. There is clear variation in the DO concentration
at the five sites. This could be due to warmer summer temperatures and increased biological activity in terms of organic
matter decomposition. The creek water showed fluctuation of the pH between acidic and alkaline along the stream at the
five sampling sites. Water with pH values above 10 was exceptional and may reflect contamination by a strong base such
as NaOH and Ca(OH)2. The creek demonstrates fluctuation of the temperature during the study period, and the tempera-
ture of the water increases in summer and decreases in winter.
69. Highlight the text. In the text menu, click the Italic button.
70. Click the + sign below the text of the “Conclusion”, click Text under Basic.
71. Type or paste Reference
72. Highlight the Reference, in the text menu, click the Paragraph and select Heading
73. Click the + sign below the text of the “Reference”, click Text under Basic.
74. Type or paste the following text
Bajjali, W. Water Quality Assessment of Newton Creek and Its Effect on Hog Island Inlet of Lake Superior. Water
Qual Expo Health 4, 123–135 (2012). https://doi.org/10.1007/s12403-012-0071-1
75. Highlight the text. In the text menu, click the Italic button.
Review the Story 389

Review the Story

The next step is to review the story, as this step allows you to view your final product before sharing it with the organization
or the community. In addition, if you see something that needs change, it is time to change it or proofread and edit the story.

1. On the ribbon, click the Design tab

2. The Design pane appear
3. Under Cover, accept the default “Minimal”
4. Under Optional story sections, check Navigation
390 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Result A Navigation ribbon display at the top of your Water Quality of Newton Creek story. The ribbon shows all the head-
ings in the story. The ribbon lets the reader jump to a specific heading in the story.

5. For Theme, switch between the themes to see which one best matches the tone of your story
6. Select the Tidal theme

7. On the ribbon, click Preview.

8. The Preview mode allows you to see the story as

(a) Preview on phone
(b) Preview on tablet
(c) Preview on desktop
(d) Preview full screen
9. Click the Preview on phone
Publish and Share 391

10. Review the story for typos, missing text, or other changes before publishing the story
11. When you are done reviewing, click Close preview “x” to return to the editing mode

Publish and Share

Now, you will publish your final story and share it with others. Once it is published, you can choose to share the story with
only people in your organization, or you can share it publicly with the world community.

12. On the ribbon, click Publish

13. The Publish options dialog box display, which allows you to edit the story and share it.
14. In the Share panel, open the Private drop-down arrow and choose Organization
15. Click Publish
392 16 Working with ArcGIS Online and StoryMap App

Result The Water Quality of Newton Creek Story is now published and displayed.

16. In the Ribbon, click the Share button

17. Click copy link (you can send the link to anyone who is interested in your research)

https://arcg.is/qSTvm

Note You can share your story also on Facebook, Twitter, or LinkedIn.
Instant App – Emergency Situations
in California 17

Background California faces threats from different natural disasters, and citizens need a variety of solutions. Specifically,
earthquakes due to the San Andras fault. California is also a coastal state and therefore is at risk of tsunamis. Throughout
California, there are citizens in danger of these natural events. In the event of an earthquake or tsunami, hospitals can treat
the injured and be a storm shelter, schools can also be a storm shelter, and groundwater wells can be used as drinking water.

ArcGIS Pro Approach

1. Launch ArcGIS Pro

2. Create a New Project from scratch
3. Name Project Emergency_WB (Emergency with your initials, i.e., WB)
4. Save it in Ch17

Change the Name and the Basemap

5. Rename the Map and Emergency_CA

6. Click the Map tab in the ribbon, in the Layer group, click the Basemap drop-down arrow.
7. Choose “Light Gray Canvas”

Supplementary Information The online version contains supplementary material available at https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_17.

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 393
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0_17
394 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California

Connect to Data and Add Layers to the Map

8. From the Catalog pane, right-click Folders and choose Add Folder Connection.
9. Browse to \\Env_Water\Ch17 highlight Data and click OK

Note The Data folder consists of Layer folder and file geodatabase (Disaster.gdb).

10. Open the Layer folder under Folder\Data and drag the Earthquake.lyrx, CA.lyrx, Fault_Andreas.lyrx, Hospitals.lyrx,
Schools.lyrx, Tsunami.lyrx, and Wells.lyrx to the Map View
Set the Extent 395

Important When you add a layer file to a map, it draws exactly as it was saved, provided the data referenced by the layer
is accessible. The Earthquake.lyrx is displayed as Quake_Ca because the original feature class in the DisasterResponse.
gdb.is called “Quake_Ca”.

Set the Extent

You will set the map extent to CA layer using custom extent
11. R-click Emergency_CA map, point to Properties, select the Extent tab
12. Click Use a custom extent, under Extent of a layer, click CA
13. Click OK
396 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California

14. R-click in the CP the Fault_Andreas, and point to Zoom To Layer

15. In the Map tab, in the Navigate group, click Full Extent

Update Label Properties and Configure Pop-up Windows

The symbology of all the added layers is based on the layer file that was added to the current map. These symbols do not
require updating because they already meet the web map design requirements.
Before sharing the web map, you will update the labels and configure the Pop-up information.
16. Click Shift on the keyboard and in the CP, and uncheck the Quake_Ca, Hospitals, School, and the Wells layers
17. In the CP, highlight the Tsunami layer and click the Labeling tab on the ribbon. In the Label Class group, choose
County from the Field, then click the Expression to the right of the County
18. In the Label Class – Tsunami pane, click the Symbol tab, and then expand Appearance.
19. Change Size to 11 pt., click the Color down arrow (under Text fill symbol) and choose Mars Red (R3, C2).
20. Click Apply.
21. Click the Position tab.
22. Click the Conflict Resolution button (third icon), expand Remove Duplicate Labels.
23. From the drop-down list, choose Remove All.
24. Close the Label Class pane.
25. In the Labeling tab, in the Layer group click the Label button
Configure Pop-ups 397

Quiz How to remove the label?

Configure Pop-ups

You will now customize the pop-up window for the “Schools” layer by removing unnecessary fields from the display.
26. In the CP, r-click Schools layer and open Attribute Table (69 fields and 10,043 rows)
27. In the CP, check the Schools layer and then right-click it and choose Configure Pop-ups.
28. In the Configure Pop-ups – Schools pane, in the list of locations, point to Fields (69) and click the Edit Pop-Up
Element Button.
29. Uncheck the “Only Use Visible Fields and Arcade Expressions” box.
30. The Display column tells you the columns that will be displayed in your pop-up window.
31. In the Display column header, uncheck the Display box to deselect all fields.
32. Check the display option for the following fields only:
(a) SchoolName
(b) SchoolType
(c) City
33. At the top of the pane, click the Back button
34. In the map, zoom around the San Francisco area and click any school feature to confirm that the pop-up window has
been properly configured.
35. Close the pop-up window, and then close the Configure Pop-ups pane.
36. In the Map tab, in Navigate group, click Full Extent
37. Close the Schools attribute table.
38. Save the project.
398 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California
Share a Web Map and a Web Feature Layer 399

Tip As an alternative to pop-up windows, you can use the Attributes pane for editing workflows where you want to visualize
and update attributes of multiple features at the same time.

Challenge Task

Configure the Pop-Up for the following layers Quake_Ca, Hospitals, School, and Wells by removing the unnecessary fields
and keeping the field as shown in the table below.

Layer Field Field Field

Quake_Ca Depth Mag Place
Hospitals Name
Wells WELL_NAME WELL_USE

Share a Web Map and a Web Feature Layer

You will share a web map with the public so that anyone can use it to generate a web or native app using an app builder. You
will configure a hosted web feature layer to support data export by other users.
39. In the CP, right-click Emergency_CA and choose Properties.
40. In the Map Properties dialog box, on the General tab, check “Allow assignment of unique numeric IDs for sharing
web Layers”
41. Click OK.

Question When a map contains both vector and raster data layers, should you share it as a web map or a web layer?

Answer You should share the map as a web map. You can only share a web map as a web layer if all the layers in the map
are of the same type.

The Emergency_CA map has

400 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California

• A basemap (raster) that consists of tiles (Light Gray Canvas)

• Many layers contain point and line features (Wells, Quake_Ca, School, Tsunami, Hospitals, Fault_Andreas).

Therefore, the Emergency_CA map should be shared as a web map.

Important To share the web map on ArcGIS Online, you must be signed in ArcGIS Online.

42. In the CP, highlight the Emergency_CA map, click Share tab on the ribbon, in the Share As group click Web Map
43. In the Share As Web Map pane, for Name, verify that the field is set to Emergency_CA
44. For Summary, type Earthquake, Tsunami, Hospital, School, Cities, and Saint Andreas fault in California.
45. For Tags, type Earthquake, Tsunami, Hospital, School, Cities, Wells, Fault, California, USA and then press Enter.

Configure the Web Feature Layer

When you share a web map, individual layers are also shared as web layers.
The different layers in the ShareWeb map can support

• Online and offline editing workflows

• Support data export.

You will now update the configuration of some layers to support data export.
46. In the “Share As Web Map” pane, click the Configuration tab.
The web feature layer (WFL) will be shared as Emergency_CA_WFL1 by default. These web feature layers contain
several layers in the map (Wells, Tsunami, School, Hospital, Quake_Ca, Fault_Andreas, and CA). A web feature layer
can contain multiple data layers in the map if they are of the same type (features or tiles).
47. Click Emergency_CA_WFL1 to select the layer and click Properties

• The Layer Type property is set to Feature by default because all layers in the Emergency_CA map are points, line, and
polygon features (vector structure).
• Web feature layers can be queried without further configuration.
• Editing and data export workflows can be supported by enabling more operations. You will enable the Export Data
operation on the web feature layer.
Share a Web Map 401

48. Click the Configuration tab and check the Export Data box.

Share a Web Map

You are now ready to analyze the map and share it as a web map in ArcGIS Online and make sure that there are no errors
before you share it.
49. At the upper left of the Share As Web Map pane, click back button.
50. From the Share As Web Map pane, click Analyze.
If you see a warning message, you can ignore it. There are no errors, so you can proceed to share the web map. The error is
that the service layer has a different projection. To correct the error, you can expand the error and double click on each one,
and the error will disappear.

51. Click Share tab to the right of the Analyze table

A message indicates that the web map was created successfully.
402 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California

52. Click the Manage the web map link (green color text).

Note If necessary, sign in to your organization’s portal.

Result The Emergency_CA web map display under Overview Tab.

53. Review the item details of the web map in your organization.

54. Click the Content tab

Result You will see the Emergency_CA web map, Emergency_CA_WFL1 feature layer (hosted) and Emergency_CA_
WFL1 service definition is listed under your folder (i.e., wbajjali).

You notice also that the web map and the layers are shared with yourself only (Owner) .

Publish a Geo APP Using an Instant App Template

In this section, you will publish a geo app from the Emergency_CA web map that you created in ArcGIS Pro. The geo app
will highlight features such as hospitals, schools, and wells within a certain distance from an earthquake or tsunami location.
Web app template can be built in three simple steps.
First Approach to Build Geo App 403

• Add data from online in the form of feature layers such as hosted feature layer that has been published to ArcGIS Online.
These features (point, line, polygon) support querying, editing, and visualization. They can be added to more than web
map
• Web maps can be created by adding hosted feature layers.
• From the web map you create a web app, which is the best way to share information

The Geo app can be created in two different approaches.

First Approach to Build Geo App

Continue using the Emergency_CA web map by performing the following steps:
55. Under My Content tab click on the Emergency_CA web map
56. To the right of the Emergency_CA web map, click “Open in Map Viewer”

Comment Map Viewer is the primary map-making tool for ArcGIS Online. In this chapter, you will use the Map Viewer
to create the geo app.

Result The web map opens and has different layers, and the Wells layer is selected. To the right if each feature there is a
symbol , when you click it show and hide the layer.
404 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California

Examination of the Attribute Table of the Wells

57. In the Layer pane, for the Wells layer, click the Option button (…) to the right
58. Click Show table
59. The table has many capabilities, such as sorting, changing column width, applying filters, and editing records, if editing
is enabled.
60. In the upper right of the table, click the “X” button to close the table

Configure the Pop-up Window of the Earthquake

You will configure the pop-up window of the earthquake (QUAKE_CA) in California between 2011 and 2022 by using a
subset of the available attributes. The pop-up windows are useful because they are how users receive information from the
map. The pop-up configuration of the web map’s layers influences the behavior of the geo app that you publish
61. In the Map Viewer, zoom in to an area where you see the Quake_Ca feature (pink circle) and click on one circle to open
its pop-up window.
62. The pop-up window opening showing different information
Configure the Pop-up of the Earthquake 405

63. Close the pop-up window

Configure the Pop-up of the Earthquake

You will use the Quake_CA layer attribute data to control what information is shown when a feature is selected on the web
map and how certain geo app components behave.
64. In the Layer pane, ensure that the Quake_Ca layer is selected

65. On the right, on the Setting Toolbar, click the Pop-ups button
66. In the Pop-ups pane of the Quake_CA layer, next to Title, click Expand button
67. From the Title Field, delete the word time
68. To the right of the Title field, click the Add Field button {}
69. From the list that opens, scroll down and select (place)
70. In the Fields list, click on the Fields list to Expand it

All the fields in the attribute table will be displayed, and all the display fields except time, depth, mag, and place will be
removed.
71. Click the X to the right of each field except time, depth, mag, and place
406 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California

72. On the Setting Toolbar, click the configure Fields button

73. In the Quake_Ca panel, click the place field
74. The Formatting dialog box display
75. Under Display name, delete the place and type Earthquake Location, click Done

76. Click the mag field

77. Under Display name, delete the mag and type Magnitude
78. Under the Significant digits, open the drop-down arrow and make it 2 decimal places.
79. Click Done
80. Repeat and make the depth to be Depth with two decimals
81. Make the time as Time
82. On the map, click a Quake_CA feature, you will see that names are updated
Save the Web Map 407

Save the Web Map

Before proceeding and creating the web app, make sure that that all layers are active, and the web map is saved.
83. On the Content toolbar, located on the left, click Save and open and choose Save as
84. In the Save map dialog box, fill it as follows:
85. Title: California Emergency Map_WB (use your initials instead of WB)
86. Folder: Save the web map in a folder in ArcGIS Online (i.e., wbajjali)
87. Tag: California, Earthquake, Tsunami, Groundwater, Wells, Hospitals, Schools, Fault
88. Summary: California Map showing the locations of the earthquake, tsunami, fault, groundwater wells, hospitals, and
schools that will be used during a hazard event.
89. Click Save
408 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California

Result the new web will be called “California Emergency Map_WB” and appear at the top of the Layer pane.

Create a Web App

Geo app is a good way for sharing spatial data with your organization or with public, especially non-GIS users. The app
allows users to combine maps, scenes, multimedia, and more to educate and inspire others to many topics related to different
subjects. A geo app will be created from the “California Emergency Map_WB”. The created geo app will pinpoint the
locations of earthquakes, tsunamis, wells, schools, and hospitals that can be used as emergency facilities in terms of shelter,
medical treatment and potable drinking water or identify what exists within a distance from a specific address in the state of
California.

1. In the Content toolbar on the left, click Create app button

The menu shows some options for creating geo app from the web map that you created. The menu shows four options
(a) Instant Apps
(b) Experience Builder
(c) ArcGIS Story Maps
(d) Dashboard

Each option offers different functionalities. In this chapter, you will create an Instant App that will allow users to interact
with the map and data.
2. Click Instant Apps
3. A gallery of app templates opens

Result The instant apps include a gallery no-code app template and configuration options. Each app template has a specific
purpose, such as finding some features nearby, which we will use in this section.
Create a Web App 409

Note You want to create an app that allow viewer to explore the location of earthquake, tsunami, and the other features that
are closest to the hazard event or specific location or address.

The Instant Apps allow you to preview and test the app before creating it.
4. In the gallery try several templates and when you finish click Back button
5. In the gallery, find the Nearby template and click the Preview button
6. Zoom in or zoom out to find a tsunami location
7. Click a tsunami location on the map

Result The “California Emergency Map_WB” displays a circle and features that exist within a certain radius inside the
circle. The left side of the map shows the nearby features. In this example, you see within 2 km some features (i.e. one tsu-
nami and 5 schools).

8. From the map click Clear Search Location

9. Click the Default Map View button

10. Click another earthquake location to explore the nearby feature
11. Click then Clear Search Location, and click Choose
410 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California

12. Give your app a title: California Emergency App_WB (use your initials instead of WB)
13. The tag field automatically populated with the tag from the web map
14. Click Create App

Configure Your Instant App

You will use the Express setup to configure your Instant App. The Express setup consists of five steps:
(a) Map
(b) About
(c) Nearby
(d) Interactivity
(e) Theme & Layout
15. Click Step 1. Map, the California Emergency Map_WB is the current web map in use. Because you are not going to
change it click the back arrow to return to the Express.

16. Under Express, click Step 2. About

17. App title: Type of Natural Disaster Emergency Resources in California
Configure Your Instant App 411

18. Click Next

18. Click Step 3. Nearby This step allows you to configure the setting to search for what is nearby, therefore, the minimum
and maximum distance unit should be configured.
19. Under Step 3 | Express: Under Layers to include in results, check all boxes, with exception CA
19. Under the Maximum search distance, replace the value with 20
20. Under Search units, choose miles from the drop-down arrow

21. Click Next to go to Step 4 (Interactivity)

412 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California

22. Under the Search Configuration in the “All sources window”, click the ArcGIS World Geocoding Service to select it

23. Click next o go to Step 5 (Theme & Layout)

24. Select a mode: Light
25. Select a preset theme: open drop-down arrow and select Ocean (blue color)
26. Manage widget positions: accept the default
Configure Your Instant App 413

The final step is to view the Instant app and explore how the app works and see the effect of the configuration and the
pop-ups on the map.
27. At the bottom, click Publish, and then click Confirm

28. In the Share dialog box, click Copy Link

29. https://arcg.is/0iSqH4
30. Click Launch
31. To the left of the map under Natural Disaster Emergency Resources in California
32. Drag the distance scale to 20 miles
33. Type San Francisco, CA, USA and press Enter

Result The following were found: 28 wells, 4 tsunamis, 606 schools, 43 hospitals, and a section of Fault Andreas.

34. From the top of the map click “Clear search location”
414 17 Instant App – Emergency Situations in California

Type a Specific Address

35. Under Natural Disaster Emergency Resources in California

36. Type: 15581 Hortense Dr, Westminster, CA, 92683, USA and press Enter

Result The search result updates and shows information about the emergency features near the address. It finds 8 schools
within 1 mile of the address.

37. Change the distance to 20 miles, and press Enter

Result The search found the following features within 20 miles from the address:

Features No
Earthquake 1
Tsunami 2
Hospitals 39
School 978
Wells 91

38. From the top of the map click “Clear search location”
39. Zoom in the map in the west coast of California around San Jose and click on a “Tsunami” north of San Jose

Result Five features were found: 41 wells, 4 tsunamis, 640 schools, 14 hospitals, and a section of Fault Andreas.
Type a Specific Address 415

40. From the top of the map click “Clear search location”
41. Exit ArcGIS Online and ArcGISPro
References - Data Source Credits

The textbook was created using ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online. “Content is the intellectual property of Esri and is used
herein with permission. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.”

Chapter 1 (INTRODUCTION TO ArcGIS Pro) Data sources include the following: the following:

Data (SamplingSite, NewtonCreek, MurphyOil, and HogIsland) are derived from the author article: Bajjali, W. Water Quality
Assessment of Newton Creek and Its Effect on Hog Island Inlet of Lake Superior. Water Qual Expo Health 4, 123–135
(2012). https://doi.org/10.1007/s12403-012-0071-1. All graphs are created by the author.
The DEM of Superior, WI downloaded from USGS Web Page: The National Map – Data Delivery. GIS Data Download |
U.S. Geological Survey (usgs.gov)
https://www.esri.com/en-us/what-is-gis/overview
Ahmad, Karam , & Laituri, Melinda (2017). Use of GIS in Environmental Science. obo in Environmental Science. doi:
10.1093/obo/9780199363445-0081 (Oxford Bibliographies)
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 2 (WORKING WITH ArcGIS Pro) Data sources include the following:

Data (Rivers, Streets, Parks, Hospitals, Airports, Cities, and County layers) are downloaded from the Minnesota Geospatial
Commons web page Resources -Minnesota Geospatial Commons (mn.gov)
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 3 (MAP CLASSIFICATION AND LAYOUT) Data sources include the following:

Data (Fault, Geology, and Well layers) are derived from the author article: Recharge origin, overexploitation, and sustain-
ability of water resources in an arid area from Azraq basin, Jordan: case study, 2006. http://hr.iwaponline.com/
content/37/3/277
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 4 (COORDINATE SYSTEMS AND PROJECTIONS) Data sources include the following:

Data (streets of Superior, street of Duluth, and WI layers) are derived from TIGER/Line Shapefiles from United States
Census Bureau web page: Partnership Shapefiles (census.gov)
Data (Lake.tif clipped from ortho_1-1_1n_s_wi078_2015_1.sid) downloaded from the Wisconsin View web page: https://
bin.ssec.wisc.edu/pub/wisconsinview/NAIP_2015/Menominee/IP_2015/Menominee/
Data (GPS layer) created a new feature by the author using Garmin GPS
The image (Aquifer.jpg) representing the eastern dolomite aquifer of Wisconsin is downloaded from the web page: http://
wgnhs.uwex.edu/water-environment/wisconsin-aquifers/
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

© The Editor(s) (if applicable) and The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 417
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0
418 References - Data Source Credits

Chapter 5 (GEODATABASE) Data sources include the following:

Data (image_rectify, Dam, Stream, StudyArea, Well and Dhuleil layers) are derived from the author article: Water quality
and geochemistry evaluation of groundwater upstream and downstream of the Khirbet Al-Samra wastewater treatment
plant/Jordan, 2015. http://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s13201-014-0263-x,
Data (Well, Fault, and Plant layers) are created as a new feature using geodatabase forms designed by the author.
Data (Well, Catchment, Table 1, and Table 2 layers) are created as new features by the author.
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 6 (DATA EDITING AND TOPOLOGY) Data sources include the following:

Data (Farm and LandB layers) created new by the author for editing purposes
Data (Geology and Field_Geology layers) are derived from the author article: Water quality and geochemistry evaluation of
groundwater upstream and downstream of the Khirbet Al-Samra wastewater treatment plant, Jordan 2015 http://link.
springer.com/article/10.1007/s13201-014-0263-x
Data (Street_Mn, River_MN, Lake_MN, and Fault layers) are downloaded from the Minnesota Geospatial Commons web
page Resources -Minnesota Geospatial Commons (mn.gov)
The image (North_Duluth.jpg) is an aerial photograph of St. Louis County derived and downloaded from the MN-DNR web
page: http://www.dnr.state.mn.us/maps/landview.html
Data (Watershed_1, and Watershed_2 layers) are derived from the author article: Bajjali, W. Water Quality Assessment of
Newton Creek and Its Effect on Hog Island Inlet of Lake Superior. Water Qual Expo Health 4, 123–135 (2012). https://
doi.org/10.1007/s12403-012-0071-1. All graphs are created by the author.
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 7 (Geoprocessing) Data sources include the following:

Data (watershed, stream, soil, and Aflaj layers) are derived from the author article: Evaluation the Groundwater Salinity
throughout Sultanate of Oman Using GIS, Ministry of Water Resources, Oman 1999.
Data (watershed, stream, soil, FarmA, FarmB, FarmC, and FarmD layers) are created as new layers by the author.
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 8 (SITE SUITABILITY AND MODELING) Data sources include the following:

Data (Landuse, Pipeline, StudyArea, and Vegetation layers) are digitized on screen from an image that had been downloaded
from Google Earth (https://www.google.com/earth). The image was then clipped and georeferenced using local
projection.
Data (Well, Fault, Stream, KSWTP, and GEOL_KS layers) are derived from the author article: Water quality and geochem-
istry evaluation of groundwater upstream and downstream of the Khirbet Al-Samra wastewater treatment plant/Jordan,
2015. http://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s13201-014-0263-x,
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 9 (Geocoding) Data sources include the following:

Data (ZipCode_WI and Street of city of superior layer) are derived from ESRI ArcGIS Data and Maps (2020) ArcGIS Pro |
My Esri. Copyright © 2017 Esri (include any data providers). All rights reserved
Data (Well_Owner layer and Well table) are created new by the author for the purpose of geocoding.
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 10 (WORKING WITH RASTER) Data sources include the following:

The Burnsville DEM image downloaded from the web page GIS Data Download | U.S. Geological Survey (usgs.gov)
The images (AZ_DEM, Dhuleil.tif and KTDam grids) are downloaded and clipped from SRTM 90 m Digital Elevation Data
downloaded from CGIAR-CSI HOME http://srtm.csi.cgiar.org
References - Data Source Credits 419

Data (Geology, stream, and Luhfi_Dam layers) are derived from the author article: Water quality and geochemistry evalua-
tion of groundwater upstream and downstream of the Khirbet Al-Samra wastewater treatment plant/Jordan, 2015. http://
link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s13201-014-0263-x,
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 11 (SPATIAL INTERPOLATION) Data sources include the following:

Data (dam, stream, watershed and well layers) are derived from the author article: Model the effect of four artificial recharge
dams on the quality of groundwater using geostatistical methods in GIS environment, Oman, 2005 http://www.spatialhy-
drology.net/index.php/JOSH/article/view/39
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 12 (WATERSHED DELINEATION) Data sources include the following:

Data (Burnsville.tif and CreditRiver.tif DEM) downloaded from the web page GIS Data Download | U.S. Geological Survey
(usgs.gov)
Data (CreditRiver layer) are downloaded from the Minnesota Geospatial Commons web page Resources - Minnesota
Geospatial Commons (mn.gov)
Data (Bridge layer) are created as new layers by the author
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 13 (GEOSTATISTICAL ANALYSIS) Data sources include the following:

Data (Governorate, Town, Well, WalaWatershed, Grid_1000, Geology, and WWTP layers) are derived from GIS Workshop
in Hydrogeology at Water Authority of Jordan, Ministry of Water and Irrigation, September 2 - 6, 2012 created and
instructed by the author.
Data (Dam, Geology, Stream, and Well layers) are derived from the author article: Water quality and geochemistry evaluation
of groundwater upstream and downstream of the Khirbet Al-Samra wastewater treatment plant/Jordan, 2015. http://link.
springer.com/article/10.1007/s13201-014-0263-x,
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 14 (PROXIMITY AND NETWORK ANALYSIS) Data sources include the following:

Data (Dam, Region, Road, Stream, Street, Town, Well, Well_Supply, and WWTP layers) are derived from GIS Workshop in
Hydrogeology at Water Authority of Jordan, Ministry of Water and Irrigation, September 2 - 6, 2012 created and instructed
by the author.
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.

Chapter 15 (3-D ANALYSIS) Data sources include the following:

Data (Building, Farm, GasStation, ObserbationWell, Plume, Street, SupplyWell, Tree, Valley, and WWTP layers) are derived
from GIS Workshop in Hydrogeology at Water Authority of Jordan, Ministry of Water and Irrigation, September 2 - 6,
2012 created and instructed by the author.
The DEM of the city of Duluth, MN (Duluth.tif) is downloaded from the USGS web page: http://viewer.nationalmap.gov/.
The data (Contour and Duluth layers) are obtained from the DEM (Duluth.tif)
Data (city and stream layers) are derived from ESRI ArcGIS Data and Maps (2020) ArcGIS Pro | My Esri. Copyright © 2017
Esri (include any data providers). All rights reserved
Data (RainStation layer) is created as a new layer by the author
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights reserved.
420 References - Data Source Credits

Chapter 16 (WORKING WITH ARCGIS ONLINE AND StoryMap APP) Data sources include the following:

Data (SamplingSite, River, and MurphyOil) are derived from the author article: Bajjali, W. Water Quality Assessment of
Newton Creek and Its Effect on Hog Island Inlet of Lake Superior. Water Qual Expo Health 4, 123–135 (2012). https://
doi.org/10.1007/s12403-012-0071-1.
Data (StoryMap maps) created by the author
Data (StoryMap- Photo) taken by the author
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights
reserved.

Chapter 17 (ARCGIS ONLINE - INSTANT APP) Data sources include the following:

Data (Wells, School, Hospitals, Quake_Ca, Fault) are downloaded from www.ca.gov | California State Portal
Data (Tsunami) are downloaded from the California Tsunami Maps and Data California Tsunami Maps and Data
Applications were performed using ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online. Copyright © 2022 Esri and its licensors. All rights
reserved.
Index

A 227–231, 233–242, 245, 246, 254, 255, 261, 262, 264, 266,
Addresses, vii–ix, 22, 169–173, 175–182, 188, 408, 409, 414–415 270, 272, 279, 282, 283, 288–291, 293, 294, 296, 297, 299,
Analyze data, vii, 2 301–303, 305, 307, 309–311, 313–316, 319–330, 334–338,
Animation, ix, 31, 344–348, 351–352 341–344, 347–349, 352, 354, 396, 397, 399, 400
Anselin Local Moran I, 279–284 Contours, viii, 184, 196–199, 334–336
Append, viii, 117, 129, 130, 135, 322, 326, 347, 348 Convert, 3, 72, 169–171, 176, 183, 187–188, 194–196, 235–236,
App templates, 402–403, 408 241–243, 245, 251, 252, 256–257, 297–298, 337, 349, 354
ArcGIS Online, vii, ix, 2, 3, 8, 9, 40, 48, 130, 169, 172, 199, 200, 301, Coordinates, vii, 2, 4, 5, 13, 23, 32, 33, 42, 63, 64, 66–76, 79, 80, 82,
357–392, 400, 401, 403, 407, 415 84, 85, 87, 97, 102, 108, 114, 121, 124, 142, 154, 169, 170,
ArcGIS Pro, vii–ix, 1–23, 26, 35, 36, 39, 40, 42, 49–51, 58, 68–70, 186, 188, 189, 191, 198, 208, 223, 224, 228–231, 235, 238,
81–83, 98, 110, 113, 129, 130, 144–146, 151, 154, 169, 170, 241, 247, 259, 262, 287, 298, 306, 313, 334, 335
177, 185, 186, 188, 196, 221, 226, 234, 243, 245, 246, 258, Copy link, 392, 413
261, 288, 299, 333, 334, 337, 338, 344, 356, 393, 402 Create video, 346
Aspects, viii, 39, 42, 146, 151, 184, 209–211, 214–215, 272 Criteria, 2, 40, 145–160, 162, 264, 270, 272, 288, 334, 386, 388
Average Nearest Neighbor, 268–270, 273
Azraq basin, 1, 36, 37, 40, 46, 48, 50
D
Definition query, 270, 272, 277, 279, 296–297, 310–311
B Delete, 23, 32, 37, 47, 77, 98, 100, 103, 347, 405, 406
Base height, 337, 338, 341, 342, 349 Digital elevation model (DEM), viii, 5, 7, 183–186, 188–189, 193,
Basemaps, 2, 8, 10, 16, 17, 180–181, 344, 345, 365, 393–394, 400 196–198, 200, 205, 243, 244, 246, 247, 333, 337, 352
Bookmarks, ix, 20, 31–33, 344–347, 365 Disasters, 393, 394, 410, 413, 414
Buffer, viii, 129, 130, 139–141, 147, 156, 157, 159, 166, 264–268, Dissolve, viii, 129, 130, 132, 133, 140, 173, 303, 386–387
287, 289, 291, 293–295, 303, 305, 312 Distortions, 64, 65, 72

C E
California, ix, 393–415 Earthquakes, ix, 393–395, 400, 402, 404–409, 414
Capture data, 1, 2, 83 Editing, viii, 8, 60, 81, 87, 97–127, 151, 161, 391, 399, 400, 403, 404
Catalog pane, 9–11, 16–19, 28, 30, 36, 37, 39, 40, 42, 45–47, 69, 70, Emergency, ix, 175, 393–415
73, 78, 83–85, 90–93, 99, 102, 104, 109, 110, 114–116, 121, Equal interval, 42, 46, 50–52, 54, 56, 61
122, 124, 131, 133, 137–139, 142, 147, 152, 154, 163–165, Erase, viii, 129, 130, 143–144, 159–161, 164, 287
168, 170, 171, 175, 185, 186, 188, 191, 192, 194, 197, 202, Euclidian distance, 276, 306–307, 312
206, 210, 216, 227–229, 233, 234, 236, 237, 239, 240, 242, Excel table, 175, 176
245, 246, 255, 261, 264, 270, 272, 276, 279, 288, 301, 305, Explore tool, 21
313, 315, 316, 319, 320, 324, 325, 329, 334, 337, 394 Extrude, 338–339, 341–342
Cells, 5–7, 12, 183, 186–188, 192–195, 209, 214, 215, 217, 220, 227,
228, 234, 235, 237, 238, 241, 243–247, 249, 250, 252, 253,
276, 277, 295, 305, 306 F
Central feature, 259, 260, 264 Facilities, ix, 321–328, 408
Classifications, vii, 35–61, 193, 281, 283, 311–312 Fault, 83–87, 89, 114, 115, 117–121, 152, 156, 159, 287, 333, 393,
Classify, vii, 30, 38, 43–48, 133, 183, 193–194, 210–211, 228, 400, 407, 413, 414
236–237, 239, 242, 307–308, 313, 328–329, 337 Feature classes, vii, viii, 18, 19, 21, 23, 25, 26, 41, 71–73, 75, 81–92,
Clip, viii, 129, 130, 137, 183, 189–190, 235, 238 114–116, 121, 122, 124, 125, 129, 132, 133, 136–139,
Content toolbar, 364, 407, 408 141–145, 148–150, 156–159, 169, 170, 172, 173, 175,
Contents pane (CP), 9–11, 16, 17, 19, 23–31, 33, 37, 38, 40–43, 179–182, 189, 194, 198, 201, 203, 206–209, 229, 237, 256,
45–47, 51, 52, 54–61, 69–72, 74–78, 83, 84, 86–90, 93, 94, 99, 262–267, 270, 272–274, 276, 277, 279–284, 287, 289, 293,
101–105, 107, 111–113, 115–117, 131, 133–141, 147, 150, 297–298, 301, 303, 312–314, 321, 322, 334, 341, 352, 358, 395
152, 154, 161, 170, 173–176, 179–181, 185, 186, 188, 189, Feature datasets, vii, 84–87, 114–116, 121, 122, 124, 125, 209, 313,
191–195, 197–199, 201–203, 206, 209, 210, 213, 220, 315, 320, 325, 329

© The Editor(s) (if applicable) and The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 421
W. Bajjali, ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online, Springer Textbooks in Earth Sciences, Geography and Environment,
https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-031-42227-0
422 Index

Feature service, 3, 358, 363–364 I

File geodatabase, 16, 18, 19, 81, 83–87, 114, 133, 165, 309, 313, 358, Immersive, 374, 380–385
394 Import, 8, 39–40, 71, 72, 83–85, 90–91, 114, 115, 121, 124, 142, 297,
Fill, viii, 16, 43, 45–47, 59, 61, 70–72, 74, 75, 78, 79, 83–85, 90–93, 313, 322, 325, 326, 345, 351
107–109, 114, 115, 120, 121, 124, 132–134, 137–142, 144, Instant app, ix, 372, 393–415
150, 154–159, 165, 172, 176, 177, 179, 187, 189–191, 193, Integer raster, 187–188, 211, 249, 252
195, 197–208, 210, 211, 214, 216, 217, 220, 227, 229, 231, Intermediate data, 164
234, 235, 238, 241, 243, 246–251, 254–258, 262–267, 270, Intersects, viii, 63–65, 111, 130, 138, 231, 254, 287
273, 274, 277, 280, 282, 284, 289, 290, 292–294, 297, 298, Inverse distance weighting (IDW), viii, 223–225, 234, 237–240, 242, 243
300, 301, 303, 304, 306, 308, 309, 313, 315, 316, 318, 322,
325, 326, 335, 353, 359, 367, 368, 372, 381, 396, 407
Float raster, 252 J
Flow accumulations, viii, 244, 245, 250–253 Join, 159, 166, 170, 216, 276, 309
Flow directions, viii, 243–244, 246–247, 249–251, 254, 255, 258
Fly, 344–348
Folder, 8, 15–19, 28, 30, 36, 37, 39, 41, 42, 45–49, 69–71, 73, 74, 78, K
81, 83, 85, 90, 91, 98, 99, 102, 104, 109, 110, 114, 121, 124, Kriging, viii, 223–226, 234, 240–243
130, 131, 133, 137–139, 146, 147, 152, 154, 163, 169, 170,
175, 177, 184–186, 188, 190, 191, 193–195, 197–199, 202,
205, 206, 216, 226, 227, 229, 233, 234, 237, 240, 245, 246, L
255, 261, 264, 270, 272, 274, 276, 278, 288, 299, 301, 305, Labels, 15, 26–30, 33, 35, 39, 44, 45, 59, 74, 87, 92, 99, 102–104,
313, 324, 329, 334, 335, 337, 344, 346–348, 352, 358, 359, 106, 117, 134–137, 141, 143, 163–164, 229, 236, 239, 242,
363, 369–372, 381, 385, 394, 402, 407 288, 289, 299, 307, 310, 311, 325, 329, 354, 356, 396–397
Latitude, 4, 23, 63, 64, 67, 68, 72, 73, 170, 188
Layer, viii, ix, 3, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 16, 19, 21, 23, 26–33, 35, 36, 38,
G 41–43, 48, 52, 56–58, 87, 97, 101, 102, 104, 105, 107–110,
Geo app, 370, 402–405, 408 112, 113, 129, 132, 138, 141, 143, 146, 148, 149, 152, 154,
Geocoding, viii, 22, 169–182, 412 159–161, 164, 168, 170, 174, 175, 180, 181, 183, 186–188,
Geodatabase, vii, viii, 2, 3, 8, 19, 75, 77, 81–95, 97, 98, 107, 113–115, 193, 194, 197, 199, 201, 203, 209, 220, 225, 227, 230–231,
117, 118, 121, 122, 124–127, 133, 169, 177, 191, 192, 194, 233, 235, 237, 238, 241, 246, 261–265, 268, 276, 279, 280,
297–298, 308, 313 282, 287–290, 293, 294, 296, 298–301, 305, 306, 309–311,
Geographic coordinate system (GCS), vii, 63, 67–69, 72, 78, 85 321–323, 325, 326, 329–331, 333, 334, 336–338, 341, 342,
Geographic distributions, viii, 259–262, 264, 265 344, 348, 349, 352, 355, 357, 359, 361, 363–365, 368, 370,
Geographic information system (GIS), vii–ix, 1–5, 8, 15, 23, 30, 32, 393–397, 399–405, 407, 408, 411
35, 63, 64, 68, 73, 81, 82, 97, 104, 110, 114, 129, 130, 145, Layouts, vii, 8, 15, 35–62, 156–161, 163, 166, 380, 385, 410, 412
146, 150, 151, 154, 169, 183, 184, 199, 201, 223, 224, 227, Legends, 51, 55–58, 61, 365, 367
243, 259, 287–289, 312, 333, 357 Line features, viii, 4, 5, 83, 86, 199–201, 206, 207, 312, 354, 400
Geoprocessing, viii, 3, 9, 48, 71, 72, 75, 79, 83, 129–137, 140, Line of sight, 184, 205–209
144–154, 156–160, 163–166, 171–173, 176, 177, 187, Locators, viii, 17, 169, 171–173, 177–179
189–191, 193, 195, 197, 198, 200, 202, 205, 206, 210, 211, Longitude, 4, 23, 63, 64, 67, 68, 72, 73, 170, 188
214, 216, 217, 219, 227, 246, 251, 258, 262–264, 266, 267, Lysimeter, 184, 215, 217–221
270, 273, 274, 276–278, 280, 282, 284, 289, 293, 298, 301,
303, 306, 308, 333, 335, 348, 353, 356
Georeferencing, 67, 73–77 M
Geostatistical analysis, viii, 259–285 Manual classification, 51, 56
Getis-Ord general G, 272–275 Map extent, 32–33, 106, 351, 395
GIS description, 2 Maplex, 15, 26
Global Moran’s I, 275–278 Map scales, 28–30, 58
Global polynomial (GP), viii, 225, 234–235 Map template, 16
Greenhouse, viii, 146–150 Map viewer, ix, 184, 363–365, 367, 368, 372, 403, 404
Grid, 5–7, 51, 63, 75, 81, 146, 183, 188, 189, 192, 215, 223, 236, 243, Match, 40, 87, 92, 169, 173, 174, 177, 179–182, 262, 276, 390
244, 246, 247, 276–277 Mean center, 259, 260, 262–265
Groundwater, viii, 1, 4, 36, 43–48, 51–53, 55, 61, 83, 91, 92, 129, 130, Media, 228, 352, 361, 362, 372, 374–380, 384
151, 152, 157, 170, 196, 216, 227–229, 234, 243, 245, 256, Merge, viii, 98, 109–110, 120, 121, 129, 130, 139, 183, 190–192
259, 260, 264, 269, 276, 279, 282, 288, 300, 305, 311, 312, Meridians, 63–65, 67, 188
333, 334, 393, 407 ModelBuilder, viii, 8, 130, 145, 146, 150–152, 154, 161–165
Guides, vii, 53–55, 89, 110 Model parameters, 164–168
Model tools, 151, 164–166, 168
Model window, 153, 155, 161
H Modifies, 65, 98, 100, 104, 109, 111–113, 120, 129, 145, 164, 169,
High/low clustering, 274–275 233, 287
Hillshade, viii, 10, 16, 77, 83, 115, 184, 196–197, 199, 226, 245, 261, Modify, 35, 57, 60
288, 334, 341, 344, 349 Mosaic, viii, 183, 190–192
Hospitals, ix, 19, 23, 24, 393, 394, 396, 399, 400, 402, 407, 408, Move, 20, 21, 30, 61, 71, 76, 98, 100, 120, 160, 184, 339, 340
413, 414 Multi-ring buffer, 287, 302–305
Hot spots, 282–284 My Content, 358–361, 363, 403
Index 423

N Realistic layer, 341

Natural Breaks, 42–44, 50, 52, 54–61 Relationship classes, vii, 91–95
Navigator, 339, 340, 349 Resample, 183, 192–193
Near, viii, 130, 152, 264, 266–268, 270, 272, 276, 285, 287, 298–301, Reservoir, 141–144, 151, 266, 267, 287
308–310, 312, 324, 414 Reshape, 98, 102, 111–113
Neighborhood, 223, 225, 227, 228, 240, 244, 279, 321 Ribbon, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 21, 23, 42, 45–49, 51, 52, 54–56, 58, 60, 61,
Network dataset, 84, 313, 315–316, 318, 322–324, 326, 329, 330 71–75, 78, 79, 83, 87–90, 100, 102–105, 109–112, 114,
Nitrate, 152, 170, 173–175, 227, 242, 288, 311–312 119–122, 124–127, 132, 134, 136–140, 143, 144, 147,
North arrow, 51, 55, 60, 61 152–154, 161–165, 171, 175, 178, 180, 187, 188, 191, 192,
Nuclear power plant (NPP), viii, 151–161, 163–165, 168 194, 197, 199, 201, 202, 208, 210, 216, 227, 229–231, 234,
Null hypothesis, 269–274, 276, 278, 279, 282 237, 240, 245, 246, 251, 255, 261, 262, 264, 289, 291, 299,
301, 305, 313, 320, 322, 324, 325, 329, 330, 334–338, 341,
342, 344–351, 353–355, 373, 389–393, 396, 400
O Route, viii, 97, 287, 320, 325, 327–331, 347
Oman, viii, 114, 132, 226–228, 232–234 Run the model, 151, 166, 168
Outliers, 237, 279–284
Overshoots, viii, 98, 110–113
S
Saint Andreas fault, 400
P Salt intrusion, viii, 227
Package Project, 48–51 Scale bar, 51, 55, 58, 59, 61
Pane, 9, 15, 23–25, 28, 30, 32, 69–72, 79, 106, 108, 109, 111–113, Scenes, ix, 8, 15, 16, 20, 21, 26, 28, 31, 32, 39, 333, 334, 337–345,
115, 147, 154, 157, 159, 187, 189–195, 197, 198, 201, 202, 347–349, 354–356, 408
204, 206, 209–211, 213, 214, 216, 226–228, 231, 233, 235, Schools, ix, 4, 393, 394, 396, 397, 399, 400, 402, 407–409, 413, 414
241, 246–249, 251–254, 258, 292, 293, 296, 301, 303, 306, Search, 411, 412, 414
307, 311, 322, 328, 330, 336, 341, 347, 348, 351, 354–356, Search location, 409, 413–415
365, 367, 368, 371, 384, 389, 396, 397, 399–401, 405, 408 Select, 15, 19, 21–25, 29–32, 35–38, 41, 43, 49, 51, 54, 55, 57–61, 68,
Parallels, 1, 63–67 70–72, 74, 79, 83–85, 88, 89, 92, 94, 99–101, 103, 104,
PDF file, 61–62, 301 107–109, 111–114, 116, 117, 121, 124, 125, 131, 133, 134,
Places, 2, 23–26, 43, 52, 54–56, 58, 60, 66, 70, 71, 76, 89, 100, 103, 136, 139, 140, 142–145, 147, 149, 150, 152, 158, 160, 161,
134, 138, 156, 157, 160, 169, 171–172, 179, 181, 182, 198, 163, 164, 170, 175, 180–182, 185, 189, 190, 194, 197–199,
203, 220, 229, 230, 233, 236, 239, 242, 272, 300, 311, 337, 201, 203, 210, 219, 226–228, 230–232, 234, 236, 238–242,
399, 405, 406 244, 245, 250, 253, 254, 261, 264–266, 287–290, 292–294,
Point features, 4, 83, 87, 169–171, 175, 179, 227, 228, 262, 308, 341 296, 299, 302, 304, 307, 309, 311, 313, 314, 317–320, 323,
Polygon feature, viii, 6, 83, 86, 97, 109, 121, 139, 142, 148, 159, 169, 325, 329, 330, 334–337, 344, 348, 352, 354, 355, 358, 362,
189, 194, 256, 287, 400 365, 367, 368, 375, 379, 381, 385, 388, 390, 395, 403, 405, 412
Pop up, 20–22, 160, 178, 299, 365, 372, 396–399, 404–407, 413 Service areas, 316, 321–323
Pour points, 245, 254, 255 Setting toolbar, 364–365, 405, 406
Project, vii, ix, 2, 3, 8–10, 13, 15, 16, 18–20, 29, 31, 32, 36, 37, Shapefile, 2, 3, 81, 85, 90, 97, 98, 107, 110, 111, 190, 194, 226, 245,
39–42, 44–52, 61, 68, 70, 72, 73, 78–80, 83, 85, 90, 98, 101, 255, 358, 359, 363
103, 104, 106, 107, 109, 110, 112, 114, 119, 124, 127, 146, Share, viii, ix, 2, 8, 15, 31, 39, 41, 48, 49, 61, 84, 97, 145, 299, 344,
150, 152, 153, 168, 170, 174, 175, 182–185, 188, 189, 191, 357, 362, 363, 370–372, 391, 392, 399–403, 413
192, 194, 195, 197, 201, 202, 205, 207, 210–212, 214, 216, Sidecar, 374, 380–386, 388
219, 221, 226, 227, 229, 233, 234, 236, 237, 239, 240, 242, Sinks, viii, 243, 244, 246–249
245, 254, 255, 258, 261, 263, 264, 267, 270, 275, 278, 281, Site suitability, viii, 145–168
285, 288, 291, 292, 296, 298, 299, 301, 303, 305, 310, Slopes, viii, 184, 209–217, 219, 336
312–314, 319, 324, 329, 333, 334, 348, 350, 352, 356, 393, 397 Smooth feature, 98
Projection, vii, 7, 13, 63–80, 146, 183, 188, 189, 191, 228, 233, 401 Soil, 121–123, 138, 139, 378
Projection on the fly, vii, 67, 69–71 Source raster, 77, 252–254
Projection parameters, 67 Spatial interpolation, viii, 223–242
Proximity analysis, 130, 147, 287–288, 305–306, 312 Spatial join, viii, 130, 276–277, 287
Publish and share, 9, 372, 391–392 Spider diagrams, viii, 287, 300–302, 312
P values, 269, 272, 274–276, 278, 279, 281, 282 Split, viii, 98, 101, 102, 129, 130, 169
Standard distance, 264–265
StoryMaps, ix, 357–392
Q Stream Link, 244, 254
Quantile, 42, 44–46, 50–52, 54, 56, 61, 225 Stream networks, 244, 250–253, 257, 258
Street addresses, viii, 170, 175–182
Structured query language (SQL), 27, 81, 82, 93, 109, 149, 155, 158,
R 204, 218, 219, 266, 291, 294, 296
Raster, vii, viii, 6, 7, 10–14, 69, 72–76, 78–80, 82, 145, 151, 183, 184, Styles, 17, 25, 27, 33, 35, 39–40, 114, 177, 365–368
186–195, 197, 198, 202, 205, 209, 210, 214–220, 227, 228, Symbolizing, 15, 35, 174–175, 261–262
234–236, 238, 239, 241–258, 287, 305, 306, 308, 333, 339, Symbols, 4, 11, 23–28, 30, 35, 36, 39, 41, 43–47, 55–59, 70, 74, 87–89,
344, 352, 399, 400 93, 102, 106, 111, 115, 119, 135, 137–140, 143, 147, 150, 152,
Raster dataset, viii, 6, 8, 75, 76, 78, 79, 82–84, 87, 90, 183, 188–195, 256 174, 175, 179, 190, 198, 199, 201, 202, 206, 218, 227, 229, 231,
Raster models, 3, 6, 7 232, 255, 261, 262, 264, 281, 283, 288, 296, 297, 306, 311, 331,
Raster projection, viii, 67, 78 336–337, 341, 342, 348, 349, 366–368, 396, 403
424 Index

T Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM), vii, 64, 67, 69, 72, 73, 84, 85,
Table, viii, 15, 16, 25–27, 30, 35, 38, 40, 41, 43, 47, 54, 56, 77, 115, 121, 124, 198, 227, 228, 231
81, 82, 87–92, 94, 97, 101, 107–109, 117–119, 121, 125, Unmatched addresses, 180–182
129, 131, 133, 134, 136, 139, 140, 143, 145, 148, 150,
152, 154, 169, 171–173, 175, 179–182, 186, 187, 195,
203, 204, 211, 213–217, 220, 225, 228, 230, 231, 234, V
237, 243, 249–252, 254, 259, 260, 263, 267, 269, 270, Validates, 117–119, 125–127, 161, 162, 166, 309
272–274, 276, 278, 279, 281, 284, 285, 287, 290–292, Vector model, 3, 7
294, 296, 298, 300, 301, 304, 305, 308, 309, 314, 317, Vertical exaggeration, 343
328, 335, 337, 340, 341, 348, 349, 352, 353, 365, 366, Vertical profile, viii, 184, 199–201, 354
385, 397, 399, 404, 405 View window, 10, 16, 28
Tag, 48, 49, 359, 369, 400, 407, 410 Visibility, 26–31, 184, 202–203, 205, 206, 208, 209, 333
3-D, viii, ix, 8, 63, 196, 333–356
Thumbnail, 31–32, 347, 351
Time, viii, 1–3, 7, 9, 26–28, 55, 57, 59, 65, 97, 134, 135, 169, 183, W
211, 232, 249, 260, 268, 272, 289, 312–314, 316, 319–325, Watershed, viii, 1, 97, 124–127, 130–137, 184, 226–229, 233–241,
327, 348–351, 357, 372, 373, 387, 389, 399, 405, 406 243–258, 272, 274, 276
Time tracking, ix, 348–349 Web feature, 3, 399–401
Title, 51, 55, 56, 201, 232, 301, 359, 360, 369, 372, 373, 386, 405, Web Map, ix, 184, 357, 363, 369–372, 381, 396, 399–405, 407–408, 410
407, 410 Wells, vii–ix, 1, 4, 7, 9, 35–37, 42–48, 58, 82–85, 87, 90–94, 114, 129,
Topologies, viii, 4, 82, 84, 97–127 130, 151, 152, 154, 157, 159, 162–164, 166, 169, 170,
Topology rules, viii, 114, 117, 121, 125 172–176, 179–182, 224–229, 259–274, 276–277, 279–283,
Travel Modes, 316 285, 287–302, 305, 306, 308–313, 316, 321–325, 327, 333,
Trend surface analysis, 223–225, 229 334, 337, 341–343, 345, 347, 348, 354, 361, 372, 393, 394,
Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN), 214, 333–337, 342–345, 396, 399, 400, 402–404, 407, 408, 413, 414
347, 348
Tsunamis, ix, 393, 394, 396, 400, 402, 407–409, 413, 414
Z
Zip codes, viii, 170–175
U Zipped shapefiles, 357–360
Undershoots, viii, 98, 110–113 Zonal statistics, 248–249
Union, viii, 130, 148, 149, 159, 164, 166, 287 Z scores, 268, 269, 271, 272, 274–276, 278, 279, 281, 282, 285

Storytelling With Data Cole Nussbaumer Knaflic
100% (45)
Storytelling With Data Cole Nussbaumer Knaflic
291 pages
Neufert 4th Edition
92% (60)
Neufert 4th Edition
608 pages
Microsoft Power BI Cookbook by Greg Deckler
100% (18)
Microsoft Power BI Cookbook by Greg Deckler
655 pages
Kurt Menke - Discover QGIS 3.x - Second Edition A Workbook For Classroom or Independent Study-Locate Press (2022)
67% (3)
Kurt Menke - Discover QGIS 3.x - Second Edition A Workbook For Classroom or Independent Study-Locate Press (2022)
430 pages
Exam 1Z0-1050-24 Oracle Payroll Cloud 2024 Implementation Professional
100% (2)
Exam 1Z0-1050-24 Oracle Payroll Cloud 2024 Implementation Professional
27 pages
Principles of Geographical Information Systems PDF
82% (11)
Principles of Geographical Information Systems PDF
360 pages
Introduction To ArcGIS Indoor
No ratings yet
Introduction To ArcGIS Indoor
323 pages
ArcGIS Pro Essential Workflows
No ratings yet
ArcGIS Pro Essential Workflows
353 pages
Qgis Training Manual PDF
83% (12)
Qgis Training Manual PDF
164 pages
QGIS For Hydrological Applications Recipes For Catchment Hydrology and Water Management
100% (11)
QGIS For Hydrological Applications Recipes For Catchment Hydrology and Water Management
168 pages
Fundamentals of Geographic Inf Systems
71% (7)
Fundamentals of Geographic Inf Systems
461 pages
Bansal, V. (2013) - Enterprise Resource Planning A Managerial Perspective
100% (2)
Bansal, V. (2013) - Enterprise Resource Planning A Managerial Perspective
216 pages
Workbook Arc GISPro
No ratings yet
Workbook Arc GISPro
371 pages
Arcgis Pro: Tips & Tricks: James Sullivan
No ratings yet
Arcgis Pro: Tips & Tricks: James Sullivan
58 pages
FastPack Protocol (31172)
No ratings yet
FastPack Protocol (31172)
11 pages
Volume 29 Esri Map Book PDF
100% (3)
Volume 29 Esri Map Book PDF
140 pages
CISSP Domain 1
No ratings yet
CISSP Domain 1
142 pages
QGISTrainingManual Part1 QGIS 3.16.7
100% (1)
QGISTrainingManual Part1 QGIS 3.16.7
132 pages
GISA 7.0 Aug20 StudentWorkbook
100% (1)
GISA 7.0 Aug20 StudentWorkbook
205 pages
Getting To Know ArcGIS Desktop
No ratings yet
Getting To Know ArcGIS Desktop
5 pages
Arcgis 10 Manual
100% (2)
Arcgis 10 Manual
83 pages
Geo-Information - Technologies, Applications and The Environment - Mathias Lemmens
100% (1)
Geo-Information - Technologies, Applications and The Environment - Mathias Lemmens
372 pages
Using Lidar in ArcGIS
100% (8)
Using Lidar in ArcGIS
377 pages
Better Data Visualizations Scholars
98% (41)
Better Data Visualizations Scholars
464 pages
GIS Science
71% (7)
GIS Science
539 pages
ARC GIS Android Guide
100% (3)
ARC GIS Android Guide
346 pages
Migrating From ArcMap To ArcGIS Pro (PDFDrive)
No ratings yet
Migrating From ArcMap To ArcGIS Pro (PDFDrive)
245 pages
Model Builderfor Pro
No ratings yet
Model Builderfor Pro
148 pages
Un Encrypted
100% (1)
Un Encrypted
269 pages
APEW 11.1 May21 StudentWorkbook
No ratings yet
APEW 11.1 May21 StudentWorkbook
343 pages
ArcGIS - Arc Hydro Tools Tutorial (2002)
100% (1)
ArcGIS - Arc Hydro Tools Tutorial (2002)
64 pages
Exercise: Find Amenities in Denver, CO
No ratings yet
Exercise: Find Amenities in Denver, CO
28 pages
Download full Getting to Know ArcGIS Pro 2.6 4th Edition Michael Law ebook all chapters
100% (7)
Download full Getting to Know ArcGIS Pro 2.6 4th Edition Michael Law ebook all chapters
50 pages
Exercitii
No ratings yet
Exercitii
168 pages
ArcPro Manual
No ratings yet
ArcPro Manual
166 pages
Applying and Extending Oracle Spatial
From Everand
Applying and Extending Oracle Spatial
Simon Greener
No ratings yet
Guided Exercise: Create Collection and Publishing Apps From A Single Feature Layer
No ratings yet
Guided Exercise: Create Collection and Publishing Apps From A Single Feature Layer
36 pages
DCEP 1.0 Lecture1
100% (1)
DCEP 1.0 Lecture1
286 pages
(GIS'23) Lecture 3 - GIS Data Representation & Modeling
No ratings yet
(GIS'23) Lecture 3 - GIS Data Representation & Modeling
33 pages
Arcgis Netstore Guide10.2.7
100% (1)
Arcgis Netstore Guide10.2.7
420 pages
ERDAS IMAGINE 2013 Product Description
No ratings yet
ERDAS IMAGINE 2013 Product Description
30 pages
Gis 2
No ratings yet
Gis 2
14 pages
Introduction To Programming Arc Objects With VBA
50% (2)
Introduction To Programming Arc Objects With VBA
417 pages
Instructor Work Book
100% (1)
Instructor Work Book
287 pages
Smart GIS Course
No ratings yet
Smart GIS Course
50 pages
Arcgis Training Content PDF
No ratings yet
Arcgis Training Content PDF
6 pages
GISA 9.1 Jan22 StudentWorkbook
100% (1)
GISA 9.1 Jan22 StudentWorkbook
201 pages
ArcGIS Blueprints - Sample Chapter
No ratings yet
ArcGIS Blueprints - Sample Chapter
36 pages
Configuring Utility Networks in ArcGIS
No ratings yet
Configuring Utility Networks in ArcGIS
8 pages
ArcGIS Arccade Workbook
No ratings yet
ArcGIS Arccade Workbook
227 pages
1GIS Science
No ratings yet
1GIS Science
537 pages
EADM 5.0 Jan24 StudentWorkbook
No ratings yet
EADM 5.0 Jan24 StudentWorkbook
333 pages
Building Web and Mobile ArcGIS Server Applications With JavaScript Sample Chapter
No ratings yet
Building Web and Mobile ArcGIS Server Applications With JavaScript Sample Chapter
24 pages
Arcgis Insert
100% (1)
Arcgis Insert
7 pages
Arcgis Api For Javascript Qa
No ratings yet
Arcgis Api For Javascript Qa
14 pages
Bim & Gis
No ratings yet
Bim & Gis
24 pages
Arcgis Desktop Associate: Exam Information Guide
No ratings yet
Arcgis Desktop Associate: Exam Information Guide
7 pages
E 23960
No ratings yet
E 23960
10 pages
A Seminar Report On: Geographical Information System (GIS)
100% (2)
A Seminar Report On: Geographical Information System (GIS)
35 pages
Generating Construction Schedules Through Automatic Data Extraction Using Open BIM (Building Information Modeling) Technology
No ratings yet
Generating Construction Schedules Through Automatic Data Extraction Using Open BIM (Building Information Modeling) Technology
11 pages
Applications of Gis Using Qgis: Aim: Procedure
No ratings yet
Applications of Gis Using Qgis: Aim: Procedure
4 pages
Exploring Autodesk Navisworks 2024, 11th Edition
From Everand
Exploring Autodesk Navisworks 2024, 11th Edition
Prof. Sham Tickoo
No ratings yet
Lecture 8 Data Sources in GIS
No ratings yet
Lecture 8 Data Sources in GIS
32 pages
Presentation On Geographic Information System (Gis)
100% (1)
Presentation On Geographic Information System (Gis)
19 pages
TerrSet Tutorial
100% (1)
TerrSet Tutorial
470 pages
Configuring and Managing The Multiuser Geodatabase
0% (1)
Configuring and Managing The Multiuser Geodatabase
7 pages
Geographical Information System: - To Answer Apparently Simple Geographic Question Like
No ratings yet
Geographical Information System: - To Answer Apparently Simple Geographic Question Like
18 pages
ArcGIS Enterprise Deployment 10.5.1 2.0 PDF
100% (1)
ArcGIS Enterprise Deployment 10.5.1 2.0 PDF
113 pages
ArcGIS DesktopIII ESPAÑOL PDF
100% (1)
ArcGIS DesktopIII ESPAÑOL PDF
276 pages
Section6Exercise1 MakingPredictions ParticulateMatterExposure PDF
No ratings yet
Section6Exercise1 MakingPredictions ParticulateMatterExposure PDF
66 pages
2018 Book ArcGISForEnvironmentalAndWater PDF
No ratings yet
2018 Book ArcGISForEnvironmentalAndWater PDF
363 pages
Previewpdf
No ratings yet
Previewpdf
66 pages
(eBook PDF) Mastering ArcGIS Pro by Maribeth Price - Download the ebook now for instant access to all chapters
100% (2)
(eBook PDF) Mastering ArcGIS Pro by Maribeth Price - Download the ebook now for instant access to all chapters
42 pages
Learning ArcGIS Pro - Sample Chapter
75% (4)
Learning ArcGIS Pro - Sample Chapter
26 pages
(eBook PDF) Mastering ArcGIS Pro by Maribeth Price download
100% (7)
(eBook PDF) Mastering ArcGIS Pro by Maribeth Price download
47 pages
Esripress Catalog 2011 Dom
No ratings yet
Esripress Catalog 2011 Dom
36 pages
Gis Pratical
No ratings yet
Gis Pratical
10 pages
(1)
No ratings yet
(1)
5 pages
GIS Library Books
No ratings yet
GIS Library Books
16 pages
GIS For Sustainable Development Syllabus Fall 2013
No ratings yet
GIS For Sustainable Development Syllabus Fall 2013
3 pages
Geospatial Analysis
100% (7)
Geospatial Analysis
60 pages
Programming ArcGIS Pro With Python (2nd Edition) by Pimpler, Eric - Opt
100% (1)
Programming ArcGIS Pro With Python (2nd Edition) by Pimpler, Eric - Opt
263 pages
Spatial Analytics With ArcGIS
83% (6)
Spatial Analytics With ArcGIS
221 pages
QGIS Training Manual - Part 2
100% (6)
QGIS Training Manual - Part 2
101 pages
Gis
No ratings yet
Gis
317 pages
Getting To Know ArcGIS
100% (3)
Getting To Know ArcGIS
608 pages
Environmental Modeling With GIS
100% (2)
Environmental Modeling With GIS
208 pages
Remote Sensing and GIS Applications Meteorology
100% (5)
Remote Sensing and GIS Applications Meteorology
423 pages
Training - ArcGIS Training Manual - Advance-2011
100% (12)
Training - ArcGIS Training Manual - Advance-2011
146 pages
978-3-031-63203-7
No ratings yet
978-3-031-63203-7
338 pages
2_dumala_indoor_jee_1_2024
No ratings yet
2_dumala_indoor_jee_1_2024
10 pages
1 s2.0 S0378778814005751 Main
No ratings yet
1 s2.0 S0378778814005751 Main
12 pages
Energies 14 02197 v2
No ratings yet
Energies 14 02197 v2
27 pages
1 s2.0 S1364032117308109 Main
No ratings yet
1 s2.0 S1364032117308109 Main
27 pages
Os Question Bank-1
No ratings yet
Os Question Bank-1
6 pages
Lighting Plot La Madeleine V2.5
No ratings yet
Lighting Plot La Madeleine V2.5
4 pages
Iitj RD 2020-21 14 PDF
No ratings yet
Iitj RD 2020-21 14 PDF
2 pages
WhatsApp Chat With 1 Minute Ka Madrasa
No ratings yet
WhatsApp Chat With 1 Minute Ka Madrasa
13 pages
Introduction To System Components and Interfaces
No ratings yet
Introduction To System Components and Interfaces
10 pages
VLT Midi Drive FC280 - Fact Sheet
No ratings yet
VLT Midi Drive FC280 - Fact Sheet
2 pages
Intructions (En)
No ratings yet
Intructions (En)
3 pages
Deep Reinforcement Learning Based Real Time Violence Detection
No ratings yet
Deep Reinforcement Learning Based Real Time Violence Detection
8 pages
Analizador Termogravinetrico Modelo TGA701 - V1-3x - 3-08
No ratings yet
Analizador Termogravinetrico Modelo TGA701 - V1-3x - 3-08
308 pages
Chapter 2 Hardware
No ratings yet
Chapter 2 Hardware
13 pages
Coaching & Educational Academy (Chiniot) : Objective Type
No ratings yet
Coaching & Educational Academy (Chiniot) : Objective Type
13 pages
Patch Cord Datasheet
No ratings yet
Patch Cord Datasheet
25 pages
Cómo Instalar Iptv Smarters App en Fire TV Stick
No ratings yet
Cómo Instalar Iptv Smarters App en Fire TV Stick
3 pages
Prezentare Cryptodata1 Compressed
No ratings yet
Prezentare Cryptodata1 Compressed
90 pages
The Browser
No ratings yet
The Browser
2 pages
Download Complete Trustworthy Ubiquitous Computing 1st Edition Karin Bee PDF for All Chapters
100% (3)
Download Complete Trustworthy Ubiquitous Computing 1st Edition Karin Bee PDF for All Chapters
81 pages
JS2 third term exam Questions
No ratings yet
JS2 third term exam Questions
40 pages
Shelly Cashman Series Discovering Computers and Microsoft Office 1st Edition Campbell Test Bank - 2025 Scribd Download Full Chapters
100% (5)
Shelly Cashman Series Discovering Computers and Microsoft Office 1st Edition Campbell Test Bank - 2025 Scribd Download Full Chapters
50 pages
GR 7 Exponents and Base
No ratings yet
GR 7 Exponents and Base
74 pages
Jetty Server Cookbook PDF
No ratings yet
Jetty Server Cookbook PDF
79 pages
Setting Parameter in Instance Profile (RZ10 Transaction) To Set The Required Parameter in Your Instance Profile
No ratings yet
Setting Parameter in Instance Profile (RZ10 Transaction) To Set The Required Parameter in Your Instance Profile
5 pages
Module-5-Lesson-16 - Measures of Central Tendency - Reponte Sebios
No ratings yet
Module-5-Lesson-16 - Measures of Central Tendency - Reponte Sebios
10 pages
Ext SD Card v1 - 1 PDF
No ratings yet
Ext SD Card v1 - 1 PDF
7 pages
Course Information Sheet: Sir Syed University of Engineering & Technology Electronic Engineering Department
No ratings yet
Course Information Sheet: Sir Syed University of Engineering & Technology Electronic Engineering Department
6 pages
PRESENTATION OUTLINE - Product Service
No ratings yet
PRESENTATION OUTLINE - Product Service
8 pages
Chapter 3 Conceptual Database Design and E-R Modeling (2)
No ratings yet
Chapter 3 Conceptual Database Design and E-R Modeling (2)
79 pages

978-3-031-42227-0

Uploaded by

978-3-031-42227-0

Uploaded by

William Bajjali

ArcGIS Pro and

ArcGIS Pro and ArcGIS Online

ISSN 2510-1307 ISSN 2510-1315 (electronic)

Paper in this product is recyclable.

The study of geographic information system (GIS) applications is enlightening, challenging,

Superior, WI, USA William Bajjali

1 Introduction to ArcGIS Pro������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 1

Proximity Analysis in Raster and Vector Formats ����������������������������������������������������� 305

References - Data Source Credits ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 417

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 1

1. Geographic: The geographical location of the real world (coordinate system)

What Can a GIS Do?

Spatial Data Representation

Vector Data Model

Fig. 1.1 Point feature

Table 1.1 Attribute table of point features

Fig. 1.2 Line feature

Table 1.2 Attribute table of line feature

Raster Data Model

Fig. 1.3 Polygon feature

Table 1.3 Attribute table of the polygon feature

Fig. 1.4 Depicts the basics

Advantages and Disadvantages of the Raster and Vector Model

Raster Model: Advantages

1. Simple data structure

Raster Model: Disadvantages

Vector Model: Advantages

1. Data can be represented in their original resolution without generalization.

Vector Model: Disadvantages

1. More complex data structure

1. Hard copy maps

Introduction to ArcGIS Pro

Authorize ArcGIS Pro to Work Offline

1. Content from ArcGIS Online

Start ArcGIS Pro

Browse to \\ENV_Water\Ch01 click Ch01.aprx and click OK.

Lesson 1: Explore the Vector Data

Open the Vector Map

Result The following happens

Lesson 2: Explore the Raster Data

Open the Raster Map

• Data Source: Show the location of the “elevlidar” raster

• Band Metadata: it shows the information about the raster

• Extent: this shows the coordinate extent in feet.

Click OK after exploring the layer properties of the “elevlidar” raster.

Save the Project

1. Save your project

Create a New ArcGIS Pro Project

© The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2023 15

Working with ArcGIS Pro

1. Open ArcGIS Pro

2. Under “New Project”

The Catalog pane will open with the following files:

Identify the Location of the Project

6. Click the Project tab on the ribbon, then click Options

9. Make sure that the Catalog pane is open

Data Integration in ArcGIS PRO

Save the Project

Explore the Navigate Group in the Map Tab

Search Information About a Feature Class

Result The MSP display

22. Click X in the search window to remove the MSP

Locate and Address

Find Places on a Map

Change the Symbol of a Feature Class

Change the Color of the Twin_Cities

35. In the CP highlight the Twin_Cities feature

38. Ensure that the Primary symbology is selected

41. Click the Properties tab to customize the Twin_Cities symbol

Change the Symbol of the Hospital

Change the Symbol of the Airport

Feature class Symbol Color Width

Change the Name of the Map

Labeling and Font Changing

Label the Airport Using the Labeling Tab

Superior, WI, USA William Bajjali

1 Introduction to ArcGIS Pro�� 1

Proximity Analysis in Raster and Vector Formats �� 305

References - Data Source Credits �� 417

Spatial Data Representation

Introduction to ArcGIS Pro

Authorize ArcGIS Pro to Work Offline

Start ArcGIS Pro

Lesson 1: Explore the Vector Data

Lesson 2: Explore the Raster Data

Create a New ArcGIS Pro Project

Data Integration in ArcGIS PRO

Find Places on a Map

Display Layers Using Visibility Range

Set Map Extent

Creating Map and Data Classification

Import Styles from ArcGIS Desktop

Import Styles from Web

Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Natural Break Method

Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Quantile Method

Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using the Equal Intervals Method

Classify the Salinity of Groundwater Using a Manual Method

Sharing the Projects and the Data Using Package Project

Create Page Layout for Groundwater Classification